Methods for controlling crystal growth, crystallization, structures and phases in materials and systems

ABSTRACT

This invention relates to novel methods for affecting, controlling and/or directing various crystal formation, structure formation or phase formation/phase change reaction pathways or systems by exposing one or more components in a holoreaction system to at least one spectral energy pattern. In a first aspect of the invention, at least one spectral energy pattern can be applied to a crystallization reaction system. In a second aspect of the invention, at lest one spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied to a conditioning reaction system. The spectral energy conditioning pattern can, for example, be applied at a separate location from the reaction vessel (e.g., in a conditioning reaction vessel) or can be applied in (or to) the reaction vessel, but prior to other (or all) crystallization reaction system participants being introduced into the reaction vessel.

DISCUSSION OF RELATED AND COMMONLY OWNED PATENT APPLICATIONS

The subject matter of the present invention is related to the subjectmatter contained in two (2) co-pending U.S. Provisional Application Ser.Nos. 60/366,755 and 60/403,225, both entitled, “Methods for ControllingCrystal Growth, Crystallization and Phases in Biologic, Organic andInorganic Systems”, the first being filed on Mar. 21, 2002, and thesecond being filed on Aug. 13, 2002.

The subject matter of the present invention is also related to thesubject matter contained in co-pending U.S. Provisional Application Ser.No. 60/403,251, entitled “Spectral Chemistry”, which was filed on Aug.13, 2002.

The subject matter of the present invention is also related to thesubject matter contained in co-pending U.S. Provisional Application Ser.No. 60/439,223, entitled “Spectral Conditioning”, which was filed onJan. 10, 2003.

The subject matter of the present invention is related to the subjectmatter contained in co-pending U.S. application Ser. No. 10/203,797,entitled “Spectral Chemistry”, which entered the National Phase on Aug.12, 2002.

The subject matter of each of the aforementioned Patent Applications isherein expressly incorporated by reference.

TECHNICAL FIELD

This invention relates to novel methods for affecting, controllingand/or directing various crystal formation, structure formation or phaseformation/phase change reaction pathways or systems by exposing one ormore components in a holoreaction system to at least one spectral energypattern. In a first aspect of the invention, at least one spectralenergy pattern can be applied to a crystallization reaction system. In asecond aspect of the invention, at least one spectral energyconditioning pattern can be applied to a conditioning reaction system.The spectral energy conditioning pattern can, for example, be applied ata separate location from the reaction vessel (e.g., in a conditioningreaction vessel) or can be applied in (or to) the reaction vessel, butprior to other (or all) crystallization reaction system participantsbeing introduced into the reaction vessel.

The techniques of the present invention are applicable to certainreactions in various crystallization reaction systems, including but notlimited to, inorganic reactions (e.g., oxides, nitrides, carbides,borides, chlorides, bromides, carbonates, organometallics, mixes phases,metals, metal alloys, single crystal structures, complex crystallinestructures, amorphous structures, etc.), organic reactions (e.g.,monomers, oligomers and/or polymers made of one component or manydifferent components), and/or biologic reactions (e.g., protein, fattyacids or cellular). The invention also relates to mimicking variousmechanisms of action of various catalysts and components incrystallization reaction systems under various environmental reactionconditions. The invention specifically discloses different means forachieving the control of energy dynamics (e.g., matching ornon-matching) between, for example, applied energy and matter (e.g.,solids, liquids, gases, plasmas and/or combinations or portionsthereof), to achieve (or to prevent) and/or increase energy transfer to,for example, at least one participant (or at least one conditionableparticipant) in a holoreaction system by taking into account variousenergy considerations in the holoreaction system. The invention furtherdiscloses different techniques and different means for delivery of atleast one spectral energy pattern (or at least one spectral energyconditioning pattern) to at least a portion of a holoreaction system.The invention also discloses an approach for designing or determiningappropriate catalyst components, environmental reaction conditionsand/or conditioned participants to be used in a crystallization reactionsystem.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The physical structures of various materials (e.g., organic, inorganicand/or biologic) are vital for determining, for example, physicalproperties (e.g., functionality, size, physical properties, electricalproperties, mechanical properties, dielectric properties, thermalproperties, etc.) of various materials (e.g., solids, liquids, gassesand/or plasmas). In this regard, certain materials may have similarchemical compositions, but very different physical properties due to,for example: (1) different arrangements of ions, atoms, molecules and/ormacromolecules of various sizes and/or shapes; (2) different bondingangles between atoms, ions, molecules and/or macromolecules; and/or (3)different types of bonds holding together ions, atoms, molecules and/ormacromolecules, etc. The prior art refers generally to the formationand/or control of structures in the areas of biology, inorganicchemistry and/or organic chemistry as crystal growth, crystallization,crystal engineering and/or structural or phase engineering of materials.

Crystal growth or crystallization begins with, for example, primarynucleation, followed by secondary nucleation. However, in crystalsystems that do not appear to require primary nucleation (e.g., sometype of seed is typically provided) then only secondary nucleation mayoccur.

There are numerous crystallization models postulated in the prior artwhich attempt to explain crystallization reactions in certain materialsystems. These models include: (1) the broken band model which focuseson the energy of dissociated atoms being proportional to the number ofbonds between nearest neighbors; (2) the free energy model which focuseson the free energies associated with various structural configurationsin lattices; (3) the step-step interactions which focus on dipole-dipoleinteractions; (4) Wulff's construction, which focuses on minimization ofsurface free energies to obtain crystalline shapes; (5) Frank's modelwhich theorizes that the velocity of growth or dissolution depends onsurface orientation; (6) the BCF (Burton, Cabrera, Frank) model whichfocuses on step flow or a series of growth stages occurring due to thepresence of a series of steps or ledges; (7) the Schwoebel Effect whichdiscusses adatoms overcoming a potential energy maximum prior toadhering; and (8) various other crystallization models which take intoaccount, for example, impurities, electric field effects, liquid fieldtheory and/or morphology, etc. None of the various proposed models ortheories for crystal growth explain satisfactorily the relevantmechanisms of crystal growth. Accordingly, detailed control of crystalgrowth or crystallization in many different areas of science remains anempirical science with numerous trials and errors often occurring toachieve desirable crystalline growth or engineering and/or desirablephases, structures or phase transformations.

It is well known that certain ions or atoms have an affinity for otheratoms and/or ions, and thus, may be capable of bonding to each other bythe well-known techniques of ionic bonding, covalent bonding,polar-covalent bonding, metallic bonding, hydrogen bonding, Van der Waalforces, etc., and/or hybrids or combinations of the same. The particulartypes of bonds which hold together atoms, ions, molecules and/ormacromolecules, influence, for example, the positioning of ions, atoms,molecules and/or macromolecules, relative to each other (e.g., includingsuch factors as separation, distances, bond angles, coordination number,etc.). Moreover, molecules (e.g., combinations of atoms) can be bondedto other molecules or molecular ions (e.g., proteins composed ofmolecules of amino acids) and also exhibit various spacings and angulardisplacements relative to each other. Still further, there are certainmaterials that have mixtures of atoms and molecules, whereby the atomsand molecules are bonded together by more than one of the bondingtechniques mentioned above, and are also thereby located at certaindistances and angles with respect to each other. Further, there arenumerous macromolecules (e.g., viruses which are composed of differentproteins, water, etc.) that contain various structural and angularrelationships between different molecules of the same (or substantiallythe same) chemical composition.

One of the most basic structures that is used to refer structurally toarrangements of atoms, ions, molecules, etc., is the unit cell. Forexample, the unit cells of seven (7) different crystal systems are shownin FIG. 70. In particular, FIG. 70 a shows a cubic unit cell structure;FIG. 70 b shows a tetragonal unit cell structure; FIG. 70 c shows anorthorhombic unit cell structure; FIG. 70 d shows a monoclinic unit cellstructure; FIG. 70 e shows a triclinic unit cell structure; FIG. 70 fshows a rhombohedral unit cell structure; and FIG. 70 g shows ahexagonal unit cell structure. Moreover, Table A shows relationshipsbetween the various unit cell dimensions and angles shown in FIG. 70 aswell as certain examples of certain inorganic materials which exhibitthe aforementioned unit cell structures. TABLE A Unit Cell DimensionsCrystal Class Example a = b = c a = β = γ = 90° Cubic NaCl, MgAl₂O₄,C₆₀K₃ a = b ≠ c a = β = γ = 90° Tetragonal K₂NiF₄, TiO2, BaTiO₃ (298K) a≠ b ≠ c a = β = γ = 90° Orthorhombic YBa₂, Cu_(3,)O₇ a ≠ b ≠ c a = γ =90° β ≠ 90° Monoclinc KH₂PO₄ a ≠ b ≠ c a ≠ β ≠ γ ≠ 90° Triclinic a = b ≠c a = β = 90° γ = 120° Hexagonal LiNbO₃ a = b = c a = β = γ ≠ 90°Trigonal/ BaTiO₃ below Rhombohedral (−80° C.)

Various known inorganic, biologic and/or organic atoms, ions, moleculesand/or macromolecules may adopt one or more of the unit cellarrangements shown in FIGS. 70 a-70 g. There are various known rules andexperimental determinations that assist in predicting the various unitcells and/or macrostructures which may result from combinations ofvarious ions, atoms, molecules and/or macromolecules of similar ordifferent chemical compositions. For example, with specific reference toinorganic systems, different types of bonds that can be used to bondspecies together include covalent bonding, ionic bonding, Van der Waalsbonding, metallic bonding, etc. For example, in covalently bondedcrystals, the covalency of the atom(s) or ion(s) and the characteristicsof the spatial distribution of the bonds in which the atoms form are theprimary factors for determining the coordination or bonding or theparticular assembly of atoms or ions in a structure.

In contrast, electrostatic bonding or ionic bonding is governed byseveral different rules. Specifically:

-   -   (1) The first rule, as an approximation, treats ions as rigid        spheres and the way in which the spherical ions are packed        together is determined by the relative sizes of the ions. In        particular, a coordinated polyhedron of anions is formed around        each cation, the cation-anion distance being determined by the        radius sum and the coordination number of the cation by the        radius ratio.    -   (2) The second rule is known as the electrostatic valency        principle. This rule causes a charge balancing to occur. In        particular, in a stable coordinated structure, the total        strength of the valency bonds which reach an anion from all        neighboring cations is equal to the charge of the anion. This        rule causes structures to assume configurations of minimum        potential energies in which the ions try to achieve electrical        neutrality in their locality (e.g., in their unit cells).    -   (3) The third rule references the existence of edges and faces        which may be common to two anion polyhedra in a coordinated        structure. In particular, stabilities of polyhedra are decreased        by the existence of edges and faces. This effect can be large        for cations with high valency and small coordination numbers,        and can be especially large when the radius ratio approaches the        lower limit of stability of the polyhedron. This rule is due to        the fact that an edge, or a face, which is common to two anion        and polyhedra, will result in the close approach of two cations,        and a corresponding increase in the potential energy of the        system as compared with a state in which only corners are shared        and thus, the cations are spaced apart as far as possible.    -   (4) The fourth rule is that in crystals containing different        cations, those of high valency and small coordination number        typically do not share polyhedron elements with each other. This        rule follows the third rule stated above.    -   (5) The final general rule is that the number of different kinds        of constituents in a crystal tends to be small in number.

The five aforementioned general rules also have certain applicability inorganic and biologic systems, but have been specifically referenced withregard to inorganic systems to simplify the discussion thereof.

By following each of the aforementioned rules, different crystallinestructures (or phases or patterns) may be obtainable in similar (orexactly the same) chemical systems. This aspect of obtaining differentcrystalline structures but having the same (or substantially the same)chemical structure is known as polymorphism. A substance is typicallyreferred to as being polymorphous when it is capable of existing in twoor more forms having different crystalline structures or patterns.Examples of well-known polymorphs include, carbon, selenium, quartz(SiO₂), certain metals, barium titanate, zinc sulfide, ferric oxide,silica, proteins, prions, lipids, hydrocarbons, glycine, etc. In certainpolymorphs, a first crystalline form can be found under a first set ofphysical conditions and a reversible transition may exist betweendifferent forms, said reversible transition being capable of occurringby, for example, one or more changes in certain of the physicalconditions (e.g., environmental conditions to which the polymorphs areexposed) or by introduction of a catalyst. These types of materials aresaid to be enantiotropic. When transitions between crystalline forms orstates is irreversible, the forms are said to be monotropic. An exampleof an enantiomer is iron which has a cubic packed structure between thetemperatures of about 906° C.-1401° C., and a cubic body-centeredstructure with temperatures outside this range. Water also exhibitsdifferent structural forms (e.g., microclusters, macroclusters, etc.)and there are at least 13 different crystalline H₂O structures that areknown to exist in relatively modest pressure and temperature regimes. Athird example are certain proteins, which when exposed to a polymorphicprion, change structure to match that of the prion via an autocatlytictransition.

There are various rules that assist in identifying relationships thatexist between polymorphous forms of different substances. Specifically,the prior art has attempted to classify polymorphic changes into thefollowing areas. For example, the recognized polymorphs that existinclude one or more of the following relationships:

-   -   (1) changes in which the immediate coordination number of the        ions/atoms is not significantly altered;    -   (2) changes in which a change in immediate coordination occurs;    -   (3) changes involving a transition between an ideal structure        and a defect structure; and    -   (4) changes in which a change in bond-type occurs.

Each of the four (4) aforementioned polymorph relationships may bemutually exclusive, or may contain features of the other. However, itshould be understood that various different configurations, such as unitcell, protein folding, or DNA twisting, exist for a large number ofmaterials of substantially similar composition or compositions which aresubstantially identical.

In addition to the unit cells shown in FIGS. 70 a-70 g, there aredifferent lattices available for use in combination with the unit cells.In particular, a lattice is known as an array of equivalent points inone, two, or more typically, three dimensions. Lattices typically do notprovide any information regarding the actual positions of atoms ormolecules in any particular spatial relationship, but show the varioustranslational symmetries of the various atoms, ions or molecules bylocating equivalent positions within the lattice. The environment of anyatom or ion placed on one of the lattice points will be identical to theenvironment of a similar atom or ion placed on a corresponding differentlattice point. The simplest illustration of this concept is aone-dimensional lattice consisting of an infinite series of equallyspaced points along a line (see, for example, FIG. 71). However, themore realistic uses of lattices occurs in three-dimensional crystalstructures. The simplest lattice type is known as a primitive(represented by the symbol “P”), and a unit cell with a primitivelattice contains a single lattice point.

A second lattice-type is body-centered (represented by the symbol ‘T’).FIG. 72 shows a body-centered cubic structure.

A lattice which has lattice points at the center of all unit faces aswell as at the corners is known as a face-centered lattice and isrepresented by the symbol “F”. This lattice is shown in FIG. 73.

A final lattice which contains points in just one of the faces is knownas face-centered, but can be given any one of the symbols “A”, “B” or“C”. A “C-type” lattice refers to the situation where additionaltranslational symmetry places lattice points at the centers of thefaces; whereas the A and B face-centered lattices are obtained in anidentical manner but the additional lattice points occur in differentplanes. An example of a face-centered lattice is given in FIG. 74. It isnoted that the “A” and “B” face-centered lattices are obtained inidentical manner but the additional lattice points in the bc and acplanes respectively are obtained. Accordingly, face-entered cubiclattice structures are typically referred to by the letter “C”.

The four different lattice types discussed above (i.e., P, I, F and C)can be combined with the seven unit cell or crystal classes which givesrise to all possible variations. All the possible variations are knownas the “Bravais” lattices. In particular, for example, in inorganicsystems, the seven different crystal systems match up with particularBravais lattices. Table B shows the 14 Bravais lattices that arepossible. TABLE B Crystal system Bravais lattices Cubic P, I, FTetragonal P, I Orthorhombic P, C, I, F Monoclinic P, C Triclinic PHexagonal P Trigonal/Rhombohedral P(R)**The primitive description of the rhombohedral lattice is normally giventhe symbol “R”.

A variety of techniques exist for achieving crystal growth or structurein organic, inorganic, biologic, etc., systems. For example: (1) thehigh vacuum techniques of molecular beam epitaxy and atomic layerepitaxy cause atoms or molecules to be projected onto a surface of asubstrate where the atoms or molecules become incorporated thereon(e.g., adatoms); (2) growth from solutions (e.g., epitaxial growth); (3)vapor phase growth onto one or more substrates or seed crystals; (4)growth from a liquid metal; (5) growth from a solution (e.g., aqueous,molten salts or other solvents); (6) growth from a saturated orsupersaturated solution (e.g., aqueous, or other solvents); (7) growthfrom a melt, also known as solidification; (8) precipitation growth; (9)growth under high pressure conditions (e.g., hydrothermal); (10)chemical vapor transport reaction growth; (11) growth throughelectrochemical reactions (e.g., electrocrystallization); (12) growthfrom the solid phase (e.g., strain annealing); (13)acoustocrystallization techniques; (14) biologic techniques (e.g.,sitting drop, hanging drop, containerless, etc.); and (15) numerouspost-growth treatments that affect already formed structures (e.g.,annealing, heat treatment, laser treatment, etching processes (e.g.,chemical, thermal, etc.), etc.). Phase-diagrams are often employed toassist in understanding what potential crystalline phases or structurescan be achieved by these various crystal growth, crystallization orordering techniques and post-growth treatment techniques.

Much experimental and empirical work has been performed to determinesystems and/or phases which various atoms, ions, molecules and/ormacromolecules assemble into. For example, thousands and thousands ofphase diagrams exist describing various organic, biologic and/orinorganic systems. Phase diagrams show equilibrium conditions forsystems and exhibit, typically, the lowest known free energy states forcomposition, temperature, pressure and/or other conditions imposed uponthe system. In particular, the traditional belief is that under a givenset of fixed parameters, there will be only one mixture of phases thatcan be present. Phase-equilibrium diagrams provide a precise method ofgraphically representing equilibrium situations and are important forcharacterizing various organic, inorganic and/or biologic systems. Thephase-equilibrium diagrams record the composition of each phase present,the number of phases present and the amounts of each phase, atequilibrium. It is noted that equilibrium conditions are rarely achievedin most systems. However, even though non-equilibrium conditions (e.g.,metastable equilibrium conditions) typically prevail in real-lifesystems, phase-diagrams are still important to practitioners in each oftheir respective fields to assist in determining what phases may bepresent, influenced, and/or controlled, etc., in various crystallizationsystems.

Phase-diagrams are regularly utilized to determine phase and compositionchanges occurring under varying environmental conditions. For example,changes in environmental gasses present in a system, changes in partialpressures of environmental gasses, changes in temperature, changes inpressure, changes in composition, etc., are all known factors that arecapable of influencing the resultant product (e.g., crystalline orstructural species present) in any given crystallization reactionsystem.

There are numerous phase-diagrams for each of the aforementioned systemsincluding, for example, one-component phase diagrams, two-componentphase diagrams, three-component phase diagrams, etc. A good example of asingle component, single-solid phase system is sodium chloride. Inparticular, FIG. 75 shows the relationship between temperature andpressure for the ionically bonded material known as NaCl. In addition,FIGS. 76 a and 76 b shown clinographic projections of the unit cell ofthe cubic structure for sodium chloride. FIG. 77 shows a clinographicprojection of the cubic unit cell structure of sodium chloride, wherethe ions are shown in approximately correct relative sizes. The solidcircles represent the sodium ions, whereas the hollow circles representthe chlorine ions.

Phase-diagrams can be interpreted by the phase rule (known as the GibbsPhase Rule) which is shown in the following relationship for a singlecomponent system:P+V=C+2.

The phase rule listed above uses P for the number of phases present inequilibrium, V for the variance or number of degrees of freedom and Cfor the number of components. This phase rule relationship is the basisfor preparing and utilizing phase-equilibrium diagrams. For example,FIG. 78 shows a perspective view of a simple binary phase-diagram. Thistwo-component system adds an additional variable of composition to thephase rule. Thus, application of the phase rule is as follows: for thepoint “A” one phase is present and both temperature and composition canbe arbitrarily varied. However, in areas in which two phases are presentat equilibrium, the composition of each phase is indicated by lines onthe diagram. The intersection of a constant-temperature line with phaseboundaries gives the compositions of the phases in equilibrium attemperature “T”. Thus, with two phases present, the following phase rulerelationship exists:P+V=C+2, 2+V=2+2, V=2.Thus, at an arbitrarily fixed pressure, any arbitrary change in eithertemperature or composition of one of the phases present requires acorresponding change in the other variable. Accordingly, the maximumnumber of phases that can be present where pressure is arbitrarily fixed(i.e., where V=1) is as follows:P+V=C+2, P+1=2+2, P=3.

The solid horizontal line indicated by the letter C in FIG. 78,represents a situation where three phases are present and thecomposition of each phase and the temperature are fixed. Accordingly,phase-diagrams can be utilized to determine what phases are present,what conditions can result in certain phases being present and thecompositions of certain phases.

In particular, defect crystallization pathways exist in eachcrystallization reaction system, and the precise crystalline pathwaythat is chosen is a function of many factors known to the art. Forexample, a representative ternary phase diagram is shown in FIG. 86 a(which is representative of a ternary eutectic) and in FIG. 86 b (whichis representative of a ternary solid solution). Further, FIG. 86 c showsone precise crystallization pathway followed by the composition “A”shown in FIG. 86 a. A brief description of the crystallization pathwayis as follows: a liquid having a composition A falls into a firstprimary field of component “X”. As the temperature in the ternary liquidis decreased to T₁, a solid having a composition “X” begins tocrystallize from the melt. The composition of the remaining liquidchanges along the line AB due to some of the solid “X” crystallizing outtherefrom. A concept known as the “lever principle” (i.e., a concept fordetermining relative amounts and compositions of materials whichcrystallize from a melt) applies along the line AB. Further, as coolingcontinues and the temperature reaches T₂, the crystallization pathwayreaches a boundary condition representing the equilibrium between thecomposition of the remaining liquid and the two solid phases “X” and“Z”. At this point, “Z” begins to crystallize as well as “X” and theremaining liquid changes in composition along the path CD. However, atthe point “L” the phases that exist in equilibrium comprise a liquidhaving a composition “L”, and the solids “X” and “Z”, whereas theoverall composition of the entire system is “A”. Cooling continues untila ternary eutectic occurs at TE at the point D. At the point D,composition “Y” is also capable of crystallizing.

Accordingly, various crystalline species are capable of crystallizingfrom, for example, the solidification of one or more species from amelt, whether the melt is under equilibrium or non-equilibriumconditions.

Another example of a phase diagram is contained in FIG. 79, which showsan example of a solubility curve. This general solubility curve is for asolid that forms a hydrate (i.e., one or more compounds that has one ormore water molecules attached to it) as a system is cooled. For example,FIG. 79 could be any solid that forms hydrates such as, for example,Na₂S₂O₃. The number of hydrate molecules shown in FIG. 79 is arbitraryand will vary for each substance.

Further, FIG. 79 a shows several solubility curves for different solutesin water. Most of these materials show increased solubility as afunction of temperature. Sodium chloride is one of those solutes thatshows a gradually increasing solubility in water as a function ofincreasing temperature. Specifically, for example, the solubility plotfor NaCl shows that a saturated solution of NaCl at 20° C., willcomprise about 36 grams of NaCl dissolved in 100 grams of water.

Accordingly, it should be apparent that the various bonding mechanismsfor bonding together ions, atoms, molecules, macromolecules, etc.,result in various possibilities for crystalline and structuralconfigurations (e.g., the different unit cells shown in FIG. 70 and thedifferent Bravais lattices shown in FIG. 72-74). While much work hasbeen done to categorize different chemical configurations and/orstructures, as well as many theories or explanations being set forth inan attempt to explain the mechanisms of crystallization, including theinitiation of crystallization as well as secondary nucleation or growth,much remains unknown regarding the ability to control variouscrystalline structures within, for example, one or more given species.However, it is clear that various reactions, including various bondingand chemical reactions, are important in determining certain crystallinestructures.

In this regard, chemical reactions are driven by energy. The energycomes in many different forms including chemical, thermal, mechanical,acoustic, and electromagnetic. Various features of each type of energyare thought to contribute in different ways to the driving of chemicalreactions. Irrespective of the type of energy involved, chemicalreactions are undeniably and inextricably intertwined with the transferand combination of energy. An understanding of energy is, therefore,vital to an understanding of chemical reactions and hence, certainstructural transformations.

A chemical reaction can be controlled and/or directed either by theaddition of energy to the reaction medium in the form of thermal,mechanical, acoustic and/or electromagnetic energy or by means oftransferring energy through a physical catalyst. These methods aretraditionally not that energy efficient and can produce, for example,either unwanted by-products, decomposition of required transients,and/or intermediates and/or activated complexes and/or insufficientquantities of preferred products of a reaction.

It has been generally believed that chemical reactions occur as a resultof collisions between reacting molecules. In terms of the collisiontheory of chemical kinetics, it has been expected that the rate of areaction is directly proportional to the number of the molecularcollisions per second:rate α number of collisions/sec

This simple relationship has been used to explain the dependence ofreaction rates on concentration. Additionally, with few exceptions,reaction rates have been believed to increase with increasingtemperature because of increased collisions.

The dependence of the rate constant k of a reaction can be expressed bythe following equation, known as the Arrhenius equation:k=Ae ^(−Ea/RT)where E_(α) is the activation energy of the reaction which is theminimum amount of energy required to initiate a chemical reaction, R isthe gas constant, T is the absolute temperature and e is the base of thenatural logarithm scale. The quantity A represents the collision rateand shows that the rate constant is directly proportional to A and,therefore, to the collision rate. Furthermore, because of the minus signassociated with the exponent E_(α)/RT, the rate constant decreases withincreasing activation energy and increases with increasing temperature.

Normally, only a small fraction of the colliding molecules, typicallythe fastest-moving ones, have enough kinetic energy to exceed theactivation energy, therefore, the increase in the rate constant k hasbeen explained with the temperature increase. Since more high-energymolecules are present at a higher temperature, the rate of productformation is also greater at the higher temperature. But, with increasedtemperatures there are a number of problems which can be introduced intothe reaction system. With thermal excitation other competing processes,such as bond rupture, may occur before the desired energy state can bereached. Also, there are a number of decomposition products which oftenproduce fragments that are extremely reactive, but they can be soshort-lived because of their thermodynamic instability, that a preferredreaction may be dampened.

Radiant or light energy is another form of energy that may be added tothe reaction medium that also may have negative side effects but whichmay be different from (or the same as) those side effects from thermalenergy. Addition of radiant energy to a system produces electronicallyexcited molecules that are capable of undergoing chemical reactions.

A molecule in which all the electrons are in stable orbitals is said tobe in the ground electronic state. These orbitals may be either bondingor non-bonding. If a photon of the proper energy collides with themolecule the photon may be absorbed and one of the electrons may bepromoted to an unoccupied orbital of higher energy. Electronicexcitation results in spatial redistribution of the valence electronswith concomitant changes in internuclear configurations. Since chemicalreactions and bonding are controlled to a great extent by these factors,an electronically excited molecule undergoes a chemical reaction or bondtransformation that may be distinctly different from those of itsground-state counterpart.

The energy of a photon is defined in terms of its frequency orwavelength,E=hv=hc/λwhere E is energy; h is Plank's constant, 6.6×10⁻³⁴ J·sec; v is thefrequency of the radiation, sec⁻¹; c is the speed of light; and λ is thewavelength of the radiation. When a photon is absorbed, all of itsenergy is typically imparted to the absorbing species. The primary actfollowing absorption depends on the wavelength of the incident light.Photochemistry studies photons whose energies lie in the ultravioletregion (e.g., 100 Å-4000 Å) and in the visible region (e.g., 4000 Å-7000Å) of the electromagnetic spectrum. Such photons are primarily a causeof electronically excited molecules.

Since the molecules are imbued with electronic energy upon absorption oflight, reactions and structural transformations occur from differentpotential-energy surfaces from those encountered in thermally excitedsystems. However, there are several drawbacks of using the knowntechniques of photochemistry, that being, utilizing a broad band offrequencies thereby causing unwanted side reactions, undueexperimentation, and poor quantum yield. The area ofphotocrystallization is still in its infancy and the known techniquesare trial and error, empirical approaches, with no cohesive orcomprehensive understanding of the underlying mechanisms. Some goodexamples of photochemistry are shown in the following patents.

In particular, U.S. Pat. No. 5,174,877 issued to Cooper, et al. al.,(1992) discloses an apparatus for the photocatalytic treatment ofliquids. In particular, it is disclosed that ultraviolet lightirradiates the surface of a prepared slurry to activate thephotocatalytic properties of the particles contained in the slurry. Thetransparency of the slurry affects, for example, absorption ofradiation. Moreover, discussions of different frequencies suitable forachieving desirable photocatalytic activity are disclosed.

Further, U.S. Pat. No. 4,755,269 issued to Brumer, et al. al., (1998)discloses a photodisassociation process for disassociating variousmolecules in a known energy level. In particular, it is disclosed thatdifferent disassociation pathways are possible and the differentpathways can be followed due to selecting different frequencies ofcertain electromagnetic radiation. It is further disclosed that theamplitude of electromagnetic radiation applied corresponds to amounts ofproduct produced.

Selective excitation of different species is shown in the followingthree (3) patents. Specifically, U.S. Pat. No. 4,012,301 to Rich, et al.al., (1977) discloses vapor phase chemical reactions that areselectively excited by using vibrational modes corresponding to thecontinuously flowing reactant species. Particularly, a continuous wavelaser emits radiation that is absorbed by the vibrational mode of thereactant species.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,215,634 issued to Wan, et al., (1993) discloses aprocess of selectively converting methane to a desired oxygenate. Inparticular, methane is irradiated in the presence of a catalyst withpulsed microwave radiation to convert reactants to desirable products.The physical catalyst disclosed comprises nickel and the microwaveradiation is applied in the range of about 1.5 to 3.0 GHz.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,015,349 issued to Suib, et al. al., (1991) discloses amethod for cracking a hydrocarbon to create cracked reaction products.It is disclosed that a stream of hydrocarbon is exposed to a microwaveenergy which creates a low power density microwave discharge plasma,wherein the microwave energy is adjusted to achieve desired results. Aparticular frequency desired of microwave energy is disclosed as being2.45 GHz.

The art contains numerous well known crystallization and structureformations or modifications techniques (e.g., single crystal,polycrystalline, amorphous, etc.) as well as numerous well knownpost-processing techniques (e.g., annealing, chemical etching, laseretching, temperature conditioning, pressure conditioning, atmosphericconditioning, etc.) which also affect structure. The prior arttechniques largely contain empirical results from many trial and errorapproaches that, in most cases, are not well understood at a basiclevel.

Physical catalysts are also well known in the art but the role thatphysical catalysts play in various reactions is also not well understoodat a basic level. Specifically, a physical catalyst is typicallyregarded as a substance which alters the reaction rate of a chemicalreaction without appearing in the end product. It is known that somereactions can be speeded up or controlled by the presence of substanceswhich themselves appear to remain unchanged after the reaction hasended. By increasing the velocity of a desired reaction relative tounwanted reactions, the formation of a desired product can be maximizedcompared with unwanted by-products. Often only a trace of physicalcatalyst is necessary to accelerate the reaction. Also, it has beenobserved that some substances, which if added in trace amounts, can slowdown the rate of a reaction. This looks like the reverse of catalysis,and, in fact, substances which slow down a reaction rate have beencalled negative catalysts or poisons. Known physical catalysts gothrough a cycle in which they are used and regenerated so that they canbe used again and again. A physical catalyst operates by providinganother path for the reaction which can have a higher reaction rate orslower rate than available in the absence of the physical catalyst. Atthe end of the reaction, because the physical catalyst can be recovered,it appears the physical catalyst is not involved in the reaction. But,the physical catalyst must somehow take part in the reaction, or elsethe rate of the reaction would not change. The catalytic act hashistorically been represented by five essential steps originallypostulated by Ostwald around the late 1800's:

-   -   1. Diffusion to the catalytic site (reactant);    -   2. Bond formation at the catalytic site (reactant);    -   3. Reaction of the catalyst-reactant complex;    -   4. Bond rupture at the catalytic site (product); and    -   5. Diffusion away from the catalytic site (product).        The exact mechanisms of catalytic actions are unknown in the art        but it is known that physical catalysts can speed up a reaction        that otherwise would take place too slowly to be practical.

A well known category of catalysts are the autocatalysts. Inautocatalysis, the product of a reaction functions as a catalyst,speeding the rate of formation of more product. In autocatalyticreactions, it is clear that the catalyst does take part in the reaction.Nevertheless, the exact mechanisms of autocatalytic actions are alsolargely unknown in the art.

Accordingly, what is needed is a better understanding of the crystalgrowth, crystallization, structural and/or phase change processes andmechanisms so that biological, organic, and/or inorganic processes andmaterials, etc., can be engineered by more precisely controlling themultitude of reaction processes that exist, as well as developingcompletely new reaction pathways and/or new and/or desirable reactionproducts (e.g., crystalline phases or species).

Definitions

For the purposes of this invention, the terms and expressions below,appearing in the Specification and claims, are intended to have thefollowing meanings:

“Activated complex”, as used herein, means the assembly of atom(s)(charged or neutral) which corresponds to the maximum in the reactionprofile describing the transformation of reactant(s) into reactionproduct(s). Either the reactant or reaction product in this definitioncould be an intermediate in an overall transformation involving morethan one step.

“Applied spectral energy conditioning pattern”, as used herein, meansthe totality of: (a) all spectral energy conditioning patterns that areexternally applied to a conditionable participant; and/or (b) spectralconditioning environmental reaction conditions that are used tocondition one or more conditionable participants to form a conditionedparticipant in a conditioning reaction system.

“Applied spectral energy pattern”, as used herein, means the totalityof: (a) all spectral energy patterns that are externally applied; and/or(b) spectral environmental reaction conditions input into acrystallization reaction system.

“Bravais lattice”, as used herein, means the permissible combination oflattice types with unit cells.

“Catalytic spectral conditioning pattern”, as used herein, means atleast a portion of a spectral conditioning pattern of a physicalcatalyst which when applied to a conditionable participant can conditionthe conditionable participant to catalyze and/or assist in catalyzingthe crystallization reaction system by the following:

-   -   completely replacing a physical chemical catalyst;    -   acting in unison with a physical chemical catalyst to increase        the rate of reaction;    -   reducing the rate of reaction by acting as a negative catalyst;        or altering the reaction pathway for formation of a specific        reaction product.

“Catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern”, as used herein, meansat least a portion of a spectral energy conditioning pattern which whenapplied to a conditionable participant in the form of a beam or fieldcan condition the conditionable participant to form a conditionedparticipant having a spectral energy pattern corresponding to at least aportion of a spectral pattern of a physical catalyst which catalyzesand/or assists in catalyzing the crystallization reaction system whenthe conditioned participant is placed into, or becomes involved with,the crystallization reaction system.

“Catalytic spectral energy pattern”, as used herein, means at least aportion of a spectral energy pattern of a physical catalyst which whenapplied to a crystallization reaction system in the form of a beam orfield can catalyze a particular reaction in the crystallization reactionsystem.

“Catalytic spectral pattern”, as used herein, means at least a portionof a spectral pattern of a physical catalyst which when applied to acrystallization reaction system can catalyze a particular reaction bythe following:

-   -   a) completely replacing a physical chemical catalyst;    -   b) acting in unison with a physical chemical catalyst to        increase the rate of reaction;    -   c) reducing the rate of reaction by acting as a negative        catalyst; or    -   d) altering the reaction pathway for formation of a specific        reaction product.

“Columnar liquid crystals”, as used herein, means a mesophaseliquid-crystal wherein disc-like molecules stack into columns whichthemselves form a two-dimensional, long-range ordered hexagonal packing(e.g., columnar mesophase of cylinders in block co-polymers).

“Condition” or “conditioning”, as used herein, means the application orexposure of a conditioning energy or combination of conditioningenergies to at least one conditionable participant prior to theconditionable participant becoming involved (e.g., being placed into acrystallization reaction system and/or prior to being activated) in thecrystallization reaction system.

“Conditionable participant”, as used herein, means reactant, physicalcatalyst, solvent, physical catalyst support material, reaction vessel,conditioning reaction vessel, promoter and/or poison comprised ofmolecules, macromolecules, ions and/or atoms (or components thereof) inany form of matter (e.g., solid, liquid, gas, plasma) that can beconditioned by an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern.

“Conditioned participant”, as used herein, means reactant, physicalcatalyst, solvent, physical catalyst support material, reaction vessel,conditioning reaction vessel, physical promoter and/or poison comprisedof molecules, ions and/or atoms (or components thereof) in any form ofmatter (e.g., solid, liquid, gas, plasma) that has been conditioned byan applied spectral energy conditioning pattern.

“Conditioning energy”, as used herein means at least one of thefollowing spectral energy conditioning providers: spectral energyconditioning catalyst; spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energyconditioning pattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectralenergy conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern;applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions.

“Conditioning environmental reaction condition”, as used herein, meansand includes traditional reaction variables such as temperature,pressure, surface area of catalysts, physical catalyst size and shape,concentrations, electromagnetic radiation, electric fields, magneticfields, mechanical forces, acoustic fields, reaction vessel size, shapeand composition and combinations thereof, etc., which may be present andare capable of influencing, positively or negatively, the conditioningof at least one conditionable participant.

“Conditioning reaction system”, as used herein, means the combination ofreactants, physical catalysts, poisons, promoters, solvents, physicalcatalyst support materials, conditioning reaction vessel, reactionvessel, spectral conditioning catalysts, spectral energy conditioningcatalysts, conditioned participants, environmental conditioning reactionconditions, spectral environmental conditioning reaction conditions,applied spectral energy conditioning pattern, etc., that are involved inany reaction pathway to form a conditioned participant.

“Conditioning reaction vessel”, as used herein, means the physicalvessel(s) or containment system(s) which contains or houses allcomponents of the conditioning reaction system, including any physicalstructure or media which are contained within the vessel or system.

“Conditioning targeting”, as used herein, means the application ofconditioning energy to a conditionable participant to condition theconditionable participant prior to the conditionable participant beinginvolved, and/or activated, in a holoreaction system, said conditioningenergy being provided by at least one of the following spectral energyconditioning providers: spectral energy conditioning catalyst; spectralconditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioning pattern; spectralconditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern;catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; applied spectral energyconditioning pattern; and spectral environmental conditioning reactionconditions, to achieve (1) direct resonance; and/or (2) harmonicresonance; and/or (3) non-harmonic heterodyne-resonance with at least aportion of at least one of the following conditionable participants:reactants; physical catalysts; promoters; poisons; solvents; physicalcatalyst support materials; reaction vessels; conditioning reactionvessels; conditioning reaction vessels and/or mixtures or componentsthereof (in any form of matter), said spectral energy conditioningprovider providing conditioning energy to condition at least oneconditionable participant by interacting with at least one frequencythereof, to form at least one conditioned participant which assists inproducing at least one desired reaction product and/or at least onedesired reaction product at a desired reaction rate, when theconditioned participant becomes involved with, and/or activated in, acrystallization reaction system.

“Coordination number”, as used herein, means the number of atoms or ionsin a crystalline structure that are nearest neighbors to, typically, adifferent atom or ion in such a crystalline structure (e.g., FIGS. 76 aand 76 b shows six fold coordination for each of Na⁺ and Cl⁻).

“Crystal growth” or “crystallization”, as used herein, means thearrangement of atoms, ions, molecules and/or macromolecules into anordered structure (macromolecules, micromolecules, etc.) which containsat least one repeatable unit cell.

“Crystallization reaction system”, as used herein, means the combinationof reactants, intermediates, transients, activated complexes, physicalcatalysts, poisons, promoters, solvents, physical catalyst supportmaterials, spectral catalysts, spectral energy catalysts, reactionproducts, seeds or seed crystals, crystal substrates, epitaxial growthsubstrates, environmental reaction conditions, spectral environmentalreaction conditions, applied spectral energy pattern, reaction vessels,etc., that are involved in any reaction pathway and which typicallyresults in at least some order (e.g., crystallization or structure) in asystem. However, controlling a system so as to prevent order also fallswithin the meaning of this definition.

“Derivative structure”, as used herein, means a somewhat more complexstructure which is related to a basic or simple structure but has beensomehow perturbed to result in a more complex arrangement or structure.Mechanisms for achieving these somewhat more complex structures include:(1) an ordered substitution of one or more species for another; (2) anordered omission of one or more species; (3) the addition of one or morespecies to an unoccupied site; and/or (4) the distortion of any array ofone or more species.

“Direct resonance conditioning targeting”, as used herein, means theapplication of conditioning energy to a conditionable participant tocondition the conditionable participant prior to the conditionableparticipant being involved, and/or activated, in a holoreaction system,said conditioning energy being provided by at least one of the followingspectral energy conditioning providers: spectral energy conditioningcatalyst; spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioningpattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energyconditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions, to achieve direct resonance with atleast a portion of at least one conditionable participant (e.g.;reactants; physical catalysts; promoters; poisons; solvents; physicalcatalyst support materials; reaction vessels; conditioning reactionvessels and/or mixtures or components thereof in any form of matter),said spectral energy conditioning providers providing conditioningenergy to condition at least one conditionable participant(s) byinteracting with at least one frequency thereof to form at least oneconditioned participant, which assists in producing at least one desiredreaction product and/or at least one desired reaction product at adesired reaction rate, when the conditioned participant becomes involvedwith, and/or activated in, a crystallization reaction system.

“Direct resonance targeting”, as used herein, means the application ofenergy to a crystallization reaction system by at least one of thefollowing spectral energy providers: spectral energy catalyst; spectralcatalyst; spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectralenergy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; applied spectral energypattern and spectral environmental reaction conditions, to achievedirect resonance with at least one of the following forms of matter:reactants; transients; intermediates; activated complexes; physicalcatalysts; reaction products; promoters; poisons; solvents; physicalcatalyst support materials; reaction vessels; and/or mixtures orcomponents thereof, said spectral energy providers providing energy toat least one of said forms of matter by interacting with at least onefrequency thereof, in said reactants, to produce at least one desiredreaction product and/or at least one desired reaction product at adesired reaction rate.

“Electrochemical cell”, as used herein, means a device that convertschemical energy into electrical energy. It includes two electrodes whichare separated by an electrolyte. The electrodes may comprise anyelectrically conducting material (e.g., solid or liquid metals,semiconductors, etc.) which can communicate with each other through anelectrolyte. These cells experience separate oxidation and reductionreactions at each electrode.

“Electrocrystallization”, as used herein, means an electrochemicaltechnique that results in a crystalline material (e.g., the depositionof metal on the cathode in an electrolytic cell).

“electrolytic cell”, as used herein, means an electrochemical cell thatconverts electrical energy into chemical energy. The chemical reactionstypically do not occur spontaneously at the electrodes when theelectrodes are connected through an external circuit. The chemicalreaction is typically forced by applying an external electric current tothe electrodes. This cell is used to store electrical energy in chemicalform such as in, for example, a secondary or rechargeable battery. Theprocess of water being decomposed into hydrogen gas and oxygen is termedelectrolysis and such electrolysis is performed in an electrolytic cell.

“Electrometallurgy”, as used herein, means a branch of metallurgy whichutilizes electrochemical processes known as electrowinning.

“Electromigration”, as used herein, means the movement of ions under theinfluence of electrical potential difference.

“Electrophoresis”, as used herein, means the movement of small-suspendedparticles or large molecules in a liquid, such movement being driven byan electrical potential difference.

“Electroplating”, as used herein, means a process that produces a thin,metallic coating on the surface of another material (e.g., a metal oranother electrically conducting material such as graphite). Thesubstrate to be coated is situated to be the cathode in an electrolyticcell, where the cations of the electrolyte becomes the positive ions ofthe metal to be coated on the surface of the cathode. When a current isapplied, the electrode reaction occurring on the cathode is a reductionreaction causing the metal ions to become metal on the surface of thecathode.

“Electrowinning”, as used herein, means an electrochemical process thatproduces metals from their ores. In particular, metal oxides typicallyoccur in nature and electrochemical reduction is one of the mosteconomic methods for producing metals from these ores. In particular,the ore is dissolved in an acidic aqueous solution or molten salt andthe resulting electrolyte solution is electrolyzed. The metal iselectroplated on the cathode (e.g., either in a solid or liquid form)while oxygen is involved in the reaction at the anode. Copper, zinc,aluminum, magnesium and sodium are manufactured by this technique.

“Enantiotropic polymorph”, as used herein, means a polymorph whichexhibits reversible transitions between at least two differentcrystalline structures.

“Environmental reaction condition”, as used herein, means and includestraditional reaction variables such as temperature, pressure, surfacearea of catalysts, physical catalyst size and shape, concentrations,electromagnetic radiation, electric fields, magnetic fields, mechanicalforces, acoustic fields, reaction vessel size, shape and composition andcombinations thereof, etc., which may be present and are capable ofinfluencing, positively or negatively, reaction pathways in acrystallization reaction system.

“Epitaxial growth”, as used herein, means the growth of at least onelayer of atoms, ions, molecules and/or macromolecules onto at least onesubstrate material.

“Frequency”, as used herein, means the number of times which a physicalevent (e.g., wave, field and/or motion) varies from the equilibriumvalue through a complete cycle in a unit of time (e.g., one second; andone cycle/sec=1 Hz). The variation from equilibrium can be positiveand/or negative, and can be, for example, symmetrical, asymmetricaland/or proportional with regard to the equilibrium value.

“Galvanizing”, as used herein, means a process for coating iron or steelwith a thin layer of zinc for corrosion protection. Galvanizing isperformed electrochemically by an electroplating process or by a hot-dipgalvanizing process which consists of immersing the metal into a moltenzinc.

“Harmonic conditioning targeting”, as used herein, means the applicationof conditioning energy to a conditionable participant to condition theconditionable participant, prior to the conditionable participantbecoming involved, and/or activated, in a holoreaction system, saidconditioning energy being provided by at least one of the followingspectral energy conditioning providers: spectral energy conditioningcatalyst; spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioningpattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energyconditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions, to achieve harmonic resonance with atleast a portion of at least one conditionable participant (e.g.;reactants; physical catalysts; promoters, poisons; solvents; physicalcatalyst support materials; reaction vessels; conditioning reactionvessels; and/or mixtures or components thereof in any form of matter),said spectral energy conditioning provider providing conditioning energyto condition at least one conditionable participant(s) by interactingwith at least one frequency thereof, to form at least one conditionedparticipant which assists in producing at least one desired reactionproduct and/or at least one desired reaction product at a desiredreaction rate when the conditioned participant becomes involved with,and/or activated in, a crystallization reaction system.

“Harmonic targeting”, as used herein, means the application of energy toa crystallization reaction system by at least one of the followingspectral energy providers: spectral energy catalyst; spectral catalyst;spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectral energypattern; catalytic spectral pattern; applied spectral energy pattern andspectral environmental reaction conditions, to achieve harmonicresonance with at least one of the following forms of matter: reactants;transients; intermediates; activated complexes; physical catalysts;reaction products; promoters, poisons; solvents; physical catalystsupport materials; reaction vessels; and/or mixtures or componentsthereof, said spectral energy providers providing energy to at least oneof said forms of matter by interacting with at least one frequencythereof, in said reactants, to produce at least one desired reactionproduct and/or at least one desired reaction product at a desiredreaction rate.

“Holoreaction system”, as used herein, means all components of thecrystallization reaction system and the conditioning reaction system.

“Hydrolysis”, as used herein, means a chemical reaction in which waterreacts with another substance and causes decomposition of otherproducts, often including the reaction of water with a salt to create anacid or a base.

“Intermediate”, as used herein, means a molecule, ion and/or atom whichis present between a reactant and a reaction product in a reactionpathway or reaction profile. It corresponds to a minimum in the reactionprofile of the reaction between reactant and reaction product. Areaction which involves an intermediate is typically a stepwisereaction.

“Liquid crystal”, as used herein, means one or more crystalline speciesthat have characteristics of both the liquid state (e.g., short-rangetranslational order due to excluded volume) and the crystalline state(e.g., long-range orientational order). In addition to long-rangeorientational order, smectic and cholesteric liquid crystals exhibitone-dimensional long-range translational order; and columnar liquidcrystals exhibit two-dimensional long-range translational order. Somehigher order smectic liquid crystals exhibit two-dimensional positionalorder within the layers.

“Mass transport”, as used herein means the movement or transportation ofmass (e.g., chemical compounds, ions, etc.) from one part of a system toanother. This phenomena is typically associated with diffusion,convection and electron migration, but can also occur or be promotedthrough spectral mechanisms.

“Monotropic polymorph”, as used herein, means a polymorph which exhibitsan irreversible transition between at least two different crystallinestructures.

“Nematic liquid crystals”, as used herein, means molecules withshort-range translational order (e.g., a densely packed liquid) andlong-range uniaxial orientational order.

“Non-harmonic heterodyne conditioning targeting”, as used herein, meansthe application of conditioning energy to a conditionable participant tocondition the conditionable participant prior to the conditionableparticipant being involved, and/or activated, in a holoreaction system,said conditioning energy being provided by at least one of the followingspectral energy conditioning providers: spectral energy conditioningcatalyst; spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioningpattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energyconditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions, to achieve non-harmonic heterodyneresonance with at least a portion of at least one conditionableparticipant (e.g.; reactants; physical catalysts; promoters; poisons;solvents; physical catalyst support materials; reaction vessels;conditioning reaction vessels and/or mixtures or components thereof inany form of matter), said spectral energy conditioning providerproviding conditioning energy to condition at least one conditionableparticipant by interacting with at least one frequency thereof, to format least one conditioned participant which assists in producing at leastone desired reaction product and/or at least one desired reactionproduct at a desired reaction rate when the conditioned participantbecomes involved with, and/or activated in, a crystallization reactionsystem.

“Non-harmonic heterodyne targeting”, as used herein, means theapplication of energy to a crystallization reaction system by at leastone of the following spectral energy providers: spectral energycatalyst; spectral catalyst; spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern;catalytic spectral energy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; appliedspectral energy pattern and spectral environmental reaction condition toachieve non-harmonic heterodyne resonance with at least one of thefollowing forms of matter: reactants; transients; intermediates;activated complexes; physical catalysts; reaction products; promoters;poisons; solvents; physical catalyst support materials; reactionvessels; and/or mixtures or components thereof, said spectral energyprovider providing energy to at least one of said forms of matter byinteracting with at least one frequency thereof, to produce at least onedesired reaction product and/or at least one desired reaction product ata desired reaction rate.

“Participant”, as used herein, means reactant, transient, intermediate,activated complex, physical catalyst, promoter, poison and/or reactionproduct comprised of molecules, macromolecules, ions and/or atoms (orcomponents thereof).

“Phase-diagram”, as used herein, means a graphical representation of,typically, an equilibrium situation for a given set of systemparameters.

“Plasma”, as used herein means, an approximately electrically neutral(quasineutral) collection of electrically activated atoms or molecules,or ions (positive and/or negative) and electrons which may or may notcontain a background neutral gas, and at least a portion of which iscapable of responding to at least electric and/or magnetic fields.

“Plastic crystals”, as used herein, means crystals which possess athree-dimensional translational order but are orientationallydisordered. These types of crystals typically have oppositecharacteristics from nematic liquid crystals.

“Polymorphs” or “polymorphism”, as used herein, means a chemicalcomposition or arrangement of atoms, ions, molecules and/ormacromolecules, which are capable of existing in at least two differentcrystalline structures or arrangements.

“Primary nucleation”, as used herein, is a first step in acrystallization process, typically, the growth of a new crystal.

“Quasicrystals”, as used herein, means a state of matter between aperiodic long-range translational order of the crystalline state and thelimited short-range translational order of a non-crystalline state.These types of crystals are often found in metal systems.

“Reactant”, as used herein, means a starting material or startingcomponent in a crystallization reaction system. A reactant can be anyinorganic, organic and/or biologic atom, molecule, macromolecule, ion,compound, substance, and/or the like.

“Reaction coordinate”, as used herein, means an intra- orinter-molecular/atom configurational variable whose change correspondsto the conversion of reactant into reaction product.

“Reaction pathway”, as used herein, means those steps which lead to theformation of reaction product(s). A reaction pathway may includeintermediates and/or transients and/or activated complexes. A reactionpathway may include some or all of a reaction profile.

“Reaction product”, as used herein, means any product of a reactioninvolving a reactant. A reaction product may have a different chemicalcomposition from a reactant or a substantially similar (or exactly thesame) chemical composition but exhibit a different physical orcrystalline structure and/or phase and/or properties.

“Reaction profile”, as used herein means a plot of energy (e.g.,molecular potential energy, molar enthalpy, or free energy) againstreaction coordinate for the conversion of reactant(s) into reactionproduct(s).

“Reaction vessel”, as used herein, means the physical vessel(s) orcontainment system(s) which contains or houses all components of thecrystallization reaction system, including any physical structures ormedia which are contained within the vessel or system.

“Resultant energy conditioning pattern”, as used herein, means thetotality of energy interactions between the applied spectral energyconditioning pattern with at least one conditionable participant beforesaid conditionable participant becomes involved, and/or activated, in acrystallization reaction system as a conditioned participant.

“Resultant energy pattern”, as used herein, means the totality of energyinteractions between the applied spectral energy pattern with allparticipants and/or components in the crystallization reaction system.

“Secondary nucleation”, as used herein, is crystallization whichachieves crystal growth by feeding a nucleated crystal (or the like)with atoms, ions, molecules and/or macromolecules that are locatednearby a seed crystal (or the like).

“Smectic liquid crystal”, as used herein, means a liquid crystal thatexhibits long-range one-dimensional translational order in addition tolong-range orientational order. Thus, in addition to orientationalorder, the molecules of this liquid crystal stack in layers.

“Spectral catalyst”, as used herein, means electromagnetic energy whichacts as a catalyst in a crystallization reaction system, for example,electromagnetic energy having a spectral pattern which affects,controls, or directs a reaction pathway.

Spectral conditioning catalyst”, as used herein, means electromagneticenergy which, when applied to a conditionable participant to form aconditioned participant, assists the conditioned participant to act as acatalyst in a crystallization reaction system, for example,electromagnetic energy having a spectral conditioning pattern whichcauses the conditioned participant to affect, control, or direct areaction pathway in a crystallization reaction system when theconditioned participant becomes involved with, and/or activated in, thecrystallization reaction system.

“Spectral conditioning environmental reaction condition”, as usedherein, means at least one frequency and/or field which simulates atleast a portion of at least one conditioning environmental reactioncondition.

“Spectral conditioning pattern”, as used herein, means a pattern formedin a conditioning reaction system by one or more electromagneticfrequencies emitted or absorbed after excitation of an atom or molecule.A spectral conditioning pattern may be formed by any known spectroscopictechnique.

“Spectral energy catalyst”, as used herein, means energy which acts as acatalyst in a crystallization reaction system having a spectral energypattern which affects, controls, and/or directs a reaction pathway.

“Spectral energy conditioning catalyst”, as used herein, meansconditioning energy which, when applied to a conditionable participant,assists a conditionable participant, once conditioned, to act as acatalyst in a crystallization reaction system, the conditionedparticipant having a spectral energy conditioning pattern which affects,controls and/or directs a reaction pathway when the conditionedparticipant becomes involved with, and/or activated in, thecrystallization reaction system.

“Spectral energy conditioning pattern”, as used herein, means a patternformed in a conditioning reaction system by one or more conditioningenergies and/or components emitted or absorbed by a molecule, ion, atomand/or component(s) thereof and/or which is present by and/or within amolecule, ion, atom and/or component(s) thereof.

“Spectral energy pattern”, as used herein, means a pattern formed by oneor more energies and/or components emitted or absorbed by a molecule,ion, atom and/or component(s) thereof and/or which is present by and/orwithin a molecule, ion, atom and/or component(s) thereof. For example,the spectral energy pattern could be a series of electromagneticfrequencies designed to heterodyne with reaction intermediates, or thespectral energy pattern could be the portion of the actual spectrumemitted by a reaction intermediate.

“Spectral environmental reaction condition”, as used herein, means atleast one frequency and/or field which simulates at least a portion ofat least one environmental reaction condition in a crystallizationreaction system.

“Spectral pattern”, as used herein, means a pattern formed by one ormore electromagnetic frequencies emitted or absorbed after excitation ofan atom or molecule. A spectral pattern may be formed by any knownspectroscopic technique.

“Targeting”, as used herein, means the application of energy to acrystallization reaction system by at least one of the followingspectral energy providers: spectral energy catalyst; spectral catalyst;spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectral energypattern; catalytic spectral pattern; applied spectral energy pattern;and spectral environmental reaction conditions, to achieve directresonance and/or harmonic resonance and/or non-harmonicheterodyne-resonance with at least one of the following forms of matter:reactants; transients; intermediates; activated complexes; physicalcatalysts; reaction products; promoters; poisons; solvents; physicalcatalyst support materials; reaction vessels; and/or mixtures orcomponents thereof, said spectral energy provider providing energy to atleast one of said forms of matter by interacting with at least onefrequency thereof, to produce at least one desired reaction productand/or at least one desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate.

“Transient”, as used herein, means any chemical and/or physical statethat exists between reactant(s) and reaction product(s) in a reactionpathway or reaction profile.

“Unit cell”, as used herein, means a fundamental and repeatable assemblyof atoms, ions, molecules and/or macromolecules in a crystal (e.g., in areaction product).

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention, discloses a variety of novel spectral energytechniques, referred to sometimes herein as spectral crystallization,that can be utilized in a number of crystallization reactions inorganic, biologic and/or inorganic systems, including very basicreactions, which may be desirable to achieve or to permit to occur (orto prevent) in the various crystallization reaction systems. Thesespectral energy techniques can be used in, for example, all knowncrystal growth or crystallization techniques including, but not limitedto, evaporation, vapor diffusion, liquid diffusion, thermal gradients,gel diffusion, high vacuum techniques of molecular beam epitaxy, atomiclayer epitaxy, epitaxial growth from solutions, growth from a liquidmetal, growth from a solution (e.g., aqueous, molten salt or othersolvent), growth from super saturated solutions, growth from a melt,precipitation growth, hydrothermal growth, chemical vapor transportreaction growth, electrocrystallization, growth from a solid phase,acoustocrystallization, co-crystals and clath rates, etc. In addition,the techniques of the present invention can be used to obtain virtuallyall types of crystallization by all known crystallization or crystalgrowth techniques including the use of defects, if desirable, oreliminating defects, if desirable. Further, the techniques of thepresent invention can be utilized to obtain desirable phase or structurechanges in certain crystals (single or polycrystalline) that havealready been formed and/or to cause certain grown crystals to behave asthough certain phase changes have occurred. Examples include suchpost-treatment processes as annealing processes, etching processes(e.g., thermal or chemical), chemical treatments (e.g., solid, liquid,gas and/or plasma), etc. Further, the techniques of the presentinvention can be utilized to obtain desired structures in certainmaterials.

Further, the invention discloses a variety of novel spectral energyconditioning techniques, referred to sometimes herein as spectralconditioning, or conditioning energies that can be utilized to conditiona conditionable participant. Once a conditionable participant has beenconditioned, the conditioned participant can be used in acrystallization reaction system. These spectral energy conditioningtechniques can be used to condition at least one conditionableparticipant which can thereafter be used in, for example, any type oforganic or inorganic crystallization system, biological crystallizationreaction system (e.g., plant and animal), industrial crystallizationreaction system, etc. Further, the conditioned participant may itselfcomprise both a reactant and a reaction product, whereby, for example,the chemical composition of the conditioned participant does notsubstantially change (if at all) but one or more energy dynamics,physical properties or structures and/or phases is changed once theconditioned participant is involved with, and/or activated by, thecrystallization reaction system.

The techniques of the present invention have utility for growingcrystals (or preventing growth of crystals in certain crystallizationreaction systems) that exhibit only a single crystalline species, andmixed crystals, as well as for growing crystals that exhibit at leasttwo crystalline species, as well as for those systems that arepolymorphic (i.e., where more than one crystalline phase exists for asingle chemical formula). For example, the techniques of the presentinvention can be utilized to assist in the primary nucleation ofcrystals, the secondary nucleation of crystals, controlling particularcompositions formed during crystallization, controlling particularphases formed during crystallization, causing crystals and/or phases toresult (or preventing certain phases from forming) that do not normallyresult under a given set of environmental conditions, causing a formedcrystal phase to change which may result in the crystal behaving asthough the phase had changed, causing primary or secondary nucleation ofa first material or crystalline species and subsequent primarynucleation and/or secondary nucleation of a second composition and/orcrystalline species; epitaxial growth of similar or dissimilar materialson a substrate, preferential or selective crystallization of aparticular species from a mixed species source, etc. The techniques ofthe present invention can be used for all known crystal growth orcrystallization techniques whereby the techniques of the inventionaugment existing techniques (e.g., use of a seed crystal is augmented byat least one spectral energy provider and/or at least one spectralenergy conditioning provider) or substantially completely replacecertain aspects of growth (e.g., a seed crystal can be replacedcompletely by a spectral energy provider and/or a spectral energyconditioning provider). Moreover, the techniques of the presentinvention can prevent the formation of certain crystals or structures orcause, for example, one or more amorphous phases or structures to resultwhen one or more crystallized species or structures would normallyresult or vice versa.

These novel spectral energy techniques (now referred to as spectralcrystallization) and novel spectral energy conditioning techniques (nowreferred to as spectral conditioning crystallization) are possible toachieve due to the fundamental discoveries contained herein thatdisclose various means for achieving the transfer of energy (orpreventing the transfer of energy) and/or controlling the energydynamics and/or controlling the resonant exchange of energy between, forexample, two entities. The invention teaches that the key fortransferring energy between two entities (e.g., one entity sharingenergy with another entity) is that when frequencies match, energytransfers. For example: (1) matching of frequencies of spectral energypatterns of two different forms of matter or matching of frequencies ofa spectral energy pattern of matter with energy in the form of aspectral energy catalyst; and/or (2) matching of frequencies of spectralconditioning energy patterns of two different forms of matter ormatching of frequencies of a spectral energy pattern of matter withenergy in the form of a spectral conditioning catalyst. In the case ofachieving the transfer of energy between, for example, a spectral energyconditioning pattern and a conditionable participant, once conditioningenergy has been transferred, the conditioned participant can thereafterfavorably utilize its conditioned energy pattern in a crystallizationreaction system. The aforementioned entities may both be comprised ofmatter (solids, liquids, gases and/or plasmas and/or mixtures and/orcomponents thereof), both comprised of various form(s) of energy, or onecomprised of various form(s) of energy and the other comprised of matter(solids, liquids, gases and/or plasmas and/or mixtures and/or componentsthereof).

More specifically, all matter can be represented by spectral energypatterns, which can be quite simple to very complex in appearance,depending on, for example, the complexity of the matter. One example ofa spectral energy pattern is a spectral pattern (or a spectralconditioning pattern) which likewise can be quite simple to quitecomplex in appearance, depending on, for example, the complexity of thematter. In the case of matter represented by spectral patterns (orspectral conditioning patterns), matter can exchange energy with othermatter if, for example, the spectral patterns of the two forms of mattermatch, at least partially, or can be made to match or overlap, at leastpartially (e.g., spectral curves or spectral patterns (or spectralconditioning patterns) comprising one or more electromagneticfrequencies may overlap with each other). In general, but not in allcases, the greater the overlap in spectral patterns (and thus, thegreater the overlap of frequencies comprising the spectral patterns orspectral conditioning patterns), the greater the amount of energytransferred. Likewise, for example, if the spectral pattern (or spectralconditioning pattern) of at least one form of energy can be caused tomatch or overlap, at least partially, with the spectral pattern ofmatter, (e.g., a participant or a conditionable participant) energy willalso transfer to the matter. Thus, energy can be transferred to matterby causing frequencies to match.

As discussed elsewhere herein, energy (E), frequency (v) and wavelength(λ) and the speed of light (c) in a vacuum are interrelated through, forexample, the following equation:E=hv=hc/λWhen a frequency or set of frequencies corresponding to at least a firstform of matter can be caused to match with a frequency or set offrequencies corresponding to at least a second form of matter, energycan transfer between the different forms of matter and permit at leastsome interaction and/or reaction to occur involving at least one of thetwo different forms of matter. For example, solid, liquid, gas and/orplasma (and/or mixtures and/or portions thereof) forms of matter caninteract and/or react and form a desirable reaction product or result.Any combination(s) of the above forms of matter (e.g., solid/solid,solid/liquid, solid/gas, solid/plasma, solid/gas/plasma,solid/liquid/gas, etc., and/or mixtures and/or portions thereof) arepossible to achieve for desirable interactions and/or reactions to occurin various crystallization reaction systems in biologic, organic and/orinorganic systems.

In particular, for example, the present invention has applicability inthe following exemplary systems: (1) graphite/diamond; (2) the phasesassociated with SiO₂; (3) the phases associated with BaTiO₃, (4) thephases of water/ice; (5) the solubility of materials in solvents (e.g.,solutes in water); (6) the phases in the binary system MgO/SiO₂; (7) thephases in the FeO/Fe₂O₃ system; (8) the phases in a hydrate system; (9)the phases in polymers; (10) the phases in lipids; and (11) the phasesin proteins. Specific experimental examples of various exemplarycrystallization reaction systems are contained in the “Examples” sectionlater herein, while the following exemplary systems give a generalunderstanding of the applicability of the techniques of the presentinvention.

FIGS. 80 a, 80 b and 80 c relate to the various phases for carbon,including graphite and diamond. A phase-diagram for carbon phases isshown in FIG. 80 a. This phase-diagram shows that graphite is thepredominate phase present at lower pressures and lower temperatures butthat a transition to diamond occurs at higher temperatures and/or higherpressures. The clinographic projection of the hexagonal structure ofdiamond is shown in FIG. 80 b; whereas the clinographic projection ofthe unit cell of the cubic structure of diamond is shown in FIG. 80 c.The techniques of the present invention can be utilized to assist inphase transformations in this system and systems like this system.

FIGS. 81 a and 81 b show two phase-diagrams for the SiO₂ system. Inparticular, FIG. 81 a shows the equilibrium diagram for SiO₂ whereasFIG. 81 b shows metastable phases that also occur in the SiO₂ system.FIG. 81 c shows a clinographic projection of the unit cell of anidealized cubic β-crystobalite structure. FIG. 81 d shows a plan view ofa rhombohedral structure of α-quartz projected on a plane perpendicularto the principal axis. FIG. 81 e shows a plan view of the hexagonalstructure of β-quartz projected on a plan view taken perpendicular tothe z-axis. The techniques of the present invention can assist incontrolling the presence of one or more phases in the SiO₂ system andsystems like this system.

FIG. 82 a shows the phase diagram for the system Ba₂TiO₄/TiO₂. Ofparticular interest in this phase diagram is the formation of bariumtitanate (BaTiO₃). FIG. 82 b shows a clinographic projection of the unitcell of an idealized cubic structure of BaTiO₃. In addition, FIG. 82 cshows cation displacements relative to an oxide sub-lattice intetragonal BaTiO₃. Moreover, Table C shows the relationship betweentransition temperature and crystal structure for the phase behavior ofBaTiO₃. TABLE C Phase Behavior of BaTiO₃ Transition Temperature −80° C.5° C. 120° C. Crystal Rhombohedral Orthorhombic Tetragonal CubicStructure a = 3.995 {acute over (Å)} a = 4.002 {acute over (Å)} c =4.034 {acute over (Å)}

The techniques of the present invention can be utilized to controlvarious phases in the barium titanate crystallographic system andsystems like this system.

The various phase diagrams (e.g., showing temperature and pressurerelationships) for water are shown in FIGS. 83 a, 83 b and 83 c, withFIG. 83 c being the more common phase diagram for water. In addition,FIG. 83 d shows a clinographic projection of the hexagonal structure ofice. In general, there are three recognized forms of water under thetemperature/pressure conditions shown in the aforementioned Figurebetween which a somewhat continuous transition with temperature occurs.Specifically, a first structure of water is ice-like and is stable belowabout 4° C.; a second phase is a quartz-like structure of water which isstable between about 4° C. and about 150° C. under the shown pressureconditions; and a third phase of water is a close-packed array which isstable above about 150° C. under the shown pressure conditions. However,water may be regarded as one of the most complex structures known toman. In particular, numerous sub-phases exist within the three generalphases discussed above. The sub-phases may coincide with various micro-and macro-molecular clusters. Further, there are at least 13 recognizedphases of water as a function of modest temperatures and pressures. Thetechniques of the present invention can be utilized to affect thebehavior of water (e.g., solute/solvent relationships can be affected bythe techniques of the present invention).

A binary phase diagram for the system MgO—SiO₂ is shown in FIG. 84 a. Acorresponding plan view of an idealized orthorhombic structure offorsterite (i.e., Mg₂SiO₄) is shown in FIG. 84 b on a plane which isperpendicular to the x-axis. The techniques of the present invention canbe utilized to control various phases in the MgO—SiO₂ system.

The system FeO/Fe₂O₃ is shown in phase-diagram form in FIG. 85 a. Aclinographic projection of four unit cells of a cubic body-centeredstructure of α-iron is shown in FIG. 85 b. The techniques of the presentinvention can be utilized to obtain desirable phases in the systemFeO—Fe₂O₃ and systems like this system (as discussed in more Stillfurther, as shown in FIG. 79, a solubility curve for a theoreticalhydrate is given. The techniques of the present invention can beutilized to modify the expected phases in the solubility curve in thissystem and in systems like this system (as discussed in greater detaillater herein.

Further, FIG. 97 a shows several solubility curves for differentsolvents in water. Most of these materials show increased solubility asa function of temperature. Sodium chloride is one of those solutes thatshows a gradually increasing solubility in water as a function ofincreasing temperature. Specifically, for example, the solubility plotfor NaCl shows that a saturated solution of NaCl at 20° C., willcomprise about 36 grams of NaCl dissolved in 100 grams of water. Thus,for example, if 40 grams of NaCl was added to the 100 grams of water,about 4 grams of undissolved NaCl would remain as solid in the bottom ofa container. Moreover, if 36 grams of NaCl was added to 100 grams ofwater at 20° C., as above, and the temperature of the solution wasraised, then the solution would be slightly unsaturated (e.g., thesolution would be capable of dissolving more NaCl at this temperature).Still further, if 36 grams of NaCl was added to 100 grams of water at20° C., as above, and the temperature of the solution was lowered, thenthe solution would be “supersaturated” (e.g., at least temporarily)until the extra (i.e., 4 grams) of solute would come out of the solution(i.e., at which point the solution would again be saturated). Thus,these aforementioned selective examples are exemplary ways to utilizesolubility curves to form saturated, unsaturated and supersaturatedsolutions. In this regard, a saturated solution is typically regarded asone where an equilibrium is established between undissolved solute anddissolved solutes. However, the techniques of the present invention canadvantageously affect or change the solubility (or at least the ratethat solutes can be dissolved by solvents) of known materials at knowntemperatures in known solutions (as discussed in grater detail laterherein).

Furthermore, the techniques of the present invention are equallyapplicable in polymer or organic systems as well as in biologic systems.In this regard, crystalline or structural growth of, for example,proteins, fatty acids, lipids, DNA, etc., as well as crystalline orstructural growth of, for examples, polymers (including monomers andoligimers) are well known. Different crystalline or structural species(e.g., phases) are also obtainable in these crystallization reactionsystems. Further, the techniques of the present invention can beutilized to control quasicrystal systems, liquid crystal systems, aswell as encouraging certain crystallization reaction systems to remainessentially non-crystalline (e.g., predominantly non-crystalline or onlylocalized order) or to encourage at least only a limited order withincertain crystallization reaction systems.

FIG. 87 a shows a molecular model of the 5-a transformation observed inoleic acid, erucic acid, asclepic acid and palmitoleic acid.Specifically, oleic acid is one of the principal unsaturated fattyacids. Most of the unsaturated fatty acids exhibit a polymorphicbehavior. Unsaturated fatty acids play an important role in lipidmolecules that correspondingly play critical roles in the functionalactivities of biological organisms and also in fatty products.Unsaturated fatty acids occupy about one-half of all acyl chains inbio-membrane phospholipids, promoting fluidity and permeability of themembrane through conformational flexibility of the acyl chains. Majorfactors which are thought to influence the physical and chemicalproperties of unsaturated fats and lipids are the number, position andconfiguration of double bonds. Thus, it is very important to have amolecular-level understanding of the structure-function relationships ofunsaturated fatty acids. The techniques of the present invention canassist in controlling certain reaction products and/or reaction pathwaysin various organic or biologic crystallization reaction systems.

FIG. 87 b shows a single crystal morphology of the α-form and δ-form ofgondoic acid.

FIG. 87 c shows a Raman scattering C-C stretching band of the α-form andδ-form of gondoic acid.

FIG. 87 d shows a phase-diagram for mixtures of gondoic acid withasclepic acid; and FIG. 87 e shows a phase-diagram for mixtures ofgondoic acid with oleic acid.

In particular, FIGS. 87 b-87 e show important phase and structurerelationships between these various biologic acids. The control ofparticular phases or structures within these fatty acids can be of greatsignificance and importance in biological reactions. Accordingly, thetechniques of the present invention can be utilized to assist and/orcontrol various reaction pathways within these crystallization reactionsystems (as discussed in greater detail later herein).

However, crystallization in biological crystallization reaction systems,in general, follow the basic steps of nucleation and growth. In thisregard, crystallization of, for example, a fat compound typicallyrequires supersaturation or supercooling. For fat systems,crystallization is often complex because natural fats are a mixture ofvarious triacylglycerols. Consequently, the concentration of thesetriacylglycerols is typically low and, for example, increasedsupercooling may be required to achieve desirable nucleation of the lowconcentration species. Furthermore, triacylglycerols are characterizedby a complex melting behavior. The triacylglycerols typically exhibitthree different crystal structures of α, β′ and β. These polymorphiccrystal structures depend on, for example, the particular driving forcesfor crystallization. Accordingly, the understanding and techniques forcontrolling of these various processes to achieve desirable polymorphicphases is important in these crystallization reaction systems.

Crystallization of other organic compounds, for example, proteins, istypically accomplished using a variety of catalytic components such assalts, buffers, precipitants, reagents, additives, and temperature.Accordingly, the techniques of the present invention can be utilized toassist and/or control various reaction pathways within thesecrystallization reaction systems (as discussed in greater detail laterherein).

In order to practice the techniques of the present invention, it hasbeen discovered that matter (e.g., solids, liquids, gases and/or plasmasand/or mixtures and/or portions thereof) can be caused, or influenced,to interact and/or react (or be prevented from reacting and/orinteracting) with other matter and/or portions thereof in, for example,a crystallization reaction system along a desired reaction pathway byapplying energy, in the form of, for example, a spectral energy providersuch as a catalytic spectral energy pattern, a catalytic spectralpattern, a spectral energy pattern, a spectral energy catalyst, aspectral pattern, a spectral catalyst, a spectral environmental reactioncondition and/or combinations thereof, which can collectively result inan applied spectral energy pattern being applied or provided in at leasta portion of the crystallization reaction system.

Likewise, matter (e.g., solids, liquids, gases and/or plasmas and/ormixtures and/or portions thereof) can be caused, or influenced, tointeract and/or react with other matter and/or portions thereof in, forexample, a crystallization reaction system along a desired reactionpathway by applying conditioning energy to a conditionable participant,in the form of, for example, a catalytic spectral energy conditioningpattern, a catalytic spectral conditioning pattern, a spectral energyconditioning pattern, a spectral energy conditioning catalyst, aspectral conditioning pattern, a spectral conditioning catalyst, aspectral conditioning environmental reaction condition and/orcombinations thereof, which can collectively result in an appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern being applied to a conditionableparticipant. Specifically, the applied conditioning energy results in aconditioned participant which, when exposed to, and/or activated by, acrystallization reaction system, can cause the crystallization reactionsystem to behave in a desirable manner (e.g., the conditioned energypattern of the conditioned participant favorably interacts with at leastone participant in a crystallization reaction system).

One aspect of the present invention is the discovery that a spectralenergy pattern delivered to a crystallization reaction system canfunction as a form of scaffolding which effects and controlscrystallization and/or structure of the reaction product. For example, aseed crystal in a crystallization reaction system can be modeled as anautocatalyst. In this model, a seed crystal emits a unique spectralenergy pattern which extends a short distance into the surroundingmedium. This extending energy pattern functions as a type of scaffoldingwhich guides and catalyzes growth of the crystal. In this regard, a seedcrystal can be considered to be an autocatalyst, and crystallization andautocatalytic process. A spectral energy pattern can be delivered to acrystallization reaction system which enhances the inherent energyscaffolding of a seed crystal, or which replaces it altogether. Examplesif this phenomena, discussed in greater detail in the “Examples” sectionlater herein, utilizes a sodium vapor lamp as a spectral energy patternwhich results in enhanced formation of sodium halide crystals fromvarious aqueous solutions.

Since, a seed crystal appears to behave as a catalyst in anautocatalytic process which results in the formation of one or moreordered or structured forms of matter in a crystallization reactionsystem, the seed crystal (or seed-crystal spectral energy pattern) is animportant component to consider in a crystallization reaction system.For example, a seed crystal catalyzes at least one reaction in acrystallization reaction system leading to the formation of one or morespecies (e.g., crystal growth, crystallization, phase changes, etc.). Inthe case of a seed crystal, the spectral frequencies, which areconstantly being emitted and absorbed by all matter, can act as aspectral catalyst for the formation of more crystal in thecrystallization reaction system. However, these frequencies emitted are,typically, somewhat limited in intensity (i.e., are relatively weak) dueto the relatively small size of most seed crystals that are utilized.Accordingly, the emanated or emitted spectral pattern may not reach veryfar into a crystallization reaction system. This disclosure teaches andshows that crystallization can be enhanced if the spectral signal of theseed crystal is effectively amplified. In many respects, the electricand/or magnetic fields emitted by the seed crystal may act as, forexample, electromagnetic scaffolding for the rapid and orderly formationof more crystalline layers. However, if the signal is small (e.g., the“scaffolding” does not extend very far into the reactants orparticipants in the crystallization reaction system) then crystal growthmay be relatively slow. However, if the size of the “scaffolding” couldbe effectively increased (e.g., by applying a spectral energy providerof sufficient strength so as to increase the effective size of thespectral pattern emitted by the seed crystal) then, for example, therate of crystallization or the rate of crystal growth can be effectivelyincreased. Moreover, directional patterning of the electromagneticscaffolding can also influence, for example, shape, morphology, phase,etc., of crystalline growth or formation in the crystallization reactionsystem.

In particular, an existing seed crystal produces an electromagnetic“scaffolding” effect comprising a combination of standing waves andnodes which are produced by, for example, the interaction of spectralpatterns of the crystallized species. These electromagnetic wavesinclude electronic, vibrational, rotational, librational, translational,gyrational and torsional frequencies, as well as fine splittingfrequencies, hyperfine splitting frequencies, Stark frequencies andZeeman frequencies. These particular electromagnetic nodes and wavesextend, typically, only a short distance from the surface of the seedcrystal (or epitaxial substrate or nucleation site). When, for example,adatoms approach the seed crystal, the adatoms can resonatesympathetically with the standing wave pattern emitted by the seedcrystal (e.g., the presence of the scaffolding) and may be attracted,through, for example, the process of beading, to form additional layerson the seed crystal (i.e., a growth of one or more crystalline speciesnow occurs).

Accordingly, by augmenting or supplementing a naturally occurringstanding wave pattern of electromagnetic energy existing in, forexample, a seed crystal, layer-by-layer growth can be accelerated, aswell as growth being capable of being controlled with greaterspecificity. Particular control of growth includes controlling thelattice vibrations for atomic or mixed crystals; controllinglibrational, vibrational or translational frequencies in the case ofmolecular crystals such as water; controlling torsional or hydrogenbonding frequencies in the case of, for example, organic macromolecules;and/or controlling electronic or other frequencies.

In addition to supplementing the electromagnetic patterns of a seedcrystal, a complete substitution of electromagnetic patterns (e.g., useof a spectral provider) can also be utilized.

In these cases, interactions and/or reactions may also be caused tooccur when the applied spectral energy pattern (or the applied spectralenergy conditioning pattern) results in, for example, some type ofmodification to the spectral energy pattern of one or more of the formsof matter in the crystallization reaction system. The various forms ofmatter include reactants; transients; intermediates; activatedcomplexes; physical catalysts; reaction products; promoters; poisons;solvents; physical catalyst support materials; reaction vessels; and/ormixtures of components thereof. For example, the applied spectral energyprovider (i.e., at least one of spectral energy catalyst; spectralcatalyst; spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectralenergy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; applied spectral energypattern and spectral environmental reaction conditions) when targetedappropriately to, for example, a participant and/or component in thecrystallization reaction system, can result in the generation of, and/ordesirable interaction (e.g., primary nucleation and/or secondarynucleation) with one or more participants for enhanced nucleation (or ifdesired, primary and/or secondary nucleation can be prevented orsubstantially completely eliminated). Specifically, the applied spectralenergy provider can be targeted to achieve very specific desirableresults and/or reaction product and/or reaction product at a desiredrate and/or along a desired reaction pathway (e.g., along a desiredcrystallization reaction pathway).

The targeting in many cases can occur by a direct resonance approach,(i.e., direct resonance targeting), a harmonic resonance approach (i.e.,harmonic targeting) and/or a non-harmonic heterodyne resonance approach(i.e., non-harmonic heterodyne targeting). The spectral energy providercan be targeted to, for example, interact with at least one frequency ofan atom or molecule, including, but not limited to, electronicfrequencies, vibrational frequencies, rotational frequencies,rotational-vibrational frequencies, librational frequencies,translational frequencies, gyrational frequencies, fine splittingfrequencies, hyperfine splitting frequencies, magnetic field inducedfrequencies, electric field induced frequencies, natural oscillatingfrequencies, and all components and/or portions thereof (discussed ingreater detail later herein). These approaches may result in, forexample, the mimicking of at least one mechanism of action of a physicalcatalyst, environmental factor and/or a seed crystal, etc., in acrystallization reaction system.

Similar concepts also apply to utilizing an applied spectral energyconditioning pattern in a conditioning reaction system to form aconditioned participant. In the case where one applied spectral energyconditioning pattern is utilized, interactions and/or reactions may becaused to occur in the conditioning reaction system when the appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern results in, for example, some typeof modification to the spectral energy pattern of one or moreconditionable participants prior to such participant(s) being involvedin, and/or activated by, the crystallization reaction system. Thevarious forms of matter that can be used as a conditionable participantinclude reactants; physical catalysts; reaction products; promoters;poisons; solvents; physical catalyst support materials; reactionvessels; conditioning reaction vessels; and/or mixtures of componentsthereof. For example, the applied spectral energy conditioning provider(e.g., at least one of a: spectral energy conditioning catalyst;spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioning pattern;spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy conditioningpattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; applied spectralenergy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmentalreaction conditions) when targeted appropriately to, for example, aconditionable participant and/or component thereof prior to theconditionable participant and/or component thereof becoming involved in,and/or activated by, the crystallization reaction system, can result inthe generation of a desirable reaction product, and/or desirableinteraction with one or more participants in the crystallizationreaction system. Specifically, the applied spectral energy conditioningprovider can be targeted to a conditionable participant to achieve veryspecific desirable results (e.g., a very specific conditioned energypattern). The desirable conditioned energy pattern can thereafter resultin a desirable reaction pathway, a desirable reaction product and/or ata desired rate in a crystallization reaction system, when theconditioned participant becomes involved in the crystallization reactionsystem. Further, the conditioned participant may itself comprise both areactant and a reaction product, whereby, for example, the chemicalcomposition of the conditioned participant does not substantially change(if at all) but one or more physical properties or structures or phasesor relationships in one or more of the energy structure(s) is changedonce the conditioned participant is involved with, and/or activated by,the crystallization reaction system.

The conditioning targeting can occur by a direct resonance conditioningapproach, (i.e., direct resonance conditioning targeting), a harmonicresonance conditioning approach (i.e., harmonic conditioning targeting),non-harmonic heterodyne conditioning resonance approach (i.e.,non-harmonic heterodyne conditioning targeting). The spectral energyconditioning provider can be targeted to, for example, interact with theconditionable participant by interacting with at least one frequency ofan atom or molecule, including, but not limited to, electronicfrequencies, vibrational frequencies, rotational frequencies,rotational-vibrational frequencies, fine splitting frequencies,hyperfine splitting frequencies, magnetic field induced frequencies,electric field induced frequencies, natural oscillating frequencies, andall components and/or portions thereof (discussed in greater detaillater herein). Some examples of known sources of spectral energyconditioning providers include, but are not limited to, ELF sources, VLFsources, radio sources, microwave sources, infrared sources, visiblelight sources, ultraviolet sources, x-ray sources and gamma ray sources.

The following Table D lists examples of various possible sources ofspectral energy patterns and of spectral energy conditioning patterns.TABLE D ELF, VLF, and Radio Sources Electron tubes (e.g. oscillatorssuch as regenerative, Meissner, Harley, Colpitts, Ultraudion, Tuned-GridTuned Plate, Crystal, Dynatron, Transitron, Beat-requency, R-CTransitron, Phase-Shift, Multivibrator, Inverse-Feedback, Sweep-Circuit,Thyratron Sweep) Glow tube Thyratron Electron-ray tube Cathode-ray tubePhototube Ballast tube Hot body Magnetron Klystron Crystals (e.g.microprocessor, piezoelectric, quartz, quartz strip, SAW resonator,semiconductor) Oscillators (e.g. crystal, digitally compensated crystal,hybrid, IC, microcomputer compensated crystal, oven controlled crystalOCXO, positive emitter-coupled logic, pulse, RC, RF, RFXO, SAW,sinusoidal, square wave, temperature compensated TCXO, trigger coherent,VHF/UHF, voltage controlled crystal VCXO, voltage controlled VCO,dielectric resonator DRO) Microwave Sources Hot body Spark dischargeElectronic tubes (e.g. triode) Klystrons Klystron plus multipliersMagnetrons Magnetron harmonics Traveling-wave and backward wave tubesSpark oscillator Mass oscillator Vacuum tube Multipliers Microwave tubeMicrowave solid-state device (e.g. transistors, bipolar transistors,field-effect transistors, transferred electron (Gunn) devices, avalanchediodes, tunnel diodes) Maser Oscillators (e.g. crystal, digitallycompensated crystal, hybrid, IC, microcomputer compensated crystal, ovencontrolled crystal OCXO, positive emitter- coupled logic, pulse, RC, RF,RFXO, SAW, sinusoidal, square wave, temperature compensated TCXO,trigger coherent, VHF/UHF, voltage controlled crystal VCXO, voltagecontrolled VCO, dielectric resonator DRO) Infrared Sources Filaments(e.g. Nernst, refractory, Globar) Gas mantle Lamp (e.g. mercury, neon)Hot body Infrared light emitting diode ILED, arrays Visible LightSources Flame Electric arc Spark electrode Gaseous discharge (e.g.sodium, mercury) Planar Gas discharge Plasma Hot body Filament,Incandescence Laser, laser diodes (e.g. multiple quantum well types,double heterostructured) Lamps (e.g. arc, cold cathode, fluorescent,electroluminescent, fluorescent, high intensity discharge, hot cathode,incandescent, mercury, neon, tungsten-halogen, deuterium, tritium,hollow cathode, xenon, high pressure, photoionization, zinc)Light-emitting diode LED, LED arrays Organic Light-emitting diode OLED(e.g. small molecule, polymer) Luminescence (e.g. electro-, chemi-)Charge coupled devices CCD Cathode ray tube CRT Cold cathode Fieldemission Liquid crystal LCD Liquid crystal on silicon LcoS LowTemperature polycrystalline silicon LTPS Metal-Insulated-Metal (MIM)Active Matrix Active Matrix Liquid Crystal Chip on Glass COG TwistNematic TN Super Twist Nematic STN Thin film transistor TNT Fluorescence(e.g. vacuum, chemi-) Ultraviolet Sources Spark discharge Arc dischargeHot body Lamps (e.g. gaseous discharge, mercury vapor, neon,fluorescence, mercury-xenon) Light emiting diode LED, LED arrays LaserX-ray Sources Atomic inner shell Positron-electron annihilation Electronimpact on a solid Spark discharge Hot body Tubes (e.g. gas, high vacuum)γ-ray Sources Radioactive nuclei Hot body

The techniques of the present invention can be utilized to achievepreferred characteristics, such as growth and/or orientation and/ormorphology, etc., which is/are not normally attainable by known systems.For example, if a seed crystal is utilized, electromagnetic energy maybe preferentially directed to one or more faces of the seed crystal toresult in a larger “scaffolding” extending from one or more selectedsides of the seed crystal to result in preferential growth from thoseside(s). Moreover, rather than simply applying a spectral energyprovider which simulates the “scaffolding” or energy pattern of a seedcrystal, a spectral energy provider such as spectral environmentalreaction condition could be applied. In this regard, environmentalfactors such as temperature, pressure, concentration, etc., can alsofavorably influence crystal growth or crystallization. Accordingly, forexample, spectral patterns corresponding to, for example, temperatureand/or pressure could be applied instead of, or in addition to, thosespectral energy patterns corresponding to the “scaffolding” of the seedcrystal.

Further, for example, a spectral energy conditioning pattern may beapplied to a conditionable participant which may by itself, or when usedwith a spectral energy pattern, favorably influence the formation ofdesirable reaction product(s) at one or more specific locations in acrystallization reaction system when the conditioned participant becomesinvolved in the crystallization reaction system. For example, theconditioned participant may itself function as a seed crystal, or maycomplement the energy pattern of one or more participants in thecrystallization reaction system. Depending on a particularcrystallization reaction system, a spectral energy pattern and aspectral energy conditioning pattern may be substantially similar toeach other, or very different from each other. Examples of thisphenomenon, discussed in greater detail in the “Examples” section laterherein, utilize a sodium vapor light as a spectral energy conditioningpattern for conditioning water prior to solute being dissolved therein.

As stated above, a spectral energy provider can be used to augment asystem, or to replace, for example, a seed crystal. In this regard, whena critical size for nucleation is provided by the use of, for example,seed crystals, crystallization occurs on the provided nucleation sites.There are a number of critical factors associated with these nucleationsites. However, rather than using such seed crystals, a spectral energyprovider could be input into a crystallization reaction system tofunction effectively as a seed crystal.

The techniques of the present invention can also be utilized to growcrystals (e.g., epitaxial growth) onto other materials (e.g., epitaxialsubstrates), which differ in crystalline form from those materials whichare desired to be grown. In particular, by providing appropriatespectral energy providers to, for example, a substrate, an appropriate“scaffolding” can emanate from a surface of a substrate resulting in theattraction of desirable ions, atoms, molecules and/or macromolecules,etc., onto at least one surface of a substrate.

Further, by substantially matching, for example, a spectral energypattern of a substrate with a spectral energy provider, atoms, ions,molecules and/or macromolecules can be encouraged to bond or attachthemselves to the substrate in a desirable manner. If, for example, thedesired substrate creates a spectral energy pattern (e.g., anelectromagnetic energy pattern), which does not match sufficiently to,for example, the spectral energy patterns of atoms, ions, moleculesand/or macromolecules which are to be bonded onto the substrate, thenthe substrate can be caused to emit a spectral energy pattern whichdiffers from the normal (i.e., inherent) spectral energy pattern emittedtherefrom. In this regard, for example, particular frequencies could beheterodyned (e.g., externally or internally) with the substrate to causethe substrate to behave in a different manner spectrally (i.e., adifferent and more favorable spectral energy pattern can be created).These techniques of causing the substrate to behave in a differentmanner spectrally could be advantageously utilized to, for example: (1)attract ions, atoms, molecules and/or macromolecules (or portionsthereof) that would not normally be attracted; (2) attract ions, atoms,molecules and/or macromolecules (or portions thereof) that subsequentlyremain fixed to the substrate; (3) attract ions, atoms, molecules and/ormacromolecules (or portions thereof) which subsequently detachthemselves from the substrate and form a free-standing body; and/or (4)repel ions, atoms, molecules and/or macromolecules (or portions thereof)that would not normally be repelled that, for example, may correspond tocertain impurities or defects in a particular structure or material.These particular techniques can enhance the production of manydifficult, and/or economically undesirable products, to be formed in anefficient, economical and desirable manner. Moreover, these techniquescould be used to form patterns or designs of similar or dissimilaratoms, ions, molecules and/or macromolecules on at least a portion of asubstrate. Specifically, designs of particular utility could be placedpermanently or temporarily on various substrate materials (e.g., forminga circuit pattern on a chip, etc.) to achieve a variety of functionaleffects.

Still further, the techniques of the present invention can be used toform composite crystals (e.g., the formation of super-lattices). In thisregard, if a first spectral energy provider was utilized in acrystallization reaction system a first crystalline growth could beachieved. Thereafter, a different spectral energy provider (and/orconditioned participant) could be introduced into the samecrystallization reaction system, thereby resulting in a differentcrystalline species growing on, for example, the first producedcrystalline species. Accordingly, alternating layers of differentcrystal materials could be achieved. An example of alternating layersthat would be useful in the inorganic crystallization art would belayers of CdTe followed by layers of ZnTe. Moreover, one or morealternating layers of an amorphous species could be included with onemore crystalline species. Accordingly, many additional unmentionedpermutations should occur to those of ordinary skill in the art oncearmed with the teachings contained herein. Examples of this phenomenon,discussed in greater detail in the “Examples” section later herein,utilize various spectral energy patterns which result in enhancedformation of particular crystalline species in composite crystals.

Further, composite crystals could be achieved where different growthpatterns are achieved in different directions. In this regard, forexample, a first crystalline species could be achieved in an XYdirection, and an alternative crystalline species could be achieved in,for example, a Z direction.

The techniques of the present invention could also enhance theevaporation crystallization process. In this regard, when materialstypically flow from the vapor phase, a crystallization growth rate isapproximately equal to the difference of the flux of atoms from thevapor compared to the evaporation rate. The incoming flux isproportional to the vapor pressure (and thus to the vapor density). Thepresent invention can effectively reduce the evaporation rate byapplying, for example, a spectral energy provider (and/or a spectralenergy conditioning provider) which corresponds to, for example,electronic frequencies or frequencies of individual components in thecrystal lattice to assist in stabilizing each atom which is, forexample, evaporated onto a surface or, generally, is within acrystallization reaction system. This effective stabilization couldlimit, for example, reabsorption of atoms into the gas and/or acceleratethe deposition of adatoms.

The techniques of the present invention can also be utilized toeliminate certain derivative structures, if desired, or to achievecertain derivative structures. In this regard, various defects exist incrystals. These defects include: point defects (e.g., lattice vacancies,interstitials, impurities, etc.); line defects (e.g., dislocations);surface defects (e.g., grain boundaries, stacking faults, etc.); andthree-dimensional defects (e.g., striations, cellular growth, voids,inclusions, etc.). In many cases a perfect crystal would be desirable toachieve because, for example, such crystals would be very strongmechanically. Such crystals could be very useful for abrasion or wearapplications. However, when crystalline defects such as latticevacancies, interstitials, dislocations, grain boundaries, stackingfaults, etc., occur, all such defects degrade mechanical performance. Inorder to minimize defects, an appropriate spectral energy provider couldbe utilized and create, for example, a “gettering”, “getting” or“scavenging” standing wave pattern or “scaffolding” for any impuritiesin the system at a location which is apart from the area wherecrystallization is occurring. The provision of such a “gettering”spectral pattern could minimize the inclusion of undesirable defects.Alternatively, if certain defects are desirable to be included, then aparticular spectral energy provider could be utilized to mimic suchdefects and the mechanism of action of, for example, the impurity couldbe copied by utilizing an appropriate spectral energy provider. Stillfurther, certain derivative structures or defects may also be minimizedor eliminated by utilizing an appropriate spectral energy provider whichcreates an effective repulsion or repulsive wave pattern at or near alocation where crystallization is occurring. The provision of such a“repulsing” spectral pattern could minimize the inclusion of undesirableimpurities or defects. One example of such a “repulsing” wave patternwould be the rotational frequency of a crystalline species causingincreased rotational motion of the species in the crystallizationreaction system thereby slowing or preventing, for example, its bondingto a growing crystal.

Still further, for most materials, E₁ (i.e., the energy required to forman interstitial), is greater than E_(v), (i.e., the energy require toform a vacancy). Vacancies tend to be a dominant entity in defectstructures. Typically, near the melting point, a crystal may have avacancy concentration of up to 0.1%. The presence of vacancies andinterstitial atoms in a crystal provides a mechanism by which masstransport (i.e., diffusion) can occur in the crystalline lattice. Thevacancy provides a missing site into which a neighboring atom can jump.When the atom jumps, the vacancy has moved, now occupying the originalsite of the neighbor. Interstitals may move in a similar manner. Both ofthese motions result in an energization of the lattice as the atomsmove. Moreover, the jump rate for a defect (as well as the rate ofatomic diffusion) in a crystal is proportional to temperature.Accordingly, the techniques of the present invention can be applied tocontrol the number of interstitials and/or vacancies in a crystal byincluding and/or excluding the spectral pattern of the vacancies and/orinterstitials, in a controlled manner, by controlling the energyprovided by the spectral energy provider. Further, diffusion of foreignsubstances can be controlled either positively or negatively, by, forexample: (1) controlling the number or lack thereof ofvacancies/interstitials; (2) using spectral energy providers which mimicthe mechanisms of action of lattice patterns to increase the jump ratesof the point defects, and hence diffusion rates, of the foreignsubstance; and/or (3) energizing the foreign substances directly bycontrolling their energy structure, etc. For example, foreign substancessuch as heavy metals (tungsten, mercury, etc.) are often infiltrated asinterstitials into protein crystals to assist in the x-ray analysis ofthose crystals. The techniques of the present invention can be used toenhance interstitial formation, for example, by applying a mercury lampemitting the mercury electronic frequencies, to a protein crystal bathedin a solution of mercury salts, thereby enhancing mercury infiltrationinto the protein crystal.

In non-metals, vacancies and interstitials may also be activated incrystallization reaction systems by applying an appropriate spectralenergy provider, thus producing electrical conductivity. The presence ofvacancies and/or interstitials in semiconductors can alter theelectronic properties of the material in that they serve to trap andscatter free electrons and holes. The techniques of the presentinvention can be used to reduce the random chaos of currentcrystallization techniques, with their subsequent random placement ofpoint defects, to produce a semiconductor with a more evenly spacedgroup of point defects, thus refining the electrical conductionproperties of the material.

Electronic transitions of the trapped charges may also give rise tooptical absorption and luminescence bands in semiconductors andinsulators. Thus, by controlling, for example, the placement and numberof point defects, (i.e., by utilizing an appropriate spectral energyprovider) these properties can also be tailored.

The somewhat chaotic manner in which atoms fall into place during growth(e.g., adatoms) makes the formation of lattice dislocations likely. Oncesuch lattice dislocations are formed on a small scale, the dislocationscan propagate as the crystal grows. Thus, applied shear stress allowsone atom plane to slip past another as the dislocations move which may,in some cases, significantly alter one or more properties of a materialin a negative manner. Further, work hardening, resulting in pinneddislocations, is currently used to minimize dislocation problems andstrengthen materials. By applying the spectral energy techniques of thepresent invention, the chaos of current crystallization techniques canbe minimized, resulting in, for example, the minimizing of dislocationsin a crystal structure and a corresponding increase in various physicalproperties including, for example, the strength of materials formed bysuch techniques. Further, as shown in the “Examples” Section laterherein, modified crystal growth can be achieved from solutions that havenot yet reached their saturation point (e.g., sodium chloride aqueoussolutions which result in the production of NaCl crystals from solutionsthat are not completely saturated).

Surface defects also can be a problem in crystal growth. As with theother defects, the chaos of random crystallization methods allow grainboundary and stacking faults to occur. Reducing the chaos of thecrystallization process will diminish, if desired, these defects aswell.

Cellular structure can occur in alloys and is thought to be due toimpurities. The impurities diffuse rather slowly in the liquid melt, andeven more slowly in the solid. Consequently, the impurities which remaintrapped in the pockets cannot escape and the pockets become infinitelydeep, leading to the formation of cellular structures. Thus cellularformations occur with rapid growth velocities. The techniques of thepresent invention can cause a spectral energy provider to be applied tospeed the rate of diffusion of impurities (e.g., via heterodyningbetween the impurity and lattice frequencies) applying the rotationalfrequency of impurity, or encouraging crystallization immediately aroundthe impurity thus avoiding the usually undesirable formation of deeppockets and cellular structures.

The current techniques for controlling defects include, for example,using temperature gradients applied during directional solidification toremove constitutional supercooling and prevent cellular growth bymorphological instability. Also, they control dislocation density by useof a bottlenecked seed at which dislocations may emerge on the crystalsurfaces. These techniques or mechanisms of action could be at leastpartially duplicated by the application of at least one spectral energyprovider. For example, a vibrational frequency may be applied toduplicate certain of the effects of a higher temperature atomic and/ormolecular motion, without actually raising the temperature.

The techniques of the present invention are also useful for controllingstep bunching as well as annealing. For example, step bunching mayresult in macrostops. This macrostop process can occur during growth ofcrystals from a liquid phase or from a vapor phase. Defects occur informed crystals due to, for example, the inclusion of physicalimpurities. Further, in annealing processes, crystals are heated to, forexample, reduce surface roughening. The techniques of the presentinvention could be utilized to enhance both of these general processes.

The techniques of the present invention can also be utilized to affectthe myriad of electrochemical crystallization systems. For example, thetechniques of the present invention are applicable to affecting thestructure of materials formed in any of the following processes ortechniques: electrocrystallization; electrometallurgy; electromigration;electrophoresis; electroplating; electrowinning; galvanizing; and masstransport reactions.

In some cases, desirable results in the aforementioned crystallizationreaction systems may be achieved by utilizing a single applied spectralenergy pattern targeted to a single participant or component or tomultiple participants or components; while in other cases, more than oneapplied spectral energy pattern may be targeted to a single participantor component or to multiple participants or components, by, for example,multiple approaches in a single crystallization reaction system.Specifically, combinations of direct resonance targeting, harmonictargeting and non-harmonic heterodyne targeting, which can be made tointeract with one or more frequencies occurring in atoms and/ormolecules, could be used sequentially or substantially continuously.Further, in certain cases, the spectral energy provider targeting mayresult in various interactions at predominantly the upper energy levelsof one or more of the various forms of matter present in acrystallization reaction system.

Further, in another preferred embodiment of the invention, theaforementioned approaches for creating a conditioned participant mayresult in, for example, the conditioned participant mimicking of atleast one mechanism of action of a physical or environmental reactioncondition once the conditioned participant is exposed to (e.g.,activated in) a crystallization reaction system and/or the conditionedparticipant may enhance certain reaction pathways and/or reaction rates(e.g., kinetics of a reaction may be increased or decreased; or reactionproducts may be altered, increased or decreased). For example, in somecases, desirable results may be achieved by utilizing a single appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern targeted to a single conditionableparticipant; while in other cases, more than one applied spectral energyconditioning pattern may be targeted to a single participant or tomultiple conditionable participants, by, for example, multipleapproaches. Specifically, combinations of direct resonance conditioningtargeting, harmonic conditioning targeting and non-harmonic heterodyneconditioning targeting, which can be made to interact with one or morefrequencies occurring in atoms and/or molecules of a conditionableparticipant, could be used sequentially or substantially continuously tocreate desirable conditioned participants. Further, in certain cases,the spectral energy conditioning provider targeting may result invarious interactions at predominantly the upper energy levels of one ormore of the various forms of matter present as a conditionableparticipant.

Still further, numerous combinations of the aforementioned appliedspectral energy patterns and applied spectral energy conditioningpatterns could be used in a crystallization reaction system to targetparticipants and/or conditionable participants. For example, appliedspectral energy patterns could be directed to one or more participants;and/or applied spectral energy conditioning patterns could be directedto one or more conditionable participants. In some crystallizationreaction systems, a spectral energy pattern and a spectral energyconditioning pattern may be substantially similar to each other (e.g.,exactly the same or at least comprising similar portions of theelectromagnetic spectrum) or very different from each other (e.g.,comprising similar or very different portions of the electromagneticspectrum). The combination of one or more spectral energy patterns withone or more spectral energy conditioning patterns could have significantimplications for control or growth of specific structures or phasesand/or rates of reaction(s).

The invention further recognizes and explains that various environmentalreaction conditions are capable of influencing reaction pathways in acrystallization reaction system when using a spectral energy catalystsuch as a spectral catalyst. The invention teaches specific methods forcontrolling various environmental reaction conditions in order toachieve desirable results in a reaction (e.g., desirable reactionproduct(s) in one or more desirable reaction pathway(s)) and/orinteractions. The invention further discloses an applied spectral energyapproach which permits the simulation, at least partially, of desirableenvironmental reaction conditions by the application of at least one,for example, spectral environmental reaction conditions. Thus,environmental reaction conditions can be controlled and used incombination with at least one spectral energy pattern to achieve adesired reaction pathway (e.g., a desired phase or phases or a desiredcrystalline form or species). Alternatively, traditionally utilizedenvironmental reaction conditions can be modified in a desirable manner(e.g., application of a reduced temperature and/or reduced pressure) bysupplementing and/or replacing the traditional environmental reactioncondition(s) with at least one spectral environmental reactioncondition. One example of such a spectral environmental reactionpattern, is the delivery of vibrational overtones to water, therebycausing water to behave, in its solvent capacity, as though it were athigher temperatures, as discussed in greater detail in the “Examples”section later herein.

Similarly, the invention further recognizes and explains that variousconditioning environmental reaction conditions are capable ofinfluencing the resultant energy pattern of a conditionable participant,which, when such conditioned participant becomes involved with, and/oractivated in, a crystallization reaction system, can influence reactionpathways in a crystallization reaction system. The invention teachesspecific methods for controlling various conditioning environmentalreaction conditions in order to achieve desirable conditioning of atleast one conditionable participant which in turn can achieve desirableresults (e.g., desirable reaction product(s) and/or one or moredesirable reaction pathway(s) and/or desirable interactions and/ordesirable reaction rates) in a crystallization reaction system. Theinvention further discloses an applied spectral energy conditioningapproach which permits the simulation, at least partially, of desirableenvironmental reaction conditions by the application of at least one,for example, spectral conditioning environmental reaction condition.Thus, conditioning environmental reaction conditions can be controlledand used in combination with at least one spectral energy conditioningpattern to achieve a desired conditioned energy pattern in a conditionedparticipant. Alternatively, traditionally utilized environmentalreaction conditions can be modified in a desirable manner (e.g.,application of a reduced temperature and/or reduced pressure) bysupplementing and/or replacing the traditional environmental reactioncondition(s) with at least one spectral conditioning environmentalreaction condition.

The invention also provides a method for determining desirable physicalcatalysts (i.e., comprising previously known materials or materials notpreviously known to function as a physical catalyst such as a new ordifferent seed crystal) which can be utilized in a crystallizationreaction system to achieve a desired reaction pathway and/or desiredreaction rate. In this regard, the invention may be able to provide arecipe for a physical and/or spectral catalyst for a particular reactionin a crystallization reaction system where no physical catalystpreviously existed. In this embodiment of the invention, spectral energypatterns are determined or calculated by the techniques of the inventionand corresponding physical catalysts (e.g., seed crystal) can besupplied or manufactured and thereafter included in the crystallizationreaction system to generate the calculated required spectral energypatterns. In certain cases, one or more existing physical species couldbe used or combined in a suitable manner, if a single physical specieswas deemed to be insufficient, to obtain the appropriate calculatedspectral energy pattern to achieve a desired reaction pathway and/ordesired reaction rate. Such catalysts can be used alone, in combinationwith other physical catalysts, spectral energy catalysts, controlledenvironmental reaction conditions and/or spectral environmental reactionconditions to achieve a desired resultant energy pattern and consequentreaction pathway and/or desired reaction rate.

Similarly, the invention also provides a method for determiningdesirable physical catalysts (e.g., comprising previously knownmaterials or materials not previously known to function as a physicalcatalyst or seed crystal) which can be utilized in a crystallizationreaction system by appropriately conditioning at least one conditionableparticipant to achieve a desired reaction pathway and/or desiredreaction rate and/or desired reaction product when the conditionedparticipant becomes involved with (e.g., is added to or activated in)the crystallization reaction system. In this regard, the invention maybe able to provide a recipe for a physical and/or spectral catalyst fora particular crystallization reaction system where no physical catalystpreviously existed. In this embodiment of the invention, spectral energyconditioning patterns are determined or calculated by the techniques ofthe invention and corresponding conditionable participants can besupplied or manufactured and thereafter included in the crystallizationreaction system to generate the calculated required spectral energypatterns. In certain cases, one or more existing physical species of aconditionable participant could be used or combined in a suitablemanner, if a single physical species was deemed to be insufficient, toobtain the appropriate calculated spectral energy conditioning patternto achieve a desired reaction pathway and/or desired reaction rate. Suchconditionable participants, once conditioned, can be used alone, incombination with other physical catalysts, spectral energy catalysts,spectral energy catalysts, controlled environmental reaction conditions,spectral environmental reaction conditions and/or spectral environmentalreaction conditions to achieve a desired reaction pathway and/or desiredreaction rate. Thus, once a desired conditioned energy pattern isachieved in a conditionable participant, the conditioned participantbecomes involved with, and/or activated in, the crystallization reactionsystem.

The invention discloses many different permutations of one importanttheme of the invention, namely, that when frequencies of components in acrystallization reaction system match, or can be made to match, energytransfers between the components, participants or conditionedparticipants in the crystallization reaction system. Depending on howthe energy dynamics of the component(s) are controlled or directed, thecrystallization reaction system will be likewise controlled or directed.It should be understood that the many different permutations can be usedalone to achieve desirable results (e.g., desired reaction pathwaysand/or a desired reaction rates and/or desired reaction products) or canbe used in a limitless combination of permutations, to achieve desiredresults (e.g., desired reaction pathways, desired reaction productsand/or desired reaction rates). However, in a first preferred embodimentof the invention, so long as a participant, or conditioned participanthas one or more of its frequencies that match with at least onefrequency of at least one other component in a crystallization reactionsystem (e.g., spectral patterns overlap), energy can be transferred. Ifenergy is transferred, desirable interactions and/or reactions canresult in the crystallization reaction system. Further, the conditionedparticipant may itself comprise both a reactant and a reaction product,whereby, for example, the chemical composition of the conditionedparticipant does not substantially change (if at all) but one or moreenergy dynamics, physical properties, structures, or phases is changedonce the conditioned participant is involved with, and/or activated by,the reaction system.

Further, the same targeted frequency or energy can be used withdifferent power amplitudes, in the same crystallization reaction system,to achieve dramatically different results. For example, the vibrationalfrequency of a liquid solvent may be input at low power amplitudes toimprove the solvent properties of the liquid without causing anysubstantial change in the chemical composition of the liquid. At higherpower levels, the same vibrational frequency can be used to dissociatethe liquid solvent, thereby changing its chemical composition. Thus,there is a continuum of effects that can be obtained with a singletargeted frequency, ranging from changes in the energy dynamics of aparticipant, to changes in the actual chemical or physical structure ofa participant.

A targeted frequency or energy can also be used with different poweramplitudes on a formed material in post-formation treatment processesthat also could achieve dramatically different structural results withthe formed material. For example, post-treatment processes such asannealing, thermal etching, chemical etching (e.g., using liquids,solids, gases and/or plasmas), etc., can all be used to selectivelyalter one or more properties in a formed material. A targeted frequencyor energy could also result in desirable structural, physical and/orchemical changes (e.g., permit certain reactions to occur, locally orglobally) within at least a portion of (or on at least a portion of asurface of) a formed material (e.g., solid, liquid, gas or plasma).These techniques could be useful for interactions including metalformation, semiconductor manufacturing, sintering, biological processes,plastics formation, hydrocarbon manufacturing, etc.

Moreover, the concept of frequencies matching can also be used in thereverse. Specifically, if a reaction in a crystallization reactionsystem is occurring because frequencies match, the reaction can beslowed or stopped by causing the frequencies to no longer match or atleast to match to a lesser degree. In this regard, one or morecrystallization reaction system components (e.g., environmental reactioncondition, spectral environmental reaction condition and/or an appliedspectral energy pattern) can be modified and/or applied so as tominimize, reduce or eliminate frequencies from matching. This alsopermits reactions to be started and stopped with ease providing fornovel control in a myriad of reactions in a crystallization reactionsystem including preventing the formation of certain crystallinespecies, controlling the amount of crystallization in a crystallizationreaction system, etc. Further, if a source of, for example,electromagnetic radiation includes a somewhat larger spectrum ofwavelengths or frequencies (i.e., energies) than those which are neededto optimize (or prevent) a particular reaction in a crystallizationreaction system, then some of the unnecessary (or undesirable)wavelengths can be prevented from coming into contact with thecrystallization reaction system (e.g., can be blocked, reflected,absorbed, etc.) by an appropriate filtering, absorbing and/or reflectingtechnique as discussed in greater detail later herein.

Moreover, the concept of frequencies matching can also be used in thereverse for conditionable participants. Specifically, if a reaction isoccurring because frequencies match, the reaction can be slowed orstopped by causing the frequencies to no longer match or at least matchto a lesser degree. In this regard, one or more crystallization reactionsystem components (e.g., environmental reaction condition, spectralenvironmental reaction condition and/or an applied spectral energypattern) can be modified by introducing a conditionable participant,once conditioned, so as to minimize, reduce or eliminate frequenciesfrom matching in the crystallization reaction system. This also permitsreactions to be started and stopped with ease providing for novelcontrol in a myriad of reactions in a crystallization reaction systemincluding preventing the formation of certain crystalline species,controlling the amount of product formed in a crystallization reactionsystem, etc. Further, if a source of, for example, electromagneticradiation includes a somewhat larger spectrum of wavelengths orfrequencies (i.e., energies) than those which are needed to optimize (orprevent) a particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system,then some of the unnecessary (or undesirable) wavelengths can beprevented from coming into contact with the crystallization reactionsystem (e.g., can be blocked, reflected, absorbed, etc.) by anappropriate filtering, absorbing and/or reflecting technique asdiscussed in greater detail later herein.

It should also be apparent that various conditionable participants, onceconditioned, can be used in combination with various participants and/orspectral energy providers in a crystallization reaction system tocontrol numerous reaction pathways. Also, the conditioning of reactionvessels, or portions thereof, can also result in desirable control ofnumerous reaction pathways.

Further, a conditionable participant may be conditioned by removing atleast a portion of its spectral pattern prior to the conditionableparticipant being introduced into a crystallization reaction system.Also, removing (or blocking) at least a portion of a spectral pattern ofa reaction vessel, or portion(s) thereof, can also result in desirablecontrol of various reaction pathways.

To simplify the disclosure and understanding of the invention, specificcategories or sections have been created in the “Summary of theInvention” and in the “Detailed Description of the PreferredEmbodiments”. However, it should be understood that these categories arenot mutually exclusive and that some overlap exists. Accordingly, theseartificially created sections should not be used in an effort to limitthe scope of the invention defined in the appended claims.

Further, in the following Sections, attempts have been made to simplifydiscussions and reduce the overall length of this disclosure. Forexample, in many instances, “participants” in a crystallization reactionsystem or holoreaction system are exclusively referred to. However, itshould be understood that “conditionable participants” could also beseparately addressed in the disclosure, even though not always expresslyreferred to herein. Thus, when the various general mechanisms of theinvention are referred to herein, even if reference is made directly orindirectly to “participants” only, it should be understood that thediscussion also applies to “conditionable participants” with similarrelevancy. Efforts have been made throughout the disclosure to referexpressly to all of the novel phenomenon associated with conditionableparticipants only when required for clarification purposes.

I. Wave Energies

In general, thermal energy has traditionally been used to drive chemicalreactions by applying heat and increasing the temperature of a reactionsystem. The addition of heat increases the kinetic (motion) energy ofthe chemical reactants. It has been believed that a reactant with morekinetic energy moves faster and farther, and is more likely to take partin a chemical reaction. Mechanical energy likewise, by stirring andmoving the chemicals, increases their kinetic energy and thus theirreactivity. The addition of mechanical energy often increasestemperature, by increasing kinetic energy.

Acoustic energy is applied to chemical reactions as orderly mechanicalwaves. Because of its mechanical nature, acoustic energy can increasethe kinetic energy of chemical reactants, and can also elevate theirtemperature(s). Electromagnetic (EM) energy consists of waves ofelectric and magnetic fields. EM energy may also increase the kineticenergy and heat in reaction systems. It also may energize electronicorbitals or vibrational motion in some reactions.

Both acoustic and electromagnetic energy consist of waves. Energy wavesand frequency have some interesting properties, and may be combined insome interesting ways. The manner in which wave energy transfers andcombines, depends largely on the frequency. For example, when two wavesof energy, each having the same amplitude, but one at a frequency of 400Hz and the other at 100 Hz are caused to interact, the waves willcombine and their frequencies will add, to produce a new frequency of500 Hz (i.e., the “sum” frequency). The frequency of the waves will alsosubtract when they combine to produce a frequency of 300 Hz (i.e., the“difference” frequency). All wave energies typically add and subtract inthis manner, and such adding and subtracting is referred to asheterodyning. Common results of heterodyning are familiar to most asharmonics in music. The importance of heterodyning will be discussed ingreater detail later herein.

Another concept important to the invention is wave interactions orinterference. In particular, wave energies are known to interactconstructively and destructively. This phenomena is important indetermining the applied spectral energy pattern. FIGS. 1 a-1 c show twodifferent incident sine waves 1 (FIG. 1 a) and 2 (FIG. 1 b) whichcorrespond to two different spectral energy patterns having twodifferent wavelengths λ₁ and λ₂ (and thus different frequencies) whichcould be applied to a reaction system. Assume arguendo that the energypattern of FIG. 1 a corresponds to an electromagnetic spectral pattern(or an electromagnetic spectral conditioning pattern) and that FIG. 1 bcorresponds to one spectral environmental reaction condition (or aspectral conditioning environmental reaction condition). Each of thesine waves 1 and 2 has a different differential equation which describesits individual motion. However, when the sine waves are combined intothe resultant additive wave 1+2 (FIG. 1 c), the resulting complexdifferential equation, which describes the totality of the combinedenergies (i.e., the applied spectral energy pattern; or the appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern) actually results in certain of theinput energies being high (i.e., constructive interference shown by ahigher amplitude) at certain points in time, as well as being low (i.e.,destructive interference shown by a lower amplitude) at certain pointsin time.

Specifically, the portions “X” represent areas where the electromagneticspectral pattern of wave 1 has constructively interfered with thespectral environmental reaction condition wave 2, whereas the portions“Y” represent areas where the two waves 1 and 2 have destructivelyinterfered. Depending upon whether the portions “X” corresponds todesirable or undesirable wavelengths, frequencies or energies (e.g.,causing the applied spectral energy pattern (or the applied spectralenergy conditioning pattern) to have positive or negative interactionswith, for example, one or more participants and/or components in thecrystallization reaction system), then the portions “X” could enhance apositive effect in the reaction system or could enhance a negativeeffect in the crystallization reaction system. Similarly, depending onwhether the portions “Y” correspond to desirable or undesirablewavelengths, frequencies, or energies, then the portions “Y” maycorrespond to the effective loss of either a positive or negativeeffect.

Further, if a source of, for example, electromagnetic radiation includesa somewhat larger spectrum of wavelengths or frequencies (i.e.,energies) than those which are needed to optimize a particular reaction,then some of the unnecessary (or undesirable) wavelengths can beprevented from coming into contact with the crystallization reactionsystem (e.g., blocked, reflected, absorbed, etc.). Accordingly in thesimplified example discussed immediately above, by permitting onlydesirable wavelengths λ₁ to interact in a crystallization reactionsystem (e.g., filtering out certain wavelengths or frequencies of abroader spectrum electromagnetic emitter) the possibilities of negativeeffects resulting from the combination of waves 1 (FIG. 1 a) and 2 (FIG.1 b) would be minimized or eliminated. In this regard, it is noted thatin practice many desirable incident wavelengths can be made to beincident on at least a portion of a crystallization reaction system.Moreover, it should also be clear that positive or desirable effectsinclude, but are not limited to, those effects resulting from aninteraction (e.g., heterodyne, resonance, additive wave, subtractivewave, constructive or destructive interference) between a wavelength orfrequency of incident light and a wavelength (e.g., atomic and/ormolecular, etc.), frequency or property (e.g., Stark effects, Zeemaneffects, etc.) inherent to the crystallization reaction system itself.Thus, by maximizing the desirable wavelengths (or minimizing undesirablewavelengths), crystallization reaction system efficiencies never beforeknown (e.g., crystal growth rates, crystal morphologies, crystal phases,crystal purities, etc.) can be achieved. Alternatively stated, certaindestructive interference effects resulting from the combinations ofdifferent energies, frequencies and/or wavelengths can reduce certaindesirable results in a crystallization reaction system. The presentinvention attempts to mask or screen (e.g., filter) as many of suchundesirable energies (or wavelengths) as possible (e.g., when a somewhatlarger spectrum of wavelengths is available to be incident on acrystallization reaction system) from becoming incident on acrystallization reaction system and thus strive for, for example, thesynergistic results that can occur due to, for example, desirableconstructive interference effects between the incident wavelengths of,for example, electromagnetic energy.

It should be clear from this particular analysis that constructiveinterferences (i.e., the points “X”) could, for example, maximize bothpositive and negative effects in a crystallization reaction system.Accordingly, this simplified example shows that by combining, forexample, certain frequencies from a spectral pattern (or a spectralconditioning pattern) with one or more other frequencies from, forexample, at least one spectral environmental reaction condition (or atleast one spectral environmental conditioning reaction condition), thatthe applied spectral energy pattern (or applied spectral energyconditioning pattern) that is actually applied to the crystallizationreaction system can be a combination of constructive and destructiveinterference(s). The degree of interference can also depend on therelative phases of the waves. Accordingly, these factors should also betaken into account when choosing appropriate spectral energy patterns(or applied spectral energy conditioning patterns) that are to beapplied to a crystallization reaction system. In this regard, it isnoted that in practice many desirable incident wavelengths can beapplied to a crystallization reaction system or undesirable incidentwavelengths removed from a source which is incident upon at least aportion of a crystallization reaction). Moreover, it should also beclear that wave interaction effects include, but are not limited to,heterodyning, direct resonance, indirect resonance, additive waves,subtractive waves, constructive or destructive interference, etc.Further, as discussed in detail later herein, additional effects such aselectric effects and/or magnetic field effects can also influencespectral energy patterns or spectral energy conditioning patterns (e.g.,spectral patterns or spectral conditioning patterns, respectively).

II. Spectral Catalysts, Spectral Conditioning Catalysts and Spectroscopy

A wide variety of reactions can be advantageously affected and directedwith the assistance of a spectral energy catalyst (or spectral energyconditioning catalyst) having a specific spectral energy pattern (e.g.,spectral pattern, spectral conditioning pattern or electromagneticpattern) which transfers targeted energy to initiate, control and/orpromote desirable reaction pathways (e.g., desirable crystallizationpathways in a single or multiple component crystallization system)and/or desirable reaction rates within a crystallization reactionsystem. This section discusses spectral catalysts (and spectralconditioning catalysts) in more detail and explains various techniquesfor using spectral catalysts (and/or spectral conditioning catalysts) invarious crystallization reaction systems (and holoreaction systems). Forexample, a spectral catalyst can be used in a crystallization reactionsystem to replace and provide the additional energy normally supplied bya physical catalyst (e.g., a seed crystal, a substrate used forepitaxial growth, a crystallization agent, promoter or inhibitor, etc.).The spectral catalyst can actually mimic or copy the mechanisms ofaction of a physical catalyst. The spectral catalyst can act as both apositive catalyst to increase the rate of a reaction or as a negativecatalyst or poison to decrease the rate of reaction. Furthermore, thespectral catalyst can augment a physical catalyst by utilizing both aphysical catalyst and a spectral catalyst to achieve, for example adesired crystallization pathway in a crystallization reaction system.The spectral catalyst can improve the activity of a physical catalyst.Also, the spectral catalyst can partially replace a specific quantity oramount of the physical catalyst, thereby reducing and/or eliminatingmany of the difficulties associated with, for example, primary and/orsecondary nucleation, selectivity, and/or morphology.

Moreover, a conditionable participant can be conditioned by a spectralconditioning catalyst to form a conditioned participant which canthereafter be used in a crystallization reaction system, alone or incombination with a spectral catalyst. The spectral conditioning catalystcan energize a conditionable participant to result in a conditionedparticipant which can likewise, for example, replace, augment orotherwise provide additional energy normally provided by a physicalcatalyst in a crystallization reaction system, as discussed immediatelyabove with regard to a spectral catalyst.

Further, in the present invention, the spectral energy catalyst providestargeted energy (e.g., electromagnetic radiation comprising a specificfrequency or combination of frequencies), in a sufficient amount for asufficient duration to initiate and/or promote and/or direct a reaction(e.g., follow a particular reaction pathway). The total combination oftargeted energy applied at any point in time to the crystallizationreaction system is referred to as the applied spectral energy pattern.The applied spectral energy pattern may be comprised of a singlespectral catalyst, multiple spectral catalysts and/or other spectralenergy catalysts as well. With the absorption of targeted energy into acrystallization reaction system (e.g., electromagnetic energy from aspectral catalyst), a reactant may be caused to proceed through one orseveral reaction pathways including: energy transfer which can, forexample, excite electrons to higher energy states for initiation of areaction, by causing frequencies to match; ionize or dissociatereactants which may participate in a reaction; stabilize reactionproducts; energize and/or stabilize intermediates and/or transientsand/or activated complexes that participate in a reaction pathway; causeone or more components in a crystallization reaction to have spectralpatterns which at least partially overlap; alter the energy dynamics ofone or more components causing them to have altered properties; and/oralter the resonant exchange of energy within the holoreaction system.

Moreover, in the present invention, the spectral energy conditioningcatalyst provides targeted conditioning energy (e.g., electromagneticradiation comprising a specific frequency or combination offrequencies), in a sufficient amount for a sufficient duration tocondition a conditionable participant to form a conditioned participantand to permit the conditioned participant to initiate and/or promoteand/or direct a reaction (e.g., follow a particular reaction pathway)once the conditioned participant is initiated or activated in thecrystallization reaction system. The total combination of targetedconditioning energy applied at any point in time to the conditioningreaction system is referred to as the applied spectral energyconditioning pattern. The applied spectral energy conditioning patternmay be comprised of a single spectral conditioning catalyst, multiplespectral conditioning catalysts and/or other spectral energyconditioning catalysts. With the absorption of targeted conditioningenergy into a conditioning reaction system (e.g., electromagnetic energyfrom a spectral conditioning catalyst), a conditioned participant maycause one or more reactants to proceed through one or several reactionpathways including: energy transfer which can for example, exciteelectrons to higher energy states for initiation of chemical reaction,by causing frequencies to match; ionize or dissociate reactants whichmay participate in a chemical reaction; stabilize reaction products;energize and/or stabilize intermediates and/or transients and/oractivated complexes that participate in a reaction pathway; cause one ormore components in a crystallization reaction system to have spectralpatterns which at least partially overlap; and/or alter the energydynamics of one or more components causing them to have alteredproperties; and/or alter the resonant exchange of energy within theholoreaction system.

For example, in a simple crystallization reaction system, if a chemicalreaction provides for at least one reactant “A” to be converted into atleast one reaction product “B”, a physical catalyst “C” (or aconditioned participant “C”) may be utilized. In contrast, a portion ofthe catalytic spectral energy pattern (e.g., in this section thecatalytic spectral pattern) of the physical catalyst “C” may be appliedin the form of, for example, an electromagnetic beam (as discussedelsewhere herein) to catalyze the crystallization reaction.

Substances A and B=unknown frequencies, and C=30 Hz;Therefore, Substance A+30 HZ→Substance B.

In the present invention, for example, the spectral pattern (e.g.,electromagnetic spectral pattern) of the physical catalyst “C” can bedetermined by known methods of spectroscopy. Utilizing spectroscopicinstrumentation, the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst ispreferably determined under conditions approximating those occurring inthe crystallization reaction system using the physical catalyst (e.g.,spectral energy patterns as well as spectral patterns can be influencedby environmental reaction conditions, as discussed later herein). In thecase of crystallization, which can be an autocatalytic process, B and Ccan be identical such that:

Spectroscopy is a process in which the energy differences betweenallowed states of any system are measured by determining the frequenciesof the corresponding electromagnetic energy which is either beingabsorbed or emitted. Electromagnetic spectroscopy in general deals withthe interaction of electromagnetic radiation with matter. When photonsinteract with, for example, atoms or molecules, changes in theproperties of atoms and molecules are observed.

Atoms and molecules are associated with several different types ofmotion. The entire molecule rotates, the bonds vibrate, and even theelectrons move, albeit so rapidly that electron density distributionshave historically been the primary focus of the prior art. Each of thesekinds of motion is quantified. That is, the atom, molecule or ion canexist only in distinct states that correspond to discrete energyamounts. The energy difference between the different quantum statesdepends on the type of motion involved. Thus, the frequency of energyrequired to bring about a transition is different for the differenttypes of motion. That is, each type of motion corresponds to theabsorption of energy in different regions of the electromagneticspectrum and different spectroscopic instrumentation may be required foreach spectral region. The total motion energy of an atom or molecule maybe considered to be at least the sum of its electronic, vibrational androtational energies.

In both emission and absorption spectra, the relation between the energychange in the atom or molecule and the frequency of the electromagneticenergy emitted or absorbed is given by the so-called Bohr frequencycondition:ΔE=hvwhere h is Planck's constant; v is the frequency; and ΔE, is thedifference of energies in the final and initial states.

Electronic spectra are the result of electrons moving from oneelectronic energy level to another in an atom, molecule or ion. Amolecular physical catalyst's spectral pattern includes not onlyelectronic energy transitions but also may involve transitions betweenrotational and vibrational energy levels. As a result, the spectra ofmolecules are much more complicated than those of atoms. The mainchanges observed in the atoms or molecules after interaction withphotons include excitation, ionization and/or rupture of chemical bonds,all of which may be measured and quantified by spectroscopic methodsincluding emission or absorption spectroscopy which give the sameinformation about energy level separation.

In emission spectroscopy, when an atom or molecule is subjected to aflame or an electric discharge, such atoms or molecules may absorbenergy and become “excited.” On their return to their “normal” statethey may emit radiation. Such an emission is the result of a transitionof the atom or molecule from a high energy or “excited” state to one oflower state. The energy lost in the transition is emitted in the form ofelectromagnetic energy. “Excited” atoms usually produce line spectrawhile “excited” molecules tend to produce band spectra.

In absorption spectroscopy, the absorption of nearly monochromaticincident radiation is monitored as it is swept over a range offrequencies. During the absorption process the atoms or molecules passfrom a state of low energy to one of high energy. Energy changesproduced by electromagnetic energy absorption occur only in integralmultiples of a unit amount of energy called a quantum, which ischaracteristic of each absorbing species. Absorption spectra may beclassified into four types: rotational; rotation-vibration; vibrational;and electronic.

The rotational spectrum of a molecule is associated with changes whichoccur in the rotational states of the molecule. The energies of therotational states differ only by a relatively small amount, and hence,the frequency which is necessary to effect a change in the rotationallevels is very low and the wavelength of electromagnetic energy is verylarge. The energy spacing of molecular rotational states depends on bonddistances and angles. Pure rotational spectra are observed in the farinfrared and microwave and radio regions (See Table 1).

Rotation-vibrational spectra are associated with transitions in whichthe vibrational states of the molecule are altered and may beaccompanied by changes in rotational states. Absorption occurs at higherfrequencies or shorter wavelength and usually occurs in the middle ofthe infrared region (See Table 1).

Vibrational spectra from different vibrational energy levels occurbecause of motion of bonds. A stretching vibration involves a change inthe interatomic distance along the axis of the bond between two atoms.Bending vibrations are characterized by a change in the angle betweentwo bonds. The vibrational spectra of a molecule are typically in thenear-infrared range. It should be understood that the term vibrationalspectra means all manner of bond motion spectra including, but notlimited to, stretching, bending, librational, translational, torsional,etc.

Electronic spectra are from transitions between electronic states foratoms and molecules and are accompanied by simultaneous changes in therotational and vibrational states in molecules. Relatively large energydifferences are involved, and hence absorption occurs at rather largefrequencies or relatively short wavelengths. Different electronic statesof atoms or molecules correspond to energies in the infrared,ultraviolet-visible or x-ray region of the electromagnetic spectrum (seeTable 1). TABLE 1 Approximate Boundaries Region Name Energy, JWavelength Frequency, Hz X-ray   2 × 10⁻¹⁴-2 × 10⁻¹⁷ 10−2-10 nm   3 ×10¹⁹-3 × 10¹⁶ Vacuum Ultraviolet   2 × 10⁻¹⁷-9.9 × 10⁻¹⁹ 10-200 nm   3 ×10¹⁶-1.5 × 10¹⁵ Near ultraviolet 9.9 × 10⁻¹⁹-5 × 10⁻¹⁹ 200-400 nm 1.5 ×10¹⁵-7.5 × 10¹⁴ Visible   5 × 10⁻¹⁹-2.5 × 10⁻¹⁹ 400-800 nm 7.5 ×10¹⁴-3.8 × 10¹⁴ Near Infrared 2.5 × 10⁻¹⁹-6.6 × 10⁻²⁰ 0.8-2.5 um 3.8 ×10¹⁴-1 × 10¹⁴ Fundamental 6.6 × 10⁻²⁰-4 × 10⁻²¹ 2.5-50 um   1 × 10¹⁴-6 ×10¹² Infrared Far infrared   4 × 10⁻²¹-6.6 × 10⁻²² 50-300 um   6 ×10¹²-1 × 10¹² Microwave 6.6 × 10⁻²²-4 × 10⁻²⁵ 0.3 mm-0.5 m   1 × 10¹²-6× 10⁸ Radiowave   4 × 10⁻²⁵-6.6 × 10⁻³⁴ 0.5-300 × 10⁶ m    6 × 10⁸-1

Electromagnetic radiation as a form of energy can be absorbed oremitted, and therefore many different types of spectroscopy may be usedin the present invention to determine a desired spectral pattern of aspectral catalyst (e.g., a spectral pattern of a physical catalyst)including, but not limited to, x-ray, ultraviolet, infrared, microwave,atomic absorption, flame emissions, atomic emissions, inductivelycoupled plasma, DC argon plasma, arc-source emission, spark-sourceemission, high-resolution laser, radio, Raman and the like.

In order to study the electronic transitions, the material to be studiedmay need to be heated to a high temperature, such as in a flame, wherethe molecules are atomized and excited. Another very effective way ofatomizing gases is the use of gaseous discharges. When a gas is placedbetween charged electrodes, causing an electrical field, electrons areliberated from the electrodes and from the gas atoms themselves and mayform a plasma or plasma-like conditions. These electrons will collidewith the gas atoms which will be atomized, excited or ionized. By usinghigh frequency fields, it is possible to induce gaseous dischargeswithout using electrodes. By varying the field strength, the excitationenergy can be varied. In the case of a solid material, excitation byelectrical spark or arc can be used. In the spark or arc, the materialto be analyzed is evaporated and the atoms are excited.

The basic scheme of an emission spectrophotometer includes a purifiedsilica cell containing the sample which is to be excited. The radiationof the sample passes through a slit and is separated into a spectrum bymeans of a dispersion element. The spectral pattern can be detected on ascreen, photographic film or by a detector.

An atom will most strongly absorb electromagnetic energy at the samefrequencies it emits. Measurements of absorption are often made so thatelectromagnetic radiation that is emitted from a source passes through awavelength-limiting device, and impinges upon the physical catalystsample that is held in a cell. When a beam of white light passes througha material, selected frequencies from the beam are absorbed. Theelectromagnetic radiation that is not absorbed by the physical catalystpasses through the cell and strikes a detector. When the remaining beamis spread out in a spectrum, the frequencies that were absorbed show upas dark lines in the otherwise continuous spectrum. The position ofthese dark lines correspond exactly to the positions of lines in anemission spectrum of the same molecule or atom. Both emission andabsorption spectrophotometers are available through regular commercialchannels.

In 1885, Balmer discovered that hydrogen vibrates and produces energy atfrequencies in the visible light region of the electromagnetic spectrumwhich can be expressed by a simple formula:1λ=R(1/2²−1/m ²)when λ is the wavelength of the light, R is Rydberg's constant and m isan integer greater than or equal to 3 (e.g., 3, 4, or 5, etc.).Subsequently, Rydberg discovered that this equation could be adapted toresult in all the wavelengths in the hydrogen spectrum by changing the1/2² to 1/n², as in,1/λ=R(1/n ²−1/m ²)where n is an integer≧1, and m is an integer≧n+1. Thus, for everydifferent number n, the result is a series of numbers for wavelength,and the names of various scientists were assigned to each such serieswhich resulted. For instance, when n=2 and m≧3, the energy is in thevisible light spectrum and the series is referred to as the Balmerseries. The Lyman series is in the ultraviolet spectrum with n=1, andthe Paschen series is in the infrared spectrum with n=3.

In the prior art, energy level diagrams were the primary means used todescribe energy levels in the hydrogen atom (see FIGS. 7 a and 7 b).

After determining the electromagnetic spectral pattern of a desiredcatalyst (e.g., a physical catalyst such as a seed crystal), thecatalytic spectral pattern may be duplicated, at least partially, andapplied to the crystallization reaction system. Any generator of one ormore frequencies within an acceptable approximate range of, for example,frequencies of electromagnetic radiation may be used in the presentinvention. When duplicating one or more frequencies of, for example, aspectral pattern (or a spectral conditioning pattern), it is notnecessary to duplicate the frequency exactly. For instance, the effectachieved by a frequency of 1,000 THz, can also be achieved by afrequency very close to it, such as 1,001 or 999 THz. Thus, there willbe a range above and below each exact frequency which will also catalyzea reaction. Specifically, FIG. 12 shows a typical bell-curve “B”distribution of frequencies around the desired frequency f_(o), whereindesirable frequencies can be applied which do not correspond exactly tof_(o), but are close enough to the frequency f_(o) to achieve a desiredeffect, such as those frequencies between and including the frequencieswithin the range of f₁ and f₂. Note that f₁ and f₂ correspond to aboutone half the maximum amplitude, a_(max), of the curve “B”. Thus,whenever the term “exact” or specific reference to “frequency” or thelike is used, it should be understood to have this meaning. In addition,harmonics of spectral catalyst (or spectral conditioning catalyst)frequencies, both above and below the exact spectral catalyst frequency(or spectral conditioning catalyst frequency), will cause sympatheticresonance with the exact frequency and will catalyze the reaction.Finally, it is possible to catalyze reactions by duplicating one or moreof the mechanisms of action of the exact frequency, rather than usingthe exact frequency itself. For example, platinum catalyzes theformation of water from hydrogen and oxygen, in part, by energizing thehydroxyl radical at its frequency of roughly 1,060 THz. The desiredreaction can also be catalyzed by energizing the hydroxy radical withits microwave frequency, thereby duplicating platinum's mechanism ofaction.

An electromagnetic radiation-emitting source should have the followingcharacteristics: high intensity of the desired wavelengths; long life;stability; and the ability to emit the electromagnetic energy in apulsed and/or continuous mode. Moreover, in certain crystallizationreaction systems, it may be desirable for the electromagnetic energyemitted to be capable of being directed to an appropriate point (orarea) within at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system.Suitable techniques include optical waveguides, optical fibers, etc.

Irradiating sources can include, but are not limited to, arc lamps, suchas xenon-arc, hydrogen and deuterium, krypton-arc, high-pressuremercury, platinum, silver; plasma arcs, discharge lamps, such as As, Bi,Cd, Cs, Ge, Hg, K, Na, P, Pb, Rb, Sb, Se, Sn, Ti, Tl and Zn;hollow-cathode lamps, either single or multiple elements such as Cu, Pt,and Ag; and sunlight and coherent electromagnetic energy emissions, suchas masers and lasers. A more complete list of irradiating sources arelocated in Table D.

Masers are devices which amplify or generate electromagnetic energywaves with great stability and accuracy. Masers operate on the sameprincipal as lasers, but produce electromagnetic energy in the radio andmicrowave, rather than visible range of the spectrum. In masers, theelectromagnetic energy is produced by the transition of moleculesbetween rotational energy levels.

Lasers are powerful coherent photon sources that produce a beam ofphotons having the same frequency, phase and direction, that is, a beamof photons that travel exactly alike. Accordingly, for example, thepredetermined spectral pattern of a desired catalyst can be generated bya series or grouping of lasers producing one or more requiredfrequencies.

Any laser capable of emitting the necessary electromagnetic radiationwith a frequency or frequencies of the spectral energy provider may beused in the present invention. Lasers are available for use throughoutmuch of the spectral range. They can be operated in either a continuousor a pulsed mode. Lasers that emit lines and lasers that emit acontinuum may be used in the present invention. Line sources may includeargon ion laser, ruby laser, the nitrogen laser, the Nd:YAG laser, thecarbon dioxide laser, the carbon monoxide laser and the nitrousoxide-carbon dioxide laser. In addition to the spectral lines that areemitted by lasers, several other lines are available, by addition orsubtraction in a crystal of the frequency emitted by one laser to orfrom that emitted by another laser. Devices that combine frequencies andmay be used in the present invention include difference frequencygenerators and sum frequency mixers. Other lasers that may be used inthis invention include, but are not limited to: crystal, such as Al₂O₃doped with Cr³⁺, Y₃Al₅O₁₂ doped with Nd³⁺; gas, such as He—Ne, Kr-ion;glass, chemical, such as vibrationally excited HCL and HP; dye, such asRhodamine 6G in methanol; and semiconductor lasers, such asGa_(1-x)Al_(x)As. Many models can be tuned to various frequency ranges,thereby providing several different frequencies from one instrument andapplying them to the crystallization reaction system (See Examples inTable 2). TABLE 2 SEVERAL POPULAR LASERS Medium Type Emitted wavelength,nm Ar Gas 334, 351.1, 363.8, 454.5, 457.9, 465.8, 472.7, 476.5, 488.0,496.5, 501.7, 514.5, 528.7 Kr Gas 350.7, 356.4, 406.7, 413.1, 415.4,468.0, 476.2, 482.5, 520.8, 530.9, 568.2, 647.1, 676.4, 752.5, 799.3He—Ne Gas 632.8 He—Cd Gas 325.0, 441.6 N₂ Gas 337.1 XeF Gas 351 KrF Gas248 ArF Gas 193 Ruby Solid 693.4 Nd: YAG Solid 266, 355, 532 Pb_(1−x)Cd_(x) S Solid 2.9 × 10³-2.6 × 10⁴ Pb_(1−x) Se_(x) Solid 2.9 × 10³-2.6 ×10⁴ Pb_(1−x) Sn_(x) Se Solid 2.9 × 10³-2.6 × 10⁴ Dyes Liquid  217-1000

The coherent light from a single laser or a series of lasers is simplybrought to focus or introduced to the region of the crystallizationreaction system where a desired reaction is to take place. The lightsource should be close enough to avoid a “dead space” in which the lightdoes not reach the desired area in the crystallization reaction system,but far enough apart to assure complete incident-light absorption. Sinceultraviolet sources generate heat, such sources may need to be cooled tomaintain efficient operation. Irradiation time, causing excitation ofone or more components in the crystallization reaction system, may beindividually tailored for each reaction: some short-term for acontinuous reaction with large surface exposure to the light source; orlong light-contact time for other systems. In addition, exposure timesand energy amplitudes or intensities may be controlled depending on thedesired effect (e.g., altered energy dynamics, ionizations, bondrupture, species selection, directional growth etc.).

An object of this invention is to provide a spectral energy pattern(e.g., a spectral pattern of electromagnetic energy) to one or morereactants in a crystallization reaction system by applying at least aportion of (or substantially all of) a required spectral energy catalyst(e.g., a spectral catalyst) determined and calculated by, for example,waveform analysis of the spectral patterns of, for example, thereactant(s) and the reaction product(s). Accordingly, in the case of aspectral catalyst, a calculated electromagnetic pattern will be aspectral pattern or will act as a spectral catalyst to generate apreferred reaction pathway and/or preferred reaction rate. In basicterms, spectroscopic data for identified substances can be used toperform a simple waveform calculation to arrive at, for example, thecorrect electromagnetic energy frequency, or combination of frequencies,needed to catalyze a reaction. In simple terms,A→BSubstance A=50 Hz, and Substance B=80 Hz80 Hz−50 Hz=30 Hz:Therefore, Substance A+30 Hz→Substance B.

The spectral energy pattern (e.g., spectral patterns) of both thereactant(s) and reaction product(s) can be determined. In the case of aspectral catalyst, this can be accomplished by the spectroscopic meansmentioned earlier. Once the spectral patterns are determined (e.g.,having a specific frequency or combination of frequencies) within anappropriate set of environmental reaction conditions, the spectralenergy pattern(s) (e.g., electromagnetic spectral pattern(s)) of thespectral energy catalyst (e.g., spectral catalyst) can be determined.Using the spectral energy pattern (s) (e.g., spectral patterns) of thereactant(s) and reaction product(s), a waveform analysis calculation candetermine the energy difference between the reactant(s) and reactionproduct(s) and at least a portion of the calculated spectral energypattern (e.g., electromagnetic spectral pattern) in the form of aspectral energy pattern (e.g., a spectral pattern) of a spectral energycatalyst (e.g., a spectral catalyst) can be applied to the desiredreaction in a crystallization reaction system to cause the desiredreaction to follow along the desired crystallization reaction pathway.The specific frequency or frequencies of the calculated spectral energypattern (e.g., spectral pattern) corresponding to the spectral energycatalyst (e.g., spectral catalyst) will provide the necessary energyinput into the desired reaction in the crystallization reaction systemto affect and initiate a desired crystallization reaction pathway.

Performing the waveform analysis calculation to arrive at, for example,the correct electromagnetic energy frequency or frequencies can beaccomplished by using complex algebra, Fourier transformation or WaveletTransforms, which is available through commercial channels under thetrademark Mathematica® and supplied by Wolfram, Co. It should be notedthat only a portion of a calculated spectral energy catalyst (e.g.,spectral catalyst) may be sufficient to catalyze a reaction or asubstantially complete spectral energy catalyst (e.g., spectralcatalyst) may be applied depending on the particular circumstances.

In addition, at least a portion of the spectral energy pattern (e.g.,electromagnetic pattern of the required spectral catalyst) may begenerated and applied to the crystallization reaction system by, forexample, the electromagnetic radiation emitting sources defined andexplained earlier.

Another object of this invention is to provide a spectral energyconditioning pattern (e.g., a spectral conditioning pattern ofelectromagnetic energy) to one or more conditionable participants in aconditioning crystallization reaction system by applying at least aportion of (or substantially all of) a required spectral energyconditioning catalyst (e.g., a spectral conditioning catalyst)determined and calculated by, for example, waveform analysis of thespectral patterns of, for example, the conditionable participant(s), andthe conditioned participant. Accordingly, in the case of a spectralconditioning catalyst, a calculated electromagnetic conditioning patternwill be a spectral conditioning pattern which, when applied to aconditionable participant, will permit the conditioned participant toact as a spectral catalyst to generate a preferred reaction pathwayand/or preferred reaction rate in a crystallization reaction system. Inbasic terms, spectroscopic data for identified substances can be used toperform a simple waveform calculation to arrive at, for example, thecorrect electromagnetic energy frequency, or combination of frequencies,needed to catalyze a reaction. In simple terms,A→BConditionable substance A=50 Hz, and conditioned Substance B=80 Hz80 Hz−50 Hz=30 Hz:Therefore, Substance A+30 Hz=Substance B.

The spectral energy conditioning pattern (e.g., spectral conditioningpattern) of both the conditionable participant and the conditionedparticipant can be determined. In the case of a spectral conditioningcatalyst, this can be accomplished by the spectroscopic means mentionedearlier. Once the spectral patterns are determined (e.g., having aspecific frequency or combination of frequencies) within an appropriateset of conditioning environmental reaction conditions, the spectralenergy conditioning pattern(s) (e.g., electromagnetic spectralconditioning pattern(s)) of the spectral energy conditioning catalyst(e.g., spectral conditioning catalyst) can be determined. Using thespectral energy conditioning pattern(s) (e.g., spectral conditioningpatterns) of the conditionable participant and the conditionedparticipant, a waveform analysis calculation can determine the energydifference between the conditioned participant and reactant(s) orproduct(s) and at least a portion of the calculated spectral energyconditioning pattern (e.g., electromagnetic spectral conditioningpattern) in the form of a spectral energy conditioning (e.g., a spectralconditioning pattern) of a spectral energy conditioning catalyst (e.g.,a spectral conditioning catalyst) can be applied to the desiredconditionable participant in a conditioning reaction system tosubsequently result in the desired reaction in the crystallizationreaction system once the conditioned participant is introduced to thecrystallization reaction system. The specific frequency or frequenciesof the calculated spectral energy conditioning pattern (e.g., a spectralconditioning pattern) corresponding to the spectral energy conditioningcatalyst (e.g., spectral conditioning catalyst) required to form aconditioned participant will provide the necessary energy input into thedesired reaction in the crystallization reaction system to affect andinitiate a desired reaction pathway.

Performing the waveform analysis calculation to arrive at, for example,the correct electromagnetic energy frequency or frequencies can beaccomplished by using complex algebra, Fourier transformation or WaveletTransforms, which is available through commercial channels under thetrademark Mathematica® and supplied by Wolfram, Co. It should be notedthat only a portion of a calculated spectral energy conditioningcatalyst (e.g., spectral conditioning catalyst) may be sufficient tocatalyze a reaction or a substantially complete spectral energyconditioning catalyst (e.g., spectral conditioning catalyst) may beapplied depending on the particular circumstances.

In addition, at least a portion of the spectral energy conditioningpattern (e.g., electromagnetic pattern of the required spectralcatalyst) may be generated and applied to the holoreaction system by,for example, the electromagnetic radiation emitting sources defined andexplained earlier.

The specific physical catalysts (e.g., seed crystals, epitaxialsubstrates, crystallization agent, promoter or inhibitor, etc.) that maybe replaced or augmented in the present invention may include any solid,liquid, gas or plasma catalyst, having either homogeneous orheterogeneous catalytic activity.

III. Targeting

The frequency and wave nature of energy has been discussed herein.Additionally, Section I entitled “Wave Energies” disclosed the conceptsof various potential interactions between different waves. The generalconcepts of “targeting”, “direct resonance targeting”, “harmonictargeting” and “non-harmonic heterodyne targeting” (all defined termsherein) build on these and other understandings.

Targeting has been defined generally as the application of a spectralenergy provider (e.g., spectral energy catalyst, spectral catalyst,spectral energy pattern, spectral pattern, catalytic spectral energypattern, catalytic spectral pattern, spectral environmental reactionconditions and applied spectral energy pattern) to a desired reaction ina crystallization reaction system. The application of these types ofenergies to a desired reaction can result in interaction(s) between theapplied spectral energy provider(s) and matter (including all componentsthereof) in the crystallization reaction system. This targeting canresult in at least one of direct resonance, harmonic resonance, and/ornon-harmonic heterodyne resonance with at least a portion, for example,of at least one form of matter in a crystallization reaction system. Inthis invention, targeting should be generally understood as meaningapplying a particular spectral energy provider (e.g., a spectral energypattern) to another entity comprising matter (or any component thereof)to achieve a particular desired result (e.g., desired reaction productand/or desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate).

Further, the invention provides techniques for achieving such desirableresults without the production of, for example, undesirable transients,intermediates, activated complexes and/or reaction products (e.g.,derivative structures, impurities, defects, etc.). In this regard, somelimited prior art techniques exist which have applied certain forms ofenergies (as previously discussed) to various non-crystallizationreactions. These certain forms of energies have been limited to directresonance and harmonic resonance with some electronic frequencies and/orvibrational frequencies of some reactants. These limited forms ofenergies used by the prior art were due to the fact that the prior artlacked an adequate understanding of the spectral energy mechanisms andtechniques disclosed herein. Further, crystallization prior art hastypically applied general processing conditions such as temperature,pressure, etc., to achieve desired goals. Moreover, it has often beenthe case in the prior art that at least some undesirable intermediate,transient, activated complex and/or reaction product was formed, and/ora less than optimum reaction rate for a desired crystallization reactionpathway occurred. The present invention overcomes the limitations of theprior art by specifically targeting, for example, various forms ofmatter (e.g., seed crystals) in a crystallization reaction system(and/or components thereof), with, for example, an applied spectralenergy pattern. Heretofore, such selective targeting of the inventionwas never disclosed or suggested. Specifically, at best, the prior arthas been reduced to using random, trial and error environmental factors.

Accordingly, whenever use of the word “targeting” is made herein, itshould be understood that targeting does not correspond to undisciplinedenergy bands being applied to a crystallization reaction system; butrather to a targeted, applied spectral energy pattern.

IV. Conditioning Targeting

Conditioning targeting has been defined generally as the application ofa spectral energy conditioning provider (e.g., spectral energyconditioning catalyst, spectral conditioning catalyst, spectral energyconditioning pattern, spectral conditioning pattern, catalytic spectralenergy conditioning pattern, catalytic spectral conditioning pattern,spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions and appliedspectral energy conditioning pattern) to a conditionable participant toform at least one conditioned participant prior to the conditionedparticipant becoming involved in (e.g., introduced into and/or activatedin) a crystallization reaction system. The application of these types ofconditioning energies to conditionable participants to form conditionedparticipants, prior to the conditioned participants being introduced toa crystallization reaction system, can result in interaction(s) betweenthe conditioned participant matter and other components in thecrystallization reaction system (including all components thereof) sothat the conditioned matter can then initiate and/or direct desirablereaction pathways and/or desirable reaction rates within acrystallization reaction system. This conditioning targeting can resultin at least one of direct conditioning resonance, harmonic conditioningresonance, non-harmonic conditioning heterodyne resonance and/ornon-resonance influencing with at least a portion of, for example, atleast one form of conditionable participant matter (of any form) to formconditioned participant matter which is later introduced into, oractivated in, a crystallization reaction system. In this invention,conditioning targeting should be generally understood as meaningapplying a particular spectral energy conditioning provider (e.g., aspectral energy conditioning pattern) to another conditionable entitycomprising conditionable matter (or any component thereof) to achieve aparticular desired result (e.g., ultimately achieve a desired reactionproduct and/or desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate dueto the conditioned matter being introduced into the crystallizationreaction system.). It should be noted that introduction into thecrystallization reaction system should not be construed as meaning onlya physical introduction of a conditioned participant that has beenconditioned in a conditioning reaction vessel, but should also beunderstood as meaning that a conditionable participant can beconditioned in situ in a crystallization reaction vessel (or thereaction vessel per se can be conditioned) and the crystallizationreaction system thereafter is initiated, activated, or turned on (e.g.,initiated by the application of, for example, temperature, pressure,etc.) once the conditioned participant is present in the crystallizationreaction vessel. Thus, the invention provides techniques for achievingsuch desirable results without the production of, for example,undesirable transients, intermediates, activated complexes and/orreaction products (e.g., defects, impurities, etc.). The presentinvention teaches that by specifically targeting, for example, variousforms of conditionable matter (and/or components thereof) prior to theconditioned matter being involved with reactions in a crystallizationreaction system desirable results can be achieved.

Accordingly, whenever use of the word “conditioning targeting” is madeherein, it should be understood that conditioning targeting does notcorrespond to undisciplined energy bands being applied to aconditionable participant to form a conditioned participant which thenbecomes involved in a crystallization reaction system; but rather towell defined, targeted, applied spectral energy conditioning patterns,each of which has a particular desirable purpose to form a conditionedparticipant so that the conditioned participant can, for example, permita desired reaction pathway to be followed, and/or achieve a desiredresult and/or a desired result at a desired reaction rate in acrystallization reaction system. These results include conditioningtargeting a single form of conditionable participant matter to formconditioned matter which, when such conditioned matter is activated orinitiated in a crystallization reaction system, causes the conditionedmatter to behave favorably, or conditioning targeting multiple forms ofconditionable participant matter to achieve desirable results.

V. Environmental Reaction Conditions

Environmental reaction conditions are important to understand becausethey can influence, positively or negatively, crystallization reactionpathways in a crystallization reaction system. Traditional environmentalreaction conditions include temperature, pressure, surface area ofcatalysts, catalyst size and shape, solvents, support materials,poisons, promoters, concentrations, electromagnetic radiation, electricfields, magnetic fields, mechanical forces, acoustic fields, reactionvessel size, shape and composition and combinations thereof, etc.

The following reaction can be used to discuss the effects ofenvironmental reaction conditions which may need to be taken intoaccount in order to cause the reaction to proceed along the simplereaction pathway shown below.

Specifically, in some instances, reactant A will not form into reactionproduct B in the presence of any catalyst C unless the environmentalreaction conditions in the crystallization reaction system includecertain maximum or minimum conditions of environmental reactionconditions such as pressure and/or temperature. In this regard, manyreactions will not occur in the presence of a physical catalyst unlessthe environmental reactions conditions include, for example, an elevatedtemperature and/or an elevated pressure. In the present invention, suchenvironmental reaction conditions should be taken into considerationwhen applying a particular spectral energy catalyst (e.g., a spectralcatalyst). Many specifics of the various environmental reactionconditions are discussed in greater detail in the Section hereinentitled “Description of the Preferred Embodiments”.

VI. Conditioning Environmental Reaction Conditions

Conditioning environmental reaction conditions are also important tounderstand because they can also influence, positively or negatively,the conditioning of a conditionable participant and can ultimately leadto different reaction pathways in a crystallization reaction system whena conditioned participant is introduced into, or activated in, thecrystallization reaction system. The same traditional environmentalreaction conditions listed above also apply here, namely temperature,pressure, surface area of catalysts, catalyst size and shape, solvents,support materials, poisons, promoters, concentrations, electromagneticradiation, electric fields, magnetic fields, mechanical forces, acousticfields, reaction vessel size, shape and composition and combinationsthereof, etc.

In the present invention, such conditioning environmental reactionconditions should be taken into consideration when applying a particularspectral energy catalyst (e.g., a spectral conditioning catalyst) to aconditionable participant. Similar environmental considerations need tobe taken into account when the conditioned participant is introducedinto a crystallization reaction system. Many specifics of the variousenvironmental and/or conditioning environmental reaction conditions arediscussed in greater detail in the Section herein entitled “Descriptionof the Preferred Embodiments”.

VII. Spectral Environmental Reaction Conditions

If it is known that certain reaction pathways will not occur within acrystallization reaction system (or not occur at a desirable rate) evenwhen a catalyst is present unless, for example, certain minimum ormaximum environmental reaction conditions are present (e.g., thetemperature is lowered or pressure is elevated), then an additionalfrequency or combination of frequencies (i.e., an applied spectralenergy pattern) can be applied to the crystallization reaction system.In this regard, spectral environmental reaction condition(s) can beapplied instead of, or to supplement, those environmental reactionconditions that are naturally present, or need to be present, in orderfor a desired crystallization reaction pathway and/or desired reactionrate to be followed. The environmental reaction conditions that can besupplemented or replaced with spectral environmental reaction conditionsinclude, for example, temperature, pressure, surface area of catalysts,catalyst size and shape, solvents, support materials, poisons,promoters, concentrations, electric fields, magnetic fields, etc.

Still further, a particular frequency or combination of frequenciesand/or fields that can produce one or more spectral environmentalreaction conditions can be combined with one or more spectral energycatalysts and/or spectral catalysts to generate an applied spectralenergy pattern which can be focussed on a particular area in acrystallization reaction system. Accordingly, various considerations canbe taken into account for what particular frequency or combination offrequencies and/or fields may be desirable to combine with (or replace)various environmental reaction conditions, for example.

As an example, in a simple reaction, assume that a first reactant “A”has a frequency or simple spectral pattern of 3 THz and a secondreactant “B” has a frequency or simple spectral pattern of 7 THz. Atroom temperature, no reaction occurs. However, when reactants A and Bare exposed to high temperatures, their frequencies, or simple spectralpatterns, both shift to 5 THz. Since their frequencies match, theytransfer energy and a reaction occurs. By applying a frequency of 2 THz,at room temperature, the applied 2 THz frequency will heterodyne withthe 3 THz pattern to result in, both 1 Thz and 5 THz heterodynedfrequencies; while the applied frequency of 2 THz will heterodyne withthe spectral pattern of 7 THz of reactant “B” and result in heterodynedfrequencies of 5 THz and 9 THz in reactant “B”. Thus, the heterodynedfrequencies of 5 THz are generated at room temperature in each of thereactants “A” and “B”. Accordingly, frequencies in each of the reactantsmatch and thus energy can transfer between the reactants “A” and “B”.When the energy can transfer between such reactants, all desirablereactions along a reaction pathway may be capable of being achieved.However, in certain reactions, only some desirable reactions along areaction pathway are capable of being achieved by the application of asingular frequency. In these instances, additional frequencies and/orfields may need to be applied to result in all desirable steps along areaction pathway being met, including but not limited to, the formationof all required reaction intermediates and/or transients.

Thus, by applying a frequency, or combination of frequencies and/orfields (i.e., creating an applied spectral energy pattern) whichcorresponds to at least one spectral environmental reaction condition,the spectral energy patterns (e.g., spectral patterns of, for example,reactant(s), intermediates, transients, catalysts, etc.) can beeffectively modified which may result in broader spectral energypatterns (e.g., broader spectral patterns), in some cases, or narrowerspectral energy patterns (e.g., spectral patterns) in other cases. Suchbroader or narrower spectral energy patterns (e.g., spectral patterns)may correspond to a broadening or narrowing of line widths in a spectralenergy pattern (e.g., a spectral pattern). As stated throughout herein,when frequencies match, energy transfers. In this particular embodiment,frequencies can be caused to match by, for example, broadening thespectral pattern of one or more participants in a crystallizationreaction system. For example, as discussed in much greater detail laterherein, the application of temperature to a crystallization reactionsystem typically causes the broadening of one or more spectral patterns(e.g., line width broadening) of, for example, one or more reactants inthe crystallization reaction system. It is this broadening of spectralpatterns that can cause spectral patterns of one or more reactants to,for example, overlap. The overlapping of the spectral patterns can causefrequencies to match, and thus energy to transfer. When energy istransferred, reactions can occur. The scope of reactions which occur,include all of those reactions along any particular crystallizationreaction pathway. Thus, the broadening of spectral pattern(s) can resultin, for example, formation of reaction product, formation of and/orstimulation and/or stabilization of reaction intermediates and/ortransients, catalyst frequencies, poisons, promoters, etc. All of theenvironmental reaction conditions that are discussed in detail in thesection entitled “Detailed Description of the Preferred Embodiments” canbe at least partially stimulated in a crystallization reaction system bythe application of a spectral environmental reaction condition.

Similarly, spectral patterns can be caused to become non-overlapping bychanging, for example, at least one spectral environmental reactioncondition, and thus changing the applied spectral energy pattern. Inthis instance, energy will not transfer (or the rate at which energytransfers can be reduced) and reactions will not occur (or the rates ofreactions can be slowed).

Finally, by controlling spectral environmental reaction conditions, theenergy dynamics within a holoreaction system may be controlled. Forexample, with a first spectral environmental reaction condition, a firstset of frequencies may match and hence energy may transfer at a firstset of energy levels and types. When the spectral environmental reactioncondition is changed, a second set of frequencies may match, resultingin transfer of energy at different levels or types.

Spectral environmental reaction conditions can be utilized to startand/or stop reactions in a reaction pathway. Thus, certain reactions canbe started, stopped, slowed and/or speeded up by, for example, applyingdifferent spectral environmental reaction conditions at different timesduring a reaction and/or at different intensities. Thus, spectralenvironmental reaction conditions are capable of influencing, positivelyor negatively, reaction pathways and/or reaction rates in acrystallization reaction system.

VII. Spectral Conditioning Environmental Reaction Conditions

Similarly, spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditionsconsiderations apply in a parallel manner in this section as well.Specifically, if it is known that certain conditioning of a conditionedparticipant will not occur (or not occur at a desirable rate), unlessfor example, certain minimum or maximum conditioning environmentalreaction conditions are present (e.g., the temperature and/or pressureis/are elevated), then an additional frequency or combination offrequencies (i.e., an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) canbe applied to the conditionable participant. In this regard, spectralconditioning environmental reaction condition(s) can be applied insteadof, or to supplement, those conditioning environmental reactionconditions that are naturally present, or need to be present, in orderfor a desired conditioning of a conditionable participant to occur(i.e., to form a desired conditioned participant). The conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions that can be supplemented or replacedwith spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions include,for example, temperature, pressure, surface area of catalysts, catalystsize and shape, solvents, support materials, poisons, promoters,concentrations, electric fields, magnetic fields, etc.

Still further, a particular frequency or combination of frequenciesand/or fields that can produce one or more spectral conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions can be combined with one or morespectral energy conditioning catalysts and/or spectral conditioningcatalysts to generate an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern.Accordingly, various considerations can be taken into account for whatparticular frequency or combination of frequencies and/or fields may bedesirable to combine with (or replace) various conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions, for example.

Thus, by applying a frequency, or combination of frequencies and/orfields (i.e., creating an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern)which corresponds to at least one spectral environmental conditioningreaction condition, the spectral energy conditioning patterns of aconditionable participant can be effectively modified which may resultin broader spectral energy conditioning patterns (e.g., broader spectralconditioning patterns), in some cases, or narrower spectral energyconditioning patterns (e.g., spectral conditioning patterns) in othercases. Such broader or narrower spectral energy patterns (e.g., spectralconditioning patterns) may correspond to a broadening or narrowing ofline widths in a spectral conditioning energy pattern (e.g., a spectralconditioning pattern). As stated throughout herein, when frequenciesmatch, energy transfers. In this particular embodiment, frequencies canbe caused to match by, for example, broadening the spectral conditioningpattern of one or more participants in a cell reaction system. Forexample, as discussed in much greater detail later herein, theapplication of temperature to a conditioning reaction system typicallycauses the broadening of one or more spectral conditioning patterns(e.g., line width broadening) of, for example, one or more conditionableparticipants in a conditioning reaction system. It is this broadening ofspectral conditioning patterns that can cause spectral conditioningpatterns of one or more constituents in a conditioning reaction systemto, for example, overlap. The overlapping of the spectral conditioningpatterns can cause frequencies to match, and thus energy to transfer toresult in a conditioned participant. The same conditionable participantmay be conditioned with different spectral energy patterns or amounts toresult in conditioned participants with different energy dynamics (e.g.,energized electronic level versus energized rotation). The scope ofreactions which occur once a conditioned participant is introduced intoa crystallization reaction system, include all of those reactions alongany particular reaction pathway. Thus, the broadening of spectralconditioned pattern(s) in a conditioned participant can result in, forexample, formation of reaction product, formation of and/or stimulationand/or stabilization of reaction intermediates and/or transients,catalyst frequencies, poisons, promoters, etc., in a crystallizationreaction system. All of the conditioning environmental reactionconditions that are discussed in detail in the section entitled“Detailed Description of the Preferred Embodiments” can be at leastpartially simulated in a conditioning reaction system by the applicationof a spectral conditioning environmental reaction condition.

Spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions can be utilizedto start direct, contain and/or appropriately condition a conditionableparticipant so that the conditioned participant can stop reactions orreaction pathways in a crystallization reaction system. Thus, certainreactions can be started, stopped, slowed and/or speeded up in acrystallization reaction system by, for example, applying differentspectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions to aconditionable participant and introducing the conditioned participantinto a crystallization reaction system at different times during areaction and/or at different intensities. Thus, spectral conditioningenvironmental reaction conditions are capable of influencing, positivelyor negatively, reaction pathways and/or reaction rates in acrystallization reaction system by providing different spectral energypatterns in one or more conditioned participants.

Moreover, by utilizing the above techniques to design (e.g., calculateor determine) a desirable spectral energy pattern, such as a desirablespectral pattern for a spectral energy catalyst (e.g., a spectralcatalyst corresponding to, for example, a seed crystal or an epitaxialsubstrate) rather than applying the spectral energy catalyst (e.g.,spectral catalyst) per se, for example, the designed spectral patterncan be used to design and/or determine an optimum physical and/orspectral catalyst that could be used in the crystallization reactionsystem to obtain a particular crystallization result. Further, theinvention may be able to provide a recipe for a physical and/or spectralcatalyst for a particular crystallization reaction where no catalystpreviously existed (e.g., certain atoms, ions, molecules and/ormacromolecules can be influenced to crystallize in a manner which doesnot normally occur). For example in a reaction where:A→I→Bwhere A=reactant, B=product and I=known intermediate, and there is noknown catalyst, either a physical or spectral catalyst could be designedwhich, for example, resonates with the intermediate “I”, therebycatalyzing the formation of one or more desirable crystallizationreaction product(s).

As a first step, the designed spectral pattern could be compared toknown spectral patterns for existing materials to determine ifsimilarities exist between the designed spectral pattern and spectralpatterns of known materials. If the designed spectral pattern at leastpartially matches against a spectral pattern of a known material, thenit is possible to utilize the known material as a physical catalyst toobtain a desired crystallization reaction and/or desired crystallizationreaction pathway in a crystallization reaction system. In this regard,it may be desirable to utilize the known material alone or incombination with a spectral energy catalyst and/or a spectral catalyst.Still further, it may be possible to utilize environmental reactionconditions and/or spectral environmental reaction conditions to causethe known material to behave in a manner which is even closer to thedesigned energy pattern or spectral pattern. Further, the application ofdifferent spectral energy patterns may cause the designed catalyst tobehave in different manners, such as, for example, encouraging a firstcrystallization reaction pathway with the application of a firstspectral energy pattern and encouraging a second crystallizationreaction pathway with the application of a second spectral energypattern. Likewise, the changing of one or more environmental reactionconditions could have a similar effect.

Further, this designed catalyst has applications in all types ofreactions including, but not limited to, chemical (organic andinorganic), biological, physical, energy, etc.

Still further, in certain cases, one or more physical species could beused or combined in a suitable manner, for example, physical mixing orby a chemical reaction, to obtain a physical catalyst materialexhibiting the appropriate designed spectral energy pattern (e.g.,spectral pattern) to achieve a desired reaction pathway. Accordingly, acombination of designed catalyst(s) (e.g., a physical catalyst which isknown or manufactured expressly to function as a physical catalyst suchas a seed crystal), spectral energy catalyst(s) and/or spectralcatalyst(s) can result in a resultant energy pattern (e.g., which inthis case can be a combination of physical catalyst(s) and/or spectralcatalyst(s)) which is conducive to forming desired reaction product(s)and/or following a desired reaction pathway at a desired reaction rate.In this regard, various line width broadening and/or narrowing ofspectral energy pattern(s) and/or spectral pattern(s) may occur when thedesigned catalyst is combined with various spectral energy patternsand/or spectral patterns.

It is important to consider the energy interactions between allcomponents involved in the desired reaction in a crystallizationreaction system when calculating or determining an appropriate designedcatalyst. There will be a particular combination of specific energypattern(s) (e.g., electromagnetic energy) that will interact with thedesigned catalyst to form an applied spectral energy pattern. Theparticular frequencies, for example, of electromagnetic radiation thatshould be caused to be applied to a crystallization reaction systemshould be as many of those frequencies as possible, when interactingwith the frequencies of the designed catalyst, that can result indesirable effects to one or more participants in the crystallizationreaction system, while eliminating as many of those frequencies aspossible which result in undesirable effects within the crystallizationreaction system.

X. Designing Conditionable Participants

Moreover, by utilizing the above techniques to design (e.g., calculateor determine) a desirable spectral energy pattern, such as a desirablespectral pattern for a spectral energy catalyst rather than applying thespectral energy catalyst (e.g., spectral catalyst) per se, for example,the designed spectral pattern can be used to design and/or determine anoptimum physical and/or spectral catalyst that could be used in thecrystallization reaction system to obtain a particular result. Further,the invention may be able to provide a recipe for a physical and/orspectral catalyst for a particular crystallization reaction where nocatalyst previously existed. For example in a reaction where:A→I→Bwhere A=reactant, B=product and I=known intermediate, and there is noknown catalyst, either a physical or spectral catalyst could be designedwhich, for example, resonates with the intermediate “I”, therebycatalyzing the formation of one or more desirable reaction product(s).

As a first step, the designed spectral pattern could be compared toknown spectral patterns for existing materials to determine ifsimilarities exist between the designed spectral pattern and spectralpatterns of known materials. If the designed spectral pattern at leastpartially matches against a spectral pattern of a known material, thenit is possible to utilize the known material as a physical catalyst toobtain a desired reaction and/or desired reaction pathway or rate in acrystallization reaction system. In this regard, it may be desirable toutilize the known material alone or in combination with a spectralenergy catalyst and/or a spectral catalyst. Still further, it may bepossible to utilize environmental reaction conditions and/or spectralenvironmental reaction conditions to cause the known material to behavein a manner which is even closer to the designed energy pattern orspectral pattern. Further, the application of different spectral energypatterns may cause the designed catalyst to behave in different manners,such as, for example, encouraging a first reaction pathway with theapplication of a first spectral energy pattern and encouraging a secondreaction pathway with the application of a second spectral energypattern. Likewise, the changing of one or more environmental reactionconditions could have a similar effect.

Further, this designed catalyst has applications in all types ofreactions including, but not limited to, chemical (organic andinorganic), biological, physical, energy, etc.

Still further, in certain cases, one or more physical species could beused or combined in a suitable manner, for example, physical mixing orby a chemical reaction, to obtain a physical catalyst materialexhibiting the appropriate designed spectral energy pattern (e.g.,spectral pattern) to achieve a desired reaction pathway. Accordingly, acombination of designed catalyst(s) (e.g., a physical catalyst which isknown or manufactured expressly to function as a physical catalyst),spectral energy catalyst(s) and/or spectral catalyst(s) can result in aresultant energy pattern (e.g., which in this case can be a combinationof physical catalyst(s) and/or spectral catalyst(s)) which is conduciveto forming desired reaction product(s) and/or following a desiredreaction pathway at a desired reaction rate. In this regard, variousline width broadening and/or narrowing of spectral energy pattern(s)and/or spectral pattern(s) may occur when the designed catalyst iscombined with various spectral energy patterns and/or spectral patterns.

It is important to consider the energy interactions between allcomponents involved in the desired reaction in a crystallizationreaction system when calculating or determining an appropriate designedcatalyst. There will be a particular combination of specific energypattern(s) (e.g., electromagnetic energy) that will interact with thedesigned catalyst to form an applied spectral energy pattern. Theparticular frequencies, for example, of electromagnetic radiation thatshould be caused to be applied to a crystallization reaction systemshould be as many of those frequencies as possible, when interactingwith the frequencies of the designed catalyst, that can result indesirable effects to one or more participants in the cell reactionsystem, while eliminating as many of those frequencies as possible whichresult in undesirable effects within the crystallization reactionsystem.

XI. Objects of the Invention

All of the above information disclosing the invention should provide acomprehensive understanding of the main aspects of the invention.However, in order to understand the invention further, the inventionshall now be discussed in terms of some of the representative objects orgoals to be achieved.

-   -   1. One object of this invention is to control or direct a        crystallization reaction pathway in a crystallization reaction        system by applying a spectral energy pattern in the form of a        spectral catalyst having at least one electromagnetic energy        frequency which may initiate, activate, and/or affect at least        one of the participants involved in the crystallization reaction        system.    -   2. Another object of the invention is to provide an efficient,        selective and economical process for replacing a known physical        catalyst (e.g., a seed crystal, an epitaxial growth promoter,        etc.) in a crystallization reaction system comprising the steps        of:    -   duplicating at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a        physical catalyst (e.g., at least one frequency of a spectral        pattern of a physical catalyst) to form a catalytic spectral        pattern; and    -   applying to at least a portion of the crystallization reaction        system (e.g. to a melt, to a solution, and/or to an epitaxial        plasma) at least a portion of the catalytic spectral pattern.    -   3. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        augment a physical catalyst (e.g., a seed crystal, an epitaxial        substrate, etc.) in a crystallization reaction system with its        own catalytic spectral pattern comprising the steps of:    -   determining an electromagnetic spectral pattern of the physical        catalyst; and    -   duplicating at least one frequency of the spectral pattern of        the physical catalyst with at least one electromagnetic energy        emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern; and    -   applying to at least a portion of the crystallization reaction        system at least one frequency of the catalytic spectral pattern        at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient duration to        catalyze the formation of reaction product(s) in a desired        portion of the crystallization reaction system. Said at least        one frequency can be applied by at least one of: (1) an        electromagnetic wave guide: (2) an optical fiber array; (3) at        least one element added to the crystallization reaction system        which permits electromagnetic energy to be radiated        therefrom; (4) an electric field; (5) a magnetic field;        and/or (6) an acoustic field.    -   4. Another object of the invention is to provide an efficient,        selective and economical process for replacing a known physical        catalyst in a crystallization reaction system comprising the        steps of:    -   duplicating at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a        physical catalyst (e.g., at least one frequency of a spectral        pattern of a physical catalyst such as a seed crystal or an        epitaxial substrate) to form a catalytic spectral pattern; and    -   applying to the crystallization reaction system at least a        portion of the catalytic spectral pattern; and, applying at        least one additional spectral energy pattern which forms an        applied spectral energy pattern when combined with said        catalytic spectral pattern.    -   5. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        replace a physical catalyst in a crystallization reaction system        comprising the steps of:    -   determining an electromagnetic spectral pattern of the physical        catalyst;    -   duplicating at least one frequency of the electromagnetic        spectral pattern of the physical catalyst with at least one        electromagnetic energy emitter source to form a catalytic        spectral pattern;    -   applying to the crystallization reaction system at least one        frequency of the catalytic spectral pattern; and    -   applying at least one additional spectral energy pattern to form        an applied spectral energy pattern, said applied spectral energy        pattern being applied at a sufficient intensity and for a        sufficient duration to catalyze the formation of at least one        crystallization reaction product in the crystallization reaction        system.    -   6. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a particular crystallization reaction        pathway in a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        catalyst (e.g., the spectral pattern of a seed crystal and/or an        epitaxial substrate) by augmenting a physical catalyst        comprising the steps of:    -   duplicating at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a        physical catalyst (e.g., at least one frequency of a spectral        pattern of the physical catalyst) with at least one energy        emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern;    -   applying to the crystallization reaction system, (e.g.,        irradiating) at least a portion of the catalytic spectral        pattern (e.g., an electromagnetic spectral pattern having a        frequency range of from about radio frequency to about        ultraviolet frequency) at a sufficient intensity and for a        sufficient duration to catalyze one or more particular reactions        in the crystallization reaction system; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst (e.g., seed crystal) into the        crystallization reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying said catalytic spectral pattern to the crystallizationreaction system.

-   -   7. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a particular reaction in a crystallization        reaction system with a spectral energy catalyst by augmenting a        physical catalyst (e.g., a seed crystal and/or an epitaxial        substrate) comprising the steps of:    -   applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to catalyze the        particular crystallization reaction in the crystallization        reaction system;    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying the spectral energy catalyst to the crystallizationreaction system.

-   -   8. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a desired crystallization reaction pathway        in a crystallization reaction system with a spectral catalyst        and a spectral energy catalyst by augmenting a physical catalyst        (e.g., a seed crystal and/or an epitaxial substrate) comprising        the steps of:    -   applying at least one spectral catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to at least partially        catalyze the desired crystallization reaction system;    -   applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to at least partially        catalyze the desired crystallization reaction system; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying the spectral catalyst and/or the spectral energy catalystto the crystallization reaction system. Moreover, the spectral catalystand spectral energy catalyst may be applied simultaneously to form anapplied spectral energy pattern or they may be applied sequentiallyeither at the same time or at different times from when the physicalcatalyst is introduced into the crystallization reaction system.

-   -   9. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a desired reaction into a crystallization        reaction system with a spectral catalyst and a spectral energy        catalyst and a spectral environmental reaction condition, with        or without a physical catalyst (e.g., a seed crystal and/or an        epitaxial substrate), comprising the steps of:    -   applying at least one spectral catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to catalyze a        crystallization reaction pathway;    -   applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to catalyze a        crystallization reaction pathway;    -   applying at last one spectral environmental reaction condition        at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient duration to        catalyze a crystallization reaction pathway, whereby when any of        said at least one spectral catalyst, said at least one spectral        energy catalyst and/or at least one spectral environmental        reaction condition are applied at the same time, they form an        applied spectral energy pattern; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying any one of, or any combination of, the spectral catalystand/or the spectral energy catalyst and/or the spectral environmentalreaction condition to the crystallization reaction system. Likewise, thespectral catalyst and/or the spectral energy catalyst and/or thespectral environmental reaction condition can be provided sequentiallyor continuously.

-   -   10. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and direct a crystallization reaction system with an        applied spectral energy pattern and a spectral energy catalyst        comprising the steps of:    -   applying at least one applied spectral energy pattern at a        sufficient intensity and for a sufficient duration to catalyze a        particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system,        whereby said at least one applied spectral energy pattern        comprises at least two members selected from the group        consisting of catalytic spectral energy pattern, catalytic        spectral pattern, spectral catalyst, spectral energy catalyst,        spectral energy pattern, spectral environmental reaction        condition and spectral pattern; and    -   applying at least one spectral energy catalyst to the        crystallization reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the applied spectralenergy pattern into the crystallization reaction system before, and/orduring, and/or after applying the spectral energy catalyst to thecrystallization reaction system. Moreover, the spectral energy catalystand the applied spectral energy pattern can be provided sequentially orcontinuously. If applied continuously, a new applied spectral energypattern is formed.

-   -   11. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a crystallization reaction system with a        spectral energy catalyst comprising the steps of:    -   determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for        starting reactant(s) in a particular reaction in said        crystallization reaction system;    -   determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for        reaction product(s) in said particular reaction in said        crystallization reaction system;    -   calculating an additive and/or subtractive spectral energy        pattern (e.g., at least one electromagnetic frequency) from said        reactant(s) and reaction product(s) spectral energy patterns to        determine a required spectral energy catalyst (e.g., a spectral        catalyst);    -   generating at least a portion of the required spectral energy        catalyst (e.g., at least one electromagnetic frequency of the        required spectral catalyst); and    -   applying to the particular reaction in said crystallization        reaction system (e.g., irradiating with electromagnetic energy)        said at least a portion of the required spectral energy catalyst        (e.g., spectral catalyst) to form at least one desired        crystallization reaction product(s).    -   12. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a crystallization reaction system with a        spectral energy catalyst comprising the steps of:    -   targeting at least one participant in said crystallization        reaction system with at least one spectral energy catalyst to        cause the formation and/or stimulation and/or stabilization of        at least one transient and/or at least one intermediate to        result in desired reaction product(s).    -   13. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy pattern to result in at least one reaction product        comprising:    -   applying at least one spectral energy pattern for a sufficient        time and at a sufficient intensity to cause the formation and/or        stimulation and/or stabilization of at least one transient        and/or at least one intermediate to result in desired reaction        product(s) at a desired reaction rate.    -   14. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        affect and direct a crystallization reaction system with a        spectral energy catalyst and at least one of the spectral        environmental reaction conditions comprising the steps of:    -   applying at least one applied spectral energy catalyst to at        least one participant in said crystallization reaction system;        and    -   applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition        to said crystallization reaction system to cause the formation        and/or stimulation and/or stabilization of at least one        transient and/or at least one intermediate to permit desired        crystallization reaction product(s) to form.    -   15. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy catalyst to result in at least one reaction product        comprising:    -   applying at least one frequency (e.g., electromagnetic) which        heterodynes with at least one reactant frequency to cause the        formation of and/or stimulation and/or stabilization of at least        one transient and/or at least one intermediate to result in        desired crystallization reaction product(s).    -   16. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with at least one        spectral energy pattern resulting in at least one reaction        product comprising:    -   applying a sufficient number of frequencies (e.g.,        electromagnetic) and/or fields (e.g., electric, magnetic and/or        acoustic) to result in an applied spectral energy pattern which        stimulates all transients and/or intermediates required in a        crystallization reaction pathway to result in desired        crystallization reaction product(s).    -   17. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy catalyst resulting in at least one reaction product        comprising:    -   targeting at least one participant in said crystallization        reaction system with at least one frequency and/or field to        form, indirectly, at least one transient and/or at least one        intermediate, whereby formation of said at least one transient        and/or at least one intermediate results in the formation of an        additional at least one transient and/or at least one additional        intermediate.    -   18. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy catalyst resulting in at least one reaction product        comprising:    -   targeting at least one spectral energy catalyst to at least one        participant in said crystallization reaction system to form        indirectly at least one transient and/or at least one        intermediate, whereby formation of said at least one transient        and/or at least one intermediate results in the formation of an        additional at least one transient and/or at least one additional        intermediate.    -   19. It is a further object of the invention to provide a method        for directing a crystallization reaction system along a desired        reaction pathway comprising:    -   applying at least one targeting approach selected from the group        of approaches consisting of direct resonance targeting, harmonic        targeting and non-harmonic heterodyne targeting.

In this regard, these targeting approaches can cause the formationand/or stimulation and/or stabilization of at least one transient and/orat least one intermediate in at least a portion of said crystallizationreaction system to result in desired reaction product(s).

-   -   20. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system comprising:    -   applying at least one frequency to at least one participant        and/or at least one component in said crystallization reaction        system to cause the formation and/or stimulation and/or        stabilization of at least one transient and/or at least one        intermediate to result in desired reaction product(s), whereby        said at least one frequency comprises at least one frequency        selected from the group consisting of direct resonance        frequencies, harmonic resonance frequencies, non-harmonic        heterodyne resonance frequencies, electronic frequencies,        vibrational frequencies, rotational frequencies,        rotational-vibrational frequencies, librational frequencies,        translational frequencies, gyrational frequencies, fine        splitting frequencies, hyperfine splitting frequencies, electric        field induced frequencies, magnetic field induced frequencies,        cyclotron resonance frequencies, orbital frequencies, acoustic        frequencies and/or nuclear frequencies.

In this regard, the applied frequencies can include any desirablefrequency or combination of frequencies which resonates directly,harmonically or by a non-harmonic heterodyne technique, with at leastone participant and/or at least one component in said crystallizationreaction system.

-   -   21. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for directing a crystallization reaction system along with a        desired crystallization reaction pathway with a spectral energy        pattern comprising:    -   applying at least one frequency and/or field to cause the        spectral energy pattern (e.g., spectral pattern) of at least one        participant and/or at least one component in said        crystallization reaction system to at least partially overlap        with the spectral energy pattern (e.g., spectral pattern) of at        least one other participant and/or at least one other component        in said crystallization reaction system to permit the transfer        of energy between said at least two participants and/or        components.    -   22. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy pattern resulting in at least one crystallization        reaction product comprising:    -   applying at least one spectral energy pattern to cause the        spectral energy pattern of at least one participant and/or        component in said crystallization reaction system to at least        partially overlap with a spectral energy pattern of at least one        other participant and/or component in said crystallization        reaction system to permit the resonant transfer of energy        between the at least two participants and/or components, thereby        causing the formation of said at least one reaction product.    -   23. It is a further object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy catalyst resulting in at least one crystallization        reaction product comprising:    -   applying at least one frequency and/or field to cause spectral        energy pattern (e.g., spectral pattern) broadening of at least        one participant (e.g., at least one reactant) and/or component        in said crystallization reaction system to cause a transfer of        energy to occur resulting in transformation (e.g., chemically,        physically, phase, property or otherwise) of at least one        participant and/or at least one component in said        crystallization reaction system.

In this regard, the transformation may result in a reaction productwhich is of a different chemical composition and/or different physicalor crystalline composition and/or phases than any of the chemical and/orphysical or crystalline compositions and/or phases of any startingreactant. Thus, only transients may be involved in the conversion of areactant into a reaction product.

-   -   24. It is a further object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral        energy catalyst resulting in at least one reaction product        comprising:    -   applying an applied spectral energy pattern to cause spectral        energy pattern (e.g., spectral pattern) broadening of at least        one participant (e.g., at least one reactant) and/or component        in said crystallization reaction system to cause a resonant        transfer of energy to occur resulting in transformation (e.g.,        chemically, physically, phase, property or otherwise) of at        least one participant and/or at least one component in said        crystallization reaction system.

In this regard, the transformation may result in a reaction productwhich is of a different chemical composition and/or different physicalor crystalline composition and/or phase and/or exhibits differentproperties than the chemical and/or physical or crystalline compositionsand/or phases of any starting reactant. Thus, only transients may beinvolved in the conversion of a reactant into a reaction product.

-   -   25. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        controlling a reaction and/or directing a reaction pathway in a        crystallization reaction system by utilizing at least one        spectral environmental reaction condition, comprising:    -   forming a crystallization reaction system; and    -   applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition        to direct said crystallization reaction system along at least        one desired crystallization reaction pathway.

In this regard, the applied spectral environmental reaction conditioncan be used alone or in combination with other environmental reactionconditions to achieve desired results. Further, additional spectralenergy patterns may also be applied, simultaneously and/or continuouslywith said spectral environmental reaction condition.

-   -   26. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        designing a catalyst (e.g., a seed catalyst and/or an epitaxial        substrate) where no catalyst previously existed (e.g., a        physical catalyst and/or spectral energy catalyst), to be used        in a crystallization reaction system, comprising:    -   determining a required spectral pattern to obtain a desired        crystallization reaction and/or desired reaction pathway and/or        desired crystallization reaction rate; and    -   designing a catalyst (e.g., material or combination of        materials, and/or spectral energy catalysts) that exhibit(s) a        spectral pattern that approximates the required spectral        pattern.

In this regard, the designed catalyst material (e.g., a seed crystaland/or an epitaxial substrate, etc.) may comprise a physical admixing ofone or more materials and/or more materials that have been combined byan appropriate reaction, such as a chemical reaction. The designedmaterial may be enhanced in function by one or more spectral energypatterns that may also be applied to the crystallization reactionsystem. Moreover, the application of different spectral energy patternsmay cause the designed material to behave in different manners, such as,for example, encouraging a first crystallization reaction pathway withthe application of a first spectral energy pattern and encouraging asecond crystallization reaction pathway with the application of a secondspectral energy pattern. Likewise, the changing of one or moreenvironmental reaction conditions could have a similar effect.

Further, this designed material has applications in all types ofreactions including, but not limited to, chemical (organic andinorganic), biological, physical, etc.

-   -   27. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        controlling a reaction and/or directing a reaction pathway in a        crystallization reaction system by preventing at least a portion        of certain undesirable spectral energy from interacting with a        crystallization reaction system comprising:    -   providing at least one control means for absorbing, filtering,        trapping, reflecting, etc., spectral energy incident thereon;    -   permitting desirable spectral energy emitted from said control        means and contacting at least a portion of a crystallization        reaction system with said emitted spectral energy; and    -   causing said emitted spectral energy from said control means to        desirably interact with said crystallization reaction system        thereby directing said crystallization reaction system along at        least one desired crystallization reaction pathway.    -   28. It should be understood that in each of the aforementioned        27 Objects of the Invention, that crystallization reaction        systems also include preventing certain crystallization        phenomena from occurring, when desirable.    -   29. One object of this invention is to control or direct a        reaction pathway in a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant, and forming the conditioned participant        by applying a spectral energy conditioning pattern (e.g., a        spectral conditioning catalyst) to at least one conditionable        participant, said conditionable participant thereafter having at        least one conditioned energy frequency (e.g., electromagnetic        energy frequency) which may initiate, activate, and/or affect at        least one of the participants involved in the crystallization        reaction system and/or may itself be affected by a subsequent        application of spectral energy in the crystallization reaction        system.    -   30. Another object of the invention is to provide an efficient,        selective and economical process for replacing a known physical        catalyst in a crystallization reaction system comprising the        steps of:    -   duplicating at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a        physical catalyst (e.g., at least one frequency of a spectral        pattern of a physical catalyst) by modifying a conditionable        participant so that the conditionable participant forms a        catalytic spectral pattern; and    -   applying or introducing to the crystallization reaction system        the conditioned participant.    -   31. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        augment a physical catalyst in a crystallization reaction system        with its own catalytic spectral pattern comprising the steps of:    -   determining an electromagnetic spectral pattern of the physical        catalyst; and    -   duplicating at least one frequency of the spectral pattern of        the physical catalyst by conditioning a conditionable        participant with at least one electromagnetic energy emitter        source to form a catalytic spectral pattern in the conditioned        participant; and    -   applying or introducing to the crystallization reaction system        the conditioned participant.    -   32. Another object of the invention is to provide an efficient,        selective and economical process for replacing a known physical        catalyst in a crystallization reaction system comprising the        steps of:    -   duplicating at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a        physical catalyst (e.g., at least one frequency of a spectral        pattern of a physical catalyst) by conditioning a conditionable        participant to form a catalytic spectral pattern in the        conditioned participant;    -   applying or introducing to the crystallization reaction system        the conditioned participant; and, applying at least one        additional spectral energy pattern which forms an applied        spectral energy pattern when combined with said catalytic        spectral pattern of the conditioned participant.    -   33. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        replace a physical catalyst in a crystallization reaction system        comprising the steps of:    -   determining an electromagnetic spectral pattern of the physical        catalyst;    -   duplicating at least one frequency of the electromagnetic        spectral pattern of the physical catalyst by conditioning a        conditionable participant with at least one electromagnetic        energy emitter conditioning source to form a catalytic spectral        pattern in the conditioned participant;    -   applying or introducing to the crystallization reaction system        the conditioned participant; and applying at least one        additional spectral energy pattern to form an applied spectral        energy pattern, said applied spectral energy pattern being        applied at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient duration        to catalyze the formation of at least one reaction product in        the crystallization reaction system.    -   34. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a crystallization reaction system with a        spectral catalyst by augmenting a physical catalyst comprising        the steps of:    -   duplicating at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a        physical catalyst (e.g., at least one frequency of a spectral        pattern of the physical catalyst) by conditioning a        conditionable participant with at least one electromagnetic        energy emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern in        the conditioned participant;    -   applying or introducing to the crystallization reaction system,        the conditioned participant; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying said conditioned participant to the crystallizationreaction system.

-   -   35. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant by augmenting a physical catalyst        comprising the steps of:    -   applying or introducing at least one conditioned participant to        the crystallization reaction system; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying the conditioned participant to the crystallizationreaction system.

-   -   36. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant and a spectral energy catalyst by        augmenting a physical catalyst comprising the steps of:    -   applying or introducing at least one conditioned participant to        the crystallization reaction system;    -   applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to at least partially        catalyze the crystallization reaction system; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying the conditioned participant and/or the spectral energycatalyst to the crystallization reaction system. Moreover, theconditioned participant and spectral energy catalyst may be appliedsimultaneously to form an applied spectral energy pattern or they may beapplied sequentially either at the same time or at different times fromwhen the physical catalyst is introduced into the crystallizationreaction system.

-   -   37. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and/or direct a reaction system with a conditioned        participant and a spectral energy catalyst and a spectral        environmental reaction condition, with or without a physical        catalyst, comprising the steps of:    -   applying or introducing at least one conditioned participant to        the crystallization reaction system;    -   applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient        intensity and for a sufficient duration to catalyze a reaction        pathway;    -   applying at last one spectral environmental reaction condition        at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient duration to        catalyze a reaction pathway, whereby when any of said at least        one conditioned participant, said at least one spectral energy        catalyst and/or at least one spectral environmental reaction        condition are applied at the same time, they form an applied        spectral energy pattern; and    -   introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization        reaction system.

The above method may be practiced by introducing the physical catalystinto the crystallization reaction system before, and/or during, and/orafter applying any one of, or any combination of, the conditionedparticipant and/or the spectral energy catalyst and/or the spectralenvironmental reaction condition to the crystallization reaction system.Likewise, the conditioned participant and/or the spectral energycatalyst and/or the spectral environmental reaction condition can beprovided sequentially or continuously.

-   -   38. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        condition a conditionable participant with an applied spectral        energy conditioning pattern and/or a spectral energy        conditioning catalyst comprising the steps of:    -   applying at least one applied spectral energy conditioning        pattern at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient duration        to condition the conditionable participant, whereby said at        least one applied spectral energy conditioning pattern comprises        at least one member selected from the group consisting of        catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern, catalytic        spectral conditioning pattern, spectral conditioning catalyst,        spectral energy conditioning catalyst, spectral energy        conditioning pattern, spectral conditioning environmental        reaction condition and spectral conditioning pattern.

The above method may be combined with introducing an applied spectralenergy pattern into a crystallization reaction system before, and/orduring, and/or after introducing a conditioned participant into thecrystallization reaction system. Moreover, the conditioned participantand the applied spectral energy pattern can be provided sequentially orcontinuously. If applied continuously, a new applied spectral energypattern is formed.

The above method may also comprise conditioning the conditionableparticipant in a conditioning reaction vessel and/or in a reactionvessel. If the conditionable participant is first conditioned in areaction vessel, the conditioning occurs prior to some or all othercomponents comprising the cell reaction system being introduced into thecell reaction system.

Further, the reaction vessel and/or conditioning reaction vessel per semay be treated with conditioning energy. In the case of the reactionvessel being treated with conditioning energy, such conditioningtreatment occurs prior to some or all other components comprising thecell reaction system being introduced into the reaction vessel.

-   -   39. Another object of this invention is to provide a method to        affect and direct a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant comprising the steps of:    -   determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for        starting reactant(s) in said crystallization reaction system;    -   determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for        reaction product(s) in said crystallization reaction system;    -   calculating an additive spectral energy pattern (e.g., at least        one electromagnetic frequency) from said reactant(s) and        reaction product(s) spectral energy patterns to determine a        required conditioned participant (e.g., a spectral conditioned        catalyst);    -   generating at least a portion of the required spectral energy        conditioning catalyst (e.g., at least one electromagnetic        frequency of the required spectral conditioning catalyst); and    -   applying to the conditionable participant (e.g., irradiating        with electromagnetic energy) said at least a portion of the        required spectral energy conditioning catalyst (e.g., spectral        conditioning catalyst) to form desired conditioned participant;        and    -   introducing the conditioned participant to the reaction system        to form a desired reaction product and/or desired reaction        product at a desired reaction rate.    -   40. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        affect and direct a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant comprising the steps of:    -   targeting at least one conditionable participant in said        conditioning reaction system with at least one spectral energy        conditioning catalyst to cause the formation and/or stimulation        and/or stabilization of at least one conditioned participant;        and applying or introducing the conditioned participant to the        crystallization reaction system to result in at least one        desired reaction product and/or desired or controlled reaction        rate in said crystallization reaction system.    -   41. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a conditioned        participant to result in at least one reaction product and/or at        least one desired reaction rate comprising:    -   applying at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern for a        sufficient time and at a sufficient intensity to cause the        formation and/or stimulation and/or stabilization of at least        one conditioned participant, so as to result in desired reaction        product(s) at a desired reaction rate when said conditioned        participant communicates with said crystallization reaction        system.    -   42. Another object of the invention is to provide a method to        affect and direct a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant and at least one spectral environmental        reaction condition comprising the steps of:    -   applying or introducing at least one conditioned participant to        the crystallization reaction system; and    -   applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition        to said crystallization reaction system to cause the formation        and/or stimulation and/or stabilization of at least one        transient and/or at least one intermediate to permit desired        reaction product(s) to form.    -   43. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        forming a conditioned participant with a spectral energy        conditioning catalyst to result in at least one conditioned        participant comprising:    -   applying at least one frequency (e.g., electromagnetic) which        heterodynes with at least one conditionable participant        frequency to cause the formation of and/or stimulation and/or        stabilization of at least one conditioned participant.    -   44. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        forming a conditioned participant with at least one spectral        energy conditioning pattern resulting in at least one        conditioned participant comprising:    -   applying a sufficient number of frequencies (e.g.,        electromagnetic) and/or fields (e.g., electric and/or magnetic)        to result in an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern        which results in the formation of at least one conditioned        participant.    -   45. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        forming a conditioned participant with a spectral energy        conditioning catalyst resulting in at least one conditioned        participant comprising:    -   conditioning targeting at least one conditionable participant        prior to being introduced to said crystallization reaction        system with at least one frequency and/or field to form a        conditioned participant, whereby formation of said at least one        conditioned participant results in the formation of at least one        transient and/or at least one intermediate when said conditioned        participant is introduced into said crystallization reaction        system.    -   46. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant resulting in at least one reaction        product comprising:    -   conditioning targeting at least one spectral energy conditioning        catalyst to form at least one conditioned participant (e.g., at        least one spectral energy catalyst) which is present in said        crystallization reaction system when at least one reaction in        said crystallization reaction system is initiated, such that at        least one transient and/or at least one intermediate, and/or at        least one reaction product is formed in the crystallization        reaction system.    -   47. It is a further object of the invention to provide a method        for directing a crystallization reaction system along a desired        reaction pathway comprising:    -   applying at least one conditioning targeting approach to at        least one conditionable participant, said at least one        conditioning targeting approach being selected from the group of        approaches consisting of direct resonance conditioning        targeting, harmonic conditioning targeting and non-harmonic        heterodyne conditioning targeting.

In this regard, these conditioning targeting approaches can result inthe formation of a conditioned participant which can cause the formationand/or stimulation and/or stabilization of at least one transient and/orat least one intermediate to result in desired reaction product(s) at adesired reaction rate.

-   -   48. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for conditioning at least one conditionable participant        comprising:    -   applying at least one conditioning frequency to at least one        conditionable participant to cause the formation and/or        stimulation and/or stabilization of at least one conditioned        participant, whereby said at least one frequency comprises at        least one frequency selected from the group consisting of direct        resonance conditioning frequencies, harmonic resonance        conditioning frequencies, non-harmonic heterodyne conditioning        resonance frequencies, electronic conditioning frequencies,        vibrational conditioning frequencies, rotational conditioning        frequencies, rotational-vibrational conditioning frequencies,        fine splitting conditioning frequencies, hyperfine splitting        conditioning frequencies, electric field splitting conditioning        frequencies, magnetic field splitting conditioning frequencies,        cyclotron resonance conditioning frequencies, orbital        conditioning frequencies and nuclear conditioning frequencies.

In this regard, the applied conditioning frequencies can include anydesirable conditioning frequency or combination of conditioningfrequencies which resonates directly, harmonically or by a non-harmonicheterodyne technique, with at least one conditionable participant and/orat least one component of said conditionable participant.

-   -   49. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for directing a crystallization reaction system along with a        desired reaction pathway with a conditioned participant        comprising:    -   applying at least one conditioning frequency and/or conditioning        field to cause the conditioned spectral energy pattern (e.g.,        spectral conditioning pattern) of at least one conditioned        participant to at least partially overlap with the spectral        energy pattern (e.g., spectral pattern) of at least one        participant and/or at least one other component in said        crystallization reaction system to permit the transfer of energy        between said conditioned participant and said participant and/or        other components.    -   50. It is another object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant resulting in at least one reaction        product comprising:    -   applying at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern to at        least one conditionable participant to cause the conditioned        spectral energy pattern of at least one conditioned participant        in said crystallization reaction system to at least partially        overlap with a spectral energy pattern of at least one other        participant and/or component in said crystallization reaction        system to permit the transfer of energy between the said        conditioned participant and said participant and/or components,        thereby causing the formation of said at least one reaction        product.    -   51. It is a further object of the invention to provide a method        for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a        conditioned participant resulting in at least one reaction        product comprising:    -   applying at least one frequency and/or field to cause a        conditioned spectral energy pattern (e.g., conditioned spectral        pattern) broadening of said conditioned participant to cause a        transfer of energy to occur between the conditioned participant        and at least one participant in the crystallization reaction        system, resulting in transformation (e.g., chemically,        physically, phase or otherwise) of at least one participant        and/or at least one component in said crystallization reaction        system.

In this regard, the transformation may result in a reaction productwhich is of a different chemical composition and/or different physicalor crystalline composition and/or phases than any of the chemical and/orphysical or crystalline compositions and/or phases of any startingreactant and/or conditioned participant. Thus, only transients may beinvolved in the conversion of a reactant into a reaction product.

-   -   52. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        controlling a reaction and/or directing a reaction pathway by        utilizing at least one conditioned participant and at least one        spectral environmental reaction condition, comprising:    -   forming a crystallization reaction system comprising said        conditioned participant; and    -   applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition        to direct said crystallization reaction system along a desired        reaction pathway.

In this regard, the applied spectral environmental reaction conditioncan be used alone or in combination with other environmental reactionconditions to achieve desired results. Further, additional spectralenergy patterns may also be applied, simultaneously and/or continuouslywith said spectral environmental reaction condition.

-   -   53. Another object of the invention is to provide a method for        designing a conditionable participant to be used as a catalyst,        once conditioned, in a crystallization reaction system where no        catalyst previously existed (e.g., a physical catalyst and/or        spectral energy catalyst), to be used in a crystallization        reaction system, comprising:    -   determining a required spectral pattern to obtain a desired        reaction and/or desired reaction pathway and/or desired reaction        rate; and    -   designing a conditionable participant (e.g., material or        combination of materials), that exhibit(s) a conditioned        spectral pattern that approximates the required spectral        pattern, when exposed to a suitable spectral energy conditioning        pattern.

In this regard, the designed conditionable participant may comprise aphysical admixing of one or more materials and/or more materials thathave been combined by an appropriate reaction, such as a chemicalreaction. The designed conditionable participant material may beenhanced in function by one or more spectral energy conditioningpatterns that may also be applied to the conditioning reaction system.Moreover, the application of different spectral energy conditioningpatterns may cause the designed conditionable material, onceconditioned, to behave in different manners in a crystallizationreaction system, such as, for example, encouraging a first reactionpathway in a crystallization reaction system with the application of afirst spectral energy conditioning pattern, and encouraging a secondreaction pathway with the application of a second spectral energyconditioning pattern. Likewise, the changing of one or moreenvironmental reaction conditions could have a similar effect.

Further, this designed conditionable participant or material hasapplications in all types of reactions including, but not limited to,chemical (organic and inorganic), biological, physical, etc.

-   -   54. It should be understood that in each of 29-53 Objects of the        Invention, that crystallization reaction systems also include        preventing certain crystallization phenomena from occurring,        when desirable.    -   55. Another object of the invention is to use at least one        conditioned participant with each of the techniques set forth in        Objects 1-28 above; and to use at least one additional spectral        energy pattern with each of the techniques set forth in Objects        29-54 above.

While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory or explanation ofoperation, it is believed that when frequencies match, energy transfers.The transfer of energy can be a sharing of energy between two entitiesand, for example, a transfer of energy from one entity into anotherentity. The entities may both be, for example, matter, or one entity maybe matter and the other energy (e.g. energy may be a spectral energypattern such as electromagnetic frequencies, and/or an electric fieldand/or a magnetic field).

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIGS. 1 a and 1 b show a graphic representation of an acoustic orelectromagnetic wave.

FIG. 1 c shows the combination wave which results from the combining ofthe waves in FIG. 1 a and FIG. 1 b.

FIGS. 2 a and 2 b show waves of different amplitudes but the samefrequency. FIG. 2 a shows a low amplitude wave and FIG. 2 b shows a highamplitude wave.

FIGS. 3 a and 3 b show frequency diagrams. FIG. 3 a shows a time vs.amplitude plot and FIG. 3 b shows a frequency vs. amplitude plot.

FIG. 4 shows a specific example of a heterodyne progression.

FIG. 5 shows a graphical example of the heterodyned series from FIG. 4.

FIG. 6 shows fractal diagrams.

FIGS. 7 a and 7 b show hydrogen energy level diagrams.

FIGS. 8 a-8 c show three different simple reaction profiles.

FIGS. 9 a and 9 b show fine frequency diagram curves for hydrogen.

FIG. 10 shows various frequencies and intensities for hydrogen.

FIGS. 11 a and 1 lb show two light amplification diagrams withstimulated emission/population inversions.

FIG. 12 shows a resonance curve where the resonance frequency is f₀, anupper frequency=f₂ and a lower frequency=f₁, wherein f₁ and f₂ are atabout 50% of the amplitude of f_(o).

FIGS. 13 a and 13 b show two different resonance curves having differentquality factors. FIG. 13 a shows a narrow resonance curve with a high Qand FIG. 13 b shows a broad resonance curve with a low Q.

FIG. 14 shows two different energy transfer curves at fundamentalresonance frequencies (curve A) and a harmonic frequency (curve B).

FIGS. 15 a-c show how a spectral pattern varies at three differenttemperatures. FIG. 15 a is at a low temperature, FIG. 15 b is at amoderate temperature and FIG. 15 c is at a high temperature.

FIG. 16 is spectral curve showing a line width which corresponds tof₂−f₁.

FIGS. 17 a and 17 b show two amplitude vs. frequency curves. FIG. 17 ashows distinct spectral curves at low temperature; and FIG. 17 b showsoverlapping of spectral curves at a higher temperature.

FIG. 18 a shows the influence of temperature on the resolution ofinfrared absorption spectra; FIG. 18 b shows blackbody radiation; andFIG. 18 c shows curves A and C at low temperature, and broadened curvesA and C* at higher temperature, with C* also shifted.

FIG. 19 shows spectral patterns which exhibit the effect of pressurebroadening on the compound NH₃.

FIG. 20 shows the theoretical shape of pressure-broadened lines at threedifferent pressures for a single compound.

FIGS. 21 a and 21 b are two graphs which show experimental confirmationof changes in spectral patterns at increased pressures. FIG. 21 acorresponds to a spectral pattern representing the absorption of watervapor in air and FIG. 21 b is a spectral pattern which corresponds tothe absorption of NH₃ at one atmosphere pressure.

FIG. 22 a shows a representation of radiation from a single atom andFIG. 22 b shows a representation of radiation from a group of atoms.

FIGS. 23 a-d show four different spectral curves, three of which exhibitself-absorption patterns. FIG. 23 a is a standard spectral curve notshowing any self-absorption; FIG. 23 b shows the shifting of resonantfrequency due to self absorption; FIG. 23 c shows a self-reversalspectral pattern due to self-absorption; and FIG. 23 d shows anattenuation example of a self-reversal spectral pattern.

FIG. 24 a shows an absorption spectra of alcohol and phthalic acid inhexane; FIG. 24 b shows an absorption spectra for the absorption ofiodine in alcohol and carbon tetrachloride; and FIG. 24 c shows theeffect of mixtures of alcohol and benzene on the solute phenylazophenol.

FIG. 25 a shows a tetrahedral unit representation of aluminum oxide andFIG. 25 b shows a representation of a tetrahedral unit for silicondioxide.

FIG. 26 a shows a truncated octahedron crystal structure for aluminum orsilicon combined with oxygen and FIG. 26 b shows a plurality oftruncated octahedrons joined together to represent zeolite. FIG. 26 cshows truncated octahedrons for zeolites “X” and “Y” which are joinedtogether by oxygen bridges.

FIG. 27 is a graph which shows the influence of copper and bismuth onzinc/cadmium line ratios.

FIG. 28 is a graph which shows the influence of magnesium oncopper/aluminum intensity ratio.

FIG. 29 shows the concentration effects on the atomic spectrafrequencies of N-methyl urethane in carbon tetrachloride solutions atthe following concentrations: a) 0.01M; b) 0.03M; c) 0.06M; d) 0.10M; 3)0.15M.

FIG. 30 shows plots corresponding to the emission spectrum of hydrogen.Specifically, FIG. 30 a corresponds to Balmer Series 2 for hydrogen; andFIG. 30 b corresponds to emission spectrum for the 456 THz frequency ofhydrogen.

FIG. 31 corresponds to a high resolution laser saturation spectrum forthe 456 THz frequency of hydrogen.

FIG. 32 shows fine splitting frequencies which exist under a typicalspectral curve.

FIG. 33 corresponds to a diagram of atomic electron levels (n) in finestructure frequencies (a).

FIG. 34 shows fine structures of the n=1 and n=2 levels of a hydrogenatom.

FIG. 35 shows multiplet splittings for the lowest energy levels ofcarbon, oxygen and fluorine: 43.5 cm=1.3 THz; 16.4 cm¹ 490 GHz; 226.5cm⁻¹=6.77 THz; 158.5 cm⁻¹=4.74 THz; 404 cm⁻¹=12.1 THz.

FIG. 36 shows a vibration band of SF₆ at a wavelength of 10 μm².

FIG. 37 a shows a spectral pattern similar to that shown in FIG. 36,with a particular frequency magnified. FIG. 37 b shows fine structurefrequencies in greater detail for the compound SF₆.

FIG. 38 shows an energy level diagram which corresponds to differentenergy levels for a molecule where rotational corresponds to “J”,vibrational corresponds to “v” and electronic levels correspond to “n”.

FIGS. 39 a and 39 b correspond to pure rotational absorption spectrum ofgaseous hydrogen chloride as recorded with an interferometer; FIG. 39 bshows the same spectrum of FIG. 39 a at a lower resolution (i.e., notshowing any fine frequencies).

FIG. 40 corresponds to the rotational spectrum for hydrogen cyanide. “J”corresponds to the rotational level.

FIG. 41 shows a spectrum corresponding to the additive heterodyne of v₁and v₅ in the spectral band showing the frequency band at A (v₁-v5),B=v₁−2v₅.

FIG. 42 shows a graphical representation of fine structure spectrumshowing the first four rotational frequencies for CO in the groundstate. The difference (heterodyne) between the molecular fine structurerotational frequencies is 2× the rotational constant B (i.e., f₂−f₁=2B).In this case, B=57.6 GHz (57,635.970 MHz).

FIG. 43 a shows rotational and vibrational frequencies (MHz) for LiF.FIG. 43 b shows differences between rotational and vibrationalfrequencies for LiF.

FIG. 44 shows the rotational transition J=1→2 for the triatomic moleculeOCS. The vibrational state is given by vibrational quantum numbers inbrackets (v₁, v₂, v₃), v₂ have a superscript [l]. In this case, l=1. Asubscript 1 is applied to the lower-frequency component of the l-typedoublet, and 2 to the higher-frequency components. The two lines at(01¹0) and (01¹0) are an l-type doublet, separated by q₁.

FIG. 45 shows the rotation-vibration band and fine structure frequenciesfor SF₆.

FIG. 46 shows a fine structure spectrum for SF₆ from zero to 300 beingmagnified.

FIGS. 47 a and 47 b show the magnification of two curves from finestructure of SF₆ showing hyperfine structure frequencies. Note theregular spacing of the hyperfine structure curves. FIG. 47 a showsmagnification of the curve marked with a single asterisk (*) in FIG. 46and FIG. 47 b shows the magnification of the curved marked with a doubleasterisk (**) in FIG. 46.

FIG. 48 shows an energy level diagram corresponding to the hyperfinesplitting for the hyperfine structure in the n=2 to n=3 transition forhydrogen.

FIG. 49 shows the hyperfine structure in the J=1→2 to rotationaltransition of CH₃I.

FIG. 50 shows the hyperfine structure of the J=1→2 transition for ClCNin the ground vibrational state.

FIG. 51 shows energy level diagrams and hyperfine frequencies for the NOmolecule.

FIG. 52 shows a spectrum corresponding to the hyperfine frequencies forNH₃.

FIG. 53 shows hyperfine structure and doubling of the NH₃ spectrum forrotational level J=3. The upper curves in FIG. 53 show experimentaldata, while the lower curves are derived from theoretical calculations.Frequency increases from left to right in 60 KHz intervals.

FIG. 54 shows a hyperfine structure and doubling of NH₃ spectrum forrotational level J=4. The upper curves in each of FIG. 54 showexperimental data, while the lower curves are derived from theoreticalcalculations. Frequency increases from left to right in 60 KHzintervals.

FIG. 55 shows a Stark effect for potassium. In particular, the schematicdependence of the 4_(s) and 5_(p) energy levels on the electric field.

FIG. 56 shows a graph plotting the deviation from zero-field positionsof the 5p_(1/2)←4s²S_(1/2.3/2) transition wavenumbers against the squareof the electric field.

FIG. 57 shows the frequency components of the J=0→1 rotationaltransition for CH₃Cl, as a function of field strength. Frequency isgiven in megacycles (MHz) and electric field strength (esu cm) is givenas the square of the field E², in esu²/cm².

FIG. 58 shows the theoretical and experimental measurements of Starkeffect in the J=1→2 transition of the molecule OCS. The unalteredabsolute rotational frequency is plotted at zero, and the frequencysplitting and shifting is denoted as MHz higher or lower than theoriginal frequency.

FIG. 59 shows patterns of Stark components for transitions in therotation of an asymmetric top molecule. Specifically, FIG. 59 a showsthe J=4→5 transitions; and FIG. 59 b shows the J=4→4 transitions. Theelectric field is large enough for complete spectral resolution.

FIG. 60 shows the Stark effect for the OCS molecule on the J=1→2transition with applied electric fields at various frequencies. The “a”curve represents the Stark effect with a static DC electric field; the“b” curve represents broadening and blurring of the Stark frequencieswith a 1 KHz electric field; and the “c” curve represents normal Starktype effect with electric field of 1,200 KHz.

FIG. 61 a shows a construction of a Stark waveguide and FIG. 61 b showsa distribution of fields in the Starck waveguide.

FIG. 62 a shows the Zeeman effect for sodium “D” lines; and FIG. 62 bshows the energy level diagram for transitions in the Zeeman effect forsodium “D” lines.

FIG. 63 is a graph which shows the splitting of the ground term of theoxygen atom as a function of magnetic field.

FIG. 64 is a graphic which shows the dependence of the Zeeman effect onmagnetic field strength for the “3P” state of silicon.

FIG. 65 a is a pictorial which shows a normal Zeeman effect and FIG. 65b is a pictorial which shows an anomolous Zeeman effect.

FIG. 66 shows anomalous Zeeman effect for zinc ³P→³S.

FIG. 67 a shows a graphic representation of four Zeeman splittingfrequencies and FIG. 67 b shows a graphic representation of four newheterodyned differences.

FIGS. 68 a and 68 b show graphs of typical Zeeman splitting patterns fortwo different transitions in a paramagnetic molecule.

FIG. 69 shows the frequencies of hydrogen listed horizontally across theTable; and the frequencies of platinum listed vertically on the Table.

FIG. 70 shows schematics of the seven (7) different unit cells in thefollowing order: a—cubic, b—tetragonal, c—orthorhombic, d—monoclinic,e—triclinic, f—hexagonal, g—trigonal/rhombohedral.

FIG. 71 shows a one-dimensional lattice system comprising a line ofequally spaced points.

FIG. 72 shows a schematic of a body-centered cubic lattice structure.

FIG. 73 shows a schematic of a face-centered lattice structure.

FIG. 74 shows a schematic of a face-centered cubic lattice structure.

FIG. 75 shows a phase-diagram exhibiting an equilibrium relationshipbetween solid and liquid forms of sodium chloride.

FIGS. 76 a and 76 b show clinographic projections of the cubic structureof sodium chloride (NaCl).

FIG. 77 shows a clinographic projection of the unit cell of the cubicstructure of sodium chloride as represented by circular ions of sodiumand chlorine.

FIG. 78 shows a perspective view of a simple binary phase-diagram.

FIG. 79 shows a phase-diagram which is an example of solubility curvefor a solid that forms a hydrate.

FIG. 79 a shows several solubility curves for different solutions inwater as a function of temperature.

FIG. 80 a shows a phase-diagram for carbon; and, FIGS. 80 b and 80 cshown clinographic projections of a hexagonal structure of graphite andthe cubic structure of diamond, respectively.

FIGS. 81 a and 81 b show two phase-diagrams for silica (SiO₂); FIG. 81 cshows a clinographic projection of the unit cell of cubicP-crystobalite; FIG. 81 d shows a plan view of the rhombohedralstructure of α-quartz; and FIG. 81 e shows a plan view of the hexagonalstructure of β-quartz.

FIG. 82 a shows a phase diagram for the system Ba₂TiO₄/TiO₂; FIG. 82 bshows a clinographic projection of the unit cell of an idealized cubicstructure of barium titanate (i.e., the Perovskite structure); and FIG.82 c shows a plan view of barium, titanium and oxygen ions in a latticerelationship, showing that the central ion of Ti₄ ⁺ has room to movewithin its lattice positions.

FIGS. 83 a, 83 b and 83 c show various phase-diagrams for water; andFIG. 83 d shows a clinographic projection of the hexagonal structure ofice.

FIG. 84 a shows a binary system for MgO/SiO₂; and FIG. 84 b shows a planview of an idealized orthorhombic structure of Mg₂SiO₄ (forsterite).

FIG. 85 a shows phase relations for the FeO/Fe₂O₃ system; and FIG. 85 bshows a clinographic projection of four unit cells of the cubicbody-centered structure of α-iron.

FIG. 86 a shows a space diagram of a ternary eutectic composition; FIG.86 b shows a space diagram of a complete series of solid solutions; andFIG. 86 c shows a crystallization path of the element “A” shown in FIG.86 a.

FIG. 87 a shows a molecular model of the δ-α transformation observed inoleic acid, erucic acid, asclepic acid and palmitoleic acid.

FIG. 87 b shows a single crystal morphology of the α-form and δ-form ofgondoic acid.

FIG. 87 c shows a Raman scattering C-C stretching band of the α-form andδ-form of gondoic acid.

FIG. 87 d shows a phase-diagram for mixtures of gondoic acid withasclepic acid; and FIG. 87 e shows a phase-diagram for mixtures ofgondoic acid with oleic acid.

FIG. 88 shows a schematic of an apparatus that was utilized to growsodium chloride crystals in accordance with Example 1.

FIG. 89 a is a photomicrograph taken at 4× of crystals formed on side“A” of the apparatus shown in FIG. 88; FIG. 89 b is a photomicrographtaken at 4× of crystals formed under ambient light condition; and FIG.89 c shows a comparison of the amount of crystallization occurring onside “A” versus side “B” of the apparatus shown in FIG. 88.

FIG. 90 shows a schematic of an apparatus that was utilized to growsodium chloride crystals in accordance with Example 2.

FIG. 91 a shows a transmission optical micrograph of sodium chloridecrystals grown with illumination by a sodium light; and FIGS. 91 b and91 c show the growth of sodium chloride crystals illuminated withtungsten light (filtered by 4250 Å) and tungsten light (filtered by 6200Å), respectively.

FIG. 92 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to prepare classicalsaturated solution.

FIG. 93 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to prepare spectrallyconditioned solution.

FIG. 94 shows a schematic of the experiments used to grow crystals froman overhead cone delivery system FIG. 95 shows a schematic of theexperiments used to grow crystals from an underneath cone deliverysystem.

FIG. 96 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to grow crystals from anoverhead cylinder delivery system

FIGS. 97 a-g show various schematic representations of differentapparatus used to grow crystals by causing spectral energy to beincident from different locations (and combinations of locations)according to various examples of the present invention.

FIG. 97 h is a schematic representation of an apparatus used for thesolubility experiments of Example 8b.

FIG. 98 a shows a photomicrograph of sodium chloride crystal grown as acontrol from a saturated solution of sodium chloride and water afterabout 18 hours of growth.

FIG. 98 b shows a photomicrograph of sodium chloride crystal grown byspectral crystallization techniques from a saturated solution of sodiumchloride and water.

FIG. 98 c shows a photomicrograph of sodium chloride crystallizationgrown by spectral crystallization techniques from an unsaturatedsolution of sodium chloride and water.

FIG. 98 d shows a photomicrograph of sodium chloride crystallizationgrown by spectral crystallization techniques from an unsaturatedsolution of sodium chloride and water.

FIG. 98 e shows a photomicrograph of sodium chloride crystallizationgrown by spectral crystallization techniques from an unsaturatedsolution of sodium chloride and water.

FIG. 98 f shows a photomicrograph of sodium chloride crystal grown byspectral crystallization techniques from a saturated solution of sodiumchloride and water.

FIG. 98 g is a photomicrograph which shows the largest crystal from FIG.98 f.

FIG. 98 h shows a photomicrograph comparison of amounts of sodiumchloride crystals formed as a function of solution propertiestechniques.

FIGS. 98 i-98 v; and 98 ad-ae are photomicrographs which correspond tocrystals grown according to Example 4.

FIGS. 98 w-98 ac are photomicrographs which correspond to crystals grownin Example 6.

FIG. 99 shows a schematic of the experimental set-up which correspondsto a Bunsen burner heating a solution of sodium chloride and water on ahot plate, which is discussed in Example 7a.

FIG. 100 shows a schematic of the experimental set-up which correspondsto a Bunsen burner heating a solution of sodium chloride and water on ahot plate, and a sodium lamp emitting an electromagnetic spectralpattern into the side of a beaker, which is discussed in Example 7b.

FIG. 101 shows a schematic of the experimental set-up which correspondsto a sodium lamp heating a solution of sodium chloride and water fromthe bottom of a beaker, which is discussed in Example 7c.

FIG. 102 shows a schematic of the pH electrode 109 used with the AccumetAR20 meter 107.

FIG. 103 a is a graph of the experimental data which shows pH as afunction of time and corresponds to the experimental set-up of Example7a.

FIG. 103 b is a graph of the experimental data which shows pH as afunction of time and corresponds to the experimental set-up of Example7b.

FIG. 103 c is a graph of the experimental data which shows pH as afunction of time and corresponds to the experimental set-up of Example7c.

FIG. 103 d is a graph which shows the averages of the three (3)different experimental conditions of experiments 7a, 7b and 7c, allsuperimposed on a single plot.

FIG. 103 e is a graph of the experimental data which shows pH as afunction of time and corresponds to the experimental set-up of Example7d.

FIG. 103 f is a graph of the experimental data which shows pH as afunction of time and corresponds to the experimental set-up of Example7e.

FIG. 103 g is a graph which shows the averages of the three (3)different experimental conditions of experiments 7a, 7b and 7e, allsuperimposed on a single plot.

FIG. 103 h shows the results of three (3) separate experiments (#'s 3, 4and 5) and represent decay curves generated by the experimentalapparatus shown in FIG. 100.

FIG. 103 i shows pH as a function of time for two experiments wheresodium chloride solute was dissolved in water.

FIGS. 104 a and 104 b are graphical representations of metal alloycrystals grown according to Example 9a.

FIGS. 105 a and 105 b are graphical representations of metal alloycrystals grown according to Example 9b.

FIG. 105 c is a photograph of exemplary crystals grown according toExample 9a.

FIGS. 105 d and 105 e are photomicrographs of protein crystals grownaccording to Example 10d.

FIG. 105 f-105 i are photomicrographs of mixed crystals grown accordingto Example 12.

FIG. 106 a is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of Bunsen burner-onlydata.

FIG. 106 b is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only) for Bunsenburner-only data.

FIG. 106 c is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of Bunsen burner-onlydata, the plot beginning with the data point generated two minutes aftersodium chloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 d is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp for about 40 minutesbefore the sodium chloride was dissolved therein.

FIG. 106 e is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only),corresponding to the water being conditioned by the sodium lamp forabout 40 minutes before the sodium chloride was dissolved therein.

FIG. 106 f is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp for about 40 minutesbefore the sodium chloride was dissolved therein.

FIG. 106 g is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe solution of sodium chloride and water being irradiated with aspectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp beginning when the sodiumchloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 h is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only)corresponding to the solution of sodium chloride and water beingirradiated with a spectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp beginningwhen the sodium chloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 i is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe solution of sodium chloride and water being irradiated with aspectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp beginning when the sodiumchloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 j is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioningpattern for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride was added to thewater; and continually irradiating the water with the sodium lightspectral pattern while sodium chloride is added thereto and remaining onwhile all conductivity measurements were taken.

FIG. 106 k is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only) for threesets of data, corresponding to the water being conditioned by the sodiumlamp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before thesodium chloride was dissolved; and continually irradiating the waterwith the sodium light spectral pattern while sodium chloride is addedthereto and remaining on while all conductivity measurements were taken.

FIG. 106 l is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioningpattern for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride was dissolved;and continually irradiating the water with the sodium light spectralpattern while sodium chloride is added thereto and remaining on whileall conductivity measurements were taken.

FIG. 106 m is a graph of the experimental data which superimposesaverages from the data in FIGS. 106 a, 106 d, 106 g and 106 j.

FIG. 106 n is a graph of the experimental data which superimposesaverages from the data in FIGS. 106 b, 106 e, 106 h and 106 k.

FIG. 106 o is a graph of the experimental data which superimposesaverages from the data in FIGS. 106 c, 106 f, 106 i and 106 j.

FIG. 107 shows a schematic of a flashlight battery assembly used inExample 14.

FIG. 108 shows a schematic of a sodium light used in Example 14.

FIG. 109 shows a graph of the change in current as a function of time.

FIG. 110 shows a graph of the change in current as a function of time.

FIG. 111 shows the corrosion/non-corrosion on steel razor bladesaccording to Example 15.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

In general, thermal energy is used to drive chemical reactions byapplying heat and increasing the temperature. The addition of heatincreases the kinetic (motion) energy of the chemical reactants. Areactant with more kinetic energy moves faster and farther, and is morelikely to take part in a chemical reaction. Mechanical energy likewise,by stirring and moving the chemicals, increases their kinetic energy andthus their reactivity. The addition of mechanical energy often increasestemperature, by increasing kinetic energy.

Acoustic energy is applied to chemical reactions as orderly mechanicalwaves. Because of its mechanical nature, acoustic energy can increasethe kinetic energy of chemical reactants, and can also elevate theirtemperature(s). Electromagnetic (M) energy consists of waves of electricand magnetic fields. Electromagnetic energy may also increase thekinetic energy and heat in crystallization reaction systems. It mayenergize electronic orbitals or vibrational motion in some reactions.

Both acoustic and electromagnetic energy may consist of waves. Thenumber of waves in a period of time can be counted. Waves are oftendrawn, as in FIG. 1 a. Usually, time is placed on the horizontal X-axis.The vertical Y-axis shows the strength or intensity of the wave. This isalso called the amplitude. A weak wave will be of weak intensity andwill have low amplitude (see FIG. 2 a). A strong wave will have highamplitude (see FIG. 2 b).

Traditionally, the number of waves per second is counted, to obtain thefrequency.Frequency=Number of waves/time=Waves/second=Hz.

Another name for “waves per second”, is “hertz” (abbreviated “Hz”).Frequency is drawn on wave diagrams by showing a different number ofwaves in a period of time (see FIG. 3 a which shows waves having afrequency of 2 Hz and 3 Hz). It is also drawn by placing frequencyitself, rather than time, on the X-axis (see FIG. 3 b which shows thesame 2 Hz and 3 Hz waves plotted differently).

Energy waves and frequency have some interesting properties, and mayinteract in some interesting ways. The manner in which wave energiesinteract, depends largely on the frequency. For example, when two wavesof energy interact, each having the same amplitude, but one at afrequency of 400 Hz and the other at 100 Hz, the waves will add theirfrequencies, to produce a new frequency of 500 Hz (i.e., the “sum”frequency). The frequency of the waves will also subtract to produce afrequency of 300 HZ (i.e., the “difference” frequency). All waveenergies typically add and subtract in this manner, and such adding andsubtracting is referred to as heterodyning. Common results ofheterodyning are familiar to most as harmonics in music.

There is a mathematical, as well as musical basis, to the harmonicsproduced by heterodyning. Consider, for example, a continuousprogression of heterodyned frequencies. As discussed above, beginningwith 400 Hz and 100 Hz, the sum frequency is 500 Hz and the differencefrequency is 300 Hz. If these frequencies are further heterodyned (addedand subtracted) then new frequencies of 800 (i.e., 500+300) and 200(i.e., 500-300) are obtained. The further heterodyning of 800 and 200results in 1,000 and 600 Hz as shown in FIG. 4.

A mathematical pattern begins to emerge. Both the sum and the differencecolumns contain alternating series of numbers that double with each setof heterodynes. In the sum column, 400 Hz, 800 Hz, and 1,600 Hz,alternates with 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, and 2000 Hz. The same sort of doublingphenomenon occurs in the difference column.

Heterodyning of frequencies is the natural process that occurs wheneverwaveform energies interact. Heterodyning results in patterns ofincreasing numbers that are mathematically derived. The number patternsare integer multiples of the original frequencies. These multiples arecalled harmonics. For example, 800 Hz and 1600 Hz are harmonics of 400Hz. In musical terms, 800 Hz is one octave above 400 Hz, and 1600 Hz istwo octaves higher. It is important to understand the mathematicalheterodyne basis for harmonics, which occurs in all waveform energies,and thus in all of nature.

The mathematics of frequencies is very important. Frequency heterodynesincrease mathematically in visual patterns (see FIG. 5). Mathematics hasa name for these visual patterns of FIG. 5. These patterns are calledfractals. A fractal is defined as a mathematical function which producesa series of self-similar patterns or numbers. Fractal patterns havespurred a great deal of interest historically because fractal patternsare found everywhere in nature. Fractals can be found in the patterningof large expanses of coastline, all the way down to microorganisms.Fractals are found in the behavior of organized insects and in thebehavior of fluids. The visual patterns produced by fractals are verydistinct and recognizable. A typical fractal pattern is shown in FIG. 6.

A heterodyne is a mathematical function, governed by mathematicalequations, just like a fractal. A heterodyne also produces self-similarpatterns of numbers, like a fractal. If graphed, a heterodyne seriesproduces the same familiar visual shape and form which is socharacteristic of fractals. It is interesting to compare the heterodyneseries in FIG. 5, with the fractal series in FIG. 6.

Heterodynes are fractals; the conclusion is inescapable. Heterodynes andfractals are both mathematical functions which produce a series ofself-similar patterns or numbers. Wave energies interact in heterodynepatterns. Thus, all wave energies interact as fractal patterns. Once itis understood that the fundamental process of interacting energies isitself a fractal process, it becomes easier to understand why so manycreatures and systems in nature also exhibit fractal patterns. Thefractal processes and patterns of nature are established at afundamental or basic level.

Accordingly, since energy interacts by heterodyning, matter should alsobe capable of interacting by a heterodyning process. All matter whetherin large or small forms, has what is called a natural oscillatoryfrequency. The natural oscillatory frequency (“NOF”) of an object, isthe frequency at which the object prefers to vibrate, once set inmotion. The NOF of an object is related to many factors including size,shape, dimension, and composition. The smaller an object is, the smallerthe distance it has to cover when it oscillates back and forth. Thesmaller the distance, the faster it can oscillate, and the higher itsNOF.

For example, consider a wire composed of metal atoms. The wire has anatural oscillatory frequency. The individual metal atoms also haveunique natural oscillatory frequencies. The NOF of the atoms and the NOFof the wire heterodyne by adding and subtracting, just the way energyheterodynes.NOF _(atom) +NOF ^(wire)=Sum Frequency_(atom+wire)andNOF _(atom) −NOF _(wire)=Difference Frequency_(atom−wire)

If the wire is stimulated with the Difference Frequency_(atom−wire), thedifference frequency will heterodyne (add) with the NOF_(wire) toproduce NOF_(atom), (natural oscillatory frequency of the atom) and theatom will absorb with the energy, thereby becoming stimulated to ahigher energy level. Cirac and Zoeller reported this phenomenon in 1995,and they used a laser to generate the Difference Frequency.Difference Frequency_(atom−wire) +NOF _(wire) =NOF _(atom)

Matter heterodynes with matter in a manner similar to the way in whichwave energies heterodyne with other wave energies. This means thatmatter in its various states may also interact in fractal processes.This interaction of matter by fractal processes assists in explainingwhy so many creatures and systems in nature exhibit fractal processesand patterns. Matter, as well as energy, interacts by the mathematicalequations of heterodynes, to produce harmonics and fractal patterns.That is why there are fractals everywhere around us.

Thus, energy heterodynes with energy, and matter heterodynes withmatter. However, perhaps even more important is that matter canheterodyne with energy (and visa versa). In the metal wire discussionabove, the Difference Frequency_(atom−wire) in the experiment by Ciracand Zoeller was provided by a laser which used electromagnetic waveenergy at a frequency equal to the Difference Frequency_(atom−wire). Thematter in the wire, via its natural oscillatory frequency, heterodynedwith the electromagnetic wave energy frequency of the laser to producethe frequency of an individual atom of matter. This shows that energyand matter do heterodyne with each other.

In general, when energy encounters matter, one of three possibilitiesoccur. The energy either bounces off the matter (i.e., is reflectedenergy), passes through the matter (i.e., is transmitted energy), orinteracts and/or combines with the matter (e.g., is absorbed orheterodynes with the matter). If the energy heterodynes with the matter,new frequencies of energy and/or matter will be produced by mathematicalprocesses of sums and differences. If the frequency thus producedmatches an NOF of the matter, the energy will be, at least partially,absorbed, and the matter will be stimulated to, for example, a higherenergy level, (i.e., it possesses more energy). A crucial factor whichdetermines which of these three possibilities will happen is thefrequency of the energy compared to the frequency of the matter. If thefrequencies do not match, the energy will either be reflected, or willpass on through as transmitted energy. If the frequencies of the energyand the matter match either directly (e.g., are close to each other, asdiscussed in greater detail later herein), or match indirectly (e.g.,heterodynes), then the energy is capable of interacting and/or combiningwith the matter.

Another term often used for describing the matching of frequencies isresonance. In this invention, use of the term resonance will typicallymean that frequencies of matter and/or energy match. For example, if thefrequency of energy and the frequency of matter match, the energy andmatter are in resonance and the energy is capable of combining with thematter. Resonance, or frequency matching, is merely an aspect ofheterodyning that permits the coherent transfer and combination ofenergy with matter.

In the example above with the wire and atoms, resonance could have beencreated with the atom, by stimulating the atom with a laser frequencyexactly matching the NOF of the atom. In this case, the atom would beenergized with its own resonant frequency and the energy would betransferred to the atom directly. Alternatively, as was performed in theactual wire/laser experiment, resonance could also have been createdwith the atom by using the heterodyning that naturally occurs betweendiffering frequencies. Thus, the resonant frequency of the atom(NOF_(atom)) can be produced indirectly, as an additive (or subtractive)heterodyned frequency, between the resonant frequency of the wire(NOF_(wire)) and the applied frequency of the laser. Either directresonance, or indirect resonance through heterodyned frequency matching,produces resonance and thus permits the combining of matter and energy.When frequencies match, energy transfers and amplitudes may increase.

Heterodyning produces indirect resonance. Heterodyning also producesharmonics, (i.e., frequencies that are integer multiples of the resonant(NOF) frequency. For example, the music note “A” is approximately 440Hz. If that frequency is doubled to about 880 Hz, the note “A” is heardan octave higher. This first octave is called the first harmonic.Doubling the note or frequency again, from 880 Hz to 1,760 Hz (i.e.,four times the frequency of the original note) results in another “A”,two octaves above the original note. This is called the third harmonic.Every time the frequency is doubled another octave is achieved, so theseare the even integer multiples of the resonant frequency.

In between the first and third harmonic is the second harmonic, which isthree times the original note. Musically, this is not an octave like thefirst and third harmonics. It is an octave and a fifth, equal to thesecond “E” above the original “A”. All of the odd integer multiples arefifths, rather than octaves. Because harmonics are simply multiples ofthe fundamental natural oscillatory frequency, harmonics stimulate theNOF or resonant frequency indirectly. Thus by playing the high “A” at880 Hz on a piano, the string for middle “A” at 440 Hz should also beginto vibrate due to the phenomenon of harmonics.

Matter and energy in chemical reactions respond to harmonics of resonantfrequencies much the way musical instruments do. Thus, the resonantfrequency of the atom (NOF_(atom)) can be stimulated indirectly, usingone or more of its' harmonic frequencies. This is because the harmonicfrequency heterodynes with the resonant frequency of the atom itself(NOF_(atom)). For example, in the wire/atom example above, if the laseris tuned to 800 THz and the atom resonates at 400 THz, heterodyning thetwo frequencies results in:800 THz−400 THz=400 THz

The 800 THz (the atom's first harmonic), heterodynes with the resonantfrequency of the atom, to produce the atom's own resonant frequency.Thus the first harmonic indirectly resonates with the atom's NOF, andstimulates the atom's resonant frequency as a first generationheterodyne.

Of course, the two frequencies will also heterodyne in the otherdirection, producing:800 THz+400 THz=1,200 THz

The 1,200 THz frequency is not the resonant frequency of the atom. Thus,part of the energy of the laser will heterodyne to produce the resonantfrequency of the atom. The other part of the energy of the laserheterodynes to a different frequency, that does not itself stimulate theresonant frequency of the atom. That is why the stimulation of an objectby a harmonic frequency of particular strength of amplitude, istypically less than the stimulation by its' own resonant (NOF) frequencyat the same particular strength.

Although it appears that half the energy of a harmonic is wasted, thatis not necessarily the case. Referring again to the exemplary atomvibrating at 400 THz, exposing the atom to electromagnetic energyvibrating at 800 THz will result in frequencies subtracting and addingas follows:800 THz−400 THz=400 THzand800 THz+400 THz=1,200 THz

The 1,200 THz heterodyne, for which about 50% of the energy appears tobe wasted, will heterodyne with other frequencies also, such as 800 THz.Thus,1,200 THz−800 THz=400 THz

Also, the 1,200 THz will heterodyne with 400 THz:1,200 THz−400 THz=800 THz,thus producing 800 THz, and the 800 THz will heterodyne with 400 THz:800 THz−400 THz=400 THz,thus producing 400 THz frequency again. When other generations ofheterodynes of the seemingly wasted energy are taken into consideration,the amount of energy transferred by a first harmonic frequency is muchgreater than the previously suggested 50% transfer of energy. There isnot as much energy transferred by this approach when compared to directresonance, but this energy transfer is sufficient to produce a desiredeffect (see FIG. 14).

As stated previously, Ostwald's theories on catalysts and bond formationwere based on the kinetic theories of chemistry from the turn of thecentury. However, it should now be understood that chemical reactionsare interactions of matter, and that matter interacts with other matterthrough resonance and heterodyning of frequencies; and energy can justas easily interact with matter through a similar processes of resonanceand heterodyning. With the advent of spectroscopy (discussed in moredetail elsewhere herein), it is evident that matter produces, forexample, electromagnetic energy at the same or substantially the samefrequencies at which it vibrates. Energy and matter can move about andrecombine with other energy or matter, as long as their frequenciesmatch, because when frequencies match, energy transfers. In manyrespects, both philosophically and mathematically, both matter andenergy can be fundamentally construed as corresponding to frequency.Accordingly, since chemical reactions are recombinations of matterdriven by energy, chemical reactions are in effect, driven just as muchby frequency.

Analysis of a typical chemical reaction should be helpful inunderstanding the normal processes disclosed herein. A representativereaction to examine is the formation of water from hydrogen and oxygengases, catalyzed by platinum. Platinum has been known for some time tobe a good hydrogen catalyst, although the reason for this has not beenwell understood.

This reaction is proposed to be a chain reaction, depending on thegeneration and stabilization of the hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates.The proposed reaction chain is:

Generation of the hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates are thought to becrucial to this reaction chain. Under normal circumstances, hydrogen andoxygen gas can be mixed together for an indefinite amount of time, andthey will not form water. Whenever the occasional hydrogen moleculesplits apart, the hydrogen atoms do not have adequate energy to bondwith an oxygen molecule to form water. The hydrogen atoms are veryshort-lived as they simply re-bond again to form a hydrogen molecule.Exactly how platinum catalyzes this reaction chain is a mystery to theprior art.

The present invention teaches that an important step to catalyzing thisreaction is the understanding now provided that it is crucial not onlyto generate the intermediates, but also to energize and/or stabilize(i.e., maintain the intermediates for a longer time), so that theintermediates have sufficient energy to, for example, react with othercomponents in the reaction system. In the case of platinum, theintermediates react with the reactants to form product and moreintermediates (i.e., by generating, energizing and stabilizing thehydrogen intermediate, it has sufficient energy to react with themolecular oxygen reactant, forming water and the hydroxy intermediate,instead of falling back into a hydrogen molecule). Moreover, byenergizing and stabilizing the hydroxy intermediates, the hydroxyintermediates can react with more reactant hydrogen molecules, and againwater and more intermediates result from this chain reaction. Thus,generating energizing and/or stabilizing the intermediates, influencesthis reaction pathway. Paralleling nature in this regard would bedesirable (e.g., nature can be paralleled by increasing the energylevels of the intermediates). Specifically, desirable, intermediates canbe energized and/or stabilized by applying at least one appropriateelectromagnetic frequency resonant with the intermediate, therebystimulating the intermediate to a higher energy level. Interestingly,that is what platinum does (e.g., various platinum frequencies resonatewith the intermediates on the reaction pathway for water formation).Moreover, in the process of energizing and stabilizing the reactionintermediates, platinum fosters the generation of more intermediates,which allows the reaction chain to continue, and thus catalyzes thereaction.

As a catalyst, platinum takes advantage of many of the ways thatfrequencies interact with each other. Specifically, frequencies interactand resonate with each other: 1) directly, by matching a frequency; or2) indirectly, by matching a frequency through harmonics or heterodynes.In other words, platinum vibrates at frequencies which both directlymatch the natural oscillatory frequencies of the intermediates, andwhich indirectly match their frequencies, for example, by heterodyningharmonics with the intermediates.

Further, in addition to the specific intermediates of the reactiondiscussed above herein, it should be understood that in this reaction,like in all reactions, various transients or transient states alsoexist. In some cases, transients or transient states may only involvedifferent bond angles between similar chemical species or in other casestransients may involve completely different chemistries altogether. Inany event, it should be understood that numerous transient states existbetween any particular combination of reactant and reaction product.

It should now be understood that physical catalysts produce effects bygenerating, energizing and/or stabilizing all manner of transients, aswell as intermediates. In this regard, FIG. 8 a shows a single reactantand a single product. The point “A” corresponds to the reactant and thepoint “B” corresponds to the reaction product. The point “C” correspondsto an activated complex. Transients correspond to all those points onthe curve between reactant “A” and product “B”, and can also include theactivated complex “C”.

In a more complex reaction which involves formation of at least oneintermediate, the reaction profile looks somewhat different. In thisregard, reference is made to FIG. 8 b, which shows reactant “A”, product“B”, activated complex “C′ and C″, and intermediate “D”. In thisparticular example, the intermediate “D” exists as a minimum in theenergy reaction profile of the reaction, while it is surrounded by theactivated complexes C′ and C″. However, again, in this particularreaction, transients correspond to anything between the reactant “A” andthe reaction product “B”, which in this particular example, includes thetwo activated complexes “C′” and “C″,” as well as the intermediate “D”.In the particular example of hydrogen and oxygen combining to formwater, the reaction profile is closer to that shown in FIG. 8 c. In thisparticular reaction profile, “D′” and “D″” could correspond generally tothe intermediates of the hydrogen atom and hydroxy molecule.

Now, with specific reference to the reaction to form water, bothintermediates are good examples of how platinum produces resonance in anintermediate by directly matching a frequency. Hydroxy intermediatesvibrate strongly at frequencies of 975 THz and 1,060 THz. Platinum alsovibrates at 975 THz and 1,060 THz. By directly matching the frequenciesof the hydroxy intermediates, platinum can cause resonance in hydroxyintermediates, enabling them to be energized, stimulated and/orstabilized long enough to take part in chemical reactions. Similarly,platinum also directly matches frequencies of the hydrogenintermediates. Platinum resonates with about 10 out of about 24 hydrogenfrequencies in its electronic spectrum (see FIG. 69). Specifically, FIG.69 shows the frequencies of hydrogen listed horizontally across theTable and the frequencies of platinum listed vertically on the Table.Thus, by directly resonating with the intermediates in theabove-described reaction, platinum facilitates the generation,energizing, stimulating, and/or stabilizing of the intermediates,thereby catalyzing the desired reaction.

Platinum's interactions with hydrogen are also a good example ofmatching frequencies through heterodyning. It is disclosed herein, andshown clearly in FIG. 69, that many of the platinum frequencies resonateindirectly as harmonics with the hydrogen atom intermediate (e.g.,harmonic heterodynes). Specifically, fifty-six (56) frequencies ofplatinum (i.e., 33% of all its frequencies) are harmonics of nineteen(19) hydrogen frequencies (i.e., 80% of its 24 frequencies). Fourteen(14) platinum frequencies are first harmonics (2×) of seven (7) hydrogenfrequencies. And, twelve (12) platinum frequencies are third harmonics(4×) of four (4) hydrogen frequencies. Thus, the presence of platinumcauses massive indirect harmonic resonance in the hydrogen atom, as wellas significant direct resonance.

Further focus on the individual hydrogen frequencies is even moreinformative. FIGS. 9-10 show a different picture of what hydrogen lookslike when the same information used to make energy level diagrams isplotted as actual frequencies and intensities instead. Specifically, theX-axis shows the frequencies emitted and absorbed by hydrogen, while theY-axis shows the relative intensity for each frequency. The frequenciesare plotted in terahertz (THz, 1012 Hz) and are rounded to the nearestTHz. The intensities are plotted on a relative scale of 1 to 1,000. Thehighest intensity frequency that hydrogen atoms produce is 2,466 THz.This is the peak of curve I to the far right in FIG. 9 a. This curve Ishall be referred to as the first curve. Curve I sweeps down and to theright, from 2,466 THz at a relative intensity of 1,000 to 3,237 THz at arelative intensity of only about 15.

The second curve in FIG. 9 a, curve II, starts at 456 THz with arelative intensity of about 300 and sweeps down and to the right. Itends at a frequency of 781 Thz with a relative intensity of five (5).Every curve in hydrogen has this same downward sweep to the right.Progressing from right to left in FIG. 9, the curves are numbered Ithrough V; going from high to low frequency and from high to lowintensity.

The hydrogen frequency chart shown in FIG. 10 appears to be much simplerthan the energy level diagrams. It is thus easier to visualize how thefrequencies are organized into the different curves shown in FIG. 9. Infact, there is one curve for each of the series described by Rydberg.Curve ‘T’ contains the frequencies in the Lyman series, originating fromwhat quantum mechanics refers to as the first energy level. The secondcurve from the right, curve “II”, equates to the second energy level,and so on.

The curves in the hydrogen frequency chart of FIG. 9 are composed ofsums and differences (i.e., they are heterodyned). For example, thesmallest curve at the far left, labeled curve “V”, has two frequenciesshown, namely 40 THz and 64 THz, with relative intensities of six (6)and four (4), respectively (see also FIG. 10). The next curve, IV,begins at 74 THz, proceeds to 114 THz and ends with 138 THz. The summedheterodyne calculations are thus:40+74=11464+74+138.

The frequencies in curve IV are the sum of the frequencies in curve Vplus the peak intensity frequency in curve IV.

Alternatively, the frequencies in curve IV, minus the frequencies incurve V, yield the peak of curve IV:114−40=74138−64=74.

This is not just a coincidental set of sums or differences in curves IVand V. Every curve in hydrogen is the result of adding each frequency inany one curve, with the highest intensity frequency in the next curve.

These hydrogen frequencies are found in both the atom itself, and in theelectromagnetic energy it radiates. The frequencies of the atom and itsenergy, add and subtract in regular fashion. This is heterodyning. Thus,not only matter and energy heterodyne interchangeably, but matterheterodynes its' own energy within itself.

Moreover, the highest intensity frequencies in each curve areheterodynes of heterodynes. For example, the peak frequency in Curve Iof FIG. 9 is 2,466 THz, which is the third harmonic of 616 THz;4×616 Thz=2,466 THz.

Thus, 2,466 THz is the third harmonic of 616 THz (Recall that forheterodyned harmonics, the result is even multiples of the startingfrequency, i.e., for the first harmonic 2× the original frequency andthe third harmonic is 4× the original frequency. Multiplying a frequencyby four (4) is a natural result of the heterodyning process.) Thus,2,466 THz is a fourth generation heterodyne, namely the third harmonicof 616 THz.

The peak of curve II of FIG. 9, a frequency corresponding to 456 THz, isthe third harmonic of 114 THz in curve IV. The peak of curve III,corresponding to a frequency of 160 THz, is the third harmonic of 40 THzin curve V. The peaks of the curves shown in FIG. 9 are not onlyheterodynes between the curves but are also harmonics of individualfrequencies which are themselves heterodynes. The whole hydrogenspectrum turns out to be an incestuously heterodyned set of frequenciesand harmonics.

Theoretically, this heterodyne process could go on forever. For example,if 40 is the peak of a curve, that means the peak is four (4) times alower number, and it also means that the peak of the previous curve is24 (64-40=24). It is possible to mathematically extrapolate backwardsand downwards this way to derive lower and lower frequencies. Peaks ofsuccessive curves to the left are 24.2382, 15.732, and 10.786 THz, allgenerated from the heterodyne process. These frequencies are in completeagreement with the Rydberg formula for energy levels 6, 7 and 8,respectively. Not much attention has historically been given by theprior art to these lower frequencies and their heterodyning.

This invention teaches that the heterodyned frequency curves amplify thevibrations and energy of hydrogen. A low intensity frequency on curve IVor V has a very high intensity by the time it is heterodyned out tocurve I. In many respects, the hydrogen atom is just one big energyamplification system. Moving from low frequencies to high frequencies,(i.e., from curve V to curve I in FIG. 9), the intensities increasedramatically. By stimulating hydrogen with 2,466 THz at an intensity of1,000, the result will be 2,466 THz at 1,000 intensity. However, ifhydrogen is stimulated with 40 THz at an intensity of 1,000, by the timeit is amplified back out to curve I of FIG. 9, the result will be 2,466THz at an intensity of 167,000. This heterodyning turns out to have adirect bearing on platinum, and on how platinum interacts with hydrogen.It all has to do with hydrogen being an energy amplification system.That is why the lower frequency curves are perceived as being higherenergy levels. By understanding this process, the low frequencies of lowintensity suddenly become potentially very significant.

Platinum resonates with most, if not all, of the hydrogen frequencieswith one notable exception, the highest intensity curve at the far rightin the frequency chart of FIG. 9 (i.e., curve I) representing energylevel 1, and beginning with 2,466 THz. Platinum does not appear toresonate significantly with the ground state transition of the hydrogenatom. However, it does resonate with multiple upper energy levels oflower frequencies.

With this information, one ongoing mystery can be solved. Ever sincelasers were developed, the prior art chemists believed that there had tobe some way to catalyze a reaction using lasers. Standard approachesinvolved using the single highest intensity frequency of an atom (suchas 2,466 THz of hydrogen) because it was apparently believed that thehighest intensity frequency would result in the highest reactivity. Thisapproach was taken due to considering only the energy level diagrams.Accordingly, prior art lasers are typically tuned to a ground statetransition frequency. This use of lasers in the prior art has beenminimally successful for catalyzing chemical reactions. It is nowunderstood why this approach was not successful. Platinum, thequintessential hydrogen catalyst, does not resonate with the groundstate transition of hydrogen. It resonates with the upper energy levelfrequencies, in fact, many of the upper level frequencies. Withoutwishing to be bound by any particular theory or explanation, this isprobably why platinum is such a good hydrogen catalyst.

Platinum resonates with multiple frequencies from the upper energylevels (i.e., the lower frequencies). There is a name given to theprocess of stimulating many upper energy levels, it is called a laser.

Einstein essentially worked out the statistics on lasers at the turn ofthe century when atoms at the ground energy level (E₁) are resonated toan excited energy level (E₂). Refer to the number of atoms in the groundstate as “N₁” and the number of excited atoms as “N₂”, with the total“N_(total)”. Since there are only two possible states that atoms canoccupy:N _(total) =N ₁ +N ₂.

After all the mathematics are performed, the relationship which evolvesis:$\frac{N_{2}}{N_{total}} = {\frac{N_{2}}{N_{1} + N_{2}} < \frac{1}{2}}$

In a two level system, it is predicted that there will never by morethan 50% of the atoms in the higher energy level, E₂, at the same time.

If, however, the same group of atoms is energized at three (3) or moreenergy levels (i.e., a multi-level system), it is possible to obtainmore than 50% of the atoms energized above the first level. By referringto the ground and energized levels as E₁, E₂, and E₃, respectively, andthe numbers of atoms as N_(total), N₁, N₂, and N₃, under certaincircumstances, the number of atoms at an elevated energy level (N₃) canbe more than the number at a lower energy level (N₂). When this happens,it is referred to as a “population inversion”. Population inversionmeans that more of the atoms are at higher energy levels that at thelower energy levels.

Population inversion in lasers is important. Population inversion causesamplification of light energy. For example, in a two-level system, onephoton in results in one photon out. In a system with three (3) or moreenergy levels and population inversion, one photon in may result in 5,10, or 15 photons out (see FIG. 11). The amount of photons out dependson the number of levels and just how energized each level becomes. Alllasers are based on this simple concept of producing a populationinversion in a group of atoms, by creating a multi-level energizedsystem among the atoms. Lasers are simply devices to amplifyelectromagnetic wave energy (i.e., light). Laser is actually anabbreviation for Light Amplification System for Emitting Radiation.

By referring back to the interactions discussed herein between platinumand hydrogen, platinum energizes 19 upper level frequencies in hydrogen(i.e., 80% of the total hydrogen frequencies). But only threefrequencies are needed for a population inversion. Hydrogen isstimulated at 19. This is a clearly multi-level system. Moreover,consider that seventy platinum frequencies do the stimulating. Onaverage, every hydrogen frequency involved is stimulated by three orfour (i.e., 70/19) different platinum frequencies; both directlyresonant frequencies and/or indirectly resonant harmonic frequencies.Platinum provides ample stimulus, atom per atom, to produce a populationinversion in hydrogen. Finally, consider the fact that every time astimulated hydrogen atom emits some electromagnetic energy, that energyis of a frequency that matches and stimulates platinum in return.

Platinum and hydrogen both resonate with each other in their respectivemulti-level systems. Together, platinum and hydrogen form an atomicscale laser (i.e., an energy amplification system on the atomic level).In so doing, platinum and hydrogen amplify the energies that are neededto stabilize both the hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates, thuscatalyzing the reaction pathway for the formation of water. Platinum issuch a good hydrogen catalyst because it forms a lasing system withhydrogen on the atomic level, thereby amplifying their respectiveenergies.

Further, this reaction hints that in order to catalyze a crystallizationreaction system and/or control the reaction pathway in a crystallizationreaction system it is possible for only a single transient and/orintermediate to be formed and/or energized by an applied frequency(e.g., a spectral catalyst) and that by forming and/or stimulating atleast one transient and/or at least one intermediate that is required tofollow for a desired reaction pathway (e.g., either a complex reactionor a simple reaction), then a frequency, or combination of frequencies,which result in such formation or stimulation of only one of suchrequired transients and/or intermediates may be all that is required.Accordingly, the present invention recognizes that in somecrystallization reaction systems, by determining at least one requiredtransient and/or intermediate, and by applying at least one frequencywhich generates, energizes and/or stabilizes said at least one transientand/or intermediate, then all other transients and/or intermediatesrequired for a reaction to proceed down a desired reaction pathway maybe self-generated. However, in some cases, the reaction could beincreased in rate by applying the appropriate frequency or spectralenergy pattern, which directly stimulates all transients and/orintermediates that are required in order for a reaction to proceed downa desired reaction pathway. Accordingly, depending upon the particularsof any crystallization reaction system, it may be desirable for avariety of reasons, including equipment, environmental reactionconditions, etc., to provide or apply a frequency or spectral energypattern which results in the formation and/or stimulation and/orstabilization of any required transients and/or intermediates. Thus, inorder to determine an appropriate frequency or spectral energy pattern,it is first desirable to determine which transients and/or intermediatesare present in any reaction pathway. Similarly, a conditionedparticipant could be formulated to accomplish a similar task.

Specifically, once all known required transients and/or intermediatesare determined, then, one can determine experimentally or empiricallywhich transients and/or intermediates are essential to a reactionpathway and then determine, which transients and or intermediates can beself-generated by the stimulation and/or formation of a differenttransient or intermediate. Once such determinations are made,appropriate spectral energies (e.g., electromagnetic frequencies) canthen be applied to the crystallization reaction system to obtain thedesirable reaction product and/or desirable reaction pathway.

It is known that an atom of platinum interacts with an atom of hydrogenand/or a hydroxy intermediate. And, that is exactly what modernchemistry has taught for the last one hundred years, based on Ostwald'stheory of catalysis. However, the prior art teaches that catalysts mustparticipate in the reaction by binding to the reactants, in other words,the prior art teaches a matter:matter bonding interaction is requiredfor physical catalysts. As previously stated, these reactions followthese steps:

-   -   1. Reactant diffusion to the catalyst site;    -   2. Bonding of reactant to the catalyst site;    -   3. Reaction of the catalyst-reactant complex;    -   4. Bond rupture at the catalytic site (product); and    -   5. Diffusion of the product away from the catalyst site.

However, according to the present invention, for example, energy:energyfrequencies can interact as well as energy: matter frequencies.Moreover, matter radiates energy, with the energy frequencies beingsubstantially the same as the matter frequencies. So platinum vibratesat the frequency of 1,060 THz, and it also radiates electromagneticenergy at 1,060 THz. Thus, according to the present invention, thedistinction between energy frequencies and matter frequencies starts tolook less important.

Resonance can be produced in, for example, the reaction intermediates bypermitting them to come into contact with additional matter vibrating atsubstantially the same frequencies, such as those frequencies of aplatinum atom (e.g., platinum stimulating the reaction between hydrogenand oxygen to form water). Alternatively, according to the presentinvention, resonance can be produced in the intermediates by introducingelectromagnetic energy corresponding to one or more platinum energies,which also vibrate at the same frequencies, thus at least partiallymimicking (an additional mechanism of platinum is resonance with the H₂molecule, a pathway reactant) the mechanism of action of a platinumcatalyst. Matter, or energy, it makes no difference as far as thefrequencies are concerned, because when the frequencies match, energytransfers. Thus, physical catalysts are not required. Rather, theapplication of at least a portion of the spectral pattern of a physicalcatalyst may be sufficient (i.e. at least a portion of the catalyticspectral pattern). However, in another preferred embodiment,substantially all of a spectral pattern can be applied.

Still further, by understanding the catalyst mechanism of action,particular frequencies can be applied to, for example, one or morereactants in a reaction system and, for example, cause the appliedfrequencies to heterodyne with existing frequencies in the matter itselfto result in frequencies which correspond to one or more platinumcatalyst or other relevant spectral frequencies. For example, both thehydrogen atom and the hydrogen molecule have unique frequencies. Byheterodyning the frequencies a subtractive frequency can be determined:NOF _(H atom) −NOF _(H molecule)=Difference_(H atom−molecule)

The Difference H_(atom−molecule) frequency applied to the H₂ moleculereactant will heterodyne with the molecule and energize the individualhydrogen atoms as intermediates. Similarly, any reaction participant canserve as the heterodyning backboard for stimulation of anotherparticipant. For example,Difference_(H atom−Oxygen molecule) +NOF _(oxygen molecule) =NOF_(H atom)orDifference_(OH−water) +NOF _(water) =NOF _(OH)

This approach enables greater flexibility for choice of appropriateequipment to apply appropriate frequencies. However, the key to thisapproach is understanding catalyst mechanisms of action and the reactionpathway so that appropriate choices for application of frequencies canbe made.

Specifically, whenever reference is made to, for example, a spectralcatalyst duplicating at least a portion of a physical catalyst'sspectral pattern, this reference is to all the different frequenciesproduced by a physical catalyst; including, but not necessarily limitedto, electronic, vibrational, rotational, and NOF frequencies. Tocatalyze, control, and/or direct a chemical reaction then, all that isneeded is to duplicate one or more frequencies from a physical catalyst,with, for example, an appropriate electromagnetic energy. The actualphysical presence of the catalyst is not necessary. A spectral catalystcan substantially completely replace a physical catalyst, if desired.

A spectral catalyst can also augment or promote the activity of aphysical catalyst. The exchange of energy at particular frequencies,between hydrogen, hydroxy, and platinum is primarily what drives theconversion to water. These participants interact and create a miniatureatomic scale lasing system that amplify their respective energies. Theaddition of these same energies to a crystallization reaction system,using a spectral catalyst, does the same thing. The spectral catalystamplifies the participant energies by resonating with them and whenfrequencies match, energy transfers and the chemicals (matter) canabsorb the energy. Thus, a spectral catalyst can augment a physicalcatalyst, as well as replace it. In so doing, the spectral catalyst mayincrease the reaction rate, enhance specificity, and/or allow for theuse of less physical catalyst.

FIG. 12 shows a basic bell-shaped curve produced by comparing how muchenergy an object absorbs, as compared to the frequency of the energy.This curve is called a resonance curve. As elsewhere herein stated, theenergy transfer between, for example, atoms or molecules, reaches amaximum at the resonant frequency (f_(o)). The farther away an appliedfrequency is from the resonant frequency, f_(o), the lower the energytransfer (e.g., matter to matter, energy to matter, etc.). At some pointthe energy transfer will fall to a value representing only about 50% ofthat at the resonant frequency f_(o). The frequency higher than theresonant frequency, at which energy transfer is only about 50% is called“f₂.” The frequency lower than the resonant frequency, at which about50% energy transfer occurs, is labeled “f₁.”

The resonant characteristics of different objects can be compared usingthe information from the simple exemplary resonance curve shown in FIG.12. One such useful characteristic is called the “resonance quality” or“Q” factor. To determine the resonance quality for an object thefollowing equation is utilized:$Q = \frac{f_{o}}{\left( {f_{2} - f_{1}} \right)}$Accordingly, as shown from the equation, if the bell-shaped resonancecurve is tall and narrow, then (f₂−f₁) will be a very small number andQ, the resonance quality, will be high (see FIG. 13 a). An example of amaterial with a high “Q” is a high quality quartz crystal resonator. Ifthe resonance curve is low and broad, then the spread or differencebetween f₂ and f₁ will be relatively large. An example of a materialwith a low “Q” is a marshmallow. The dividing of the resonant frequencyby this large number will produce a much lower Q value (see FIG. 13 b).

Atoms and molecules, for example, have resonance curves which exhibitproperties similar to larger objects such as quartz crystals andmarshmallows. If the goal is to stimulate atoms in a reaction (e.g.,hydrogen in the reaction to produce water as mentioned previously) aprecise resonant frequency produced by a crystallization reaction systemcomponent or environmental reaction condition (e.g., hydrogen) can beused. It is not necessary to use the precise frequency, however. Use ofa frequency that is near a resonant frequency of, for example, one ormore crystallization reaction system components or environmentalreaction conditions is adequate. There will not be quite as much of aneffect as using the exact resonant frequency, because less energy willbe transferred, but there will still be an effect. The closer theapplied frequency is to the resonant frequency, the more the effect. Thefarther away the applied frequency is from the resonant frequency, theless effect that is present (i.e., the less energy transfer thatoccurs).

Harmonics present a similar situation. As previously stated, harmonicsare created by the heterodyning (i.e., adding and subtracting) offrequencies, allowing the transfer of significant amounts of energy.Accordingly, for example, desirable results can be achieved in chemicalreactions if applied frequencies (e.g., at least a portion of a spectralcatalyst) are harmonics (i.e., matching heterodynes) with one or moreresonant frequency(ies) of one or more crystallization reaction systemcomponents or environmental reaction conditions.

Further, similar to applied frequencies being close to resonantfrequencies, applied frequencies which are close to the harmonicfrequency can also produce desirable results. The amplitude of theenergy transfer will be less relative to a harmonic frequency, but aneffect will still occur. For example, if the harmonic produces 70% ofthe amplitude of the fundamental resonant frequency and by using afrequency which is merely close to the harmonic, for example, about 90%on the harmonic's resonance curve, then the total effect will be 90% of70%, or about 63% total energy transfer in comparison to a directresonant frequency. Accordingly, according to the present invention,when at least a portion of the frequencies of one or morecrystallization reaction system components or environmental reactionconditions at least partially match, then at least some energy willtransfer and at least some reaction will occur (i.e., when frequenciesmatch, energy transfers).

Duplicating the Catalyst Mechanism of Action

As stated previously, to catalyze, control, and/or direct a chemicalreaction, a spectral catalyst can be applied. The spectral catalyst maycorrespond to at least a portion of a spectral pattern of a physicalcatalyst or the spectral catalyst may correspond to frequencies whichform or stimulate required participants (e.g., heterodyned frequencies)or the spectral catalyst may substantially duplicate environmentalreaction conditions such as temperature or pressure. Thus, as now taughtby the present invention, the actual physical presence of a catalyst isnot required to achieve the desirable chemical reactions, phasetransformations, or structural control. The obsoleting of a physicalcatalyst is accomplished by understanding the underlying mechanisminherent in catalysis, namely that desirable energy can be exchanged(i.e., transferred) between, for example, (1) at least one participant(e.g., reactant, transient, intermediate, activated complex, reactionproduct, promoter and/or poison) and/or at least one component in acrystallization reaction system and (2) an applied spectral energy(e.g., spectral catalyst) when such energy is present at one or morespecific frequencies. In other words, the targeted mechanism that naturehas built into the catalytic process can be copied according to theteachings of the present invention. Nature can be further mimickedbecause the catalyst process reveals several opportunities forduplicating catalyst mechanisms of action, and hence improving the useof spectral catalysts, as well as the control of countless chemicalreactions and transformations.

For example, the previously discussed reaction of hydrogen and oxygen toproduce water, which used platinum as a catalyst, is a good startingpoint for understanding catalyst mechanisms of action. For example, thisinvention discloses that platinum catalyzes the reaction in several waysnot contemplated by the prior art:

-   -   Platinum directly resonates with and energizes reaction        intermediates and/or transients (e.g., atomic hydrogen and        hydroxy radicals);    -   Platinum harmonically resonates with and energizes at least one        reaction intermediate and or transient (e.g., atomic hydrogen);        and    -   Platinum energizes multiple upper energy levels of at least one        reaction intermediate and or transient (e.g., atomic hydrogen).

This knowledge can be utilized to improve the functioning of thespectral catalyst and/or spectral energy catalyst, to design spectralcatalysts and spectral energy catalysts which differ from actualcatalytic spectral patterns, to design physical catalysts (orconditionable participants that can be conditioned to function asphysical catalysts), and to optimize environmental reaction conditionsin crystallization holoreaction systems. For example, the electronicfrequencies of potassium are in the visible light regions of theelectromagnetic spectrum. The electronic spectra of virtually all atomsare in the ultraviolet, visible light, and infrared regions. However,these very high electromagnetic frequencies can be a problem forlarge-scale and industrial applications because wave energies havinghigh frequencies typically do not penetrate matter very well (i.e., donot penetrate far into matter). The tendency of wave energy to beabsorbed rather than transmitted, can be referred to as attenuation.High frequency wave energies have a high attenuation, and thus do notpenetrate far into a typical industrial scale reaction vessel containingtypical reactants for a chemical reaction. Thus, the duplication andapplication of at least a portion of the spectral pattern of platinuminto a commercial scale reaction vessel will typically be a slow processbecause a large portion of the applied spectral pattern of the spectralcatalysts may be rapidly absorbed near the edges of the reaction vessel.

Thus, in order to input energy into a large industrial-sized commercialreaction vessel, a lower frequency energy could be used that wouldpenetrate farther into the reactants housed within the reaction vessel.The present invention teaches that this can be accomplished in a uniquemanner by copying nature. As discussed herein, the spectra of atoms andmolecules are broadly classified into three (3) different groups:electronic, vibrational, and rotational. The electronic spectra of atomsand small molecules are said to result from transitions of electronsfrom one energy level to another, and have the corresponding highestfrequencies, typically occurring in the ultraviolet (UV), visible, andinfrared (IR) regions of the EM spectrum. The vibrational spectra aresaid to result primarily from this movement of bonds between individualatoms within molecules, and typically occur in the infrared andmicrowave regions. Rotational spectra occur primarily in the microwaveand radiowave regions of the EM spectrum due, primarily, to the rotationof the molecules.

Microwave or radiowave radiation could be an acceptable frequency to beused to spectrally control a chemical reaction or transformation becauseit would penetrate well into a large reaction vessel. Unfortunately,potassium atoms do not produce frequencies in the microwave or radiowaveportions of the electromagnetic spectrum because they do not havevibrational or rotational spectra. However, by understanding themechanism of action of electronic potassium frequencies in phasetransformations, selected potassium frequencies can be used as a modelfor a spectral catalyst in the microwave portion of the spectrum.Specifically, as previously discussed by an analogy of platinum, onemechanism of action of potassium in the mixed KCl halide crystallizationreaction system to produce only KCl solid crystals involves energizingthe potassium atoms to produce resonant attraction and solid growth ofthe potassium atoms. Atomic potassium has a high frequency electronicspectrum without vibrational or rotational spectra. The NaCl and KClcrystals, on the other hand, are molecules and have vibrational androtational spectra as well as electronic spectra. Thus, the NaCl and KClmolecules absorb and heterodyne frequencies in the microwave portion ofthe electromagnetic spectrum.

Thus, to copy the mechanism of action of potassium in the reaction toform solid KCl, namely resonating with at least one reactionparticipant, the potassium atom can be specifically targeted viaresonance. However, instead of resonating with the potassium in itselectronic spectrum, as the KCl seed crystal does, at least one NaClfrequency in the microwave portion of the electromagnetic spectrum canbe used to resonate with the NaCl nuclei. NaCl molecules resonate at amicrowave frequency of about 13.0737 GHz. Energizing a mixedcrystallization Na, K, and Cl with a spectral catalyst at about 13.0737GHz will catalyze the formation of KCl. In this instance, the mechanismof action of the physical catalyst potassium has been partially copiedand reversed and the mechanism has been shifted to a different region ofthe electromagnetic spectrum. In other words, by engineering the NaClvibrational frequency, small NaCl molecules are energized and preventedfrom bonding to the KCl solid. Thus, by understanding the resonantmechanisms involved in phase transformations, the mechanisms can becopied in desired regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

According to the present invention, by again copying the mechanism ofaction, physical catalysts (e.g., seed crystals) frequencies can beadapted or selected to be convenient and/or efficient for the equipmentavailable. Specifically, harmonic frequencies can be utilized. Thepotassium atom has resonant frequencies which are harmonics of thesodium spectral frequencies. Thus, a K spectral light source canresonate harmonically with the sodium (in a sodium crystallizationsystem) and visa versa to enhance phase transformations. Similarly,harmonic overtones of materials can be used to alter and control thosematerial properties. In summary, a mechanism of action of a physicalcatalyst can be copied, duplicated or mimicked while moving the relevantenergy frequencies, to a portion of the electromagnetic spectrum thatmatches equipment available for the holoreaction system and theapplication of electromagnetic energy.

The third method discussed above for platinum catalyzing this reactioninvolves energizing at least one reaction component multiple upperenergy levels. Again, assume that the only spectral energy sourceavailable produces frequencies in the infra-red region, where many ofthe upper energy level electronic frequencies for atoms are located.These infra-red frequencies, for example for potassium, can be used toproduce resonant attraction and solid growth of the potassium atom in,for example, a potassium covalent crystal. Specifically, the presentinvention has discovered that a mechanism of action that physicalcatalysts use is to resonate with multiple upper energy levels of atleast one reaction participant. It is now understood that the use ofupper energy levels can affect and control transformations of matter.Once again, nature can be mimicked by duplicating one naturallyoccurring mechanism of action by specifically targeting multiple energylevels with a spectral catalyst to achieve energy transfer in a novelmanner.

The preceding discussion on duplicating catalyst mechanisms of action isjust the beginning of an understanding of many variables associated withthe use of spectral catalysts. These additional variables should beviewed as potentially very useful tools for enhancing the performance ofspectral energy, and/or physical catalysts. There are many factors andvariables that affect both catalyst performance, and chemical reactionsin general. For example, when the same catalyst (or conditionedparticipant) is mixed with the same reactant, but exposed to differentenvironmental reaction conditions such as temperature or pressure,different products can be produced. Consider the following example:

The same reactants produces quite different products in these tworeactions, namely 74% salinity or 100% salinity, depending on thereaction temperature.

Many factors are known in the art which affect the direction andintensity and rate at a which a reaction proceeds in general.Temperature is but one of these factors. Other factors include pressure,volume, surface area of physical catalysts, solvents, support materials,contaminants, catalyst size and shape and composition, reactor vesselsize, shape and composition, electric fields, magnetic fields, acousticfields and whether a conditioning energy was introduced to a conditionedparticipant prior to the conditioned participant being involved oractivated in a crystallization reaction system. The present inventionteaches that these factors all have one thing in common. These factorsare capable of changing the spectral patterns (i.e., frequency pattern)of, for example, participants and/or crystallization reaction systemcomponents. Some changes in spectra are very well studied and thus muchinformation is available for consideration and application thereof. Theprior art does not contemplate, however, the spectral chemistry basisfor each of these factors, and how they relate to catalyst mechanisms ofaction, and chemical reactions in general. Further, alternatively,effects of the aforementioned factors can be enhanced or diminished bythe application of additional spectral, spectral energy, and/or physicalcatalyst frequencies. Moreover, these environmental reaction conditionscan be at least partially simulated in a crystallization reaction systemby the application of one or more corresponding spectral environmentalreaction conditions (e.g., a spectral energy pattern which duplicates atleast a portion of one or more environmental reaction conditions).Alternatively, one spectral environmental reaction condition (e.g., aspectral energy pattern corresponding to temperature) could besubstituted for another (e.g., spectral energy pattern corresponding topressure) so long as the goal of matching of frequencies was met.

Temperature

At very low temperatures, the spectral pattern of an atom or moleculehas clean, crisp peaks (see FIG. 15 a). As the temperature increases,the peaks begin to broaden, producing a bell-shaped curve of a spectralpattern (see FIG. 15 b). At even higher temperatures, the bell-shapedcurve broadens even more, to include more and more frequencies on eitherside of the primary frequency (see FIG. 15 c). This phenomenon is called“broadening”.

These spectral curves are very much like the resonance curves discussedin the previous section. Spectroscopists use resonance curve terminologyto describe spectral frequency curves for atoms and molecules (see FIG.16). The frequency at the top of the curve, f_(o), is called theresonance frequency. There is a frequency (f₂) above the resonancefrequency and another (f₁) below it (i.e., in frequency), at which theenergy or intensity (i.e., amplitude) is 50% of that for the resonancefrequency f_(o). The quantity f₂−f₁ is a measure of how wide or narrowthe spectral frequency curve is. This quantity (f₂−f₁) is the “linewidth”. A spectrum with narrow curves has a small line width, while aspectrum with wide curves has a large line width.

Temperature affects the line width of spectral curves. Line width canaffect catalyst performance, chemical reactions and/or reactionpathways. At low temperatures, the spectral curves of chemical specieswill be separate and distinct, with a lesser possibility for thetransfer of resonant energy between potential crystallization reactionsystem components (see FIG. 17 a). However, as the line widths ofpotentially reactive chemical species broaden, their spectral curves maystart to overlap with spectral curves of other chemical species (seeFIG. 17 b). When frequencies match, or spectral energy patterns overlap,energy transfers. Thus, when temperatures are low, frequencies do notmatch and reactions are slow. At higher temperatures, resonant transferof energy can take place and reactions can proceed very quickly orproceed along a different reaction pathway than they otherwise wouldhave at a lower temperature.

Besides affecting the line width of the spectral curves, temperaturealso can change, for example, the resonant frequency of holoreactionsystem components. For some chemical species, the resonant frequencywill shift as temperature changes. This can be seen in the infraredabsorption spectra in FIG. 18 a and blackbody radiation graphs shown inFIG. 18 b. Further, atoms and molecules do not all shift their resonantfrequencies by the same amount or in the same direction, when they areat the same temperature. This can also affect catalyst performance. Forexample, if a catalyst resonant frequency shifts more with increasedtemperature than the resonant frequency of its targeted chemicalspecies, then the catalyst could end up matching the frequency of achemical species, and resonance may be created where none previouslyexisted (see FIG. 18 c). Specifically, FIG. 18 c shows catalyst “C” atlow temperature and “C*” at high temperature. The catalyst “C*”resonates with reactant “A” at high temperatures, but not at lowtemperatures.

The amplitude or intensity of a spectral line may be affected bytemperature also. For example, linear and symmetric rotor molecules willhave an increase in intensity as the temperature is lowered while othermolecules will increase intensity as the temperature is raised. Thesechanges of spectral intensity can also affect catalyst performance.Consider the example where a low intensity spectral curve of a catalystis resonant with one or more frequencies of a specific chemical target.Only small amounts of energy can be transferred from the catalyst to thetarget chemical (e.g., a hydroxy intermediate). As temperatureincreases, the amplitude of the catalyst's curve increases also. In thisexample, the catalyst can transfer much larger amounts of energy to thechemical target when the temperature is raised.

If the chemical target is the intermediate chemical species for analternative reaction route, the type and ratio of end products may beaffected. By examining the above cyclohexene/palladium reaction again,at temperatures below 300° C., the products are benzene and hydrogengas. However, when the temperature is above 300° C., the products arebenzene and cyclohexane. Temperature is affecting the palladium and/orother constituents in the holoreaction system (including, for example,reactants, intermediates, and/or products) in such a way that analternative reaction pathway leading to the formation of cyclohexane isfavored above 300° C. This could be a result of, for example, increasedline width, altered resonance frequencies, or changes in spectral curveintensities for any of the components in the holoreaction system.

It is important to consider not only the spectral catalyst frequenciesone may wish to use to catalyze a reaction, but also the reactionconditions under which those frequencies are supposed to work. Forexample, in the palladium/cyclohexene reaction at low temperatures, thepalladium may match frequencies with an intermediate for the formationof hydrogen molecules (H₂). At temperatures above 300° C. the reactantsand transients may be unaffected, but the palladium may have anincreased line width, altered resonant frequency and/or increasedintensity. The changes in the line width, resonant frequency and/orintensity may cause the palladium to match frequencies and transferenergy to an intermediate in the formation of cyclohexane instead. If aspectral catalyst was to be used to assist in the formation ofcyclohexane at room temperature, the frequency for the cyclohexaneintermediate would be more effective if used, rather than the spectralcatalyst frequency used at room temperature.

Thus, it may be important to understand the holoreaction system dynamicsin designing and selecting an appropriate spectral catalyst. Thetransfer of energy between different crystallization reaction systemcomponents will vary, depending on temperature. Once understood, thisallows one to knowingly adjust temperature to optimize a reaction,reaction product, interaction and/or formation of reaction product at adesirable reaction rate, without the trial and error approaches of priorart. Further, it allows one to choose catalysts such as physicalcatalysts, spectral catalysts, and/or spectral energy patterns tooptimize a desired reaction pathway. This understanding of the spectralimpact of temperature allows one to perform customarily high temperature(and, sometimes high danger) chemical processes at safer, roomtemperatures. It also allows one to design physical catalysts which workat much broader temperature ranges (e.g., frigid arctic temperatures orhot furnace temperatures), as desired.

Pressure

Pressure and temperature are directly related to each other.Specifically, from the ideal gas law, we know thatPV=nRTwhere P is pressure, V is volume, n is the number of moles of gas, R isthe gas constant, and T is the absolute temperature. Thus, atequilibrium, an increase in temperature will result in a correspondingincrease in pressure. Pressure also has an effect on spectral patterns.Specifically, increases in pressure can cause broadening and changes inspectral curves, just as increases in temperature do (see FIG. 19 whichshows the pressure broadening effects on the NH₃ 3.3 absorption line).

Mathematical treatments of pressure broadening are generally groupedinto either collision or statistical theories. In collision theories,the assumption is made that most of the time an atom or molecule is sofar from other atoms or molecules that their energy fields do notinteract. Occasionally, however, the atoms or molecules come so closetogether that they collide. In this case, the atom or molecule mayundergo a change in wave phase (spectral) function, or may change to adifferent energy level. Collision theories treat the matter's emittedenergy as occurring only when the atom or molecule is far from others,and is not involved in a collision. Because collision theories ignorespectral frequencies during collisions, collision theories fail topredict accurately chemical behavior at more than a few atmospheres ofpressure, when collisions are frequent.

Statistical theories, however, consider spectral frequencies before,during and after collisions. They are based on calculating theprobabilities that various atoms and/or molecules are interacting with,or perturbed by other atoms or molecules. The drawback with statisticaltreatments of pressure effects is that the statistical treatments do notdo a good job of accounting for the effects of molecular motion. In anyevent, neither collision nor statistical theories adequately predict therich interplay of frequencies and heterodynes that take place aspressure is increased. Experimental work has demonstrated that increasedpressure can have effects similar to those produced by increasedtemperature, by:

-   -   1) broadening of the spectral curve, producing increased line        width; and    -   2) shifting of the resonant frequency (f₀).

Pressure effects different from those produced by temperatures are: (1)pressure changes typically do not affect intensity, (see FIG. 20 whichshows a theoretical set of curves exhibiting an unchanged intensity forthree applied different pressures) as with temperature changes; and (2)the curves produced by pressure broadening are often less symmetric thanthe temperature affected curves. Consider the shape of the threetheoretical curves shown in FIG. 20. As the pressure increases, thecurves become less symmetrical. A tail extending into the higherfrequencies develops. This upper frequency extension is confirmed by theexperimental work shown in FIG. 21. Specifically, FIG. 21 a shows apattern for the absorption by water vapor in air (10 g of H₂O per cubicmeter); and FIG. 21 b shows the absorption in NH₃ at 1 atmospherepressure.

Pressure broadening effects on spectral curves are broadly grouped intotwo types: resonance or “Holtsmark” broadening, and “Lorentz”broadening. Holtsmark broadening is secondary to collisions betweenatoms of the same element, and thus the collisions are considered to besymmetrical. Lorentz broadening results from collisions between atoms ormolecules which are different. The collisions are asymmetric, and theresonant frequency, f_(o), is often shifted to a lower frequency. Thisshift in resonant frequency is shown in FIG. 20. The changes in spectralcurves and frequencies that accompany changes in pressure can affectcatalysts, both physical and spectral, and chemical reactions and/orreaction pathways. At low pressures, the spectral curves tend to befairly narrow and crisp, and nearly symmetrical about the resonantfrequency. However, as pressures increase, the curves may broaden,shift, and develop high frequency tails.

At low pressures the spectral frequencies in the crystallizationreaction system might be so different for the various atoms andmolecules that there may be little or no resonant effect, and thuslittle or no energy transfer. At higher pressures, however, thecombination of broadening, shifting and extension into higherfrequencies can produce overlapping between the spectral curves,resulting in the creation of resonance, where none previously existed,and thus, the transfer of energy. The crystallization reaction systemmay proceed down one reaction pathway or another, depending on thechanges in spectral curves produced by various pressure changes. Onereaction pathway may be resonant and proceed at moderate pressure, whileanother reaction pathway may be resonant and predominate at higherpressures. As with temperature, it is important to consider thecrystallization reaction system frequencies and mechanisms of action ofvarious catalysts under the environmental reaction conditions one wishesto duplicate. Specifically, in order for an efficient transfer of energyto occur between, for example, a spectral catalyst and at least onereactant in a crystallization reaction system, there must be at leastsome overlap in frequencies.

For example, a reaction with a physical catalyst seed crystal at 400 THzand a key covalent adatom at 500 THz may proceed slowly at atmosphericpressure. Where the pressure is raised to about five (5) atmospheres,the catalyst broadens out through the 500 THz, for example, of theadatom. This allows the transfer of energy between the catalyst andadatom by, for example, energizing and stimulating the adatom. Thecrystallization reaction then proceeds very quickly. Without wishing tobe bound by any particular theory or explanation, it appears that, thespeed of the reaction has much less to do with the number of collisions(as taught by the prior art) than it has to do with the spectralpatterns of the crystallization reaction system components. In the aboveexample, the reaction could be energized at low pressures by applyingthe 500 THz frequency to directly stimulate and attract the key adatom.This could also be accompanied indirectly using various heterodynes,(e.g., @ 1,000 THz harmonic, or a 100 THz non-harmonic heterodynebetween the catalyst and transient (500 THz−400 THz=100 THz.).

As shown herein, the transfer of energy between differentcrystallization reaction system components will vary, depending onpressure. Once understood, this allows one to knowingly adjust pressureto optimize a reaction, without the trial and error approaches of priorart. Further, it allows one to choose catalysts such as physicalcatalysts, seed crystals, epitaxial substrates, spectral catalysts,and/or spectral energy patterns to optimize one or more desired reactionpathways. This understanding of the spectral impact of pressure allowsone to perform customarily high pressure (and thus, typically, highdanger) chemical processes at safer, room pressures. It also allows oneto design physical catalysts which work over a large range of acceptablepressures (e.g., low pressures approaching a vacuum to severalatmospheres of pressure).

Surface Area

Traditionally, the surface area of a catalyst has been considered to beimportant because the available surface area controls the number ofavailable binding sites. Supposedly, the more exposed binding sites, themore catalysis. In light of the spectral mechanisms disclosed in thepresent invention, surface area may be important for another reason.

Many of the spectral catalyst frequencies that correspond to physicalcatalysts are electronic frequencies in the visible light andultraviolet regions of the spectrum. These high frequencies haverelatively poor penetrance into, for example, large reaction vesselsthat contain one or more reactants. The high frequency spectralemissions from a catalyst such as a seed crystal will thus not travelvery far into such a crystallization reaction system before suchspectral emissions are absorbed. Thus, for example, an atom or moleculemust be fairly close to a physical catalyst so that their respectiveelectronic frequencies can interact.

Thus, surface area primarily affects the probability that a particularchemical species, will be close enough to the physical catalyst tointeract with its electromagnetic spectra emission(s) and in the case ofcrystallization, be attracted to the catalyst as an adatom. With smallsurface area, few atoms or molecules will be close enough to interact.However, as surface area increases, so too does the probability thatmore atoms or molecules will be within range for reaction. Thus, inaddition to increasing the available number of binding sites, largersurface area probably increases the volume of the crystallizationreaction system exposed to the spectral catalyst frequencies orpatterns. This is similar to the concept of assuring adequatepenetration of a spectral catalyst into a crystallization reactionsystem (e.g., assuming that there are adequate opportunities for speciesto interact with each other).

An understanding of the effects of surface area on catalysts andcrystallization reaction system components allows one to knowinglyadjust surface area, spectral emission, and other crystallizationreaction system components to optimize a reaction, reaction pathwayand/or formation of reaction product(s), at a desirable reaction rate,without the drawbacks of the prior art. For instance, surface area iscurrently optimized by making traditional chemical catalyst particles assmall as possible, thereby maximizing the overall surface area. Thesmall particles have a tendency to, for example, sinter (merge or bondtogether) which decreases the overall surface area and catalyticactivity. Rejuvenation of a large surface area catalyst can be a costlyand time-consuming process. This process can be avoided with anunderstanding of the herein presented invention in the field of spectralchemistry. For example, assume a reaction is quickly catalyzed by a 3 m²catalyst bed (in a transfer of energy from catalyst to a key reactantand product). After sintering takes place, however, the surface area isreduced to 1 m². Thus, the transfer of energy from the catalyst isdramatically reduced, and the reaction slows down. The costly andtime-consuming process of rejuvenating the surface area can be avoided(or at least delayed) by inhibiting the crystallization reaction system(i.e., sintering) with one or more desirable spectral energy patterns.In addition, because spectral energy patterns can affect the finalphysical form or phase of a material, as well as its chemical formula,the sintering process itself may be reduced or eliminated.

Further, the penetrance of spectral frequencies into a crystallizationreaction system can be enhanced, creating a “virtually” enlargedsurface. For example, in a metal alloy crystallization reaction system,spectral frequencies of a desired metal in the alloy can be transmittedonto the seed crystal. These spectral frequencies may act to extent theeffective spectral emissions of the metal many times further than wouldnormally occur with typical attenuation. Crystallizing species will beattracted by resonance from much further away, enhancing formation ofthe alloy. These same methods can be used to control selectivity ofcrystallization, such as ratios or symmetry of species within amaterial, such as an alloy.

Catalyst Size and Shape

In a related line of reasoning, catalyst size and shape are classicallythought to affect physical catalyst activity. Crystallization controlledby critical nucleus size has historically been used to steertransformation pathways. As with surface area, certain particle sizes(e.g., critical nuclei) are thought to provide a stable structure andthus maximize the transformation rate and amount. The relationshipbetween size and surface area has been previously discussed.

In light of the current understanding of the spectral mechanismsunderlying the activity of physical catalysts and transformations ingeneral, catalyst size and shape may be important for other reasons. Oneof those reasons is a phenomenon called “self absorption”. When a singleatom or molecule produces its' classical spectral pattern it radiateselectromagnetic energy which travels outward from the atom or moleculeinto neighboring space. FIG. 22 a shows radiation from a single atomversus radiation from a group of atoms as shown in FIG. 22 b. As moreand more atoms or molecules group together, radiation from the center ofthe group is absorbed by its' neighbors and may never make it out intospace. Depending on the size and shape of the group of atoms, selfabsorption can cause a number of changes in the spectral emissionpattern (see FIG. 23). Specifically, FIG. 23 a shows a normal spectralcurve produced by a single atom; FIG. 23 b shows a resonant frequencyshift due to self absorption; FIG. 23 c shows a self-reversal spectralpattern produced by self absorption in a group of atoms and FIG. 23 dshows a self-reversal spectral pattern produced by self absorption in agroup of atoms. These changes include a shift in resonant frequency andself-reversal patterns.

The changes in spectral curves and frequencies that accompany changes incatalyst (e.g., seed crystal) size and shape can affect catalysts,chemical transformations and/or reaction pathways. For example, atoms ormolecules of a physical catalyst may produce spectral frequencies in thecrystallization reaction system which resonate with a key intermediateand/or reaction product. With larger groups of atoms, such as in aforming crystal, the combination of resonant frequency shifting andself-reversal may eliminate overlapping between the spectral curves ofchemical species, thereby minimizing or destroying conditions ofresonance, and for example slowing the rate of crystallization.

A crystallization reaction system may proceed down one reaction pathwayor another, depending on the changes in spectral curves produced by theparticle sizes. For example, a catalyst (or conditioned participant)having a moderate particle size may proceed down a first reactionpathway while a larger size catalyst may direct the reaction downanother reaction pathway.

The changes in spectral curves and frequencies that accompany changes incatalyst size and shape are relevant for practical applications The useof spectral catalysts according to the present invention allows for muchfiner tuning of these processes. For example, the high level of catalystactivity obtained with a smaller catalyst size can still be obtained by,for example, augmenting the physical catalyst with at least a portion ofone or more spectral catalyst(s).

For example, assume that a 10 μm average particle size catalyst (e.g.,seed crystal) has 50% of the activity of a 5 μm average particle sizecatalyst. One approach to maintain desired rates of crystallization isto use the 10 μm physical catalyst and augment the physical catalystwith at least a portion of at least one spectral catalyst. Catalystactivity can be effectively doubled (or increased even more) by thespectral catalyst, resulting in approximately the same degree ofactivity (or perhaps even greater activity) as with the 5 μm catalyst.Thus, the present invention permits the size of the catalyst to bechanged, while retaining favorable conditions so that the reaction canbe performed economically, compared to traditional prior art approaches.

Another manner to approach the issue is to eliminate the physicalcatalyst completely. For example, in another embodiment of theinvention, a fiberoptic sieve, (e.g., one with very large pores) can beused in a flow-through reactor vessel. According to the presentinvention, the spectral catalyst can be emitted through the fiberopticsieve, thus catalyzing the reacting species as they flow by. Thisimprovement over the prior art approaches has significant processingimplications including lower costs, higher rates and improved safety, tomention only a few.

Materials are also manufactured in a range of shapes, as well as sizes.Shapes include spheres, irregular granules, pellets, extrudate, andrings. Some shapes are more expensive to manufacture than others, whilesome shapes have superior properties (e.g., material activity, strength,etc.) than others. While spheres are inexpensive to manufacture, apacked bed of spheres produces high-pressure drops and the spheres aretypically not very strong. Traditional physical catalyst rings on theother hand, have superior strength and activity and produce very littlepressure drop, but they are also relatively expensive to produce.

Spectral energy catalysts permit a greater flexibility in choosingshape, for example, in a traditional chemical catalyst. For example,instead of using a packed bed of inexpensive spheres, with theinevitable high pressure drop and resulting mechanical damage to thecatalyst particles, catalyst rings can be used while obtaining the sameor greater catalyst activity. Using the spectral crystallizationtechniques described herein, particularly those related to directionalgrowth, the shape of formed materials can be more easily controlled.

The use of spectral energy catalysts and/or spectral environmentalreaction conditions to control shape of materials has the followingadvantages:

-   -   permit the use of less expensive shaped material particles;    -   permit the use of fewer particles overall;    -   permit the use of stronger shapes of particles; and    -   permit the use of particle shapes with more desirable        performance characteristics.

Their use to replace existing physical catalysts has similar advantages:

-   -   eliminate the use and expense of catalyst particles (e.g., seed        crystals) altogether;    -   allow use of spectral catalyst delivery systems that are faster;        and    -   delivery systems can be designed to incorporate superior        materials characteristics.

Catalyst size and shape are also important to spectral emission patternsbecause all objects have an NOF depending on their size and shape. Thesmaller an object is in dimension, the higher its NOF will be infrequency (because speed=length×frequency). Also, two (2) objects of thesame size, but different shape will have different NOF's (e.g., theresonant NOF frequency of a 1.0 m diameter sphere, is different from theNOF for a 1.0 m edged cube). Wave energies (both acoustic and EM) willhave unique resonant frequencies for particular objects. The objects,such as physical catalyst particles or powder granules of reactants in aslurry, will act like antennas, absorbing and emitting energies at theirstructurally resonant frequencies. With this understanding, one isfurther able to manipulate and control the size and shape ofcrystallization reaction system components (e.g., physical catalysts,reactants, etc.) to achieve desired effects. For example, a transientfor a desired reaction pathway may produce a spectral rotationalfrequency of 30 GHz. Catalyst spheres 1 cm in diameter with structuralEM resonant frequency of 30 GHz (3×10⁸ m/s 1×10⁻² m=30×10⁹ Hz), can beused to direct the reaction. The catalyst particles will structurallyresonate with the rotational frequency of the transient, providingenergy to the transient and controlling the reaction. Likewise, thestructurally resonant catalyst particles may be further energized by aspectral energy catalyst, such as, for example, 30 GHz microwaveradiation. Thus understood, the spectral dynamics of chemicaltransformations can be much more precisely controlled than in prior arttrial and error approaches.

Solvents

Typically, the term solvent is applied to mixtures for which the solventis a liquid, however, it should be understood that solvents may alsocomprise solids, liquids, gases or plasmas and/or mixtures and/orcomponents thereof. The prior art typically groups liquid solvents intothree broad classes: aqueous, organic, and non-aqueous. If an aqueoussolvent is used, it means that the solvent is water. Organic solventsinclude hydrocarbons such as alcohols and ethers. Non-aqueous solventsinclude inorganic non-water substances. Many chemical transformationstake place in solvents.

Because solvents are themselves composed of atoms, molecules and/or ionsthey can have pronounced effects on chemical transformations. Solventsare comprised of matter and they emit their own spectral frequencies.The present invention teaches that these solvent frequencies undergo thesame basic processes discussed earlier, including heterodyning,resonance, and harmonics. Spectroscopists have known for years that asolvent can dramatically affect the spectral frequencies produced byits' solutes. Likewise, chemists have known for years that solvents canaffect catalyst activity and material properties. However, thespectroscopists and chemists in the prior art have apparently notassociated these long studied changes in solute frequencies with changesin catalyst activity and material properties. The present inventionrecognizes that these changes in solute spectral frequencies can affectcatalyst activity and chemical reactions and/or reaction pathways ingeneral. Changes of curve intensity, gradual or abrupt shifting of theresonant frequency f₀, and even abrupt rearrangement of resonantfrequencies can occur.

Further, the present invention recognizes that one or more spectralfrequencies in a solvent may be targeted by a spectral energy pattern orspectral energy conditioning pattern to change one or more properties ofthe solvent, and hence may change the reaction and energy dynamics in aholoreaction system. Similarly, a spectral energy pattern or a spectralenergy conditioning pattern may be applied to a solute, causing a changein one or more properties of the solute, solvent, or solute/solventsystem, and hence may change the reaction and energy dynamics in aholoreaction systems.

When reviewing FIG. 24 a, the solid line represents a portion of thespectral pattern of phthalic acid in alcohol while the dotted linerepresents phthalic acid in the solvent hexane. Consider a phasereaction taking place in alcohol, in which the spectral catalystresonates with phthalic acid at a frequency of 1,250, the large solidcurve in the middle. If the solvent is changed to hexane, the phthalicacid no longer resonates at a frequency of 1,250 and the spectralcatalyst can not stimulate and energize its phase transformation. Thechange in solvent will render the spectral catalyst ineffective.

Similarly, in reference to FIG. 24 b, iodine produces a high intensitycurve at 580 when dissolved in carbon tetrachloride, as shown in curveB. In alcohol, as shown by curve A the iodine produces instead, amoderate intensity curve at 1,050 and a low intensity curve at 850.Accordingly, assume that a reaction uses a spectral catalyst thatresonates directly with the iodine in carbon tetrachloride at 580 for anorganohalide crystallization. If the spectral catalyst does not changeand the solvent is changed to alcohol, the spectral catalyst will nolonger function because frequencies no longer match and energy will nottransfer. Specifically, the spectral catalyst's frequency of 580 will nolonger match and resonate with the new iodine frequencies of 850 and1,050.

There is also the possibility that the change in the solvent could bringthe catalyst into resonance with a different chemical species and helpthe reaction proceed down an alternative reaction pathway.

Finally, consider the graph in FIG. 24 c, which shows a variety ofsolvent mixtures ranging from 100% benzene at the far left, to a 50:50mixture of benzene and alcohol in the center, to 100% alcohol at the farright. The solute is phenylazophenol. The phenylazophenol has afrequency of 855-860 for most of the solvent mixtures. For a 50:50benzene:alcohol mixture the frequency is 855; or for a 98:2benzene:alcohol mixture the frequency is still 855. However, at 99.5:0.5benzene:alcohol mixture, the frequency abruptly changes to about 865. Aspectral catalyst active in 100% benzene by resonating with thephenylazophenol at 865, will lose its activity if there is even a slightamount of alcohol (e.g., 0.5%) in the solvent.

Thus understood, the principles of spectral chemistry presented hereincan be applied to catalysis, and reactions and/or reaction pathways ingeneral. Instead of using the prior art trial and error approach to thechoice of solvents and/or other crystallization reaction systemcomponents, solvents can be tailored and/or modified to optimize thespectral environmental reaction conditions. For example, a reaction maybe designed to have a key reaction participant (e.g., reaction vessel)which resonates at 400 THz, while the catalyst (e.g., seed crystal)resonates at 800 THz transferring energy harmonically. A more efficientsystem could be designed with a different solvent that may cause theresonant frequencies of both the participant and the catalyst toabruptly shift to 600 THz. There the catalyst would resonate directlywith the participant, transferring even more energy, and catalyzing thecrystallization reaction system more efficiently.

Further, the properties of solvents, solutes, and solvent/solute systemsmay be affected by spectral energy providers. Water is the universalsolvent. It is commonly known and understood that if water is heated,its kinetic energy increases, and hence, the rate at which solutesdissolve also increases. After a solute has been added to a solvent,such as water, physical properties such as pH and conductivity change ata rate related to their kinetic energy and the temperature of thesolute/solvent system.

A novel aspect of the present invention is the understanding that theproperties of solvents, solutes and solvent/solute systems may beaffected and controlled by spectral energy providers outside the realmof simple thermal or kinetic mechanisms. For example, water at about 28°C. will dissolve salt (sodium chloride) at a particular rate. Water atabout 28° C. which has been conditioned with its own vibrationalovertones will dissolve salt faster, even though there is no apparentdifference in temperature. Similarly, if salt is added to water, thereis a predictable rate of change in the pH and conductivity of thesolution. If the water is conditioned or spectrally activated with itsown vibrational overtones, either before or after, respectively, theaddition of the salt, the rate of change of pH and conductivity isenhanced even though there is no difference in temperature. Theseeffects are shown in greater detail in the Examples section herein.

Further, if the salt is conditioned with some of its own electronicfrequencies prior to adding it to water, the rate of change ofconductivity is again enhanced, even though there is again no apparentdifference in temperature. These effects are shown in greater detail inthe Examples section herein.

In general, delivery of spectral energy patterns and/or spectral energyconditioning patterns to solvents, solutes: and solvent/solute systemsmay change the energy dynamics of the solvent and/or solute and hencetheir properties in a holoreaction system. These spectral techniquesdisclosed herein can be used to control many aspects of mattertransformations such as chemical reactions, phase changes, and materialproperties (all of which are described in the Examples section herein).

Support Materials

Traditional physical catalysts can be either unsupported or supported.An unsupported catalyst is a formulation of the pure catalyst, withsubstantially no other molecules present. Unsupported catalysts arerarely used industrially because these catalysts generally have lowsurface area and hence low activity. The low surface area can resultfrom, for example, sintering, or coalescence of small molecules of thecatalyst into larger particles in a process which reduces surfacetension of the particles. An example of an unsupported catalyst isplatinum alloy gauze, which is sometimes used for the selectiveoxidation of ammonia to nitric oxide. Another example is small silvergranules, sometimes used to catalyze the reaction of methanol with air,to form formaldehyde. When the use of unsupported catalysts is possible,their advantages include straightforward fabrication and relativelysimple installation in various industrial processes.

A supported catalyst is a formulation of the catalyst with otherparticles, the other particles acting as a supporting skeleton for thecatalyst. Traditionally, the support particles are thought to be inert,thus providing a simple physical scaffolding for the catalyst molecules.Thus, one of the traditional functions of the support material is togive the catalyst shape and mechanical strength. The support material isalso said to reduce sintering rates. If the catalyst support is finelydivided similar to the catalyst, the support will act as a “spacer”between the catalyst particles, and hence prevent sintering. Analternative theory holds that an interaction takes place between thecatalyst and support, thereby preventing sintering. This theory issupported by the many observations that catalyst activity is altered bychanges in support material structure and composition.

Supported catalysts are generally made by one or more of the followingthree methods: impregnation, precipitation, and/or crystallization.Impregnation techniques use preformed support materials, which are thenexposed to a solution containing the catalyst or its precursors. Thecatalyst or precursors diffuse into the pores of the support. Heating,or another conversion process, drives off the solvent and transforms thecatalyst or precursors into the final catalyst. The most common supportmaterials for impregnation are refractory oxides such as aluminas andaluminum hydrous oxides. These support materials have found theirgreatest use for catalysts that must operate under extreme conditionssuch as steam reforming, because they have reasonable mechanicalstrengths.

Precipitation techniques use concentrated solutions of catalyst salts(e.g., usually metal salts). The salt solutions are rapidly mixed andthen allowed to precipitate in a finely divided form. The precipitate isthen prepared using a variety of processes including washing, filtering,drying, heating, and pelleting. Often a graphitic lubricant is added.Precipitated catalysts have high catalytic activity secondary to highsurface area, but they are generally not as strong as impregnatedcatalysts.

Traditional crystallization techniques produce support materials calledzeolites. The structure of these crystallized catalyst zeolites is basedon SiO₄ and AlO₄ (see FIG. 25 a which shows the tetrahedral units ofsilicon; and FIG. 25 b which shows the tetrahedral units of aluminum).These units link in different combinations to form structural families,which include rings, chains, and complex polyhedra. For example, theSiO₄ and AlO₄ tetrahderal units can form truncated octahedronstructures, which form the building blocks for A, X, and Y zeolites (seeFIG. 26 a which shows a truncated octahedron structure with linesrepresenting oxygen atoms and corners are Al or Si atoms; FIG. 26 bwhich shows zeolite with joined truncated octahedrons joined by oxygenbridges between square faces; and FIG. 26 c which shows zeolites X and Ywith joined truncated octahedrons joined by oxygen bridges betweenhexagonal faces).

The crystalline structure of zeolites gives them a well defined poresize and structure. This differs from the varying pore sizes found inimpregnated or precipitated support materials. Zeolite crystals are madeby mixing solutions of silicates and aluminates and the catalyst.Crystallization is generally induced by heating (see spectral effects oftemperature in the Section entitled “Temperature”). The structure of theresulting zeolite depends on the silicon/aluminum ratio, theirconcentration, the presence of added catalyst, the temperature, and eventhe size of the reaction vessels used, all of which are environmentalreaction conditions. Zeolites generally have greater specificity thanother catalyst support materials (e.g., they do not just speed up thereaction). They also may steer the reaction towards a particularreaction pathway.

Spectral crystallization methods can be used to affect and control theformation of desired materials such as, for example, zeolites. Theprocesses taught herein can, for example, crystallize materials faster,more economically, in greater numbers, with more convenientenvironmental factors (e.g., lower temperatures for zeolite), with moreprecise control of poisons or promoters, and with desired materialproperties, etc.

Support materials can affect the activity of a catalyst. Traditionally,the prior art has attributed these effects to geometric factors.However, according to the present invention, there are spectral factorsto consider as well. It has been well established that solvents affectthe spectral patterns produced by their solutes. Solvents can beliquids, solids, gases and/or plasmas Support materials can, in manycases, be viewed as nothing more than solid solvents for catalysts. Assuch, support materials can affect the spectral patterns produced bytheir solute catalysts.

Just as dissolved sugar can be placed into a solid phase solvent (ice),catalysts can be placed into support materials that are solid phasesolvents. These support material solid solvents can have similarspectral effects on catalysts that liquid solvents have. Supportmaterials can change spectral frequencies of their catalyst solutes by,for example, causing spectral curve broadening, changing of curveintensity, gradual or abrupt shifting of the resonant frequency f_(o),and even abrupt rearrangement of resonant frequencies.

Further, uses of spectral techniques to affect matter transformationsare not limited to solvent/solute or support/catalysts systems, butrather apply broadly to all material systems and phases of matter, andtheir respective properties (e.g., chemical, physical, electrical,magnetic, thermal, etc.).

The use of targeted spectral techniques in numerous materials systems(including solid, liquid and gas to control chemical reactions, phasechanges and material properties (e.g., chemical physical, electrical,thermal, etc.) is described more fully in the Examples section laterherein.

Support materials can be simply viewed as solid solvents for theircatalyst solutes. The present invention teaches that spectral techniquescan be used to control many aspects of matter transformation insolvent/solute systems such as chemical reactions, phase changes, andmaterial properties. Similarly, spectral techniques can be used tocontrol many aspects such as chemical reactions, phase changes, andmaterial properties of support/catalyst systems. These spectraltechniques can be used to affect the synthesis of support/catalystsystems, or to affect the subsequent properties of the support/catalystsystem in a holoreaction system.

Additionally, in transformations of matter, substrates are often used asa base for the growth of a desired species (e.g., epitaxial substrates).The methods taught herein can be used to control and direct interactionsof materials with substrates. For example, if the spectral frequenciesof a crystallization reaction system participant are caused to emanatefrom an amorphous surface (which traditionally does not supportformation of the desired crystalline species), crystals may be caused toform and adhere to that surface. In this manner, it should be understoodthat methods applied to support materials apply also to substrates ofall kinds.

Thus, due to the disclosure herein, it should become clear to an artisanof ordinary skill that changes in support materials can have dramaticeffects on catalyst activity. The support materials affect the spectralfrequencies produced by the catalysts. The changes in catalyst spectralfrequencies produce varying effects on chemical reactions and catalystactivity, including accelerating the rate of reaction and also guidingthe reaction on a particular reaction path. Thus support materials canpotentially influence the matching of frequencies and can thus favor thepossibility of transferring energy between crystallization reactionsystem components and/or spectral energy patterns, thus permittingcertain reactions to occur.

Poisoning

Poisoning of catalysts occurs when the catalyst activity is reduced byadding a small amount of another constituent, such as a chemicalspecies. The prior art has attributed poisoning to chemical species thatcontain excess electrons (e.g., electron donor materials) and toadsorption of poisons onto the physical catalyst surface where thepoison physically blocks reaction sites. However, neither of thesetheories satisfactorily explains poisoning.

Consider the case of nickel hydrogenation catalysts. These physicalcatalysts are substantially deactivated if only 0.1% sulphur compoundsby weight are adsorbed onto them. It is difficult to believe that 0.1%sulphur by weight could contribute so many electrons as to inactivatethe nickel catalyst. Likewise, it is difficult to believe that thepresence of 0.1% sulphur by weight occupies so many reaction sites thatit completely deactivates the catalyst. Accordingly, neither prior artexplanation is satisfying.

Poisoning phenomena can be more logically understood in terms ofspectral chemistry. In reference to the example in the Solvent Sectionusing a benzene solvent and phenylazophenol as the solute, in purebenzene the phenylazophenol had a spectral frequency of 865 Hz. Theaddition of just a few drops of alcohol (0.5%) abruptly changed thephenylazophenol frequency to 855. If the expectation was for thephenylazophenol to resonate at 865, then the alcohol would have poisonedthat particular reaction. The addition of small quantities of otherchemical species can change the resonant frequencies (f₀) of catalystsand reacting chemicals. The addition of another chemical species can actas a poison to take the catalyst and reacting species out of resonance(i.e., the presence of the additional species can remove any substantialoverlapping of frequencies and thus prevent any significant transfer ofenergy).

Besides changing resonant frequencies of chemical species, adding smallamounts of other chemicals can also affect the spectral intensities ofthe catalyst and, for example, other atoms and molecules in thecrystallization reaction system by either increasing or decreasing thespectral intensities. Consider cadmium and zinc mixed in analumina-silica precipitate (see FIG. 27 which shows the influences ofcopper and bismuth on the zinc/cadmium line ratio). A normal ratiobetween the cadmium 3252.5 spectral line and the zinc 3345.0 spectralline was determined. The addition of sodium, potassium, lead, andmagnesium had little or no effect on the Cd/Zn intensity ratio. However,the addition of copper reduced the relative intensity of the zinc lineand increased the cadmium intensity. Conversely, addition of bismuthincreased the relative intensity of the zinc line while decreasingcadmium.

Also, consider the effect of small amounts of magnesium on acopper-aluminum mixture (see FIG. 28 which shows the influence ofmagnesium on the copper aluminum intensity ratio). Magnesium present at0.6%, caused significant reductions in line intensity for copper and foraluminum. At 1.4% magnesium, the spectral intensities for both copperand aluminum were reduced by about a third. If the copper frequency isimportant for catalyzing a reaction, adding this small amount ofmagnesium would dramatically reduce the catalyst activity. Thus, itcould be concluded that the copper catalyst had been poisoned by themagnesium.

In summary, poisoning effects on catalysts are due to spectral changes.Adding a small amount of another chemical species to a physical catalystand/or crystallization reaction system can change the resonancefrequencies or the spectral intensities of one or more chemical species(e.g., reactant). The catalyst might remain the same, while a crucialintermediate is changed. Likewise, the catalyst might change, while theintermediate stays the same. They might both change, or they might bothstay the same and be oblivious to the added poison species. Thisunderstanding is important to achieving the goals of the presentinvention which include targeting species to cause an overlap infrequencies, or in this instance, specifically targeting one or morespecies so as to prevent any substantial overlap in frequencies and thusprevent reactions from occurring by blocking the transfer of energy.

Promoters

Just as adding a small amount of another chemical species to a catalystand crystallization reaction system can poison the activity of thecatalyst, the opposite can also happen. When an added species enhancesthe activity of a catalyst, it is called a promoter. For instance,adding a few percent calcium and potassium oxide to iron-aluminacompounds promotes activity of the iron catalyst for ammonia synthesis.Promoters act by all the mechanisms discussed previously in the Sectionsentitled Solvents, Support Materials, and Poisoning. Not surprisingly,some support materials actually are promoters. Promoters enhancecatalysts and specific reactions and/or reaction pathways by changingspectral frequencies and intensities. While a catalyst poison takes thereacting species out of resonance (i.e., the frequencies do notoverlap), the promoter brings them into resonance (i.e., the frequenciesdo overlap). Likewise, instead of reducing the spectral intensity ofcrucial frequencies, the promoter may increase the crucial intensities.

Thus, if it was desired for phenylazophenol to react at 855 in a benzenesolvent, alcohol could be added and the alcohol would be termed apromoter. If it was desired for the phenylazophenol too react at 865,alcohol could be added and the alcohol could be considered a poison.Thus understood, the differences between poisons and promoters are amatter of perspective, and depend on which reaction pathways and/orreaction products are desired. They both act by the same underlyingspectral chemistry mechanisms of the present invention.

Similarly, in crystallization and material transformation systems,addition of small amounts of other species can change reaction dynamics.For example, NaCl structure can be modified from cubic to pyramidal oroctahedral by the addition of small amounts of boron. Similarly,spectral irradiation (and hence activation) of NaCl solution through aboron containing substrate (borosilicate glass) may cause typical boronmodification of NaCl structure to become pyramidal or octahedral, eventhough no boron is physically present in the solution. A spectral boronpattern can substitute for the effects of a boron crystallizing agent inthe actual solution.

Thus understood, poisons, promoters, and all manner of crystallizationagents affect crystallization reaction system pathways through spectralmechanisms, which can be duplicated, approximated, or initiated.

Concentrations

Concentrations of chemical species are known to affect reaction ratesand dynamics. Concentration also affects catalyst activity. The priorart explains these effects by the probabilities that various chemicalspecies will collide with each other. At high concentrations of aparticular species, there are many individual atoms or moleculespresent. The more atoms or molecules present, the more likely they areto collide with something else. However, this statistical treatment bythe prior art does not explain the entire situation. FIG. 29 showsvarious concentrations of N-methyl urethane in a carbon tetrachloridesolution. At low concentrations, the spectral lines have a relativelylow intensity. However, as the concentration is increased, theintensities of the spectral curves increase also. At 0.01 molarity, thespectral curve at 3,460 cm⁻¹ is the only prominent frequency. However,at 0.15 molarity, the curves at 3,370 and 3,300 cm⁻¹ are also prominent.

As the concentration of a chemical species is changed, the spectralcharacter of that species in the reaction mixture changes also. Supposethat 3,300 and 3,370 cm⁻¹ are important frequencies for a desiredreaction pathway. At low concentrations the desired reaction pathwaywill not occur. However, if the concentrations are increased (and hencethe intensities of the relevant frequencies) the reaction will proceeddown the desired pathway. Concentration is also related to solvents,support structures, poisons and promoters, as previously discussed.

Similarly, as discussed previously, the intensity of spectral emissionsin a holoreaction system affects species attraction and phasetransformations. The effects of increased concentration can be mimickedspectrally. For example, crystallization can be caused to occur inunsaturated solutions, wherein crystallization does not normally occur.Further, by controlling the material transformation spectrally in theabsence of the inherently chaotic process which normally takes place ina saturated solution, structure and morphology can be more easilycontrolled.

Fine Structure Frequencies

The field of science concerned generally with measuring the frequenciesof energy and matter, known as spectroscopy, has already been discussedherein. Specifically, the three broad classes of atomic and molecularspectra were reviewed. Electronic spectra, which are due to electrontransitions, have frequencies primarily in the ultraviolet (UV),visible, and infrared (IR) regions, and occur in atoms and molecules.Vibrational spectra, which are due to, for example, bond motion betweenindividual atoms within molecules, are primarily in the IR, and occur inmolecules. Rotational spectra are due primarily to rotation of moleculesin space and have microwave or radiowave frequencies, and also occur inmolecules.

The previous discussion of various spectra and spectroscopy has beenoversimplified. There are actually at least three additional sets ofspectra, which comprise the spectrum discussed above herein, namely, thefine structure spectra and the hyperfine structure spectra and thesuperfine structure spectra. These spectra occur in atoms and molecules,and extend, for example, from the ultraviolet down to the low radioregions. These spectra are often mentioned in prior art chemistry andspectroscopy books typically as an aside, because prior art chemiststypically focus more on the traditional types of spectroscopy, namely,electronic, vibrational, and rotational.

The fine and hyperfine spectra are quite prevalent in the areas ofphysics and radio astronomy. For example, cosmologists map the locationsof interstellar clouds of hydrogen, and collect data regarding theorigins of the universe by detecting signals from outerspace, forexample, at 1.420 GHz, a microwave frequency which is one of thehyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogen. Most of the largedatabases concerning the microwave and radio frequencies of moleculesand atoms have been developed by astronomers and physicists, rather thanby chemists. This apparent gap between the use by chemists andphysicists, of the fine and hyperfine spectra in chemistry, hasapparently resulted in prior art chemists not giving much, if any,attention to these potentially useful spectra.

Referring again to FIGS. 9 a and 9 b, the Balmer series (i.e., frequencycurve II), begins with a frequency of 456 THz (see FIG. 30 a). Closerexamination of this individual frequency shows that instead of therebeing just one crisp narrow curve at 456 THz, there are really sevendifferent curves very close together that comprise the curve at 456 THz.The seven (7) different curves are fine structure frequencies. FIG. 30 bshows the emission spectrum for the 456 THz curve in hydrogen. Ahigh-resolution laser saturation spectrum, shown in FIG. 31, gives evenmore detail. These seven different curves, which are positioned veryclose together, are generally referred to as a multiplet.

Although there are seven different fine structure frequencies shown,these seven frequencies are grouped around two major frequencies. Theseare the two, tall, relatively high intensity curves shown in FIG. 30 b.These two high intensity curves are also shown in FIG. 31 at zero cm⁻¹(456.676 THz), and at relative wavenumber 0.34 cm⁻¹ (456.686 THz). Whatappears to be a single frequency of (456 THz), is actually composedpredominantly of two slightly different frequencies (456.676 and 456.686THz), and the two frequencies are typically referred to as doublet andthe frequencies are said to be split. The difference or split betweenthe two predominant frequencies in the hydrogen 456 THz doublet is 0.010THz (100 THz) or 0.34 cm⁻¹ wavnumbers. This difference frequency, 10GHz, is called the fine splitting frequency for the 456 THz frequency ofhydrogen.

Thus, the individual frequencies that are typically shown in ordinaryelectronic spectra are composed of two or more distinct frequenciesspaced very close together. The distinct frequencies spaced very closetogether are called fine structure frequencies. The difference, betweentwo fine structure frequencies that are split apart by a very slightamount, is a fine splitting frequency (see FIG. 32 which shows f₁ and f₂which comprise f₀ and which are shown as underneath f₀. The differencebetween f₁ and f₂ is known as the fine splitting frequency). This“difference” between two fine structure frequencies is important becausesuch a difference between any two frequencies is a heterodyne.

Almost all the hydrogen frequencies shown in FIGS. 9 a and 9 b aredoublets or multiplets. This means that almost all the hydrogenelectronic spectrum frequencies have fine structure frequencies and finesplitting frequencies (which means that these heterodynes are availableto be used as spectral catalysts, if desired). The present inventiondiscloses that these “differences” or heterodynes can be quite usefulfor certain reactions. However, prior to discussing the use of theseheterodynes, in the present invention, more must be understood aboutthese heterodynes. Some of the fine splitting frequencies (i.e.,heterodynes) for hydrogen are listed in Table 3. These fine splittingheterodynes range from the microwave down into the upper reaches of theradio frequency region. TABLE 3 Fine Splitting Frequencies for HydrogenFrequency (THz) Orbital Wavenumber (cm⁻¹) Fine Splitting Frequency 2,4662p 0.365 10.87 GHz 456 n2→3 0.340 10.02 GHz 2,923 3p 0.108 3.23 GHz2,923 3d 0.036 1.06 GHz 3,082 4p 0.046 1.38 GHz 3,082 4d 0.015 448.00MHz 3,082 4f 0.008 239.00 MHz

There are more than 23 fine splitting frequencies (i.e., heterodynes)for just the first series or curve I in hydrogen. Lists of the finesplitting heterodynes can be found, for example, in the classic 1949reference “Atomic Energy Levels” by Charlotte Moore. This reference alsolists 133 fine splitting heterodyned intervals for carbon, whosefrequencies range from 14.1 THz (473.3 cm⁻¹) down to 12.2. GHz (0.41cm⁻¹). Oxygen has 287 fine splitting heterodynes listed from 15.9 THz(532.5 cm⁻¹) down to 3.88 GHz (0.13 cm⁻¹). The 23 platinum finesplitting intervals detailed are from 23.3 THz (775.9 cm⁻¹) to 8.62 THzin frequency (287.9 cm⁻¹).

Diagrammatically, the magnification and resolution of an electronicfrequency into several closely spaced fine frequencies is depicted inFIG. 33. The electronic orbit is designated by the orbital number n=0,1, 2, etc. The fine structure is designated as α. A quantum diagram forthe hydrogen fine structure is shown in FIG. 34. Specifically, shown isthe fine structure of the n=1 and n=2 levels of the hydrogen atom. FIG.35 shows the multiplet splittings for the lowest energy levels ofcarbon, oxygen, and fluorine, as represented by “C”, “O” and “F”,respectively.

In addition to the fine splitting frequencies for atoms (i.e.,heterodynes), molecules also have similar fine structure frequencies.The origin and derivation for molecular fine structure and splitting isdifferent from that for atoms, however, the graphical and practicalresults are quite similar. In atoms, the fine structure frequencies aresaid to result from the interaction of the spinning electron with its'own magnetic field. Basically, this means the electron cloud of a singleatomic sphere, rotating and interacting with its' own magnetic field,produces the atomic fine structure frequencies. The prior art refers tothis phenomena as “spin-orbit coupling”. For molecules, the finestructure frequencies correspond to the actual rotational frequencies ofthe electronic or vibrational frequencies. So the fine structurefrequencies for atoms and molecules both result from rotation. In thecase of atoms, it is the atom spinning and rotating around itself, muchthe way the earth rotates around its axis. In the case of molecules, itis the molecule spinning and rotating through space.

FIG. 36 shows the infrared absorption spectrum of the SF₆ vibration bandnear 28.3 THz (10.6 μm wavelength, wavenumber 948 cm⁻¹) of the SF₆molecule. The molecule is highly symmetrical and rotates somewhat like atop. The spectral tracing was obtained with a high resolution gratingspectrometer. There is a broad band between 941 and 952 cm⁻¹ (28.1 and28.5 THz) with three sharp spectral curves at 946, 947, and 948 cm⁻¹(28.3, 28.32, and 23.834 THz).

FIG. 37 a shows a narrow slice being taken from between 949 and 950cm⁻¹, which is blown up to show more detail in FIG. 37 b. A tunablesemiconductor diode laser was used to obtain the detail. There are manymore spectral curves which appear when the spectrum is reviewed in finerdetail. These curves are called the fine structure frequencies for thismolecule. The total energy of an atom or molecule is the sum of its'electronic, vibrational, and rotational energies. Thus, the simplePlanck equation discussed previously herein:E=hvcan be rewritten as follows:E=E _(e) +E _(v) +E _(r)where E is the total energy, E_(e) is the electronic energy, E_(v) isthe vibrational energy, and E_(r) is the rotational energy.Diagrammatically, this equation is shown in FIG. 38 for molecules. Theelectronic energy, E_(e), involves a change in the orbit of one of theelectrons in the molecule. It is designated by the orbital number n=0,1, 2, 3, etc. The vibrational energy, E_(v), is produced by a change inthe vibration rate between two atoms within the molecule, and isdesignated by a vibrational number v=1, 2, 3, etc. Lastly, therotational energy, E_(r), is the energy of rotation caused by themolecule rotating around its' center of mass. The rotational energy isdesignated by the quantum number J=1, 2, and 3, etc., as determined fromangular momentum equations.

Thus, by examining the vibrational frequencies of SP₆ in more detail,the fine structure molecular frequencies become apparent. These finestructure frequencies are actually produced by the molecular rotations,“J”, as a subset of each vibrational frequency. Just as the rotationallevels “J” are substantially evenly separated in FIG. 38, they are alsosubstantially evenly separated when plotted as frequencies.

This concept may be easier to understand by viewing some additionalfrequency diagrams. For example, FIG. 39 a shows the pure rotationalabsorption spectrum for gaseous hydrogen-chloride and FIG. 39 b showsthe same spectrum at low resolution. In FIG. 39 a, the separate waves,that look something like teeth on a “comb”, correspond to the individualrotational frequencies. The complete wave (i.e., that wave comprisingthe whole comb) that extends in frequency from 20 to 500 cm⁻¹corresponds to the entire vibrational frequency. At low resolution ormagnification, this set of rotational frequencies appear to be a singlefrequency peaking at about 20 cm⁻¹ (598 GHz) (see FIG. 39 b). This isvery similar to the way atomic frequencies such as the 456 THz hydrogenfrequency appear (i.e., just one frequency at low resolution, that turnout to be several different frequencies at higher magnification).

In FIG. 40, the rotational spectrum (i.e., fine structure) of hydrogencyanide is shown, where “J” is the rotational level. Note again, theregular spacing of the rotational levels. (Note that this spectrum isoriented opposite of what is typical). This spectrum uses transmissionrather than emission on the horizontal Y-axis, thus, intensity increasesdownward on the Y-axis, rather than upwards.

Additionally, FIG. 41 shows the v₁-v₅ vibrational bands for FCCF (wherev₁ is vibrational level 1 and v₅ vibrational level 5) which includes aplurality of rotational frequencies. All of the fine sawtooth spikes arethe fine structure frequencies which correspond to the rotationalfrequencies. Note the substantially regular spacing of the rotationalfrequencies. Also note, the undulating pattern of the rotationalfrequency intensity, as well as the alternating pattern of therotational frequency intensities.

Consider the actual rotational frequencies (i.e., fine structurefrequencies) for the ground state of carbon monoxide listed in Table 4.TABLE 4 Rotational Frequencies and Derived Rotational Constant for CO inthe Ground State J Transition Frequency (MHz) Frequency (GHz) 0 → 1115,271.204 115 1 → 2 230,537.974 230 2 → 3 345,795.989 346 3 → 4461,040.811 461 4 → 5 576,267.934 576 5 → 6 691,472.978 691 6 → 7806,651.719 807Where; B_(o) = 57,635.970 MHz

Each of the rotational frequencies is regularly spaced at approximately115 GHz apart. Prior art quantum theorists would explain this regularspacing as being due to the fact that the rotational frequencies arerelated to Planck's constant and the moment of inertia (i.e., center ofmass for the molecule) by the equation: $B = \frac{h}{8\pi^{2}I}$where B is the rotational constant, h is Planck's constant, and I is themoment of inertia for the molecule. From there the prior art establisheda frequency equation for the rotational levels that corresponds to:f=2B(J+1)where f is the frequency, B is the rotational constant, and J is therotational level. Thus, the rotational spectrum (i.e., fine structurespectrum) for a molecule turns out to be a harmonic series of lines withthe frequencies all spaced or split (i.e., heterodyned) by the sameamount. This amount has been referred to in the prior art as “2B”, and“B” has been referred to as the “rotational constant”. In existingcharts and databases of molecular frequencies, “B” is usually listed asa frequency such as MHz. This is graphically represented for the firstfour rotational frequencies for CO in FIG. 42.

This fact is interesting for several reasons. The rotational constant“B”, listed in many databases, is equal to one half of the differencebetween rotational frequencies for a molecule. That means that B is thefirst subharmonic frequency, to the fundamental frequency “2B”, which isthe heterodyned difference between all the rotational frequencies. Therotational constant B listed for carbon monoxide is 57.6 GHz (57,635.970MHz). This is basically half of the 115 GHz difference between therotational frequencies. Thus, according to the present invention, if itis desired to stimulate a molecule's rotational levels, the amount “2B”can be used, because it is the fundamental first generation heterodyne.Alternatively, the same “B” can be used because “B” corresponds to thefirst subharmonic of that heterodyne.

Further, the prior art teaches that if it is desired to use microwavesfor stimulation, the microwave frequencies used will be restricted tostimulating levels at or near the ground state of the molecule (i.e.,n=0 in FIG. 38). The prior art teaches that as you progress upward inFIG. 38 to the higher electronic and vibrational levels, the requiredfrequencies will correspond to the infrared, visible, and ultravioletregions. However, the prior art is wrong about this point.

By referring to FIG. 38 again, it is clear that the rotationalfrequencies are evenly spaced out no matter what electronic orvibrational level is under scrutiny. The even spacing shown in FIG. 38is due to the rotational frequencies being evenly spaced as progressionis made upwards through all the higher vibrational and electroniclevels. Table 5 lists the rotational frequencies for lithium fluoride(LiF) at several different rotational and vibrational levels. TABLE 5Rotational Frequencies for Lithium Fluoride (LiF) Vibrational LevelRotational Transition Frequency (MHz) 0 0 → 1 89,740.46 0 1 → 2179,470.35 0 2 → 3 269,179.18 0 3 → 4 358,856.19 0 4 → 5 448,491.07 0 5→ 6 538,072.65 1 0 → 1 88,319.18 1 1 → 2 176,627.91 1 2 → 3 264,915.79 13 → 4 353,172.23 1 4 → 5 441,386.83 2 0 → 1 86,921.20 2 1 → 2 173,832.042 2 → 3 260,722.24 2 3 → 4 347,581.39 3 1 → 2 171,082.27 3 2 → 3256,597.84 3 3 → 4 342,082.66

It is clear from Table 5 that the differences between rotationalfrequencies, no matter what the vibrational level, is about 86,000 toabout 89,000 MHz (i.e., 86-89 GHz). Thus, according to the presentinvention, by using a microwave frequency between about 86,000 MHz and89,000 MHz, the molecule can be stimulated from the ground state levelall the way up to its' highest energy levels. This effect has not beeneven remotely suggested by the prior art. Specifically, the rotationalfrequencies of molecules can be manipulated in a unique manner. Thefirst rotational level has a natural oscillatory frequency (NOF) of89,740 MHz. The second rotational level has an NOF of 179,470 MHz. Thus,NOF _(rotational 1→2) −NOF _(rotational 0→1)=SubtractedFrequency_(rotation 2−1);or179,470 MHz−89,740 MHz=89,730 MHz.

Thus, the present invention has discovered that the NOF's of therotational frequencies heterodyne by adding and subtracting in a mannersimilar to the manner that all frequencies heterodyne. Specifically, thetwo rotational frequencies heterodyne to produce a subtracted frequency.This subtracted frequency happens to be exactly twice as big as thederived rotational constant “B” listed in nuclear physics andspectroscopy manuals. Thus, when the first rotational frequency in themolecule is stimulated with the Subtracted Frequency_(rotational 2−1),the first rotational frequency will heterodyne (i.e., in this case add)with the NOF_(rotational 0→1) (i.e., first rotational frequency) toproduce NOF_(rotational 1→2), which is the natural oscillatory frequencyof the molecule's second rotational level. In other words:Subtracted Frequency_(rotational 2−1) +NOF _(rotational 0→1) =NOF_(rotational 1→2);or89,730 MHz+89,740 MHz=179,470 MHz

Since the present invention has disclosed that the rotationalfrequencies are actually evenly spaced harmonics, the subtractedfrequency will also add with the second level NOF to produce the thirdlevel NOF. The subtracted frequency will add with the third level NOF toproduce the fourth level NOF. This procedure can be repeated over andover. Thus, according to the present invention, by using one singlemicrowave frequency, it is possible to stimulate all the rotationallevels in a vibratory band.

Moreover, if all the rotational levels for a vibrational frequency areexcited, then the vibrational frequency will also be correspondinglyexcited. Further, if all the vibrational levels for an electronic levelare excited, then the electronic level will be excited as well. Thus,according to the teachings of the present invention, it is possible toexcite the highest levels of the electronic and vibrational structure ofa molecule by using a single microwave frequency. This is contrary tothe prior art teachings that the use of microwaves is restricted to theground state of the molecule. Specifically, if the goal is to resonatedirectly with an upper vibrational or electronic level, the prior artteaches that microwave frequencies can not be used. If, however,according to the present invention, a catalytic mechanism of action isinitiated by, for example, resonating with target species indirectlythrough heterodynes, then one or more microwave frequencies can be usedto energize at least one upper level vibrational or electronic state.Accordingly, by using the teachings of the present invention inconjunction with the simple processes of heterodyning it becomes readilyapparent that microwave frequencies are not limited to the ground statelevels of molecules.

The present invention has determined that catalysts can actuallystimulate target species indirectly by utilizing at least one heterodynefrequency (e.g., harmonic). However, catalysts can also stimulate thetarget species by direct resonance with at least one fundamentalfrequency of interest. However, the rotational frequencies can result inuse of both mechanisms. For example, FIG. 42 shows a graphicalrepresentation of fine structure spectrum showing the first fourrotational frequencies for CO in the ground state. The first rotationalfrequency for CO is 115 GHz. The heterodyned difference betweenrotational frequencies is also 115 GHz. The first rotational frequencyand the heterodyned difference between frequencies are identical. All ofthe upper level rotational frequencies are harmonics of the firstfrequency. This relationship is not as apparent when one deals only withthe rotational constant “B” of the prior art. However, frequency-basedspectral chemistry analyses, like those of the present invention, makessuch concepts easier to understand.

Examination of the first level rotational frequencies for LiF shows thatit is nearly identical to the heterodyned difference between it and thesecond level rotational frequency. The rotational frequencies aresequential harmonics of the first rotational frequency. Accordingly, ifa molecule is stimulated with a frequency equal to 2B (i.e., aheterodyned harmonic difference between rotational frequencies) thepresent invention teaches that energy will resonate with all the upperrotational frequencies indirectly through heterodynes, and resonatedirectly with the first rotational frequency. This is an importantdiscovery.

The prior art discloses a number of constants used in spectroscopy thatrelate in some way or another to the frequencies of atoms and molecule,just as the rotational constant “B” relates to the harmonic spacing ofrotational fine structure molecular frequencies. The alpha (α)rotation-vibration constant is a good example of this. The alpharotation-vibration frequency constant is related to slight changes inthe frequencies for the same rotational level, when the vibrationallevel changes. For example, FIG. 43 a shows the frequencies for the samerotational levels, but different vibrational levels for LiF. Thefrequencies are almost the same, but vary by a few percent between thedifferent vibrational levels.

Referring to FIG. 43 b, the differences between all the frequencies forthe various rotational transitions at different vibrational levels ofFIG. 43 a are shown. The rotational transition 0→1 in the top line ofFIG. 43 b has a frequency of 89,740.46 MHz at vibrational level 0. Atvibrational level 1, the 0→1 transition is 88,319.18 MHz. The differencebetween these two rotational frequencies is 1,421.28 MHz. At vibrationallevel 2, the 0→1 transition is 86,921.20 MHz. The difference between itand the vibrational level 1 frequency (88,319.18 MHz) is 1,397.98 MHz.These slight differences for the same J rotational level betweendifferent vibrational levels are nearly identical. For the J=0→1rotational level they center around a frequency of 1,400 MHz.

For the J=1→2 transition, the differences center around 2,800 Hz, andfor the J=2→3 transition, the differences center around 4,200 Hz. Thesedifferent frequencies of 1,400, 2,800 and 4,200, Hz etc., are allharmonics of each other. Further, they are all harmonics of the alpharotation-vibration constant. Just as the actual molecular rotationalfrequencies are harmonics of the rotational constant B, the differencesbetween the rotational frequencies are harmonics of the alpharotation-vibration constant. Accordingly, if a molecule is stimulatedwith a frequency equal to the alpha vibration-rotation frequencies, thepresent invention teaches that energy will resonate with all therotational frequencies indirectly through heterodynes. This is animportant discovery.

Consider the rotational and vibrational states for the triatomicmolecule OCS shown in FIG. 44. FIG. 44 shows the same rotational level(J=1→2) for different vibrational states in the OCS molecule. For theground vibrational (000) level, J=1→2 transition; and the excitedvibrational state (100) J=1→2 transition, the difference between the twofrequencies is equal to 4× alpha₁ (4 α₁). In another excited state, thefrequency difference between the ground vibrational (000) level, J=1→2transition, and the center of the two 1-type doublets is 4× alpha₂(4α₂). In a higher excited vibrational state, the frequency differencebetween (000) and (02°0) is 8× alpha₂ (8α₂). Thus, it can be seen thatthe rotation-vibration constants “α” are actually harmonics of molecularfrequencies. Thus, according to the present invention, stimulating amolecule with an “α” frequency, or a harmonic of “α”, will eitherdirectly resonate with or indirectly heterodyne harmonically withvarious rotational-vibrational frequencies of the molecule.

Another interesting constant is the l-type doubling constant. Thisconstant is also shown in FIG. 44. Specifically, FIG. 44 shows therotational transition J=1→2 for the triatomic molecule OCS. Just as theatomic frequencies are sometimes split into doublets or multiplets, therotational frequencies are also sometimes split into doublets. Thedifference between them is called the l-type doubling constant. Theseconstants are usually smaller (i.e., of a lower frequency) than the aconstants. For the OCS molecule, the a constants are 20.56 and 10.56 MHzwhile the l-type doubling constant is 6.3 MHz. These frequencies are allin the radiowave portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.

As discussed previously herein, energy is transferred by two fundamentalfrequency mechanisms. If frequencies are substantially the same ormatch, then energy transfers by direct resonance. Energy can alsotransfer indirectly by heterodyning, (i.e., the frequenciessubstantially match after having been added or subtracted with anotherfrequency). Further, as previously stated, the direct or indirectresonant frequencies do not have to match exactly. If they are merelyclose, significant amounts of energy will still transfer. Any of theseconstants or frequencies that are related to molecules or other mattervia heterodynes, can be used to transfer, for example, energy to thematter and hence can directly interact with the matter.

In the reaction in which hydrogen and oxygen are combined to form water,the present invention teaches that the energizing of the reactionintermediates of atomic hydrogen and the hydroxy radical are crucial tosustaining the reaction. In this regard, the physical catalyst platinumenergizes both reaction intermediates by directly and indirectlyresonating with them. Platinum also energizes the intermediates atmultiple energy levels, creating the conditions for energyamplification. The present invention also teaches how to copy platinum'smechanism of action by making use of atomic fine structure frequencies.

The invention has previously discussed resonating with the finestructure frequencies with only slight variations between thefrequencies (e.g., 456.676 and 456.686 THz). However, indirectlyresonating with the fine structure frequencies, is a significantdifference. Specifically, by using the fine splitting frequencies, whichare simply the differences or heterodynes between the fine structurefrequencies, the present invention teaches that indirect resonance canbe achieved. By examining the hydrogen 456 THz fine structure and finesplitting frequencies (see, for example, FIGS. 30 and 31 and Table 3many heterodynes are shown). In other words, the difference between thefine structure frequencies can be calculated as follows:456.686 THz−456.676 THz=0.0102 THz=10.2 GHzThus, if hydrogen atoms are subjected to 10.2 GHz electromagnetic energy(i.e., energy corresponding to microwaves), then the 456 THz electronicspectrum frequency is energized by resonating with it indirectly. Inother words, the 10.2 GHz will add to 456.676 THz to produce theresonant frequency of 456.686 THz. The 10.2 GHz will also subtract fromthe 456.686 THz to produce the resonant frequency of 456.676 THz. Thus,by introducing 10.2 GHz to a hydrogen atom, the hydrogen atom is excitedat the 456 THz frequency. A microwave frequency can be used to stimulatean electronic level.

According to the present invention, it is also possible to use acombination of mimicked catalyst mechanisms. For example, it is possibleto: 1) resonate with the hydrogen atom frequencies indirectly throughheterodynes (i.e., fine splitting frequencies); and/or 2) resonate withthe hydrogen atom at multiple frequencies. Such multiple resonatingcould occur using a combination of microwave frequencies eithersimultaneously, in sequence, and/or in chirps or bursts. For example,the individual microwave fine splitting frequencies for hydrogen of10.87 GHz, 10.2 GHz, 3.23 GHz, 1.38 GHz, and 1.06 GHz could be used in asequence. Further, there are many fine splitting frequencies forhydrogen that have not been expressly included herein, thus, dependingon the frequency range of equipment available, the present inventionprovides a means for tailoring the chosen frequencies to thecapabilities of the available equipment. Thus, the flexibility accordingto the teachings of the present invention is enormous.

Another method to deliver multiple electromagnetic energy frequenciesaccording to the present invention, is to use a lower frequency as acarrier wave for a higher frequency. This can be done, for example, byproducing 10.2 GHz EM energy in short bursts, with the bursts coming ata rate of about 239 MHz. Both of these frequencies are fine splittingfrequencies for hydrogen. This can also be achieved by continuouslydelivering EM energy and by varying the amplitude at a rate of about 239MHz. These techniques can be used alone or in combination with thevarious other techniques disclosed herein.

Thus, by mimicking one or more mechanisms of action of catalysts and bymaking use of the atomic fine structure and splitting frequencies, it ispossible to energize upper levels of atoms using microwave and radiowavefrequencies. Accordingly, by selectively energizing or targetingparticular atoms, it is possible to catalyze and guide desirablereactions to desired end products. Depending on the circumstances, theoption to use lower frequencies may have many advantages. Lowerfrequencies typically have much better penetration into large reactionspaces and volumes, and may be better suited to large-scale industrialapplications. Lower frequencies may be easier to deliver with portable,compact equipment, as opposed to large, bulky equipment which delivershigher frequencies (e.g., lasers). The choice of frequencies of aspectral catalyst may be for as simple a reason as to avoid interferencefrom other sources of EM energy. Thus, according to the presentinvention, an understanding of the basic processes of heterodyning andfine structure splitting frequencies confers greater flexibility indesigning and applying spectral energy catalysts in a targeted manner.Specifically, rather than simply reproducing the spectral pattern of aphysical catalyst, the present invention teaches that is possible tomake full use of the entire range of frequencies in the electromagneticspectrum, so long as the teachings of the present invention arefollowed. Thus, certain desirable frequencies can be applied while othernot so desirable frequencies could be left out of an applied spectralenergy catalyst targeted to a particular participant and/or component inthe crystallization reaction system.

As a further example, reference is again made to the hydrogen and oxygenreaction for the formation of water. If it is desired to catalyze thewater reaction by duplicating the catalyst's mechanism of action in themicrowave region, the present invention teaches that several options areavailable. Another such option is use of the knowledge that platinumenergizes the reaction intermediates of the hydroxy radical. In additionto the hydrogen atom, the B frequency for the hydroxy radical is 565.8GHz. That means that the actual heterodyned difference between therotational frequencies is 2B, or 1,131.6 GHz. Accordingly, such afrequency could be utilized to achieve excitement of the hydroxy radicalintermediate.

Further, the a constant for the hydroxy radical is 21.4 GHz.Accordingly, this frequency could also be applied to energizing thehydroxy radical. Thus, by introducing hydrogen and oxygen gases into achamber and irradiating the gases with 21.4 GHz, water will be formed.This particular gigahertz energy is a harmonic heterodyne of therotational frequencies for the same rotational level but differentvibrational levels. The heterodyned frequency energizes all therotational frequencies, which energize the vibrational levels, whichenergize the electronic frequencies, which catalyze the reaction.Accordingly, the aforementioned reaction could be catalyzed or targetedwith a spectral catalyst applied at several applicable frequencies, allof which match with one or more frequencies in one or more participantsand thus permit energy to transfer.

Still further, delivery of frequencies of 565.8 GHz, or even 1,131.6GHz, would result in substantially all of the rotational levels in themolecule becoming energized, from the ground state all the way up. Thisapproach copies a catalyst mechanism of action in two ways. The firstway is by energizing the hydroxy radical and sustaining a crucialreaction intermediate to catalyze the formation of water. The secondmechanism copied from the catalyst is to energize multiple levels in themolecule. Because the rotational constant “B” relates to the rotationalfrequencies, heterodynes occur at all levels in the molecule. Thus,using the frequency “B” energizes all levels in the molecule. Thispotentiates the establishment of an energy amplification system such asthat which occurs with the physical catalyst platinum.

Still further, if a molecule was energized with a frequencycorresponding to an l-type doubling constant, such frequency could beused in a substantially similar manner in which a fine splittingfrequency from an atomic spectrum is used. The difference between thetwo frequencies in a doublet is a heterodyne, and energizing the doubletwith its' heterodyne frequency (i.e., the splitting frequency) wouldenergize the basic frequency and catalyze the reaction.

A still further example utilizes a combination of frequencies for atomicfine structure. For instance, by utilizing a constant central frequencyof 1,131.6 GHz (i.e., the heterodyned difference between rotationalfrequencies for a hydroxy radical) with a vibrato varying around thecentral frequency by ±21.4 GHz (i.e., the α constant harmonic forvariations between rotational frequencies), use could be made of 1.131.6GHz EM energy in short bursts, with the bursts coming at a rate of 21.4GHz.

Since there is slight variation between rotational frequencies for thesame level, that frequency range can be used to construct bursts. Forexample, if the largest “B” is 565.8 GHz, then a rotational frequencyheterodyne corresponds to 1,131.6 GHz. If the smallest “B” is 551.2 GHz,this corresponds to a rotational frequency heterodyne of 1,102 GHz.Thus, “chirps” or bursts of energy starting at 1,100 GHz and increasingin frequency to 1,140 GHz, could be used. In fact, the transmitter couldbe set to “chirp” or burst at a rate of 21.4 GHz.

As previously discussed, fine and fine splitting frequencies can also beused in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

In any event, there are many ways to make use of the atomic andmolecular fine structure frequencies, with their attendant heterodynesand harmonics. An understanding of catalyst mechanisms of action enablesone of ordinary skill armed with the teachings of the present inventionto utilize a spectral catalyst from the high frequency ultraviolet andvisible light regions, down into the sometimes more manageable microwaveand radiowave regions. Moreover, the invention enables an artisan ofordinary skill to calculate and/or determine the effects of microwaveand radiowave energies on chemical reactions and/or reaction pathways.

Hyperfine Frequencies

Hyperfine structure frequencies are similar to the fine structurefrequencies. Fine structure frequencies can be seen by magnifying aportion of a standard frequency spectrum. Hyperfine frequencies can beseen by magnifying a portion of a fine structure spectrum. Finestructure splitting frequencies occur at lower frequencies than theelectronic spectra, primarily in the infrared and microwave regions ofthe electromagnetic spectrum. Hyperfine splitting frequencies occur ateven lower frequencies than the fine structure spectra, primarily in themicrowave and radio wave regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Finestructure frequencies are generally caused by at least the electroninteracting with its' own magnetic field. Hyperfine frequencies aregenerally caused by at least the electron interacting with the magneticfield of the nucleus.

FIG. 36 shows the rotation-vibration band frequency spectra for an SF₆molecule. The rotation-vibration band and fine structure are shown againin FIG. 45. However, the fine structure frequencies are seen bymagnifying a small section of the standard vibrational band spectrum(i.e., the lower portion of FIG. 45 shows some of the fine structurefrequencies). In many respects, looking at fine structure frequencies islike using a magnifying glass to look at a standard spectrum.Magnification of what looks like a flat and uninteresting portion of astandard vibrational frequency band shows many more curves with lowerfrequency splitting. These many other curves are the fine structurecurves. Similarly, by magnifying a small and seemingly uninterestingportion of the fine structure spectrum of the result is yet anotherspectrum of many more curves known as the hyperfine spectrum.

A small portion (i.e., from zero to 300) of the SF₆ fine structurespectrum is magnified in FIG. 46. The hyperfine spectrum includes manycurves split part by even lower frequencies. This time the finestructure spectrum was magnified instead of the regular vibrationalspectrum. What is found is even more curves, even closer together. FIGS.47 a and 47 b show a further magnification of the two curves marked withasterisks (i.e., “*” and “**”) in FIG. 46.

What appears to be a single crisp curve in FIG. 46, turns out to be aseries of several curves spaced very close together. These are thehyperfine frequency curves. Accordingly, the fine structure spectra iscomprised of several more curves spaced very close together. These othercurves spaced even closer together correspond to the hyperfinefrequencies.

FIGS. 47 a and 47 b show that the spacing of the hyperfine frequencycurves are very close together and at somewhat regular intervals. Thesmall amount that the hyperfine curves are split apart is called thehyperfine splitting frequency. The hyperfine splitting frequency is alsoa heterodyne. This concept is substantially similar to the concept ofthe fine splitting frequency. The difference between two curves that aresplit apart is called a splitting frequency. As before, the differencebetween two curves is referred to as a heterodyne frequency. So,hyperfine splitting frequencies are all heterodynes of hyperfinefrequencies.

Because the hyperfine frequency curves result from a magnification ofthe fine structure curves, the hyperfine splitting frequencies occur atonly a fraction of the fine structure splitting frequencies. The finestructure splitting frequencies are really just several curves, spacedvery close together around the regular spectrum frequency. Magnificationof fine structure splitting frequencies results in hyperfine splittingfrequencies. The hyperfine splitting frequencies are really just severalmore curves, spaced very close together. The closer together the curvesare, the smaller the distance or frequency separating them. Now thedistance separating any two curves is a heterodyne frequency. So, thecloser together any two curves are, the smaller (lower) is theheterodyne frequency between them. The distance between hyperfinesplitting frequencies (i.e., the amount that hyperfine frequencies aresplit apart) is the hyperfine splitting frequency. It can also be calleda constant or interval.

The electronic spectrum frequency of hydrogen is 2,466 THz. The 2,466THz frequency is made up of fine structure curves spaced 10.87 GHz(0.01087 THz) apart. Thus, the fine splitting frequency is 10.87 GHz.Now the fine structure curves are made up of hyperfine curves. Thesehyperfine curves are spaced just 23.68 and 59.21 MHz apart. Thus, 23 and59 MHz are both hyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogen. Otherhyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogen include 2.71, 4.21, 7.02,17.55, 52.63, 177.64, and 1,420.0 MHz. The hyperfine splittingfrequencies are spaced even closer together than the fine structuresplitting frequencies, so the hyperfine splitting frequencies aresmaller and lower than the fine splitting frequencies.

Thus, the hyperfine splitting frequencies are lower than the finesplitting frequencies. This means that rather than being in the infraredand microwave regions, as the fine splitting frequencies can be, thehyperfine splitting frequencies are in the microwave and radiowaveregions. These lower frequencies are in the MHz (10⁶ hertz) and Khz (10³hertz) regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Several of the hyperfinesplitting frequencies for hydrogen are shown in FIG. 48. (FIG. 48 showshyperfine structure in the n=2 to n=3 transition of hydrogen).

FIG. 49 shows the hyperfine frequencies for CH₃I. These frequencies area magnification of the fine structure frequencies for that molecule.Since fine structure frequencies for molecules are actually rotationalfrequencies, what is shown is actually the hyperfine splitting ofrotational frequencies. FIG. 49 shows the hyperfine splitting of justthe J=1→2 rotational transition. The splitting between the two tallestcurves is less than 100 MHz.

FIG. 50 shows another example of the molecule ClCN. This set ofhyperfine frequencies is from the J=1→2 transition of the groundvibrational state for ClCN. Notice that the hyperfine frequencies areseparated by just a few megahertz, (MHz) and in a few places by lessthan even one megahertz.

The energy-level diagram and spectrum of the J=½→ 3/2 rotationaltransition for NO is shown if FIG. 51.

In FIG. 52, the hyperfine splitting frequencies for NH₃ are shown.Notice that the frequencies are spaced so close together that the scaleat the bottom is in kilohertz (Kc/sec). The hyperfine features of thelines were obtained using a beam spectrometer.

Just as with fine splitting frequencies, the hyperfine splittingfrequencies are heterodynes of atomic and molecular frequencies.Accordingly, if an atom or molecule is stimulated with a frequency equalto a hyperfine splitting frequency (a heterodyned difference betweenhyperfine frequencies), the present invention teaches that the energywill equal to a hyperfine splitting frequency will resonate with thehyperfine frequencies indirectly through heterodynes. The relatedrotational, vibrational, and/or electronic energy levels will, in turn,be stimulated. This is an important discovery. It allows one to use moreradio and microwave frequencies to selectively stimulate and targetspecific crystallization reaction system components (e.g., atomichydrogen intermediates can be stimulated with, for example, (2.55, 23.6859.2 and/or 1,420 MHz).

Hyperfine frequencies, like fine frequencies, also contain features suchas doublets. Specifically, in a region where one would expect to findonly a single hyperfine frequency curve, there are two curves instead,typically, one on either side of the location where a single hyperfinefrequency was expected. Hyperfine doubling is shown in FIGS. 53 and 54.This hyperfine spectrum is also from NH₃. FIG. 53 corresponds to the J=3rotational level and FIG. 54 corresponds to the J=4 rotational level.The doubling can be seen most easily in the J=3 curves (i.e., FIG. 53).There are two sets of short curves, a tall one, and then two more shortsets. Each of the short sets of curves is generally located where onewould expect to find just one curve. There are two curves instead, oneon either side of the main curve location. Each set of curves is ahyperfine doublet.

There are different notations to indicate the source of the doublingsuch as l-type doubling, K doubling, and A doubling, etc., and they allhave their own constants or intervals. Without going into the detailedtheory behind the formation of various types of doublets, the intervalbetween any two hyperfine multiplet curves is also a heterodyne, andthus all of these doubling constants represent frequency heterodynes.Accordingly, those frequency heterodynes (i.e., hyperfine constants) canalso be used as spectral energy catalysts according to the presentinvention.

Specifically, a frequency in an atom or molecule can be stimulateddirectly or indirectly. If the goal was to stimulate the 2,466 Thzfrequency of hydrogen for some reason, then, for example, an ultravioletlaser could irradiate the hydrogen with 2,466 THz electromagneticradiation. This would stimulate the atom directly. However, if such alaser was unavailable, then hydrogen's fine structure splittingfrequency of 10.87 GHz could be achieved with microwave equipment. Thegigahertz frequency would heterodyne (i.e., add or subtract) with thetwo closely spaced fine structure curves at 2,466, and stimulate the2,466 THz frequency band. This would stimulate the atom indirectly.

Still further, the atom could be stimulated by using the hyperfinesplitting frequency for hydrogen at 23.68 MHz as produced by radiowaveequipment. The 23.68 MHz frequency would heterodyne (i.e., add orsubtract) with the two closely spaced hyperfine frequency curves at2,466, and stimulate the fine structure curves at the 2,466 THz.Stimulation of the fine structure curves would in turn lead tostimulation of the 2,466 THz electronic frequency for the hydrogen atom.

Still further, additional hyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogenin the radiowave and microwave portions of the electromagnetic spectrumcould also be used to stimulate the atom. For example, a radio wavepattern with 2.7 MHz, 4.2 MHz, 7 MHz, 18 MHz, 23 MHz, 52 MHz, and 59 MHzcould be used. This would stimulate several different hyperfinefrequencies of hydrogen, and it would stimulate them essentially all atthe same time. This would cause stimulation of the fine structurefrequencies, which in turn would stimulate the electronic frequencies inthe hydrogen atom.

Still further, depending on available equipment and/or design, and/orprocessing constraints, some delivery mode variations can also be used.For example, one of the lower frequencies could be a carrier frequencyfor the upper frequencies. A continuous frequency of 52 MHz could bevaried in amplitude at a rate of 2.7 MHz. Or, a 59 MHz frequency couldbe pulsed at a rate of 4.2 MHz. There are various ways in which thesefrequencies can be combined and/or delivered, including different waveshapes durations, intensity shapes, duty cycles, etc. Depending on whichof the hyperfine splitting frequencies are stimulated, the evolution of,for example, various and specific transients may be precisely tailoredand controlled, allowing precise control over holoreaction systems usingthe fine and/or hyperfine splitting frequencies.

Accordingly, a major point of the present invention is once it isunderstood the energy transfers when frequencies match, then determiningwhich frequencies are available for matching is the next step. Thisinvention discloses precisely how to achieve that goal. Interactionsbetween equipment limitations, processing constraints, etc., can decidewhich frequencies are best suited for a particular purpose. Thus, bothdirect resonance and indirect resonance are suitable approaches for theuse of spectral energy catalysts.

Similar to previous discussions, hyperfine and hyperfine spittingfrequencies can be used to achieve desired results in crystallizationreaction systems.

Electric Fields

Another means for modifying the spectral pattern of substances, is toexpose a substance to an electric field. Specifically, in the presenceof an electric field, spectral frequency lines of atoms and moleculescan be split, shifted, broadened, or changed in intensity. The effect ofan electric field on spectral lines is known as the “Stark Effect”, inhonor of its' discoverer, J. Stark. In 1913, Stark discovered that theBalmer series of hydrogen (i.e., curve II of FIGS. 9 a and 9 b) wassplit into several different components, while Stark was using a highelectric field in the presence of a hydrogen flame. In the interveningyears, Stark's original observation has evolved into a separate branchof spectroscopy, namely the study of the structure of atoms andmolecules by measuring the changes in their respective spectral linescaused by an electric field.

The electric field effects have some similarities to fine and hyperfinesplitting frequencies. Specifically, as previously discussed herein,fine structure and hyperfine structure frequencies, along with their lowfrequency splitting or coupling constants, were caused by interactionsinside the atom or molecule, between the electric field of the electronand the magnetic field of the electron or nucleus. Electric fieldeffects are similar, except that instead of the electric field comingfrom inside the atom, the electric field is applied from outside theatom. The Stark effect is primarily the interaction of an externalelectric field, from outside the atom or molecule, with the electric andmagnetic fields already established within the atom or molecule.

When examining electric field effects on atoms, molecules, ions and/orcomponents thereof, the nature of the electric field should also beconsidered (e.g., such as whether the electric field is static ordynamic). A static electric field may be produced by a direct current. Adynamic electric field is time varying, and may be produced by analternating current. If the electric field is from an alternatingcurrent, then the frequency of the alternating current compared to thefrequencies of the, for instance atom or molecule, should also beconsidered.

In atoms, an external electric field disturbs the charge distribution ofthe atom's electrons. This disturbance of the electron's own electricfield induces a dipole moment in it (i.e., slightly lopsided chargedistribution). This lopsided electron dipole moment then interacts withthe external electric field. In other words, the external electric fieldfirst induces a dipole moment in the electron field, and then interactswith the dipole. The end result is that the atomic frequencies becomesplit into several different frequencies. The amount the frequencies aresplit apart depends on the strength of the electric field. In otherwords, the stronger the electric field, the farther apart the splitting.

If the splitting varies directly with the electric field strength, thenit is called first order splitting (i.e., Δv=ΔF where Δv is thesplitting frequency, A is a constant and F is the electric fieldstrength. When the splitting varies with the square of the fieldstrength, it is called a second order or quadriatic effect (i.e.,Δv=BF²). One or both effects may be seen in various forms of matter. Forexample, the hydrogen atom exhibits first order Stark effects at lowelectric field strengths, and second order effects at high fieldstrengths. Other electric field effects which vary with the cube or thefourth power, etc., of the electric field strength are less studied, butproduce splitting frequencies nonetheless. A second order electric fieldeffect for potassium is shown in FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 shows theschematic dependence of the 4s and 5p energy levels on the electricfield. FIG. 56 shows a plot of the deviation from zero-field positionsof the 5p² P1/2.3/2←4s² S1/2 transition wavenumbers against the squareof the electric field. Note that the frequency splitting or separationof the frequencies (i.e., deviation from zero-field wavenumber) varieswith the square of the electric field strength (v/cm)².

The mechanism for the Stark effect in molecules is simpler than theeffect is in atoms. Most molecules already have an electric dipolemoment (i.e., a slightly uneven charge distribution). The externalelectric field simply interacts with the electric dipole moment alreadyinside the molecule. The type of interaction, a first or a second orderStark effect, is different for differently shaped molecules. Forexample, most symmetric top molecules have first-order Stark effects.Asymmetric rotors typically have second-order Stark effects. Thus, inmolecules, as in atoms, the splitting or separation of the frequenciesdue to the external electric field, is proportional either to theelectric field strength itself, or to the square of the electric fieldstrength.

An example of this is shown in FIG. 57, which diagrams how frequencycomponents of the J=0→1 rotational transition for the molecule CH₃Clrespond to an external electric field. When the electric field is verysmall (e.g., less than 10 E² esu²/cm²), the primary effect is shiftingof the three rotational frequencies to higher frequencies. As the fieldstrength is increased (e.g., between 10 and 20 E² esu²/cm²), the threerotational frequencies split into five different frequencies. Withcontinued increases in the electric field strength, the now fivefrequencies continue to shift to even higher frequencies. Some of theintervals or differences between the five frequencies remain the sameregardless of the electric field strength, while other intervals becomeprogressively larger and higher. Thus, a heterodyned frequency mightstimulate splitting frequencies at one electric field strength, but notat another.

Another molecular example is shown in FIG. 58. (This is a diagram of theStark Effect in the same OCS molecule shown in FIG. 44 for the J=1→2).The J=1→2 rotational transition frequency is shown centered at zero onthe horizontal frequency axis in FIG. 58. That frequency centered atzero is a single frequency when there is no external electric field.When an electric field is added, however, the single rotationalfrequency splits into two. The stronger the electric field is, the widerthe splitting is between the two frequencies. One of the new frequenciesshifts up higher and higher, while the other frequency shifts lower andlower. Because the difference between the two frequencies changes whenthe electric field strength changes, a heterodyned splitting frequencymight stimulate the rotational level at one electric field strength, butnot at another. An electric field can effect the spectral frequencies ofreaction participants, and thus impact the spectral chemistry of areaction.

Broadening and shifting of spectral lines also occurs with theintermolecular Stark effect. The intermolecular Stark effect is producedwhen the electric field from surrounding atoms, ions, or molecules,affects the spectral emissions of the species under study. In otherwords, the external electric field comes from other atoms and moleculesrather than from a DC or AC current. The other atoms and molecules arein constant motion, and thus their electric fields are inhomogeneous inspace and time. Instead of a frequency being split into several easilyseen narrow frequencies, the original frequency simply becomes muchwider, encompassing most, if not all, of what would have been the splitfrequencies, (i.e., it is broadened). Solvents, support materials,poisons, promoters, etc., are composed of atoms and molecules andcomponents thereof. It is now understood that many of their effects arethe result of the intermolecular Stark effect.

The above examples demonstrate how an electric field splits, shifts, andbroadens spectral frequencies for matter. However, intensities of thelines can also be affected. Some of these variations in intensity areshown in FIGS. 59 a and 59 b. FIG. 59 a shows patterns of Starkcomponents for transitions in the rotation of an asymmetric top moleculefor the J=4→5 transition; whereas FIG. 59 b corresponds to J=4→4. Theintensity variations depend on rotational transitions, molecularstructure, etc., and the electric field strength.

An interesting Stark effect is shown in a structure such as a molecule,which has hyperfine (rotational) frequencies. The general rule for thecreation of hyperfine frequencies is that the hyperfine frequenciesresult from an interaction between electrons and the nucleus. Thisinteraction can be affected by an external electric field. If theapplied external electric field is weak, then the Stark energy is muchless than the energy of the hyperfine energy (i.e., rotational energy).The hyperfine lines are split into various new lines, and the separation(i.e., splitting) between the lines is very small (i.e., at radiofrequencies and extra low frequencies).

If the external electric field is very strong, then the Stark energy ismuch larger than the hyperfine energy, and the molecule is tossed,sometimes violently, back and forth by the electric field. In this case,the hyperfine structure is radically changed. It is almost as thoughthere no longer is any hyperfine structure. The Stark splitting issubstantially the same as that which would have been observed if therewere no hyperfine frequencies, and the hyperfine frequencies simply actas a small perturbation to the Stark splitting frequencies.

If the external electric field is intermediate in strength, then theStark and hyperfine energies are substantially equivalent. In this case,the calculations become very complex. Generally, the Stark splitting isclose to the same frequencies as the hyperfine splitting, but therelative intensities of the various components can vary rapidly withslight changes in the strength of the external electric field. Thus, atone electric field strength one splitting frequency may predominate,while at an electric field strength just 1% higher, a totally differentStark frequency could predominate in intensity.

All of the preceding discussion on the Stark effect has concentrated onthe effects due to a static electric field, such as one would find witha direct current. The Stark effects of a dynamic, or time-varyingelectric field produced by an alternating current, are quite interestingand can be quite different. Just which of those affects appear, dependson the frequency of the electric field (i.e., alternating current)compared to the frequency of the matter in question. If the electricfield is varying very slowly, such as with 60 Hz wall outletelectricity, then the normal or static type of electric field effectoccurs. As the electric field varies from zero to maximum fieldstrength, the matter frequencies vary from their unsplit frequencies totheir maximally split frequencies at the rate of the changing electricfield. Thus, the electric field frequency modulates the frequency of thesplitting phenomena.

However, as the electrical frequency increases, the first frequencymeasurement it will begin to overtake is the line width (see FIG. 16 fora diagram of line width). The line width of a curve is its' distanceacross, and the measurement is actually a very tiny heterodyne frequencymeasurement from one side of the curve to the other side. Line widthfrequencies are typically around 100 KHz at room temperature. Inpractical terms, line width represents a relaxation time for molecules,where the relaxation time is the time required for any transientphenomena to disappear. So, if the electrical frequency is significantlysmaller than the line width frequency, the molecule has plenty of timeto adjust to the slowly changing electric field, and the normal orstatic-type Stark effects occur.

If the electrical frequency is slightly less than the line widthfrequency, the molecule changes its' frequencies substantially in rhythmwith the frequency of the electric field (i.e., it entrains to thefrequency of the electric field). This is shown in FIG. 60 which showsthe Stark effect for OCS on the J=1→2 transition with applied electricfields at various frequencies. The letter “a” corresponds to the Starkeffect with a static DC electric field; “b” corresponds to a broadeningand blurring of the Stark frequencies with a 1 KHz electric field; and“c” corresponds to a normal Stark effect with an electric field of 1,200KHz. As the electric field frequency approaches the KHz line widthrange, the Stark curves vary their frequencies with the electric fieldfrequency and become broadened and somewhat blurred. When the electricfield frequency moves up and beyond the line width range to about 1,200KHz, the normal Stark type curves again become crisp anddistinguishable. In many respects, the molecule cannot keep up with therapid electrical field variation and simply averages the Stark effect.In all three cases, the cyclic splitting of the Stark frequencies ismodulated with the electrical field frequency, or its' first harmonic(i.e., 2× the electrical field frequency).

The next frequency measurement that an ever-increasing electricalfrequency will overtake in a molecule is the transitional frequencybetween two rotational levels (i.e., hyperfine frequencies). As theelectric field frequency approaches a transitional frequency between twolevels, the radiation of the transitional frequency in the molecule willinduce transitions back and forth between the levels. The moleculeoscillates back and forth between both levels, at the frequency of theelectric field. When the electric field and transition level frequenciesare substantially the same (i.e., in resonance), the molecule will beoscillating back and forth in both levels, and the spectral lines forboth levels will appear simultaneously and at approximately the sameintensity. Normally, only one frequency level is seen at a time, but aresonant electric field causes the molecule to be at both levels atessentially the same time, and so both transitional frequencies appearin its' spectrum.

Moreover, for sufficiently large electric fields (e.g., those used togenerate plasmas) additional transition level frequencies can occur atregular spacings substantially equal to the electric field frequency.Also, splitting of the transition level frequencies can occur, atfrequencies of the electric field frequency divided by odd numbers(e.g., electric field frequency “f_(E)” divided by 3, or 5, or 7, i.e.,f_(E)/3 or f_(E)/5, etc.).

All the varied effects of electric fields cause new frequencies, newsplitting frequencies and new energy level states.

Further, when the electric field frequency equals a transition levelfrequency of for instance, an atom or molecule, a second component withan opposite frequency charge and equal intensity can develop. This isnegative Stark effect, with the two components of equal and oppositefrequency charges destructively canceling each other. In spectralchemistry terms this amounts to a negative catalyst or poison in thecrystallization reaction system, if the transition thus targeted wasimportant to the reaction pathway. Thus, electric fields cause the Starkeffect, which is the splitting, shifting, broadening, or changingintensity and changing transitional states of spectral frequencies formatter, (e.g., atoms and molecules). As with many of the othermechanisms that have been discussed herein, changes in the spectralfrequencies of crystallization reaction systems can affect the reactionrate and/or reaction pathway. For example, consider a crystallizationreaction system like the following:

where A&B are reactants, C is a physical catalyst, I stands for theintermediates, and D&F are the products.

Assume arguendo that the reaction normally progresses at only a moderaterate, by virtue of the fact that the physical catalyst produces severalfrequencies that are merely close to harmonics of the intermediates.Further assume that when an electric field is added, the catalystfrequencies are shifted so that several of the catalyst frequencies arenow exact or substantially exact harmonics of the intermediates. Thiswill result in, for example, the reaction being catalyzed at a fasterrate. Thus, the Stark effect can be used to obtain a more efficientenergy transfer through the matching of frequencies (i.e., whenfrequencies match, energies transfer).

If a reaction normally progresses at only a moderate rate, many“solutions” have included subjecting the crystallization reaction systemto extremely high pressures. The high pressures result in a broadeningof the spectral patterns, which improves the transfer of energy througha matching of resonant frequencies. By understanding the underlyingcatalyst mechanisms of action, high-pressure systems could be replacedwith, for example, a simple electric field which produces broadening.Not only would this be less costly to an industrial manufacturer, itcould be much safer for manufacturing due to the removal of, forexample, high-pressure equipment.

Some reactants when mixed together do not react very quickly at all, butwhen an electric field is added they react rather rapidly. The prior artmay refer to such a reaction as being catalyzed by an electric field andthe equations would look like this:

where E is the electric field. In this case, rather than applying acatalyst “C” (as discussed previously) to obtain the products “D+F”, anelectric field “E” can be applied. In this instance, the electric fieldworks by changing the spectral frequencies (or spectral pattern) of oneor more components in the crystallization reaction system so that thefrequencies come into resonance, and the reaction can proceed along adesired reaction pathway (i.e., when frequencies match, energy istransferred). Understood in this way, the electric field becomes justanother tool to change spectral frequencies of atoms and molecules, andthereby affect reaction rates in spectral chemistry.

Reaction pathways are also important. In the absence of an electricalfield, a reaction pathway will progress to one set of products:

However, if an electrical field is added, at some particular strength ofthe field, the spectral frequencies may change so much, that a differentintermediate is energized and the reaction proceeds down a differentreaction pathway:

This is similar to the concept discussed earlier herein, regarding theformation of different products depending on temperature. The changes intemperature caused changes in spectral frequencies, and hence differentreaction pathways were favored at different temperatures. Likewise,electric fields cause changes in spectral frequencies, and hencedifferent reactions pathways are favored by different electric fields.By tailoring an electric field to a particular crystallization reactionsystem, one can control not only the rate of the reaction but also thereaction products produced.

The ability to tailor reactions, with or without a physical catalyst, byvarying the strength of an electric field should be useful in manymanufacturing situations. For example, it might be more cost effectiveto build only one physical set-up for a crystallization reaction systemand to use one or more electric fields to change the reaction dynamicsand products, depending on which product is desired. This would save theexpense of having a separate physical set-up for production of eachgroup of products.

Besides varying the strength of an electric field, the frequency of anelectric field can also be varied. Assuming that a reaction will proceedat a much faster rate if a particular strength static electric field(i.e., direct current) is added as in the following:

But further assume, that because of reactor design and location, it ismuch easier to deliver a time-varying electric field with alternatingcurrent. A very low frequency field, such as with a 60 Hz wall outlet,can produce the normal or static-type Stark effect. Thus, the reactorcould be adapted to the 60 Hz electric field and enjoy the same increasein reaction rate that would occur with the static electric field.

If a certain physical catalyst produces spectral frequencies that areclose to intermediate frequencies, but are not exact, it is possiblethat the activity of the physical catalyst in the past may have beenimproved by using higher temperatures. As disclosed earlier herein, thehigher temperatures actually broadened the physical catalyst's spectralpattern to cause the frequency of the physical catalyst to be at least apartial match for at least one of the intermediates. What is significanthere is that high temperature boilers can be minimized, or eliminatedaltogether, and in their stead a moderate frequency electric fieldwhich, for example, broadened the spectral frequencies, could be used.For example, a frequency of around 100 Khz, equivalent to the typicalline width frequencies at room temperature, could broaden substantiallyall of the spectral curves and cause the physical catalyst's spectralcurves to match those of, for example, required intermediates. Thus, theelectric field could cause the matter to behave as though thetemperature had been raised, even though it had not been. (Similarly,any spectral manipulation, (e.g., electric fields acoustics,heterodynes, etc., that cause changes in the spectral line width, maycause a material to behave as though its temperature had been changed).

The cyclic splitting of the Stark frequencies can be modulated with theelectrical field frequency or its' first harmonic (i.e., first-orderStark effects are modulated with the electrical field frequency, whilesecond-order Stark effects are modulated by two times the electricalfield, frequency). Assume that a metallic platinum catalyst is used in ahydrogen reaction and it is desired to stimulate the 2.7 MHz hyperfinefrequency of the hydrogen atoms. Earlier herein it was disclosed thatelectromagnetic radiation could be used to deliver the 2.7 MHzfrequency. However, use of an alternating electric field at 2.7 MHzcould be used instead. Since platinum is a metal and conductselectricity well, the platinum can be considered to be a part of thealternating current circuit. The platinum will exhibit a Stark effect,with all the frequencies splitting at a rate of 2.7 MHz. At sufficientlystrong electric fields, additional transition frequencies or “sidebands”will occur at regular spacings equal to the electric field frequency.There will be dozens of split frequencies in the platinum atoms that areheterodynes of 2.7 MHz. This massive heterodyned output may stimulatethe hydrogen hyperfine frequency of 2.7 MHz and direct the reaction.

Another way to achieve this reaction, of course, would be to leave theplatinum out of the reaction altogether. The 2.7 MHz field will have aresonant Stark effect on the hydrogen, separate and independent of theplatinum catalyst. Copper is not normally catalytic for hydrogen, butcopper could be used to construct a reaction vessel like a Starkwaveguide to energize the hydrogen. A Stark waveguide is used to performStark spectroscopy. It is shown as FIGS. 61 a and 61 b. Specifically,FIG. 61 a shows the construction of the Stark waveguide, whereas FIG. 61b shows the distribution of fields in the Stark waveguide. Theelectrical field is delivered through the conducting plate. A reactionvessel could be made for the flow-through of gases and use an economicalmetal such as copper for the conducting plate. When the 2.7 MHzalternating current is delivered through the electrical connection tothe copper conductor plate, the copper spectral frequencies, none ofwhich are particularly resonant with hydrogen, will exhibit a Starkeffect with normal-type splitting. The Stark frequencies will be splitat a rate of 2.7 MHz. At a sufficiently strong electric field strength,additional sidebands will appear in the copper, with regular spacings(i.e., heterodynes) of 2.7 MHz even though none of the actual copperfrequencies matches the hydrogen frequencies, the Stark splitting orheterodynes will match the hydrogen frequency. Dozens of the coppersplit frequencies may resonate indirectly with the hydrogen hyperfinefrequency and direct the reaction (i.e., when frequencies match,energies transfer).

With sophisticated equipment and a good understanding of a particularsystem, Stark resonance can be used with a transition level frequency.For example, assume that to achieve a particular reaction pathway, amolecule needs to be stimulated with a transition level frequency of 500MHz. By delivering the 500 MHz electrical field to the molecule, thisresonant electrical field may cause the molecule to oscillate back andforth between the two levels at the rate of 500 MHz. This electricallycreates the conditions for light amplification (i.e., laser viastimulation of multiple upper energy levels) and any addedelectromagnetic radiation at this frequency will be amplified by themolecule. In this manner, an electrical field may substitute for thelaser effects of physical catalysts.

In summary, by understanding the underlying spectral mechanisms ofchemical reactions, electric fields can be used as yet another tool tocatalyze and modify those chemical reactions and/or reaction pathways bymodifying the spectral characteristics, for example, at least oneparticipant and/or one or more components in the crystallizationreaction system. Thus, another tool for mimicking catalyst mechanisms ofreactions can be utilized.

Similar to other spectral frequencies, as previously discussed, controlof resonant energy exchange via manipulation of electric fields can beused in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

Magnetic Fields

In spectral terms, magnetic fields behave similar to electric fields intheir effect. Specifically, the spectral frequency lines, for instanceof atoms and molecules, can be split and shifted by a magnetic field. Inthis case, the external magnetic field from outside the atom ormolecule, interacts with the electric and magnetic fields already insidethe atom or molecule.

This action of an external magnetic field on spectral lines is calledthe “Zeeman Effect”, in honor of its' discoverer, Dutch physicist PieterZeeman. In 1896, Zeeman discovered that the yellow flame spectroscopy“D” lines of sodium were broadened when the flame was held betweenstrong magnetic poles. It was later discovered that the apparentbroadening of the sodium spectral lines was actually due to theirsplitting and shifting. Zeeman's original observation has evolved into aseparate branch of spectroscopy, relating to the study of atoms andmolecules by measuring the changes in their spectral lines caused by amagnetic field. This in turn has evolved into the nuclear magneticresonance spectroscopy and magnetic resonance imaging used in medicine,as well as the laser magnetic resonance and electron spin resonancespectroscopy used in physics and chemistry.

The Zeeman effect for the famous “D” lines of sodium is shown in FIGS.62 a and 62 b. FIG. 62 a shows the Zeeman effect for sodium “D” lines;whereas FIG. 62 b shows the energy level diagram for the transitions inthe Zeeman effect for the sodium “D” lines. The “D” lines aretraditionally said to result from transition between the 3p²p and 3s²Selectron orbitals. As is shown, each of the single spectral frequenciesis split into two or more slightly different frequencies, which centeraround the original unsplit frequency.

In the Zeeman effect, the amount that the spectral frequencies are splitapart depends on the strength of the applied magnetic field. FIG. 63shows Zeeman splitting effects for the oxygen atom as a function ofmagnetic field. When there is no magnetic field, there are two singlefrequencies at zero and 4.8. When the magnetic field is at low strength(e.g., 0.2 Tesla) there is just slight splitting and shifting of theoriginal two frequencies. However, as the magnetic field is increased,the frequencies are split and shifted farther and farther apart.

The degree of splitting and shifting in the Zeeman effect, depending onmagnetic field strength, is shown in FIG. 64 for the ³P state ofsilicon.

As with the Stark effect generated from an external electric field, theZeeman effect, generated from an external magnetic field, is slightlydifferent depending on whether an atom or molecule is subjected to themagnetic field. The Zeeman effect on atoms can be divided into threedifferent magnetic field strengths: weak; moderate; and strong. If themagnetic field strength is weak, the amount that the spectralfrequencies will be shifted and split apart will be very small. Theshifting away from the original spectral frequency will still stimulatethe shifted frequencies. This is because they will be so close to theoriginal spectral frequency that they will still be well within itsresonance curve. As for the splitting, it is so small, that it is evenless than the hyperfine splitting that normally occurs. This means thatin a weak magnetic field, there will be only very slight splitting ofspectral frequencies, translating into very low splitting frequencies inthe lower regions of the radio spectrum and down into the very lowfrequency region. For example, the Zeeman splitting frequency for thehydrogen atom, which is caused by the earth's magnetic field, is around30 KHz. Larger atoms have even lower frequencies in the lower kilohertzand even hertz regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

Without a magnetic field, an atom can be stimulated by using directresonance with a spectral frequency or by using its fine or hyperfinesplitting frequencies in the infrared through microwave, or microwavethrough radio regions, respectively. By merely adding a very weakmagnetic field, the atom can be stimulated with an even lower radio orvery low frequency matching the Zeeman splitting frequency. Thus, bysimply using a weak magnetic field, a spectral catalyst range can beextended even lower into the radio frequency range. The weak magneticfield from the Earth causes Zeeman splitting in atoms in the hertz andkilohertz ranges. This means that all atoms, including those inbiological organisms, are sensitive to hertz and kilohertz EMfrequencies, by virtue of being subjected to the Earth's magnetic field.

At the other end of magnetic field strength, is the very strong magneticfield. In this case, the splitting apart and shifting of the spectralfrequencies will be very wide. With this wide shifting of frequencies,the difference between the split frequencies will be much larger thanthe difference between the hyperfine splitting frequencies. Thistranslates to Zeeman effect splitting frequencies at higher frequenciesthan the hyperfine splitting frequencies. This splitting occurssomewhere around the microwave region. Although the addition of a strongmagnetic field does not extend the reach in the electromagnetic spectrumat one extreme or the other, as a weak magnetic field does, it stilldoes provide an option of several more potential spectral catalystfrequencies that can be used in the microwave region.

The moderate magnetic field strength case is more complicated. Theshifting and splitting caused by the Zeeman effect from a moderatemagnetic field will be approximately equal to the hyperfine splitting.Although not widely discussed in the prior art, it is possible to applya moderate magnetic field to an atom, to produce Zeeman splitting whichis substantially equivalent to its' hyperfine splitting. This presentsinteresting possibilities. Methods for guiding atoms in chemicalreactions were disclosed earlier herein by stimulating atoms withhyperfine splitting frequencies. The Zeeman effect provides a way toachieve similar effects without introducing any spectral frequencies atall. For example, by introducing a moderate magnetic field, resonancemay be set-up within the atom itself, that stimulates and/or energizesand/or stabilizes the atom.

The moderate magnetic field causes low frequency Zeeman splitting thatmatches and hence energizes the low frequency hyperfine splittingfrequency in the atom. However, the low hyperfine splitting frequenciesactually correspond to the heterodyned difference between twovibrational or fine structure frequencies. When the hyperfine splittingfrequency is stimulated, the two electronic frequencies will eventuallybe stimulated. This in turn causes the atom to be, for example,stimulated. Thus, the Zeeman effect permits a spectral energy catalyststimulation of an atom by exposing that atom to a precise strength of amagnetic field, and the use of spectral EM frequencies is not required(i.e., so long as frequencies match, energies will transfer). Thepossibilities are quite interesting because an inert crystallizationreaction system may suddenly spring to life upon the application of theproper moderate strength magnetic field.

There is also a difference between the “normal” Zeeman effect and the“anomalous” Zeeman effect. With the “normal” Zeeman effect, a spectralfrequency is split by a magnetic field into three frequencies, withexpected even spacing between them (see FIG. 65 a which shows the“normal” Zeeman effects and FIG. 65 b which shows the “anomalous” Zeemaneffects). One of the new split frequencies is above the originalfrequency, and the other new split frequency is below the originalfrequency. Both new frequencies are split the same distance away fromthe original frequency. Thus, the difference between the upper andoriginal and the lower and original frequencies is about the same. Thismeans that in terms of heterodyne differences, there are at most, twonew heterodyned differences with the normal Zeeman effect. The firstheterodyne or splitting difference is the difference between one of thenew split frequencies and the original frequency. The other splittingdifference is between the upper and lower new split frequencies. It is,of course, twice the frequency difference between either of the upper orlower frequencies and the original frequency.

In many instances the Zeeman splitting produced by a magnetic fieldresults in more than three frequencies, or in splitting that is spaceddifferently than expected. This is called the “anomalous” Zeeman effect(see FIGS. 65 and 66; wherein FIG. 66 shows an anomalous Zeeman effectfor zinc 3p→3s.

If there are still just three frequencies, and the Zeeman effect isanomalous because the spacing is different than expected, the situationis similar to the normal effect. However, there are at most, two newsplitting frequencies that can be used. If, however, the effect isanomalous because more than three frequencies are produced, then therewill be a much more richly varied situation. Assume an easy case wherethere are four Zeeman splitting frequencies (see FIG. 67 a and FIG. 67b). FIG. 67 a shows four Zeeman splitting frequencies and FIG. 67 bshows four new heterodyned differences.

In this example of anomalous Zeeman splitting, there are a total of fourfrequencies, where once existed only one frequency. For simplicity'ssake, the new Zeeman frequencies will be labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4.Frequencies 3 and 4 are also split apart by the same difference “w”.Thus, “w” is a heterodyned splitting frequency. Frequencies 2 and 3 arealso split apart by a different amount “x”. So far there are twoheterodyned splitting frequencies, as in the normal Zeeman effect.

However, frequencies 1 and 3 are split apart by a third amount “y”,where “y” is the sum of “w” and “x”. And, frequencies 2 and 4 are alsosplit apart by the same third amount “y”. Finally, frequencies 1 and 4are split even farther apart by an amount “z”. Once again, “z” is asummation amount from adding “w+x+w”. Thus, the result is fourheterodyned frequencies: w, x, y, and z in the anomalous Zeeman effect.

If there were six frequencies present from the anomalous Zeeman effect,there would be even more heterodyned differences. Thus, the anomalousZeeman effect results in far greater flexibility in the choice offrequencies when compared to the normal Zeeman effect. In the normalZeeman effect the original frequency is split into three evenly spacedfrequencies, with a total of just two heterodyned frequencies. In theanomalous Zeeman effect the original frequency is split into four ormore unevenly spaced frequencies, with at least four or more heterodynedfrequencies.

Similar Zeeman effects can occur in molecules. Molecules come in threebasic varieties: ferromagnetic; paramagnetic; and diamagnetic.Ferromagnetic molecules are typical magnets. The materials typicallyhold a strong magnetic field and are composed of magnetic elements suchas iron, cobalt, and nickel.

Paramagnetic molecules hold only a weak magnetic field. If aparamagnetic material is put into an external magnetic field, themagnetic moment of the molecules of the material are lined up in thesame direction as the external magnetic field. Now, the magnetic momentof the molecules is the direction in which the molecules own magneticfield is weighted. Specifically, the magnetic moment of a molecule willtip to whichever side of the molecule is more heavily weighted in termsof its own magnetic field. Thus, paramagnetic molecules will typicallytip in the same direction as an externally applied magnetic field.Because paramagnetic materials line up with an external magnetic field,they are also weakly attracted to sources of magnetic fields.

Common paramagnetic elements include oxygen, aluminum, sodium,magnesium, calcium and potassium. Stable molecules such as oxygen (O₂)and nitric oxide (NO) are also paramagnetic. Molecular oxygen makes upapproximately 20% of our planet's atmosphere. Both molecules playimportant roles in biologic organisms. In addition, unstable molecules,more commonly known as free radicals, chemical reaction intermediates orplasmas, are also paramagnetic. Paramagnetic ions include hydrogen,manganese, chromium, iron, cobalt, and nickel. Many paramagneticsubstances occur in biological organisms. For instance the blood flowingin our veins is an ionic solution containing red blood cells. The redblood cells contain hemoglobin, which in turn contains ionized iron. Thehemoglobin, and hence the red blood cells, are paramagnetic. Inaddition, hydrogen ions can be found in a multitude of organic compoundsand reactions. For instance, the hydrochloric acid in a stomach containshydrogen ions. Adenosine triphosphate (ATP), the energy system of nearlyall biological organisms, requires hydrogen and manganese ions tofunction properly. Thus, the very existence of life itself depends onparamagnetic materials.

Diamagnetic molecules, on the other hand, are repelled by a magneticfield, and line up what little magnetic moments they have away from thedirection of an external magnetic field. Diamagnetic substances do nottypically hold a magnetic field. Examples of diamagnetic elementsinclude hydrogen, helium, neon, argon, carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus,chlorine, copper, zinc, silver, gold, lead, and mercury. Diamagneticmolecules include water, most gases, organic compounds, and salts suchas sodium chloride. Salts are really just crystals of diamagnetic ions.Diamagnetic ions include lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium,fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, ammonium, and sulphate. Ioniccrystals usually dissolve easily in water, and as such the ionic watersolution is also diamagnetic. Biologic organisms are filled withdiamagnetic materials, because they are carbon-based life forms. Inaddition, the blood flowing in our veins is an ionic solution containingblood cells. The ionic solution (i.e., blood plasma) is made of watermolecules, sodium ions, potassium ions, chlorine ions, and organicprotein compounds. Hence, our blood is a diamagnetic solution carryingparamagnetic blood cells.

With regard to the Zeeman effect, first consider the case ofparamagnetic molecules. As with atoms, the effects can be categorized onthe basis of magnetic field strength. If the external magnetic fieldapplied to a paramagnetic molecule is weak, the Zeeman effect willproduce splitting into equally spaced levels. In most cases, the amountof splitting will be directly proportional to the strength of themagnetic field, a “first-order” effect. A general rule of thumb is thata field of one (1) oersted (i.e., slightly larger than the earth'smagnetic field) will produce Zeeman splittings of approximately 1.4 MHzin paramagnetic molecules. Weaker magnetic fields will produce narrowersplittings, at lower frequencies. Stronger magnetic fields will producewider splittings, at higher frequencies. In these first order Zeemaneffects, there is usually only splitting, with no shifting of theoriginal or center frequency, as was present with Zeeman effects onatoms.

In many paramagnetic molecules there are also second-order effects wherethe Zeeman splitting is proportional to the square of the magnetic fieldstrength. In these cases, the splitting is much smaller and of muchlower frequencies. In addition to splitting, the original or centerfrequencies shift as they do in atoms, proportional to the magneticfield strength.

Sometimes the direction of the magnetic field in relation to theorientation of the molecule makes a difference. For instance, πfrequencies are associated with a magnetic field parallel to an excitingelectromagnetic field, while σ frequencies are found when it isperpendicular. Both π and σ frequencies are present with a circularlypolarized electromagnetic field. Typical Zeeman splitting patterns for aparamagnetic molecule in two different transitions are shown in FIGS. 68a and 68 b. The π frequencies are seen when ΔM=0, and are above the longhorizontal line. The σ frequencies are seen when ΔM=+1, and are belowthe long horizontal line. If a paramagnetic molecule was placed in aweak magnetic field, circularly polarized light would excite both setsof frequencies in the molecule. Thus, it is possible to control whichset of frequencies are excited in a molecule by controlling itsorientation with respect to the magnetic field.

When the magnetic field strength is intermediate, the interactionbetween the paramagnetic molecule's magnetic moments and the externallyapplied magnetic field produces Zeeman effects equivalent to otherfrequencies and energies in the molecule. For instance, the Zeemanspitting may be near a rotational frequency and disturb the end-over-endrotational motion of the molecule. The Zeeman splitting and energy maybe particular or large enough to uncouple the molecule's spin from itsmolecular axis.

If the magnetic field is very strong, the nuclear magnetic moment spinwill uncouple from the molecular angular momentum. In this case, theZeeman effects overwhelm the hyperfine structure, and are of much higherenergies at much higher frequencies. In spectra of molecules exposed tostrong magnetic fields, hyperfine splitting appears as a smallperturbation of the Zeeman splitting.

Next, consider Zeeman effects in so called “ordinary molecules” ordiamagnetic molecules. Most molecules are of the diamagnetic variety,hence the designation “ordinary”. This includes, of course, most organicmolecules found in biologic organisms. Diamagnetic molecules haverotational magnetic moments from rotation of the positively chargednucleus, and this magnetic moment of the nucleus is only about 1/1000 ofthat from the paramagnetic molecules. This means that the energy fromZeeman splitting in diamagnetic molecules is much smaller than theenergy from Zeeman splitting in paramagnetic molecules. The equation forthe Zeeman energy in diamagnetic molecules is:Hz=−(g _(j) J=g ₁ I).βH _(o)where J is the molecular rotational angular momentum, I is thenuclear-spin angular momentum, g_(j) is the rotational g factor, and g₁is the nuclear-spin g factor. This Zeeman energy is much less, and ofmuch lower frequency, than the paramagnetic Zeeman energy. In terms offrequency, it falls in the hertz and kilohertz regions of theelectromagnetic spectrum.

Finally, consider the implications of Zeeman splitting for catalyst andchemical reactions and for spectral chemistry. A weak magnetic fieldwill produce hertz and kilohertz Zeeman splitting in atoms and secondorder effects in paramagnetic molecules. Virtually any kind of magneticfield will produce hertz and kilohertz Zeeman splitting in diamagneticmolecules. All these atoms and molecules will then become sensitive toradio and very low frequency (VLF) electromagnetic waves. The atoms andmolecules will absorb the radio or VLF energy and become stimulated to agreater or lesser degree. This could be used to add spectral energy to,for instance, a particular molecule or intermediate in a chemicalcrystallization reaction system. For instance, for hydrogen and oxygengases turning into water over a platinum catalyst, the hydrogen atomradical is important for maintaining the reaction. In the earth's weakmagnetic field, Zeeman splitting for hydrogen is around 30 KHz. Thus,the hydrogen atoms in the crystallization reaction system, could beenergized by applying to them a Zeeman splitting frequency for hydrogen(e.g., 30 KHz). Energizing the hydrogen atoms in the crystallizationreaction system will duplicate the mechanisms of action of platinum, andcatalyze the reaction. If the reaction was moved into outer space, awayfrom the earth's weak magnetic field, hydrogen would no longer have a 30KHz Zeeman splitting frequency, and the 30 KHz would no longer aseffectively catalyze the reaction.

The vast majority of materials on this planet, by virtue of existingwithin the earth's weak magnetic field, will exhibit Zeeman splitting inthe hertz and kilohertz regions. This applies to biologics and organicsas well as inorganic or inanimate materials. Humans are composed of awide variety of atoms, diamagnetic molecules, and second order effectparamagnetic molecules. These atoms and molecules all exist in theearth's weak magnetic field. These atoms and molecules in humans allhave Zeeman splitting in the hertz and kilohertz regions, because theyare in the earth's magnetic field. Biochemical and biocatalyticprocesses in humans are thus sensitive to hertz and kilohertzelectromagnetic radiation, by virtue of the fact that they are in theearth's weak magnetic field. As long as humans continue to exist on thisplanet, they will be subject to spectral energy catalyst effects fromhertz and kilohertz EM waves because of the Zeeman effect from theplanet's magnetic field. This has significant implications for lowfrequency communications, as well as chemical and biochemical reactions,diagnostics, and treatment of diseases.

A strong magnetic field will produce splitting greater than thehyperfine frequencies, in the microwave and infrared regions of the EMspectrum in atoms and paramagnetic molecules. In the hydrogen/oxygenreaction, a strong field could be added to the crystallization reactionsystem and transmit MHz and/or GHz frequencies into the reaction toenergize the hydroxy radical and hydrogen reaction intermediates. Ifphysical platinum was used to catalyze the reaction, the application ofa particular magnetic field strength could result in both the platinumand the reaction intermediate spectra having frequencies that were splitand shifted in such a way that even more frequencies matched thanwithout the magnetic field. In this way, Zeeman splitting can be used toimprove the effectiveness of a physical catalyst, by copying itsmechanism of action (i.e., more frequencies could be caused to match andthus more energy could transfer).

A moderate magnetic field will produce Zeeman splitting in atoms andparamagnetic molecules at frequencies on par with the hyperfine androtational splitting frequencies. This means that a crystallizationreaction system can be energized without even adding electromagneticenergy. Similarly, by placing the crystallization reaction system in amoderate magnetic field that produces Zeeman splitting equal to thehyperfine or rotational splitting, increased reaction would occur. Forinstance, by using a magnetic field that causes hyperfine or rotationalsplitting in hydrogen and oxygen gas, that matches the Zeeman splittingin hydrogen atom or hydroxy radicals, the hydrogen or hydroxyintermediate would be energized and would proceed through the reactioncascade to produce water. By using the appropriately tuned moderatemagnetic field, the magnetic field could be used to turn the reactantsinto catalysts for their own reaction, without the addition of physicalcatalyst platinum or the spectral catalyst of platinum. Although themagnetic field would simply be copying the mechanism of action ofplatinum, the reaction would have the appearance of being catalyzedsolely by an applied magnetic field.

Finally, consider the direction of the magnetic field in relation to theorientation of the molecule. When the magnetic field is parallel to anexciting electromagnetic field, π frequencies are produced. When themagnetic field is perpendicular to an exciting electromagnetic field, σfrequencies are found. Assume that there is an industrial chemicalcrystallization reaction system that uses the same (or similar) startingreactants, but the goal is to be able to produce different products atwill. By using magnetic fields combined with spectral energy or physicalcatalysts, the reaction can be guided to one set of products or another.For the first set of products, the electromagnetic excitation isoriented parallel to the magnetic field, producing one set of πfrequencies, which leads to a first set of products. To achieve adifferent product, the direction of the magnetic field is changed sothat it is perpendicular to the exciting electromagnetic field. Thisproduces a different set of a frequencies, and a different reactionpathway is energized, thus producing a different set of products. Thus,according to the present invention, magnetic field effects, Zeemansplitting, splitting and spectral energy catalysts can be used tofine-tune the specificity of many crystallization reaction systems.

Similar to other spectral frequencies, as previously discussed, controlof resonant energy exchange via manipulation of magnetic fields can beused in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

In summary, by understanding the underlying spectral mechanism tochemical reactions, magnetic fields can be used as yet another tool tocatalyze and modify those chemical reactions by modifying the spectralcharacteristics of at least one participant and/or at least onecomponent in the crystallization reaction system.

Reaction Vessel and Conditioning Reaction Vessel Size, Shape andComposition

An important consideration in the use of spectral chemistry is thereaction vessel size, shape and composition. The reaction vessel sizeand shape can affect the vessel's NOF to various wave energies (e.g.,EM, acoustic, electrical current, etc). This in turn may affect cellreaction system dynamics. For instance, a particularly small bench-topreaction vessel may have an EM NOF of 1,420 MHz related to a 25 cmdimension. When a reaction with an atomic hydrogen intermediate isperformed in the small bench-top reaction the reaction proceeds quickly,due in part to the fact that the reactor vessel and the hydrogenhyperfine splitting frequencies match (1,420 MHz). This allows thereaction vessel and hydrogen intermediates to resonate, thustransferring energy to the intermediate and promoting the reactionpathway.

When the reaction is scaled up for large industrial production, thereaction would occur in a much larger reaction vessel with an EM NOF of,for example, 100 MHz. Because the reaction vessel is no longerresonating with the hydrogen intermediate, the reaction proceeds at aslower rate. This deficiency in the larger reaction vessel can becompensated for, by, for example, supplementing the reaction with 1,420MHz radiation, thereby restoring the faster reaction rate.

Likewise, reaction vessel (or conditioning reaction vessel) compositionmay play a similar role in crystallization reaction system dynamics. Forexample, a stainless steel bench-top reaction vessel may producevibrational frequencies which resonate with vibrational frequencies of areactant, thus, for example, promoting disassociation of a reactant intoreactive intermediates. When the reaction is scaled up for industrialproduction, it may be placed into, for example, a ceramic-lined metalreactor vessel. The new reaction vessel typically will not produce thereactant vibrational frequency, and the reaction will proceed at aslower rate. Once again, this deficiency in the new reaction vessel,caused by its different composition, can be compensated for either byreturning the reaction to a stainless steel vessel, or by supplementing,for example, the vibrational frequency of the reactant into theceramic-lined vessel; and/or conditioning the reaction vessel with asuitable conditioning energy prior to some or all of the othercomponents of the reaction system being introduced into the reactionvessel.

It should now be understood that all the aspects of spectral chemistrypreviously discussed (resonance, targeting, poisons, promoters,supporters, electric and magnetic-fields both endogenous and exogenousto cell reaction system components, etc.) apply to the reaction vessel(or conditioning reaction vessel), as well as to, for example, anyparticipant (or conditionable participant) placed inside it. Thereaction vessel (or conditioning reaction vessel) may be comprised ofmatter (e.g., stainless steel, plastic, glass, and/or ceramic, etc.) orit may be comprised of a field or energy (e.g., magnetic bottle, lighttrapping, etc.) A reaction vessel (or conditioning reactor vessel), bypossessing inherent properties such as frequencies, waves, and/orfields, may interact with other components in the cell reaction systemand/or at least one participant. Likewise, holding vessels, conduits,etc., some of which may interact with the reaction system, but in whichthe reaction does not actually take place, may interact with one or morecomponents in the cell reaction system and may potentially affect them,either positively or negatively. Accordingly, when reference is made tothe reaction vessel, it should be understood that all portionsassociated therewith may also be involved in desirable reactions.

EXAMPLES

The invention will be more clearly perceived and better understood fromthe following specific examples.

Example 1 Enhancing the Growth of Sodium Chloride Crystals

This Example shows that the growth of crystals of NaCl was enhanced byapplying electromagnetic energy from a commercially available 70-watthigh-pressure sodium bulb to a saturated solution of sodium chloride.Specifically, as shown schematically in FIG. 88, a glass beaker 200 wasdivided substantially in half vertically by a divider or membrane 201.The divider or membrane 201 was not completely liquid-tight at thepoints where it contacted the glass beaker 200. Thus, ions were capableof migrating around and/or underneath the membrane 201 to permitsubstantially equivalent ion concentrations at any point in the beaker200. However, the membrane 201 itself was substantially impervious tovisible light frequencies. In particular, the membrane 201 was comprisedof a paper-backed acetate material which is similar to the material usedfor creating overhead projector transparencies. A saturated solution ofsodium chloride 202 was prepared by known conventional techniques.Specifically, distilled and deionized water was heated to about 45° C.and sodium chloride crystals from Fisher Chemicals (Certified A.C.S. anddiscussed later herein) were added until no more dissolution of thesodium chloride crystals occurred. The liquid was then decanted andfiltered from any remaining undissolved sodium chloride and theresulting solution was placed into the beaker 200.

A commonly available, 70 watt, high-pressure sodium lamp 203, was usedto illuminate only side “A” of the beaker 200 containing the saturatedNaCl solution 202. The lamp 203 was made by Philips and was sold underthe Trademark CERAMALUX. The electric discharge sodium lamp 203contained primarily sodium, but also contained some mercury, as iscommon in this type of discharge lamp. As shown in FIG. 88, a camera 204was positioned on top of a magnifying microscopic assembly (not shown)so as to be able to view both of sides “A” and “B” from the top of thebeaker 200 under 2× to 4× magnification.

The sodium lamp 203 was allowed to illuminate only the side “A” of thebeaker 200 while the saturated solution 202 in both sides “A” and “B”was maintained at about room temperature. Even though the membrane 201was not completely light-tight, the specific positioning of the lightsource 203 along with the positioning of the membrane 201 preventedalmost all light from entering side “B” of the beaker 200. Thetemperature of the solution 202 was maintained at constant temperature(in this Example room temperature) by using a conventionalheating/cooling stage (not shown in FIG. 88). In addition, allphotomicrographs were taken by a computer-controlled system whichpermitted an instantaneous reading of temperature at the moment that thephotomicrograph was taken. The entire crystal growth experiment wasperformed in a darkened room.

FIG. 89 a shows crystals 205 (magnification 4×) which were grown fromthe saturated solution 202 on side “A” of the beaker 200 which wasilluminated by the sodium lamp 203 of FIG. 88. FIG. 89 b shows crystals205 (magnification 4×) which are grown from a solution corresponding toside “B” of the beaker 200. FIG. 89 c shows an actual photomicrographcorresponding to a top view of the beaker 200 (by the microscope 204)with the divider or membrane 201 forming sides “A” and “B”. It is clearthat side “A” of the chamber contained a number of crystals 205, whereasside “B” of the chamber did not exhibit nearly as much crystal formationin comparison to side “A”. Accordingly, the sodium discharge lamp 203had a dramatic impact on the number, size and morphology (more precisefaceting, pyramidal crystals) of crystals 205 formed from the saturatedsolution 202.

Example 2 Enhancing the Crystal Growth of Sodium Chloride

This Example shows that the growth of crystals of NaCl was enhanced byapplying electromagnetic energy from a commercially available 70-watthigh pressure sodium bulb to a saturated solution of sodium chloride;compared to crystal growth achieved with electromagnetic energy of asimilar intensity but a different wavelength or frequency (e.g.,provided by a tungsten light source).

Specifically, FIG. 90 shows a schematic representation of an assemblysimilar to that assembly used in Example 1. In particular, a slide 206,contained a small amount of a saturated solution 202 of sodium chloridethereon. The saturated solution of sodium chloride 202 was prepared bythe same conventional techniques discussed in Example 1. A small amountof saturated solution 202 was placed onto the slide 206. As discussed inExample 1, the saturated solution 202 was made at a temperature about45° C. The solution 202 was transferred to the slide 206 while itstemperature was still elevated (e.g., was around 25-35° C.). The slide206 was placed onto the same heating/cooling stage 310 discussed inExample 1. The temperature of the solution 202 was thereafter cooled bythe heating and controlled channels 311 and 312 which were capable ofchanging temperature at a rate of about 1° C. per minute.

A light source 203 comprising the same sodium light source discussed inExample 1, and a light source 203′, comprising a tungsten bulb, weresequentially exposed to different solutions 202. Specifically, a firstsample of the saturated solution 202 was cooled down from about 3045°C., depending on the experiment, at a controlled rate of about 1° C. perminute while the sodium light source 203 was irradiated onto thesolution 202 on the slide 206. Similarly, a second series of samples ofsaturated solution 202 was cooled from about 30-45° C., at the samecontrolled rate of about 1° C. per minute, while the tungsten lightsource 203′ was irradiated onto the solution 202 located on the slide206. In this instance, a 50 Å bandpass filter 207 was used whichpermitted only light corresponding to wavelengths of from about 4225 Åto about 4275 Å to pass therethrough. Similarly, a third sample ofsaturated solution 202 was cooled from about 30-45° C. at the samecontrolled rate of about 1° C. per minute while the filtered tungstenlight source 203′ was irradiated onto the solution 202 on the stage 206.In this instance, a second bandpass 50 Å filter 207′ was used whichpermitted light corresponding to wavelengths of from about 6175 Å toabout 6225 Å to pass therethrough. In each of these three differentsaturated solution samples series, the onset of crystallization wasmonitored and recorded by a computer-controlled system which permittedan instantaneous reading of temperature at the moment that thephotograph was taken. It was noted that these solutions, upon cooling,may have become slightly supersaturated. However, for comparisonpurposes, the solutions were at the same temperatures and cooled at thesame rates. Thus, the amount of crystallization observed was only afunction of the spectral patterns that irradiated the solutions.

FIG. 91 a shows a transmission optical micrograph of the NaCl crystalgrowth which had resulted at a temperature of approximately 20° C. Thesaturated solution was illuminated by the sodium source light 203.

FIG. 91 b shows a transmission optical micrograph of the NaCl crystalgrowth from the saturated solution taken at about 19° C. This saturatedsolution was illuminated with a tungsten light filtered by the bandpassfilter 207 (i.e., 4225 Å-4275 Å).

FIG. 91 c shows a transmission optical micrograph of the NaCl crystalgrowth from saturated solution taken at about 19° C. This saturatedsolution was illuminated with a tungsten light filtered by the bandpassfilter of 207′ (i.e., 6175 Å-6225 Å).

It is clear from comparing the results in FIG. 91 a, versus the resultsin both of FIGS. 91 b and 91 c, that the illumination of the saturatedsolution 202 with a sodium light source 203 had a dramatic increase inthe amount of crystallization or crystal growth compared to illuminationwith the tungsten light source 203′ filtered by the two filters207/207′, as shown in FIGS. 91 b and 91 c, respectively. In particular,the amount of field occlusion which is shown in FIG. 91 a is much moredramatic than the amount of field occlusion that is shown in FIG. 91 bor 91 c. In this particular example, field occlusion is equivalent tothe amount of crystallization that occurred. Accordingly, it is clearthat the sodium light source had a dramatic impact on the number andsize of crystals 205 which were formed from the saturated solution 202.It should be noted that the excessive field occlusion shown in FIG. 91 awas accompanied by an onset of crystallization which began immediatelyupon illumination with the sodium light source. Crystallization did notbegin in the experiments corresponding to FIGS. 91 b and 91 c until thesolutions had cooled 2-3° C. Typically, in traditional crystallizationexperiments of this general type (e.g., growing NaCl crystals fromsolution) less crystallization would be expected at higher temperatures.NaCl crystal growth began at about 25° C. in the experimentcorresponding to FIG. 91 a; at about 23° C. in the experimentcorresponding to FIG. 91 b; and at about 22° C. in the experimentcorresponding to FIG. 91 c. Clearly the results shown in this Example 2demonstrate that the sodium light influenced not only the amount ofcrystallization, but also the temperature at which the onset of crystalgrowth began.

Example 3 Enhancing the Growth of Potassium Dihydrogen PhosphateCyrstals

The procedures of Example 1 were followed except for the followingdifferences. Rather than forming a saturated solution of NaCl in water,a saturated solution of “KDP” (Potassium Dihydrogen Phosphate) wasformed. The KDP (molecular weight 136.1) was obtained from BakerAnalyzed Reagents (Stock #1-3246; Bakers Company in Phillipsburg, N.J.).Further, a potassium light source (Thermo Oriel, 10 W spectral linepotassium lamp #65070; lamp mount #65160 and spectral lamp power supply#65150) was used rather than the sodium light source. Moreover, themembrane 201 divided the beaker 202 into four sections rather than two.The potassium source light was introduced to only one portion of thebeaker 202. Growth of KDP crystals was observed only in the section ofthe beaker 202 which had the potassium light incident thereon.Absolutely no KDP crystal growth began in any of the three otherchambers in the beaker 202 under the experimental conditions of thisExample 3.

Example 4 Various Sodium Chloride and Sodium Bromide CrystallizationExperiments

For the following Examples 4a-4ah, the below-listed Equipment, materialsand experimental procedures were utilized (unless stated differently ineach Example).

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Sterile water—Bio Whittaker, contained in one liter clear,        plastic bottles, processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis,        deionization, and distillation.    -   Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kg        bottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Sodium Chloride; Certified A.C.S.            -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.            -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%            -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%            -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%            -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0            -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm            -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%            -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Potassium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3        Kg bottles. The potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Potassium Chloride, Certified A.C.S.            -   Bromide—0.01%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.001%            -   Phosphate—less than 5 ppm            -   Sulfate—less than 0.001%            -   Barium 0.001%            -   Calcium and R₂O₃ Precipitate—less than 0.002%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 5 ppm            -   Iron—less than 2 ppm            -   Sodium—less than 0.005%            -   Magnesium—less than 0.001%            -   Iodide—less than 0.002%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.4 to 8.6            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.005%    -   Sodium Bromide, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in small (e.g.,        pint-sized) brown glass jars. The sodium bromide, in crystalline        form, is characterized as follows:        -   Sodium Bromide, Certified A.C.S.            -   Barium—less than 0.002%            -   Bromate—less than 0.001%            -   Calcium—less than 0.002%            -   Magnesium—less than 0.001%            -   Chloride—less than 0.2%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 5 ppm            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.005%            -   Iron—less than 5 ppm            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 5 ppm            -   pH of a 5% solution at 25° C.—5.5 to 8.8            -   Potassium—less than 0.1%            -   Sulfate—less than 0.002%    -   Humboldt Bunsen burner, with Coleman propane fuel.    -   One or more sodium lamps, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium        security wall light, fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector        directing the light away from the housing. The sodium bulb was a        Type S62 lamp, 120V, 60 Hz, 1.5 A made in Hungary by        Jemanamjjasond. One or more sodium lamps was/were mounted at        various angles, and location(s) as specified in each experiment.        Unless stated differently in the Example, the lamp was located        at about 15 inches (about 38 cm) from the beakers or dishes to        maintain substantially consistent intensities.    -   Potassium lamp, Thermo Oriel, 10 watt spectral line potassium        lamp #65070 with Thermo Oriel lamp mount #65160 and Thermo Oriel        spectral lamp power supply #65150. The potassium lamp was        mounted overhead with the bulb oriented horizontally and about 9        inches (about 23 cm) from the experimental surface.    -   Full spectrum lamp, 75 watt, frosted Chromalux full spectrum        lamp (containing full visible spectra of sodium, potassium,        chlorine, and bromine). The full spectrum lamp was mounted        overhead with the bulb oriented vertically and also, typically,        about 15 inches from the beakers or dishes used in the various        Examples, unless stated differently in each Example.    -   Shielded room in a dark or darkened room, Ace Shielded Room,        Ace, Philadelphia, Pa., U.S. Model A6H3-16, copper mesh, with a        width of about eight feet, a length of about 17 feet and a        height of about eight feet (about 2.4 meters×5.2 meters×2.4        meters).

b) Preparation of Solutions

-   -   i) Classical Solution—The apparatus used to make a classical        solution is shown schematically in FIG. 92. Water (about 800 ml)        was placed into a glass Beaker 104 and was heated with a Bunsen        burner 101 from room temperature to about 55° C. in about 6-12        minutes. Salt was added in about 50 gram amounts and the        solution 105 was stirred with a glass stir rod (not shown) until        no more salt would dissolve and undissolved salt remained on the        bottom of the Beaker 104. The solution 105 was then allowed to        equilibrate overnight (about 16 hours) before being decanted for        use in the various crystallization experiments discussed later        herein.    -   ii) Conditioned Solution—The apparatus used to make a        conditioned solution is shown in FIG. 93. Water (about 800 ml)        was heated by the sodium lamp 112 and housing 111, which        together were positioned below the Beaker 104. The light from        the bulb 112 was made to be incident on the bottom of the Beaker        104 through an aluminum foil cylinder 110 which functioned as a        light guide. The temperature of the solution 105 was raised to        about 55° C. in about 40 minutes. Salt was added in about 50        gram amounts and the solution 105 was stirred with a glass stir        rod until no more salt would dissolve and undissolved salt        remained on the bottom of the Beaker 104. The solution 105 was        allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 16 hours) before being        decanted for use in the various crystallization experiments        discussed later herein.

The D lines in the sodium electronic spectrum are resonant withvibrational overtones of water. Energizing these vibrational overtonesof water changes its material properties as a solvent. Thus, the sodiumlamp can be used to condition the water and change its materialproperties before it is used in a crystallization solution.

c) Crystallization Procedures

-   -   i) Classical Crystallization—Solution was placed in a beaker or        in a crystallization dish and left undisturbed in the presence        of ambient overhead fluorescent lighting.    -   ii) Spectral Crystallization—Solution was placed in a beaker or        in a crystallization dish and left undisturbed in the presence        of irradiation from one or more positioned sodium or potassium        lamps (as discussed in each Example). The sodium electronic        spectrum produced by the spectral lamp affected metal halide        phase changes.

d) Spectral Delivery Configurations

-   -   i) Cone—Aluminum foil cone light guide fitted around a sodium        light bulb, extending about 23 cm from the bulb, with the distal        end formed around a uniform diameter of about 1.8 cm.    -   ii) Cylinder—Aluminum foil cylinder light guide fitted around a        sodium light bulb, extending about 23 cm from the bulb, with a        uniform diameter of about 6 cm.    -   iii) Parabolic—Aluminum dish (e.g., from a small stove-top        burner) fitted around a sodium light bulb without a foil light        guide.

e) Ambient Lighting

All experimental conditions described in the Examples occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts, and were eachabout eight (8) feet long (about 2.4 meters long). The lamps weresuspended in pairs approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counteron which the experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairsof lamps present in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40feet (7.6 meters×12.1 meters).

Example 4a Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 50 ml), at room temperature(22° C.), was placed into three glass beakers (200 ml). One beaker wasplaced in a 25° C. waterbath (making the solution slightly unsaturated)with spectral crystallization being initiated from a single overheadsodium lamp 112 with a cone delivery configuration 120 (as shown in FIG.94). The second beaker was placed directly on the laboratory counterwith spectral crystallization being irradiated from a single overheadsodium lamp 112 with a cone delivery configuration 120 (as shown in FIG.94). The third beaker was placed into a plastic bucket as a control withno ambient light being incident on the saturated solution.Crystallization proceeded for about 21 hours under overhead fluorescentambient lights (i.e., the first and second beakers).

Results: Both spectral crystallizations, relative to the control(crystals shown in FIG. 98 a), showed more primary nucleation, andincreased growth rate. The 25° C. unsaturated solution, which wasspectrally irradiated, showed more crystallization (crystals shown inFIG. 98 c) relative to the saturated spectral crystallization experiment(crystals shown in FIG. 98 b). Moreover, the unsaturated solution showedmore primary nucleation, increased sizes in NaCl crystals (e.g., about 2mm average vs. about 1 mm average), and certain changes in morphology(rod-like structure (see FIG. 98 d) in addition to cubes) and moreprecise faceting relative to the saturated and spectrally excitedsolution. Thus, the crystals from the thermally unsaturated solutionshown in FIGS. 98 c and 98 d were larger than the crystals from thesaturated solution shown in FIG. 98 b.

Example 4b Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml), at room temperature(22° C.), was placed into four glass beakers (about 200 ml in size).Beaker #1 was suspended over a sodium lamp 112 with an aluminum foilcone 120 used to direct the energy from the sodium light 112 and thehousing toward the Beaker 104, as shown in FIG. 95. Beaker #2, whichalso contained about 100 ml of classical saturated NaCl solution, hadabout 10 ml of water added thereto using a glass syringe (i.e., makingthe solution slightly unsaturated). Beaker #2 was also suspended over asodium lamp 112 using a cone 120, as shown in FIG. 95. Beaker #3 wasplaced in an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket as a saturated control. Afteradding about 10 ml of water to beaker #4, it too was placed in thealuminum foil-wrapped bucket, but as an unsaturated control.Crystallization commenced under ambient overhead fluorescent lights.Approximately 2 hours after placing the beakers over the sodium lamps112 (as shown in FIG. 95) it was noted that heat rising from the sodiumlamps and sodium lamp housings 111 was heating the NaCl solutions inbeakers 1 and 2. Solution temperatures were measured and Beaker #1 wasabout 56° C. The temperature of the solution 105 in Beaker #2 was about58° C. and there were numerous small crystals on the bottom of thebeaker and on the surface of the solution 105. A fan was used to coolthe solutions while still delivering sodium spectra through the bottomsof the beakers. After about 21 hours, the temperature in Beaker #1 wasabout 22° C.; and the temperature in Beaker #2 was about 27° C.

Results: Both spectral crystallizations in Beakers #1 and #2, comparedto the saturated control in Beaker #3, showed increased primarynucleation and increased crystal growth. The unsaturated control inBeaker #4 had no growth. Crystals from the unsaturated solution inBeaker #2 showed decreased primary nucleation, substantially increasedgrowth rate (about 3-7 mm in size), and certain changes in morphology(rods) compared to the saturated solution in Beaker #1 (about 1-2 mm insize cubic crystals).

Example 4c Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml), at room temperature(22° C.), was placed into three beakers (about 200 ml in size). Sterilewater (about 10 ml) was added to the 100 ml of classical saturatedsolution in Beaker #1 and Beaker #2, which were both suspended over asodium lamp 112 with a cone delivery configuration 120, as shown in FIG.95. Beaker #3 was placed into an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket as asaturated control. Beaker #1 was cooled with a fan. Beaker #2 wasshielded from the fan until the temperature rose to about 58° C., andthe shield was removed. Crystallization commenced under ambient overheadfluorescent lighting. After about 20 hours, the temperature in Beaker #1was about 23° C. and there was no observed crystallization growth. Thetemperature in Beaker #2 was about 25° C.

Results: There were several cubic (approximately 3-8 mm) and arectangular crystal (approximately 4×11 mm), similar to Example 4b,Beaker #2.

Example 4d Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) at room temperature(22° C.) was placed into Beaker #1. A spectral saturated NaCl solution(about 100 ml) at room temperature (22° C.) was placed into Beaker #2.Beaker #3 with about 100 ml classical solution and Beaker #4 with about100 ml of spectral solution were placed into an aluminum foil-wrappedbucket as controls. Beakers #1 and #2 were each placed under a singleoverhead sodium lamp 112 with a cone delivery configuration 120 (asshown in FIG. 94). Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours)under ambient overhead fluorescent lighting.

Results: Beakers #1 and #2 showed increased primary nucleation, andincreased growth rate compared to the controls. Beaker #2, with aspectral solution, showed substantially increased primary nucleation andmore overall crystallization (about 3.8 grams total) compared to theclassical solution in Beaker #1 (about 3.3 grams total). In addition,crystals from the spectral solution had an altered morphology whichincluded glass sheets, pyramid structures, and hollow pyramids insidecubic structures.

Example 4e Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml), at room temperature(22° C.), was placed into three beakers (about 200 ml in size). Sterilewater (about 10 ml) was added to all three beakers. Beakers #1 and #2were both suspended over a sodium lamp 112 with a cone deliveryconfiguration 120 (FIG. 95). Beaker #3 was placed into an aluminumfoil-wrapped bucket as an unsaturated control. Beaker #1 was shieldedfrom the fan until the temperature rose to about 58° C., and the shieldwas removed. Beaker #2 was cooled with the fan. The tops of all threebeakers were covered with plastic wrap.

Results: After about 20 hours there was no growth in any of the beakers.

Example 4f Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml), at room temperature(22° C.) was placed into five beakers (about 200 ml in size), and 50 mlinto Beaker #6. Beakers #'s 1-5 were positioned under single overheadsodium lamps 112 with cones 120 (as shown in FIG. 94). Water was added(in the following amounts) via glass syringe to Beakers #'s 1-5 tocreate serial dilutions as follows: 1) zero; 2) 2 ml; 3) 4 ml; 4) 6 ml;and 5) 8 ml. Beaker #6 was placed into an aluminum foil-wrapped bucketas a saturated control. Spectral crystallization proceeded overnight(about 16 hours) at room temperature under ambient fluorescent lighting.

Results: Spectral crystallization of saturated, and 2 and 4 ml dilutionsof the 100 ml saturated solution showed changes in morphology (e.g.,rods, glass sheets, daisy stalks). Saturated solutions grew cubiccrystals about 14 mm on a side, and a glassy sheet about 5 mm×5 mm. The2 and 4 ml diluted solutions, relative to the saturated solution, showedapproximately the same primary nucleation, and increased growth rate ofindividual crystals up to about 5 mm cubic. The 6 and 8 ml dilutedsolutions, compared to the saturated solution, showed differentmorphologies (e.g., pyramids), and decreased nucleation and decreasedgrowth rate (e.g., ≦1 mm cubic crystals). The 6 and 8 ml dilutedsolutions showed definite spectral crystallization at decreasedsaturation (i.e., 103-104 ml remaining in beakers) with approximatelythe same primary nucleation, and approximately the same growth ratecompared to the control crystallized traditionally from saturatedsolution. Crystals grown from the 3% unsaturated solution are shown inFIG. 98 e.

Example 4g Sodium Chloride

Serial dilutions of classically prepared saturated NaCl solution (about100 ml) were created as in Example 4f, with added water per 100 ml perbeaker as follows: 1) zero; 2) 1 ml; 3) 2 ml; 4) 4 ml; 5) 6 ml; 6) 8 ml.Control Beakers #'s 7-10 each contained about 50 ml of classicalsaturated solution with added water as follows: 7) zero; 8) 0.5 ml; 9) 1ml; 10) 2 ml. Beakers #1-6 were positioned under single overhead sodiumlamps 112 with cylinder delivery configuration 110 (as shown in FIG.96), and Beakers #'s 7-10 were placed in a closed, wooden/plasticcupboard. Crystallization proceeded at room temperature overnight (about16 hours) with ambient fluorescent lighting on.

Results: All solutions in Beakers #1-6 showed substantially increasedprimary nucleation, increased growth rate, numerous clusters withindividual cubic crystals about 3-5 mm, and increased water evaporationwith overhead spectral cylinder irradiation (as shown in FIG. 96)compared to the results in Example 4f with overhead spectral coneirradiation. Beakers #1-6 also exhibited NaCl dendritic-like growth upthe sides of the beakers (as shown in FIGS. 98 ad and 98 ae) apparentlyoriginating from NaCl crystals growing expitaxially on the beaker. Byirradiating the sides of the beaker, which reflected the sodium spectralpattern, the beaker apparently functioned as an epitaxial substrate forcrystallization. Approximate NaCl crystal weights for Beakers #'s 1-6were as follows: 1) 22.9 g; 2) 10.3 g; 3) 26.4 g; 4) 22.1 g; 5) 23.4 g;6) 13.4 g. Saturated control beaker #7 grew a few small crystals, whilecontrol Beakers #8-10 had no observable crystal growth.

Example 4h Sodium Chloride

Serial dilutions of classically prepared saturated NaCl solution werecreated as in Example 15f, with added water per 100 ml per beaker asfollows: 1) zero; 2) 1 ml; 3) 2 ml; 4) 3 ml; 5) 4 ml; 6) 5 ml. Beakers#1-6 were positioned under single overhead sodium lamps 112 withcylinder delivery configuration 110 (as shown in FIG. 96).Crystallization proceeded at room temperature with no ambient lightingpresent for about 65 hours.

Results: Compared to overnight spectral crystallizations of about 16-20hours, all 65 hour crystallizations showed increased primary nucleation,and substantial increases in crystal size. Although crystallizationbegan first in more saturated solutions, the largest single crystal(i.e., about 12×12×4 mm) was from the most dilute (5 ml H₂O/100 ml)solution. There were between 10 to 20 crystals greater than 1 cm on aside in each of the Beakers #1-6. Remaining saturated solution on thecounter about 11 feet in front of the sodium lamps (e.g., there were 6sodium lamps irradiating separate beakers at one time) grew manycrystals (see FIGS. 98 p and 98 q) equal in size (i.e., about 5-7 mm andcubic in size) to those crystals grown overnight from the heatedsolutions in Examples 4b and 4c. Controls for Example 4g left on thecounter about 12 feet behind the sodium lamps grew about 1 mm sand-likecrystals in about 85 hours.

Example 4i Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution was prepared on a counter about 10feet away from the nearest sodium lamp while Example 4h, was beingconducted. Seven days later the classical saturated sodium chloridesolution (about 50 ml) was placed into each of three separate beakers ina dark, shielded room. Spectral cone crystallization in variousconfigurations, with no ambient light, proceeded overnight asfollows: 1) single horizontal sodium lamp (FIG. 97 a); 2) two horizontalsodium lamps at right angles to each other (FIG. 97 b); and 3) twohorizontal lamps at right angles to each other and one overhead lamp(FIG. 97 c).

Results: Compared to classical solutions not exposed to ambient sodiumspectral irradiation during their preparation, this solution grewcrystals that exhibited substantially increased primary nucleation andall crystals were small (e.g., less than 1 mm) sand-like crystals.

Example 4i Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution was filtered and about 50 ml wasplaced into each of three beakers in a dark and EM shielded room.Spectral cone crystallization (as discussed in Example 4i) with noambient light present occurred overnight, as above.

Results—From the single horizontal sodium lamp (FIG. 97 a) a singlecubic crystal (about 0.27 grams) grew. From two horizontal sodium lampsat approximate right angles to each other (FIG. 97 b) crystals grew(about 2.2 grams total weight) with 45° growth axes on the horizontalplane. Two horizontal lamps at approximate right angles and a third lampoverhead at approximate right angles grew hoppers and crystals withtwinning on 3 planes (3.5 grams total weight). Temperature in theshielded room was about 26° C. (i.e., about 2 degrees above roomtemperature of the original saturated solution).

Example 4k Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution prepared as above was filtered andabout 50 ml was placed into each of three beakers which were then placedinto the aforementioned dark, shielded room. Beaker #1 had fourhorizontal sodium lamps with cones (FIG. 97 d), and all at approximateright angles to each other. Beaker #2 had four overhead sodium lampswith cones, and positioned at right angles to each other and at about a45 degree angle from the horizontal (FIG. 97 e). Beaker #3 was placed ina control bucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 18 hours)with no ambient light present in the shielded room.

Results: Beaker #1 (four horizontal sodium lamps at right angles and asshown in FIG. 97 d) grew cubes (about 4-11 mm on a side) and largecrystals with significant twinning (about 16 mm on a side). Fouroverhead sodium lamps at approximate 45° angles (FIG. 97 e), grewtwinned cubes (about 5-10 mm) and large hoppers (with the largestmeasuring about 13×13×7 mm). FIGS. 98 f and 98 g show some of thecrystals grown according to this Example, with FIG. 98 g showing thelargest crystal grown. The control in total darkness in the shieldedroom showed no growth. Beaker #1 also grew epitaxial crystals anddendritic formations on the side of the beaker, where the horizontallight beams intersected the glass/solution/air triple point.

Example 4l Sodium Chloride

The experimental procedure was identical to the experimental procedureof Example 4k, except that spectral NaCl solution was used rather thanclassical NaCl solution.

Results: Beaker #1 (four horizontal sodium lamps at approximate rightangles (FIG. 97 d), grew many small twinned cubes (about 34 mm on aside). Beaker #2 (four overhead sodium lamps at approximately 45° anglesfrom horizontal and substantially equally spaced from each other (FIG.97 e), grew many small twinned cubes (about 4-5 mm on a side) and a fewtwinned crystals. The control maintained in total darkness in theshielded room showed no growth. The spectral solution exhibitedincreased nucleation.

Twinned cubic crystals from Beakers 1 and 2 were removed and placed infresh spectral, saturated, filtered NaCl solution in the dark, shieldedroom with the same spectral cone crystallization overnight.

Results: Crystals in both Beakers #1 and #2 grew pyramidal corners andrims onto the twinned cubes with substantially increased primarynucleation.

Example 4m Sodium Chloride

Seven beakers with different serial dilutions of classical saturatedfiltered NaCl solution were placed under overhead sodium lamps withparabolic dishes (FIG. 97 f). The serial dilutions were 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5and 6 ml of water separately added to about 100 ml of saturatedsolution. Four more beakers with serial dilutions (zero, 2, 4, and 6 ml)were placed in a cupboard as controls. Crystallization proceededovernight (about 20 hours) with no ambient light.

Results: Twinned cubes and/or crystals grew in all beakers, withincreased primary nucleation in the more saturated solutions andincreased crystal size in the 4 ml dilution.

Spectral Crystallization—about 3-4 mm cubic; 1 ml diluted solution about3-6 mm cubic with 1 cm polycrystalline mass; 2 ml diluted solution about4-6 mm cubes and 16 mm diameter twinned crystal with about 1 cm rodprojecting vertically at 45 degrees; 3 ml diluted solution about 5-7 mmcubes and about 14 mm polycrystalline twinned crystal; 4 ml dilutedsolution about 34 mm cubes and about 5×10 twinned polycrystalline mass;5 ml diluted solution about 2-3 mm cubes; 6 ml diluted solution about2-3 mm cubes.

Serial dilution controls had been placed in a wooden/plastic cupboard,which was later found to admit a narrow beam of light between thecupboard doors (e.g., sodium light and/or ambient fluorescent lights).The saturated control grew many small (about 1-1.5 mm cubic) primarynucleations overnight while the dilutions grew nothing. After anadditional approximately 24 hours in the cupboard, the saturated and 2ml serial dilution showed substantially increased primary nucleationwith about 1-2 mm crystals; the 4 ml diluted solution grew large rods(about 4×10 mm and about 3×8 mm), a cubic corner (about 8 mm), and twotwinned crystals (about 10×12 mm and about 9×9 mm); and the 6 ml dilutedsolution grew small sand-like crystals.

Example 4n Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution was both prepared and stored in thedark. Beakers with 100 ml filtered solution were placed into the dark,shielded room with the following set-up: 1) four horizontal sodium lampswith cones at approximate right angles (FIG. 97 d); 2) four overheadsodium lamps with cones at about 45° angles FIG. 97 e); 3) on a tableabout 8 feet from the sodium lamps; and 4) in an aluminum foil-coveredbucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours) with noambient light present.

Results:—Beaker #1 (four horizontal sodium lamps), FIG. 97 d, grew manytwinned cubes (about 34 mm), pyramids, rods, twinned crystals, and acubic corner, with a total weight of 6.1 grams. Beaker #2 (four sodiumlamps at about 45°), FIG. 97 e, grew twinned cubes and crystals (about4-5 mm on a side), and a large twinned crystal (about 18×11 mm) with atotal weight of about 9.5 grams. Beaker #3 (i.e., on the about table 8feet away) grew many small (about 1 mm) crystals, with a total weight ofabout 2.7 grams. Beaker #4 (aluminum foil-covered bucket) grew about 0.2grams of very small crystals (less than about 1 mm).

Example 4o Sodium Chloride

The experimental procedure was identical to the experimental procedureof Example 4n, except that a spectral NaCl solution prepared in the darkwas used.

Results: Beaker #1 (four horizontal sodium lamps as shown in FIG. 97 d),grew 15 twinned cubes (most about 5-7 mm), hoppers, a corner (about10×10 mm), a rod (about 15×4) and polycrystals (up to about 15×12 mm).As shown in FIGS. 98 i, 98 j, 98 k and 98 l, the crystals that weregrown according to this Example also exhibited modified growth planes at45° angles to the normal axes. Beaker #2 (four sodium lamps orientedoverhead at about a 45° angle, as shown in FIG. 97 e, grew twinned cubes(about 7 mm), 2 large hoppers (about 10×10 mm and 12×12 mm), and 5polycrystals with twinning ranging from about 6×10 mm to 14×18 mm. Asshown in FIGS. 98 m, 98 n, 98 o, and 98 v, the crystals that were grownaccording to this Example also exhibited modified growth planes at 45°angles to the normal axes. The control maintained in total darknessshowed no crystallization at all. This experiment demonstrates theeffects of directional spectral crystallization.

Example 4p Sodium Chloride

The experimental procedure was identical to Example 4n, except aspectral NaCl solution prepared under ambient fluorescent lighting wasused.

Results—Beaker #1 (four horizontal sodium lamps; FIG. 97 d) grew clearcubes and rods. Beaker #2 (four sodium lamps oriented at 45°; FIG. 97 e)grew cubes and clumped crystals. The control, maintained in totaldarkness in the shielded room in an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket, showedno crystallization. The crystals grown from the spectral solution appearto be more clear and more perfect than crystals grown from the classicalsolution.

Example 4q Sodium Chloride

The experimental procedure was identical to Example 4n, except that aspectral NaCl solution prepared in the dark was used.

Results—Beaker #1 (four horizontal Na lamps; FIG. 97 d) grew many(greater than 50) small cubes (about 24 mm on a side). Beaker #2 (foursodium lamps oriented at 45°; FIG. 97 e) grew fewer (approximately 30)but larger cubes (about 5-7 mm on a side) and pyramids. The crystals inboth Beakers #1 and #2 were growing above a layer of sandy consistencycrystals. The control, maintained in total darkness in the aluminumfoil-wrapped bucket, showed no crystallization. The spectral solutionsappear to produce many more nucleations and this solution preparationtechnique should be applicable when a polycrystalline phase or thin filmmay be useful.

Example 4r Sodium Chloride

A spectral NaCl solution was prepared and filtered and about 50 ml ofsolution was placed into each of five different sized beakers #'s 1-5 asfollows: 1) 50 ml beaker; 2) 150 ml beaker; 3) 250 ml beaker; 4) 400 mlbeaker; and 5) 600 ml beaker. About 50 ml of solution was also placedinto each of control Beakers #'s 6-10 as follows: 6) 50 ml beaker; 7)150 ml beaker; 8) 250 ml beaker; 9) 400 ml beaker; and 10) 600 mlbeaker. Beakers #'s 1-5 were placed under overhead sodium lamps 112 withcone delivery configuration 120, as shown in FIG. 94. Beakers #'s 6-10were placed in a cabinet with the doors covered with aluminum foil toblock light from entering into the cabinet. Crystallization proceededovernight (about 16 hours) with no ambient light present.

Results: For the spectral crystallizations, the following results wereachieved: 1) approximately 25 cubes (about 1.5-2 mm); 2) approximately12 cubes (about 3-5 mm); 3) approximately 25 cubes (about 3-6 mm); 4)approximately 20 cubes (up to about 9 mm); 5) approximately 25 cubes(about 3-6 mm).

For the controls, the following results were achieved: 6) approximately15 cubes (most about 1 mm); 7) approximately 10 cubes (about 1.5 mm); 8)approximately 4 cubes (about 3 mm) and a rod (about 1.5×9 mm); 9)approximately 8 cubes (about 24 mm); 10) approximately 12 cubes (about3-6 mm). Thus, with the same solution and crystallization time, crystalyields and growth are affected by the size and/or shape of the beaker(e.g., container or reaction vessel effects).

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to affect phasechanges, material properties, and structure in solid and liquidmaterials.

Example 4s Sodium Chloride

Classical NaCl solution prepared in the dark was filtered and about 100ml placed into three separate beakers (about 600 ml in size) in thedark, shielded room. Beaker #1 was illuminated by two horizontal sodiumlamps and one overhead sodium lamp (FIG. 97 c). Beaker #2 wasilluminated by one horizontal lamp, one overhead lamp at about 90degrees to the horizontal lamp, and one lamp at about 45 degrees betweenthe horizontal and overhead lamps (FIG. 97 g). The control Beaker #3 wasplaced in an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket in the dark, shielded room.Crystallization proceeded overnight in the dark, shielded room (about 20hours) with no ambient light present.

Results: The control in the aluminum foil-wrapped bucket showed nocrystallization. Beaker #1 (2 horizontal/1 overhead; FIG. 97 c) grewmore than 50 cubes (2 about 4 mm) and approximately 10 rods (about 3-11mm in length). Beaker #2 (one horizontal, one 45 degrees, one overhead;FIG. 97 g) grew approximately 15 cubes (about 5-12 mm; see FIGS. 98 tand 98 u) many of which were twinned and/or hoppers, a few rods (up toabout 22×2 mm) and two polycrystalline clusters. Thus, it appears thatdirection and orientation of the spectral input during crystallizationaffects crystal growth and morphology.

Example 4t Sodium Chloride

Experimental procedures were identical to Example 4s, except that aspectral solution prepared in the dark was used. Crystallizationproceeded with no ambient light present.

Results: The control in the aluminum foil-wrapped bucket showed nocrystallization. Beaker #1 (2 horizontal/1 overhead; FIG. 97 c) grewapproximately 40 cubes (about 3-7 mm) many with twinning and 4-5polycrystalline masses about 5-10 mm. Beaker #2 (horizontal, 45 degrees,overhead; FIG. 97 g) grew approximately 30 slightly larger cubes (about5-7 mm) and rods (about 10×3 mm). Beaker #3 (control) showed no growth.

Example 4u Sodium Chloride

Spectral NaCl solution (stored with aluminum foil around beaker to blocklight) was filtered and different amounts were placed into identical 400ml Pyrex beakers #'s 1-5 as follows: 1) 50 ml solution; 2) 75 mlsolution; 3) 100 ml solution; 4) 125 ml solution; 5) 150 ml solution.Beakers #'s 6-10 (identical 400 ml Pyrex beakers) were used as controlsas follows: 6) 50 ml solution; 7) 75 ml solution; 8) 100 ml solution; 9)125 ml solution; 10) 150 ml solution. Beakers #'s 1-5 were placed underoverhead sodium lamps with cones (FIG. 94). Beakers #'s 6-10 were placedin a cabinet with the doors covered with aluminum foil to block light.Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 16 hours) with no ambientlight present.

Results: For the spectral crystallization in Beakers #'s 1-5 crystalswere about 1.5 mm cubic in shape and weights were about as follows: 1)1.6 gram 2) 2.0 gram; 3) 1.6 gram; 4) 1.2 gram; 5) 1.3 gram. ControlBeakers #6-10 contained crystals which were less than 1 mm and weightswere about as follows: 6) 0.4 gram; 7) 0.5 gram; 8) 0.4 gram; 9) 0.4gram; 10) 0.5 gram. Accordingly, with identical size, shape, andcomposition of the beakers, classical crystallization was the sameregardless of solution volume. However, spectral crystallization wasabout 3-5 times greater than classical crystallization and varied withsolution volume.

Example 4v Sodium Chloride

The experimental procedure was identical to Example 4u.

Results: For the spectral crystallization in beakers 1-5 crystals wereapproximately 1 mm cubic and approximate weights were: 1) 5.0 gram; 2)4.5 gram; 3) 5.4 gram; 4) 5.2 gram; 5) 5.1 gram. Control beakers #'s6-10 crystals were approximately 1 mm and weights were approximately: 6)2.8 grams; 7) 3.0 grams; 8) 2.8 grams; 9) 3.1 grams; 10) 3.1 grams. Withidentical size, shape, and composition of the beakers, classicalcrystallization was the same regardless of solution volume. Spectralcrystallization was about 65% greater than classical crystallization andvaried with solution volume.

Example 4w Sodium Bromide

Classical NaBr and NaCl solutions were filtered. A saturated solution ofNaBr (100 ml) was placed into a 600 ml beaker, Beaker #1, and placedunder an overhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG. 94). A saturated solutionof NaCl (100 ml) was placed into a 600 ml beaker, Beaker #2, and placedunder an overhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG. 94). Beakers #3 and #4were controls of about 100 ml of NaBr and NaCl, respectively, placedinto 600 ml Pyrex beakers. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 18hours) with no ambient light present.

Results: NaBr solution from Beaker #1 grew approximately 20 flathexagonal sheets (up to about 8×15 mm) and some rods (about 2×8 mm).NaCl solution from Beaker #2 grew typical spectral NaCl cubic crystals,approximately 100, 2×2 mm. Controls of both solutions grew only a smallamount of sandy type crystals overnight. The controls were left outunder the ambient fluorescent lights for a weekend (about 60 hours), andafter the additional 60 hours showed crystal growth similar to that inBeakers #1 and #2 in about 18 hours. While the average control NaBrcrystal was slightly smaller (about 6×8 mm) the largest was in thiscontrol beaker (about 30 mm×20 mm).

Example 4x Sodium Bromide

The spectral NaBr solution was filtered and about 100 ml was placed intofour beakers (about 600 ml in size) in the dark, shielded room. Beaker#1 was illuminated by two horizontal Na lamps and one overhead Na lamp(FIG. 97 c). Beaker #2 was illuminated by one horizontal lamp, oneoverhead lamp at approximately 90 degrees to the horizontal lamp, andone lamp approximately 45 degrees between the horizontal and overheadlamp (FIG. 97 g). The control Beaker #3 was placed in the aluminumfoil-wrapped bucket. Control Beaker #4 was placed under ambientfluorescent lights in an office (i.e., slightly different ambient lightintensity). Crystallization proceeded with no ambient light for Beakers#1, #2 and #3.

Results: Beaker #1 (2 horizontal/1 overhead; FIG. 97 c) and Beaker #2(horizontal, 45 degrees, overhead; FIG. 97 g) grew several large, flat,hexagonal crystals (up to about 30 mm×20 mm), and weighing about 21.5grams and 19.32 grams, respectively. Beaker #3 in the bucket grewnothing. Beaker #4 under ambient lights in an office grew crystalssimilar in size to Beakers #1 and #2, but fewer in number, about 4.5grams in weight. Solution levels in Beakers #1 and #2 were about 80 ml,and about 100 ml in the control. The control Beaker #3 was next placedunder ambient fluorescent lights in an office until water had evaporatedto about the 80 ml level. A small number of moderately sized (about 2mm×4 mm) flat hexagonal crystals grew. Accordingly, the increase incrystal growth rate observed with the sodium lamps is not due simply togreater evaporation, because control solutions which had waterevaporated therefrom in approximately the same amount did not producethe same amount of crystal growth.

Example 4v Sodium Bromide

A spectral NaBr solution was prepared and filtered and about 100 ml wasplaced into three beakers (about 400 ml in size). Beaker #1 was placedin a water bath at about 28° C. under an overhead sodium lamp 112 withcone delivery configuration 120 (FIG. 94). The room temperature wasabout 24° C. Beaker #2 was placed on the counter under an overheadsodium lamp 112 with cone delivery configuration 120 (FIG. 94).Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 21 hours) with no ambientlight. Beaker #3 was placed in an office with overhead fluorescentambient lighting present.

Results: Beakers #1 and #2 had polycrystalline films on the surfaces,and flat hexagonal crystals on the bottom. Beaker #1 crystals were up toabout 30 mm×20 mm and weighed about 14.2 grams. Beaker #2 crystalsmeasured up to about 25 mm×15 mm and weighed about 6.4 grams. Beaker #3had similar morphology to Beaker #2, but a much lesser quantity ofcrystals.

Example 4z Sodium Chloride

Water in its original clear plastic packaging was conditioned overnight(about 19 hours) by irradiation with a sodium lamp. Classic NaClsolution was prepared using the conditioned water under ambientfluorescent lighting. The saturated classic solution was filtered andabout 100 ml was placed into three beakers (about 600 ml in size) in adark, shielded room at about 24° C. Beaker #1 was illuminated by twohorizontal sodium lamps and one overhead sodium lamp (FIG. 97 c). Beaker#2 was illuminated by one horizontal lamp, one overhead lamp at about 90degrees to the horizontal lamp, and one lamp at about 45 degrees betweenthe horizontal and overhead lamp (FIG. 97 g). The control Beaker #3 wasplaced in an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket. Crystallization proceededwith no ambient light for Beakers 1-3.

Results: The control in the aluminum foil-wrapped bucket showed a fewpinpoints of crystallization (too little to collect and weigh). Beaker#1 (two horizontal/one overhead; FIG. 97 c) grew hundreds of small cubic(about 1.5 mm) crystals and some small rods, about 5.9 grams. Beaker #1fluid level was about 90 ml and the solution temperature was about 27°C. Beaker #2 (horizontal, 45 degrees, overhead; FIG. 97 g) grew hundredsof small cubic (about 1.5 mm) crystals with some rods, total weightabout 5.6 grams. The solution level was approximately 80 ml and thesolution temperature was about 27° C. Thus, solutions preparedclassically from irradiated water showed an increase in nucleation.

Example 4aa

Classical NaCl solution, prepared with sodium lamp-conditioned waterunder ambient fluorescent lights and stored in an aluminum foil-wrappedbeaker, was filtered and about 100 ml was placed into two beakers (600ml in size) in a shielded room at about 24° C. Beaker #1 was placedunder an overhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG. 94), and Beaker #2 wasplaced in the aluminum foil-wrapped bucket. A spectral NaBr solution,prepared under ambient fluorescent lights and stored in aluminum foil,was also filtered and about 100 ml was placed in two beakers (about 600ml in size) in a shielded room at about 24° C. Beaker #3 was placedunder an overhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG. 94), and Beaker #4 wasplaced in an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket. Crystallization proceededovernight (about 18 hours) with no ambient light present.

Results: Beaker #1 (conditioned water NaCl solution) had 95 ml ofsolution and many small, sandy crystals, a total weight of about 2grams. Beaker #2 also grew small sandy crystals, total weight about 0.7grams. Beaker #3 had about 95 ml solution and several flat, hexagonalcrystals, up to about 8×4 mm and total weight about 6.3 grams. Beaker #4had several smaller sized flat hexagonal crystals (most about 2×4 mm,although two were up to about 10 mm on a side) and weighing about 5.0grams total.

Example 4ab Sodium Chloride

Classical NaCl solution, prepared under ambient fluorescent lights andstored in aluminum foil, was filtered and about 100 ml was placed intotwo beakers (about 600 ml in size) in a shielded, dark room at about 25°C. Beaker #1 was placed under an overhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG.94), and Beaker #2 was placed into an aluminum foil-wrapped bucket.Classic NaCl solution, prepared with sodium lamp-conditioned water underambient fluorescent lights and stored in aluminum foil, was alsofiltered and about 100 ml was placed into two beakers (about 600 ml insize) in a shielded room at about 24° C. Beaker #3 was placed under anoverhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG. 94), and Beaker #4 was placed intoan aluminum foil-wrapped bucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight(about 21 hours) with no ambient light present Results: Beaker #1 withclassic solution grew about 7.0 grams total of about 1 mm cubiccrystals. Beaker #3 with conditioned water solution grew about 6.2 gramstotal of about 1.5 mm crystals. Control Beakers #2 and #4 hadessentially no growth.

Example 4ac Sodium Chloride

The procedure in Example 4ab was repeated. Results were similar.

Results: Beaker #1 with classic solution grew about 2.5 grams of about 1mm cubic crystals. Beaker #3 with conditioned water solution grew about2.3 grams of about 1.5 mm crystals. Control Beakers #2 and #4 hadessentially no growth. Both solutions crystallized almost the sameweight of NaCl, but the crystals from the irradiated water solution werelarger (and hence fewer in number). Thus, it appears that sodiumspectral conditioning of water prior to preparing classical saturatedNaCl solutions affects subsequent crystal size and nucleation.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to affect phasechange, structure, and material properties of solid and liquidmaterials.

Example 4ad Sodium Chloride

Classical NaCl was prepared and stored four different ways asfollows: 1) wrapped in aluminum foil; 2) wax paper over the top; 3)wrapped in a black plastic bag; 4) wrapped in clear plastic. Theclassical NaCl solution stored in aluminum foil was filtered and about100 ml was placed into Beakers #1, #2 and #3 (about 600 ml in size).Classical NaCl solution stored with wax paper over the top was filteredand about 100 ml was placed into Beakers #4, #5 and #6 (about 600 ml insize). Classical NaCl solution stored wrapped in a black plastic bag wasfiltered and about 100 ml was placed into Beakers #7, #8 and #9 (about600 ml in size). Classical NaCl solution stored wrapped in clear plasticwas filtered and about 100 ml was placed into Beakers #10, #11 and #12(about 600 ml in size). Beakers #1, #4, #7, and #10 were placed under anoverhead sodium lamp with cone (FIG. 94). Beakers #2, #5, #8, and 1#1had about 10 ml water added and were placed under an overhead sodiumlamp with cone (FIG. 94). Control beakers #3, #6, #9, and #12 wereplaced in a light-tight cabinet.

Results:

-   -   1. (foil, sodium lamp)—crystals less than about 1 mm, about 0.17        grams total weight    -   2. (foil, diluted)—no growth    -   3. (foil, control)—no growth    -   4. (wax paper, sodium lamp)—three cubes (about 2-4 mm), clusters        of about 1 mm crystals, total weight about 0.26 grams    -   5. (wax paper, diluted)—no growth    -   6. (wax paper, control)—no growth    -   7. (black plastic, sodium lamp)—three cubes (about 2-4 mm),        clusters of about 1 mm crystals, total weight about 0.44 gram    -   8. (black plastic, diluted)—no growth    -   9. (black plastic, control)—no growth    -   10. (clear plastic, sodium lamp)—nine cubes (about 3-6 mm) with        twinning and three polycrystalline clusters, about 1.1 gram        total weight    -   11. (clear plastic, diluted)—no growth    -   12. (clear plastic, control)—no growth

Example 4ae Sodium Chloride

Classical NaCl solution stored in aluminum foil was filtered and about100 ml was placed into Beakers #1 and #2 (about 600 ml in size).Classical NaCl solution stored wrapped in a black plastic bag wasfiltered and about 100 ml was placed into Beakers #3 and #4 (about 600ml in size). Classical NaCl solution stored wrapped in clear plastic wasfiltered and about 100 ml was placed into Beakers #5 and #6 (about 600ml in size). Beakers #1, #3, and #5 were placed under an overhead sodiumlamp with cone FIG. 94). Control Beakers #2, #4, and #6 were placed in alight-tight cabinet. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20hours) with no ambient light present.

Results:

-   -   1. (foil, sodium lamp)—about 1 mm crystals, about 0.8 grams        total weight    -   2. (foil, control)—no growth    -   3. (black plastic, sodium lamp)—about 3-7 mm cubic crystals,        some twinning, about 1.2 grams total weight    -   4. (black plastic, control)—less than 0.4 mm crystals, about        0.25 grams total weight    -   5. (clear plastic, sodium lamp)—about 34 mm cubic crystals, no        twinning, about 1.7 grams total weight    -   6. (clear plastic, control)—about 1.5 mm crystals, about 0.38 g        total weight

Thus, aluminum foil coverings on the outside of the Pyrex beaker duringstorage conditioned the saturated solution and inhibited subsequent NaClcrystal nucleation and growth. Solutions exposed to ambient light duringsolution equilibration overnight have more crystal growth by weight.Accordingly, it appears that storage containers and/or spectralconditions and/or conditioning of solutions preparation before, during,and after affect subsequent crystallization from solutions.

Example af Sodium Chloride

Classical NaCl solution stored in black plastic was filtered and about100 ml was placed into six crystallization dishes. Room temperature wasabout 25° C. Dishes #1, #2, and #3 were placed under an overhead sodiumlamp with cone (FIG. 94). Dishes #4, #5 and #6 were placed under anoverhead full spectrum lamp with cone. Crystallization proceededovernight (about 19 hours) with no ambient light present Results—Dishes#1, #2 and #3 (sodium lamp) grew cubes (about 2 mm) and clusters, 5.8grams in total weight. Dishes #4, #5, and #6 (full spectrum lamp) grewcubes (about 2-3 mm), 8.1 grams total weight.

Example 4ag Sodium Cholride

Classical NaCl solution stored in black plastic was filtered and about100 ml was placed in six crystallization dishes. Room temperature wasabout 25° C. Dishes #1, #2, and #3 were placed under an overhead sodiumlamp with a cone delivery configuration (FIG. 94). Dishes #4, #5, and #6were placed under an overhead full spectrum lamp with a cone deliveryconfiguration (similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 94).Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 19 hours) with no ambientlight present.

Results—Dishes #1, #2, and #3 (sodium lamp) grew cubes (about 2-4 mm)and clusters, total weight about 5.5 grams. Dishes #4, #5, and #6 (fullspectrum lamp) grew cubes (about 3-4 mm), total weight about 7.4 grams.The full spectrum lamp had higher wattage than the Na lamp and containedfrequencies in the spectra for both Na and Cl.

Example 4ah Sodium Chloride

Classical saturated NaCl solution was filtered and about 100 ml wasplaced into three beakers. Beaker #1 was placed in a dark, shielded roomdirectly under an overhead potassium lamp (similar to the configurationshown in FIG. 94). Beaker #2 was placed in a shielded room behind acardboard shield, in very low level ambient potassium spectral light.Beaker #3 was placed in an office about 3.5 feet from overheadfluorescent lights.

Results: Beaker #1 grew cubic crystals (about 34 mm), about 2.7 gramstotal weight. Beaker #2 grew cubic crystals (about 2-2.5 mm), about 0.5grams total weight. Beaker #3 grew less than 1 mm crystals, about 0.7grams total weight. It appears that the significant direct resonancebetween the sodium and potassium spectra allows one to influence NaClcrystal growth using the potassium spectrum alone. Moreover, NaCl growthwith the potassium lamp may be modulated by spectral intensity, similarto the sodium lamp.

Observations for Examples 4a-4ah

Spectral crystallization techniques permitted the modification/controlof crystals as follows:

FIGS. 98 a-98 v and 98 ad-98 ae show photomicrographs of variouscrystals formed according to some of the Experiments in Example 4. Thesephotomicrographs, along with direct experimental observations, showedthat spectral crystallization has the following general affects:

-   -   (1) increased primary nucleation;    -   (2) increased growth rate;    -   (3) increased temperature at which crystallization begins;    -   (4) controlled crystallization from a thermally unsaturated        solution;    -   (5) controlled crystallization from a diluted unsaturated        solution;    -   (6) altered morphologies including:        -   altered crystal symmetry;        -   altered axes;        -   multiple growth axes controlled by multiple axes of spectral            irradiation;        -   altered growth axis direction controlled by spectral axis            directions;    -   (7) altered crystallization controlled by controlling spectral        conditions during solution preparation; and    -   (8) altered crystallization controlled by controlling ambient        spectral conditions during crystallization.

Example 5 Microwaves and Sodium Chloride Crystallization

For the following Examples 5a-5c, the below-listed Equipment, materialsand experimental procedures were utilized (unless stated differently ineach Example).

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Distilled Water—the water is distilled water from American Fare,        contained in one (1) gallon translucent, colorless, plastic jugs        and was processed by a combination of distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. The original source for the water        was the Greeneville Municipal water supply in Greeneville, Tenn.        The plastic jugs were stored in a darkened and electromagnetic        shielded room prior to use in the experiments described in        Examples 5a, 5b and 5c.    -   Pyrex 1000 ml beakers.    -   Pyrex 400 ml beakers.    -   A solution of water, or of sodium chloride and water. The sodium        chloride is from Fisher Chemicals, is in crystalline form and is        characterized as follows:    -   Sodium Chloride: Certified A.C.S.        -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.        -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%        -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%        -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%        -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm        -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%        -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%        -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm        -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%        -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%        -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0        -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm        -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%        -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Grounded, dark enclosure: about 6 feet by about 3 feet by about        1½ foot metal cabinet (24 gauge metal) with flat, black paint        inside.    -   Microwave horn, Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN# s959,        12.4-18.0 GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725 A, 3.5 mm.    -   Microwave spectroscopy system, Hewlett Packard; HP 83350B Sweep        Oscillator, HP 8510B Network analyzer, and HP 8513A        Reflection—Transmission Test set.    -   Sodium lamp, Stonco, 70 watt high pressure sodium security wall        light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light down and away from the housing, oriented vertically above        a flat, horizontal testing surface, with the bulb about 9 inches        (about 23 cm) from the horizontal test surface.    -   Humboldt Bunsen burner with Bernzomatic propane fuel.    -   Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate.    -   1000 ml Pyrex beakers.    -   Crystallization dishes, Pyrex 270 ml capacity, Corning 3140, Ace        Glass 8465-12.    -   Forma Scientific incubator; Model 3157; Water-jacketed; 28° C.        internal temperature, opaque door and walls, nearly completely        light blocking with internal light, average 0.82 mW/cm².    -   Intel computerized microscope.

Example 5a

Crystallization of Sodium Chloride Using Rotational Frequencies

The rotational constant Be of 6536.86 Mc for sodium chloride (NaCl) wasobtained from “Microwave Spectroscopy: C. H. Townes and A. L. Schawlow,Dover Publ. Inc., New York”. The rotational frequency used in thisexperiment was calculated to be 2×Be, or 13.07372 GHz.

Saturated sodium chloride solution was prepared by heating distilledwater (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C., andadding NaCl until no more would dissolve (about 250-300 grams), underambient fluorescent lighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic,stored in a cabinet, and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 15hours). The saturated solution was filtered over the crystals at roomtemperature (22° C.).

Saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was pipetted into each of sixcrystallization dishes. Two crystallization dishes A and B were placedin the incubator (set to about 28° C.); two crystallization dishes C andD were placed under a sodium lamp 112 as shown in FIG. 94, thetemperature being about 28° C. (8.2 mW/cm²); and two crystallizationdishes E and F were placed in a shielded dark enclosure for microwaveirradiation at about 25° C. The microwave field was coupled through theair to the outside of microwave Dish E. Microwave Dish F was placedadjacent to microwave Dish E, in line with the microwave horn. Themicrowave was set in parameter S₁₁, sweeping from 13.0736 to 13.0738GHz. The solutions were allowed to crystallize for about 40 hours.

Photomicrographs taken at about at 60× (Figures not shown but were usedto determine “Relative Crystal Size” reported below) and total crystalweight from each crystallization dish A-F was determined. The relativesizes of formed crystals were determined from the photomicrographs bymeasuring the dimensions of all discernable individual crystals. Forrectangular crystals, the smaller dimension was used.

Results: Crystals from the incubator at about 28° C. in dishes A and Bwere smaller than crystals in dishes C and D which had received sodiumspectral electronic irradiation; and smaller than the crystals in dishesE and F which were grown with the sodium microwave rotational frequency.However, crystals grown in dishes E and F (microwave irradiatedsolutions) were inhibited relative to crystals grown in dishes C and D(sodium lamp irradiated solutions). Relative sizes and weights of formedcrystals were as follows: Relative Crystal Size Weight (g) IncubatorDish A 14.5 1.4 Dish B 14.5 1.2 Sodium lamp Dish C 44 11.4 Dish D 4110.9 Microwave Dish E 36.5 5.3 Dish F 34.5 4.6

Example 5b Sodium Chloride Crystallization Using Rotational Frequencies

The rotational constant Be of 6536.86 Mc for sodium chloride (NaCl) wasobtained from “Microwave Spectroscopy: C. H. Townes and A. L. Schawlow,Dover Publ. Inc., New York”. The rotational frequency used in thisexperiment was calculated to be 2×Be, or 13.07372 GHz.

Saturated sodium chloride solution was prepared by heating distilledwater (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C., andadding NaCl until no more would dissolve (about 250-300 grams), underambient fluorescent lighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic,stored in a cabinet, and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 15hours). The saturated solution was filtered over the crystals at roomtemperature (about 22° C.).

Saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was pipetted into each of eightcrystallization dishes labeled G-N. Two crystallization dishes G and Hwere placed in an incubator (set to about 28° C.), two crystallizationdishes H and I were placed under a sodium lamp 112, as shown in FIG. 94at about 28-30° C. (8.2 mW/cm²), two crystallization dishes K and L wereplaced in a shielded dark enclosure for microwave irradiation at about25° C., and two control crystallization dishes M and N were placed in ashielded dark enclosure at about 25° C. The microwave field was coupledthrough the air to the outside of microwave Dish K. Microwave Dish L wasplaced adjacent to Dish K, in line with the microwave horn. Themicrowave was set in parameter S₁₁, sweeping from 13.073719 to 13.073721GHz. The solutions were allowed to crystallize for about 18 hours.

The total crystal weight in each of dishes G-N was determined.

Results: Irradiation with the sodium chloride rotational microwavefrequency in a shielded dark enclosure inhibited sodium chloridecrystallization compared to controls in a shielded dark enclosure.

Sodium lamp spectral electronic irradiation enhanced crystallizationcompared to controls at the same ambient room temperature. Weight (g)Incubator Dish G 0.0 Dish H 0.0 Na lamp Dish I 5.4 Dish J 6.2 MicrowaveDish K 1.9 Dish L 1.8 Shielded Control Dish M 2.1 Dish N 2.1

Example 5c Crystallization of Sodium Chloride Using RotationalFrequencies

The rotational constant Be of 6536.86 Mc for sodium chloride (NaCl) wasobtained from “Microwave Spectroscopy: C. H. Townes and A. L. Schawlow,Dover Publ. Inc., New York”. The rotational frequency used in thisexperiment was calculated to be 2×B_(e), or 13.07372 GHz.

Saturated sodium chloride solution was prepared by heating distilledwater (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C., andadding NaCl until no more would dissolve (about 250-300 grams), underambient fluorescent lighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic,stored in a cabinet, and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 15hours). The saturated solution was filtered over the crystals at roomtemperature (about 20° C.).

Saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was pipetted into each of fourcrystallization dishes labeled) O-R, and 85 ml of saturated NaClsolution (about 100 ml) was pipetted into each of four crystallizationdishes labeled S-V. Two crystallization dishes O and S were placed in anincubator (set at about 28° C.), two crystallization dishes P and T wereplaced under a sodium lamp 112, as shown in FIG. 94, at about 28-30° C.(8.2 mW/cm²), two crystallization dishes Q and U were placed in ashielded dark enclosure for microwave irradiation, and two controlcrystallization dishes R and V were placed in a shielded dark enclosureat about 25° C. The microwave field was coupled through the air to theoutside of microwave Dish 0. Microwave Dish U was placed adjacent toDish 0, in line with the microwave horn. The microwave parameter wasS₁₁, sweeping from 13.073719 to 13.073721 GHz. Ambient room/enclosuretemperatures throughout were:

-   -   1) incubator controls about 28° C.;    -   2) sodium lamp about 28° C.;    -   3) microwave irradiation about 25° C.;    -   4) shielded enclosure control about 25° C.

The solutions were allowed to crystallize for about 14.5 hours, afterwhich solution temperatures were measured:

-   -   1) incubator control solutions about 26° C.;    -   2) sodium lamp solutions about 22° C.;    -   3) microwave irradiation about 21° C.; and    -   4) shielded enclosure control about 20° C.

The dishes O-V were photomicrographed (not shown) at about 60×magnification. The total crystal weight was determined in each of dishesO-V by being dried and weighed. Relative crystal sizes for only DishesO-R was determined as in Example 5a.

Results: Irradiation with the sodium chloride rotational microwavefrequency in a shielded dark enclosure inhibited sodium chloridecrystallization compared to controls in a shielded dark enclosure.

Sodium lamp spectral electronic irradiation enhanced crystallizationrate compared to controls at the same ambient room temperatures, howeversolution temperatures differed. The sodium lamp solutions were closestin temperature to the microwave irradiated solution. Although the sizeof the sodium lamp and microwave crystals was essentially the same andthe sodium lamp solution was slightly warmer, about 2.5 times more saltcrystallized under the sodium lamp, than with the microwave irradiation.Relative Crystal Size Weight (g) Incubator Dish O 10 0.7 Dish S — 0.6Sodium lamp Dish P 21 5.6 Dish T — 5.1 Microwave Dish Q 20 1.9 Dish U —1.9 Shielded Control Dish R 25 2.1 Dish V — 1.9

Example 6 Various Potassium Lamp Crystallization Experiments

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Sterile water by Bio Whittaker (prepared by ultrafiltration,        reverse osmosis, deionization, and distillation) in one liter        plastic bottles.    -   Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kg        bottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Sodium Chloride: Certified A.C.S.            -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.            -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%            -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%            -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%            -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0            -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm            -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%            -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Potassium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3        Kg bottles. The potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Potassium Chloride, Certified A.C.S.            -   Bromide—0.01%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.001%            -   Phosphate—less than 5 ppm            -   Sulfate—less than 0.001%            -   Barium 0.001%            -   Calcium and R₂O₃ Precipitate—less than 0.002%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 5 ppm            -   Iron—less than 2 ppm            -   Sodium—less than 0.005%            -   Magnesium—less than 0.001%            -   Iodide—less than 0.002%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.4 to 8.6            -   Insoluable Matter—less than 0.005%    -   Humboldt Bunsen burner, with Coleman propane fuel.    -   Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 watt high pressure sodium security wall        light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light away from the housing and an aluminum foil cone light        guide fitted around the sodium bulb, with distal end formed        around uniform diameter (about 1.8 cm). The sodium lamp was        mounted overhead with the bulb oriented vertically and with the        tip of the bulb about 15 inches (about 38 cm) from the        crystallization dishes.    -   Potassium lamp, Thermo Oriel 10 watt spectral line potassium        lamp #65070 with Thermo Oriel lamp mount #65160 and Thermo Oriel        spectral lamp power supply #65150. The potassium lamp was        mounted overhead with the rectangular bulb oriented horizontally        at about 9 inches (about 23 cm) from the crystallization dishes        (as shown in FIG. 97 h).    -   Crystallization dishes, Pyrex 270 ml capacity, Corning 3140, Ace        Glass 8465-12.        b) Preparation of Solutions

Water was heated with a Bunsen burner from room temperature to about 55°C. Salt was added to the solution which was stirred with a glass stirrod until no more salt would dissolve. The solution was allowed toequilibrate overnight (about 18 hours) before being decanted andfiltered for use in a crystallization procedure.

Example 6a

Classical KCl solution was filtered and about 100 ml was placed intoeach of nine (9) crystallization dishes. Dish #'s 1-3 were placed in thedark, shielded room under the potassium lamp. Cardboard shields wereplaced between the potassium lamp and Dish #'s 4-6 which then receivedonly very low levels of an ambient potassium spectrum. Dish #'s 7-9 wereplaced onto a counter in another room with overhead ambient fluorescentlighting.

Results: Control crystals grew small cubic crystals (see FIG. 98 w). Thesolution was exposed to a low ambient potassium lamp light and grewabout 25 crystals which showed some twinning. Most crystals were about3-5 mm cubic, and the largest crystal (about 12 mm cubic) is shown inFIGS. 98 x and 98 y. The solution under the potassium lamp grew about 15large crystals, with cubes, triangular rods, polycrystalline masses, andtwinned crystals (see FIGS. 98 z and 98 aa).

Example 6b

Classical NaCl solution was filtered and about 100 ml was placed intoeach of 3 crystallization dishes. Dish #1 was placed in the dark,shielded room under the potassium lamp. Dish #2 was placed behind acardboard shield with only low ambient levels of the potassium lamp.Dish #3 was placed in an office under fluorescent lights.

Results: All dishes produced small cubic crystals: about 2.8 grams indish #1 under the potassium lamp; about 0.6 grams in dish #2 withambient potassium lamp light; and about 0.89 grams in dish #3 underfluorescent lights.

Example 6c

Classical KCl solution was filtered and about 100 ml was placed intoeight (8) crystallization dishes. Dish #'s 1-3 were placed into thedark, shielded room under the potassium lamp. Dishes #'s 4-6 were placedinto the same dark, shielded room under the sodium lamp. Cardboardshields were placed between the potassium and sodium lamps to preventcross-illumination. Dish #7 was placed in an aluminum foil-coveredbucket in the shielded room. Dish #8 was placed onto a file cabinet inan office, about 40 inches beneath fluorescent overhead lights (about1.12 mW/cm²).

Results:

There were different crystal sizes and morphologies observed:

-   -   1) Potassium lamp—Several cubic and twinned hoppers, about        1.6×1.6×0.7 cm in length for the largest crystal which grew        under the main part of the potassium bulb;    -   2) Sodium lamp—Cubic and twinned hoppers, many rods and glassy        sheets, the largest of which was about 2×2×1 cm in length, grew        directly under the sodium bulb (see FIG. 98 ab and FIG. 98 ac);    -   3) Foil bucket—no growth; and    -   4) Fluorescent office—many small cubes, about 2-3 mm, a few rods        and sheets.

Average weights per dish were: 1) potassium lamp, about 1.5 grams; 2)sodium lamp, about 2.9 grams; 3) foil bucket 0.0 grams; and 6)fluorescent office about 0.97 grams.

Example 7 Increase in Measured pH in a NaCl/Water Solution Due to aSodium Spectral Pattern

This Example demonstrates the effects of conditioning a conditionableparticipant (distilled water) with a conditioning energy (sodium lamp)by dissolving crystalline sodium chloride (NaCl) into the water andmonitoring pH changes.

a) Equipment and Materials

The following reference numerals refer to those items shownschematically in FIGS. 99, 100 and 101, which setups are referred to inthe following Examples 7a-7f. FIG. 102 shows the pH electrode 109 ingreater detail. Like reference numerals have been used wheneverpossible.

-   -   100—Bernzomatic propane fuel.    -   101—Humboldt Bunsen burner.    -   102—Ring stand.    -   103—Cast iron hot plate from Fisher Scientific.    -   104—1000 ml Pyrex™ cylindrical beaker.    -   105—A solution of water, or of sodium chloride and water.    -   Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kg        bottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:    -   Sodium Chloride, Certified A.C.S.        -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.        -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%        -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%        -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%        -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm        -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%        -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%        -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm        -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%        -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%        -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0        -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm        -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%        -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Distilled Water—American Fare, contained in one (1) gallon        translucent, colorless, plastic jugs, processed by distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. Source, Greeneville Municipal        Water supply, Greeneville, Tenn. Stored in cardboard boxes in a        dark, shielded room prior to use in the experiments described in        Examples 7a, 7b and 7c.    -   106—Support structure for pH meter.    -   107—An AR20 “pH/mV/° C./Conductivity” meter from Accumet        Research (Fisher Catalog No. 13-636-AR20 2000/2001 Catalog).    -   108—Temperature probe for pH meter.    -   109—pH Electrode for AR20 pH meter (Fisher 2000-2001 Catalog        #13-620-285); and shown in greater detail in FIG. 102.    -   110—Aluminum foil tube made from kitchen grade aluminum foil,        medium duty.    -   111—Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall fixture        (TLW Series Twilighter Wallprism model) fitted with a parabolic        aluminum reflector which directs the light from the housing.    -   112—sodium lamp, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium security        wall light, fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing        the light away from the housing. The sodium bulb was a Type S62        lamp, 120V, 601H, 1.5 A made in Hungary by Jemanamjjasond. The        lamp was located about 12 cm from the beaker side.    -   113—Ring stand.    -   114—Chain clamp.

Experimental Procedure Example 7a

FIG. 99 is a schematic of the experimental apparatus used to generatebaseline measured pH information at about 55° C. as a function of time.In this Example 7a, the Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuelfrom the fuel source 100 via a flexible rubber tube 115. The flame fromthe Bunsen burner 101 was caused to be incident upon a cast iron hotplate 103 which was attached to a ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex™cylindrical beaker 104 was placed on top of the cast iron hot plate 103.The beaker 104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled waterobtained from American Fare. An AR20 pH/mV/° C./Conductivity meter 107from Accumet Research communicated with the 800 ml of distilled waterand later with the solution 105 through a temperature probe 108 and a pHelectrode 109. More details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. 102.The pH meter was elevated to a convenient height by the use of a supportstructure 106.

The AR20 meter 107, which used the pH electrode 109 (the electrode beingshown in more detail in FIG. 102), were together calibrated by using twodifferent buffer solutions. The first buffer solution had a pH of4.00+/−0.01 at 25° C., and was a solution of potassium bipthalate. Asecond buffer solution had a pH of 7.00+/−0.01 at 25° C., and was asolution of potassium phosphate monobasic-sodium hydroxide. Bothsolutions were 0.05 Molar, both were certified and both were obtainedfrom Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended toinsure accuracy of the readings from the pH electrode.

The pH of the distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured atroom temperature and then heated to about 55° C. in about 15-20 minutesby use of the Bunsen burner heating the hot plate 103 and the hot plate103 radiating (e.g., by radiation and/or conduction) its conditioningenergy to the beaker 104 containing the distilled water. The watertemperature was monitored by the Accumet meter 107. Once a temperatureof about 55° C. was obtained, about 50 grams of sodium chloride(certified A.C.S. and as discussed above herein), were added to the 800ml of distilled water in the beaker 104 to form the solution 105. Thesodium chloride was stirred into the 800 ml of distilled water by use ofglass stirring rod and complete dissolution of the sodium chlorideoccurred within about 30-45 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105was reduced by approximately ½ to 1° C., but was quickly brought back toabout 55° C. by the Bunsen burner 101 and cast iron hot plate 103 in amatter of a few seconds. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarilyremoved from the solution 105 to permit the stirring, mixing anddissolution of the sodium chloride into the distilled water. However,the electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted into the solution105 upon completion of the stirring.

FIG. 103 a shows the results of three (3) separate experimentscorresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. 99. The plotted datashow the change in measured pH of the solution 105 as a function of timefrom room temperature to about 55° C. In particular, the pH of thedistilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and thenmeasured at about 55° C., and thereafter the pH of the solution 105 wasmeasured about every two minutes for about 20 minutes after the additionand dissolution of sodium chloride. The time measurements were all atintervals of about two minutes up to about 20 minutes with a finalmeasurement being taken after about 40 minutes.

All experimental conditions described in the Example occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were eachabout eight (8) feet (about 2.4 meters) long. The lamps were suspendedin pairs approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on whichthe experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of lampspresent in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40 feet (about7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce a widelybroadened and noisy mercury spectrum.

Example 7b

FIG. 100 is a schematic of the experimental apparatus used to generatemeasured pH information at about 55° C. as a function of time. In thisExample 7b, the Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel fromthe fuel source 100 via a flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from theBunsen burner 101 was caused to be incident upon a cast iron hot plate103 which was attached to a ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex™ cylindricalbeaker 104 was placed on top of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained fromAmerican Fare. An AR20 pH/mV/° C./Conductivity meter 107 from AccumetResearch communicated with the 800 ml of distilled water and later withthe solution 105 through a temperature probe 108 and a pH electrode 109.More details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. 102. The pH meterwas elevated to a convenient height by the use of a support structure106.

The AR20 meter 107, which used the pH electrode 109 (the electrode beingshown in more detail in FIG. 102) were together calibrated by using twodifferent buffer solutions. The first buffer solution had a pH of4.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., and was a solution of potassium bipthalate.A second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., andwas a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic-sodium hydroxide. Bothsolutions were 0.05 Molar, both were certified and both were obtainedfrom Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended toinsure accuracy of the pH readings from the pH electrode.

The pH of the distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured atroom temperature and then heated to about 55° C. in about 15-20 minutesby use of the Bunsen burner heating the hot plate 103. The watertemperature was monitored by the Accumet meter 107. Once a temperatureof about 55° C. was obtained, about 50 grams of sodium chloride(certified A.C.S. and discussed above herein), were added to the 800 mlof distilled water in the beaker 104 to form the solution 105. Thesodium chloride was stirred into the 800 ml of distilled water by use ofglass stirring rod and complete dissolution of the sodium chlorideoccurred within about 3045 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105was reduced by approximately ½ to 1° C., but was quickly brought back toabout 55° C. by the Bunsen burner 101 and cast iron hot plate 103 in amatter of a few seconds. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarilyremoved from the solution 105 to permit the stirring, mixing anddissolution of the sodium chloride into the distilled water. However,the electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted upon completionof the stirring.

A ring stand 113 was positioned adjacent to the ring stand 102 such thata high pressure sodium light 112 contained within a housing 111, andsurrounded by an aluminum foil tube 110 permitted light emitted from thebulb 112 to be transmitted through the aluminum foil tube 110 and becomeincident upon a side of the beaker 104. The ring stand 113 waspositioned such that the end of the aluminum tube 110 adjacent to theside of the beaker 104 was about ½ inch to ¾ inch away from the side ofthe beaker 104. The tube 110 measured about eight (8) inches long andwas about 3½ inches in diameter. The end of the sodium light bulb 112was about five (5) inches from the end of the tube 110. In this Example18b, the sodium light bulb 112 was actuated at about the same time thatthe electrodes 108 and 109 were reinserted into the solution 105 whichis after the sodium chloride had been mixed into and dissolved in thedistilled water. The light fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113by use of a chain clamp 114.

FIG. 103 b shows the results of three (3) separate experimentscorresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. 100. The plotteddata show the change in measured pH of the solution 105 as a function oftime from room temperature to about 55° C. In particular, the pH of thedistilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and thenmeasured at about 55° C., and thereafter measured about every twominutes after the addition and dissolution of sodium chloride and theactivation of the high pressure sodium light 112. The time measurementswere all at intervals of about two minutes for about 20 minutes with afinal measurement being taken after about 40 minutes.

All experimental conditions described in this Example occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were eachabout eight (8) feet (about 2.4 meters) long. The lamps were suspendedin pairs approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on whichthe experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of lampspresent in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40 feet (about7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce a widelybroadened and noisy mercury spectrum.

Example 7c

FIG. 101 is a schematic of the experimental apparatus used to generatemeasured pH information where the temperature of the distilled water inthe beaker 104, and later in the solution 105, in the beaker 104 washeated exclusively by use of a high pressure sodium bulb 112 containedin a fixture 111.

The AR20 meter 107, which used the pH electrode 109 (the electrode beingshown in more detail in FIG. 102) were together calibrated by using twodifferent buffer solutions. The first buffer solution had a pH of4.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., and was a solution of potassium bipthalate.A second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., andwas a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic-sodium hydroxide. Bothsolutions were 0.05 Molar, both were certified and both were obtainedfrom Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended toinsure accuracy of the pH readings from the pH electrode.

This Example 7c differs from the previous Examples 7a and 7b in that noBunsen burner was provided for heating. In this regard, heat wasgenerated from the energy emitted by the combination of thehigh-pressure sodium bulb 112, and the fixture 111. In particular, theenergy was transmitted to the bottom of the beaker 104 initiallycontaining the distilled water, and later to the solution 105, throughthe use of the aluminum foil tube 110. Specifically, the ring stand 102supported the beaker 104 by the use of the chain clamp 114. The beaker104 was initially lowered into the aluminum foil tube 110 such thatapproximately 150-200 ml of the distilled water contained in the beaker104 was physically located inside of the aluminum foil tube 110. Thetube 110 measured about seven (7) inches long and was about four (4)inches in diameter. The top end of the sodium light bulb 112 was aboutfour (4) inches from the end of the tube 110. Once the distilled watertemperature achieved about 55° C. after about 1¼-1½ hours, the sodiumchloride was added, as discussed above. The chain clamp 114 was thenraised vertically slightly upon the ring stand 102 so that the bottom ofthe beaker 104 was now positioned slightly outside of the aluminum foiltube 110 (as shown in FIG. 101). Experience caused the precise finallocation of the bottom of the beaker 104 to be about ½ inch-¾ inch abovethe end of the aluminum foil tube 110. The primary difference betweenthis Example 7c and the previous two Examples 7a and 7b is that the onlyenergy provided to the distilled water and the solution 105 came fromthe combination of the sodium bulb 112 and the fixture 111 by radiationand convection.

FIG. 103 c shows the results of three (3) separate experimentscorresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. 101. The plotteddata show the change in measured pH of the solution 105 as a function oftime at a temperature of about 55° C. In particular, the pH of thedistilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and thenmeasured at about 55° C., and thereafter the pH of the solution 105 wasmeasured about every two minutes after the addition and dissolution ofsodium chloride. The time measurements were all at intervals of abouttwo minutes for 20 minutes, with a final measurement being taken atabout 40 minutes.

All experimental conditions described in this Example occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were eachabout eight (8) feet (about 2.4 meters) long. The lamps were suspendedin pairs approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on whichthe experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) of lamps presentin a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40 feet (about 7.6meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce a widely broadenedand noisy mercury spectrum.

Example 7d

FIG. 100 is a schematic of the experimental apparatus used to generatemeasured pH information at about 55° C. as a function of time. In thisExample 7d, a ring stand 113 was positioned adjacent to the ring stand102 such that a high pressure sodium light 112 contained within ahousing 111, and surrounded by an aluminum foil tube 110 permitted lightemitted from the bulb 112 to be transmitted through the aluminum foiltube 110 and become incident upon a side of the beaker 104. The ringstand 113 was positioned such that the end of the aluminum tube 110adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about ½ inch to ¾ inch (about2.0 cm to about 2.5 cm) away from the side of the beaker 104. The tube110 measured about eight (8) inches (about 2.4 meters) long and wasabout 3½ inches (about 8.5 cm) in diameter. The top end of the sodiumlight bulb 112 was about five (5) inches (about 12.5 cm) from the end ofthe tube 110. In this Example 7d, the sodium light bulb 112 was actuatedabout 40 minutes before heating the water with the Bunsen burner andirradiated the solution continuously throughout the pH measurements. Thelight fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113 by use of a chainclamp 114.

The Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from the fuelsource 100 via a flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsenburner 101 was caused to be incident upon a cast iron hot plate 103which was attached to a ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex™ cylindricalbeaker 104 was placed on top of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained fromAmerican Fare. An AR20 pH/mV/° C./Conductivity meter 107 from AccumetResearch communicated with the 800 ml of distilled water and later withthe solution 105 through a temperature probe 108 and a pH electrode 109.More details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. 102. The pH meterwas elevated to a convenient height by the use of a support structure106.

The AR20 meter 107, which used the pH electrode 109 (the electrode beingshown in more detail in FIG. 102) were together calibrated by using twodifferent buffer solutions. The first buffer solution had a pH of4.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., and was a solution of potassium bipthalate.A second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., andwas a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic-sodium hydroxide. Bothsolutions were 0.05 Molar, both were certified and both were obtainedfrom Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended toinsure accuracy of the pH readings from the pH electrode.

The pH of the distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured atroom temperature before actuating the sodium lamp. After the 40 minutesodium lamp conditioning, the water was then heated to about 55° C. inabout 15-20 minutes by use of the Bunsen burner heating the hot plate103. The water temperature was monitored by the Accumet meter 107. Oncea temperature of about 55° C. was obtained, about 50 grams of sodiumchloride (certified A.C.S. and discussed above herein), were added tothe 800 ml of distilled water in the beaker 104 to form the solution105. The sodium chloride was stirred into the 800 ml of distilled waterby use of glass stirring rod and complete dissolution of the sodiumchloride occurred within about 3045 seconds. The temperature of thesolution 105 was reduced by approximately ½ to 1° C., but was quicklybrought back to about 55° C. by the Bunsen burner 101 and cast iron hotplate 103 in a matter of a few seconds. The electrodes 108 and 109 weretemporarily removed from the solution 105 to permit the stirring, mixingand dissolution of the sodium chloride into the distilled water.However, the electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted uponcompletion of the stirring.

FIG. 103 e shows the results of three (3) separate experimentscorresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. 100. The plotteddata show the change in measured pH of the solution 105 as a function oftime at room temperature to about 55° C. In particular, the pH of thedistilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and thenmeasured at about 55° C., and thereafter measured about every twominutes after the addition and dissolution of sodium chloride and theactivation of the high pressure sodium light 112. The time measurementswere all at intervals of about two minutes for 20 minutes with a finalmeasurement being taken at about 40 minutes.

All experimental conditions described in this Example occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were eachabout eight (8) feet (about 2.4 meters) long. The lamps were suspendedin pairs approximately 3.5 feet above the laboratory counter on whichthe experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of lampspresent in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40 feet (about2.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent light produce a widelybroadened and noisy mercury spectrum.

Example 7e

FIG. 100 is a schematic of the experimental apparatus used to generatemeasured pH information at about 55° C. as a function of time. In thisExample 7e, a ring stand 113 was positioned adjacent to the ring stand102 such that a high pressure sodium light 112 contained within ahousing 111, and surrounded by an aluminum foil tube 110 permitted lightemitted from the bulb 112 to be transmitted through the aluminum foiltube 110 and become incident upon a side of the beaker 104. The ringstand 113 was positioned such that the end of the aluminum tube 110adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about ½ inch to ¾ inch (about2.0 cm to about 2.5 cm) away from the side of the beaker 104. The tube110 measured about eight (8) inches (about 2.4 cm) long and was about 3½inches (about 8.5 cm) in diameter. The top end of the sodium light bulb112 was about five (5) inches (about 12.5 cm) from the end of the tube110. In this Example 7e, the sodium light bulb 112 was actuated about 40minutes and then terminated, before heating the water with the Bunsenburner. The light fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113 by use ofa chain clamp 114.

The Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from the fuelsource 100 via a flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsenburner 101 was caused to be incident upon a cast iron hot plate 103which was attached to a ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex™ cylindricalbeaker 104 was placed on top of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained fromAmerican Fare. An AR20 pH/mV/° C./Conductivity meter 107 from AccumetResearch communicated with the 800 ml of distilled water and later withthe solution 105 through a temperature probe 108 and a pH electrode 109.More details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. 102. The pH meterwas elevated to a convenient height by the use of a support structure106.

The AR20 meter 107, which used the pH electrode 109 (the electrode beingshown in more detail in FIG. 102) were together calibrated by using twodifferent buffer solutions. The first buffer solution had a pH of4.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., and was a solution of potassium bipthalate.A second buffer solution had a pH of about 7.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C.,and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic-sodium hydroxide.Both solutions were 0.05 Molar, both were certified and both wereobtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions wasintended to insure accuracy of the pH readings from the pH electrode.

The pH of the distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured atroom temperature, before actuating the sodium lamp conditioning. Afterthe 40 minutes of sodium lamp conditioning of the water, the water wasthen heated to about 55° C. in about 15-20 minutes by use of the Bunsenburner heating the hot plate 103. The water temperature was monitored bythe Accumet meter 107. Once a temperature of about 55° C. was obtained,about 50 grams of sodium chloride (certified A.C.S. and discussed aboveherein), were added to the 800 ml of distilled water in the beaker 104to form the solution 105. The sodium chloride was stirred into the 800ml of distilled water by use of glass stirring rod and completedissolution of the sodium chloride occurred within about 3045 seconds.The temperature of the solution 105 was reduced by approximately ½ to 1°C., but was quickly brought back to about 55° C. by the Bunsen burner101 and cast iron hot plate 103 in a matter of a few seconds. Theelectrodes 108 and 109 were temporarily removed from the solution 105 topermit the stirring, mixing and dissolution of the sodium chloride intothe distilled water. However, the electrodes 108 and 109 wereimmediately reinserted upon completion of the stirring.

FIG. 103 f shows the results of three (3) separate experimentscorresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. 100. The plotteddata show the change in measured pH of the solution 105 as a function oftime from room temperature to about 55° C. In particular, the pH of thedistilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and thenmeasured at about 55° C., and thereafter measured about every twominutes after the addition and dissolution of sodium chloride and theactivation of the high pressure sodium light 112. The time measurementswere all at intervals of about two minutes for about 20 minutes with afinal measurement being taken at about 40 minutes.

FIG. 103 g shows the averages calculated from the data from each of thethree (3) series of experiments from each of Examples 7a, 7b and 7e.

All experimental conditions described in this Example occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were eachabout eight (8) feet (about 2.4 meters) long. The lamps were suspendedin pairs approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on whichthe experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of lampspresent in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40 feet (about7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce a widelybroadened and noisy mercury spectrum.

Example 7f

FIG. 100 is a schematic of the experimental apparatus used to generatemeasured pH information at about 55° C. as a function of time. In thisExample 7f, a ring stand 113 was positioned adjacent to the ring stand102 such that a high pressure sodium light 112 contained within ahousing 111, and surrounded by an aluminum foil tube 110 permitted lightemitted from the bulb 112 to be transmitted through the aluminum foiltube 110 and become incident upon a side of the beaker 104. The ringstand 113 was positioned such that the end of the aluminum tube 110adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about ½ inch to ¾ inch (about1 cm to about 1.5 cm) away from the side of the beaker 104. The tube 110measured about eight (8) inches long (about 20 cm) and was about 3½inches (about 8.5 cm) in diameter. The top end of the sodium light bulb112 was about five (5) inches (about 12.5 cm) from the end of the tube110. In this Example 7f, the sodium light bulb 112 was actuated about 40minutes, terminated, and pH was measured. The light fixture 111 wasfixed to the ring stand 113 by use of a chain clamp 114.

The Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from the fuelsource 100 via a flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsenburner 101 was caused to be incident upon a cast iron hot plate 103which was attached to a ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex™ cylindricalbeaker 104 was placed on top of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained fromAmerican Fare. An AR20 pH/mV/° C./Conductivity meter 107 from AccumetResearch communicated with the 800 ml of distilled water and later withthe solution 105 through a temperature probe 108 and a pH electrode 109.More details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. 102. The pH meterwas elevated to a convenient height by the use of a support structure106.

The AR20 meter 107, which used the pH electrode 109 (the electrode beingshown in more detail in FIG. 102) were together calibrated by using twodifferent buffer solutions. The first buffer solution had a pH of4.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., and was a solution of potassium bipthalate.A second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00+/−0.01 at about 25° C., andwas a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic-sodium hydroxide. Bothsolutions were 0.05 Molar, both were certified and both were obtainedfrom Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended toinsure accuracy of the pH readings from the pH electrode.

The pH of the distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured atroom temperature, before actuating the sodium lamp conditioning. Afterthe 40 minutes sodium lamp conditioning of the water, the following timeintervals elapsed before heating the water to 55° C. with the Bunsenburner: 1) 0 minutes; 2) 20 minutes; 3) 40 minutes; 4) 60 minutes; and5) 120 minutes. The water was then heated to about 55° C. in about 5minutes by use of the Bunsen burner heating the hot plate 103. The watertemperature was monitored by the Accumet meter 107. Once a temperatureof about 55° C. was obtained, about 50 grams of sodium chloride(certified A.C.S. and discussed above herein), were added to the 800 mlof distilled water in the beaker 104 to form the solution 105. Thesodium chloride was stirred into the 800 ml of distilled water by use ofglass stirring rod and complete dissolution of the sodium chlorideoccurred within about 3045 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105was reduced by approximately ½ to 1° C., but was quickly brought back toabout 55° C. by the Bunsen burner 101 and cast iron hot plate 103 in amatter of a few seconds. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarilyremoved from the solution 105 to permit the stirring, mixing anddissolution of the sodium chloride into the distilled water. However,the electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted upon completionof the stirring.

FIG. 103 h shows the results of three (3) separate experiments (#'s 3,4, and 5) corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. 100,representing decay curves for the sodium lamp conditioning effect inwater. The plotted data show the change in measured pH of the solution105 as a function of time from room temperature to about 55° C. (curves7f1, 7f2 and 7f3 were essentially identical). In particular, the pH ofthe distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature andthen measured when the sodium lamp was terminated, and thereaftermeasured about every two minutes after the addition and dissolution ofsodium chloride. The time measurements were all at intervals of abouttwo (2) minutes for 20 minutes, with a final measurement being taken atabout 40 minutes.

All experimental conditions described in the Example occurred in thepresence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps wereSylvania Cool White Deluxe Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were eachabout eight (8) feet (about 2.4 meters) long. The lamps were suspendedin pairs approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on whichthe experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of lampspresent in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by 40 feet (about2.6 meters×12.1 meters).). The fluorescent lamps produce a widelybroadened and noisy mercury spectrum.

Discussion of Examples 7a, 7b, 7c, 7d, 7e and 7f

FIG. 103 d shows the averages calculated from the data from each of thethree (3) series of experiments from each of Examples 7a, 7b and 7c. Thedata show that the Bunsen burner—only heating corresponding to Example7a and FIG. 99 had the smallest overall measured rise in pH after aperiod of time of approximately 40 minutes. The data generated fromExample 7b, and corresponding to FIG. 100, showed an intermediate risein measured pH with time after about 40 minutes. In Example 7b, thesodium spectral pattern was added only at the point when the solution105 had attained a temperature of about 55° C.

The greatest overall increase in measured pH from a time of about 240minutes was shown in the data corresponding to Example 7c, whichcorresponds to the experimental apparatus shown in FIG. 101. In thisExample 7c, the distilled water in the beaker 104, was exposed to thesodium spectral pattern emitted from the sodium light bulb 112 for thelongest amount of time (e.g., energy was provided to the distilled waterand the solution 105 exclusively through the combination of the sodiumlight bulb 112 and the fixture 111) which was about 1¼-1½ hours to heatthe water to about 55° C. and then for an additional 40 minutes whilethe pH measurements were made.

Accordingly, the data shown in FIG. 103 d clearly show the effect of asodium spectral pattern upon the measured pH of the sodiumchloride/water solution 105, as measured by an AR20 meter from AccumetResearch used in combination with a pH electrode 109 (as shown in moredetail in FIG. 102).

FIG. 103 g shows the averages calculated from the data from each of thethree (3) series of experiments from each of Examples 7a, 7b and 7e. Thedata show that the Bunsen burner-only heating corresponding to Example7a and FIG. 99 had the smallest overall measured rise in pH after aperiod of time of approximately 40 minutes. The data generated fromExample 7b, and corresponding to FIG. 100, showed an intermediate risein measured pH with time after about 40 minutes. In Example 7e, thewater was conditioned by the sodium spectral pattern, after which it washeated to 55° C. and the NaCl was added and dissolved.

The greatest overall increase in measured pH from a time of about 240minutes was shown in the data corresponding to Example 7e, whichcorresponds to the experimental apparatus shown in FIG. 100. In thisExample 7e, the distilled water in the beaker 104, was exposed to theconditioning sodium spectral pattern emitted from the sodium light bulb112 for about forty (40) minutes (e.g., conditioning energy was providedto the distilled water 105 exclusively with the sodium light bulb 112for about 40 minutes).

Accordingly, the data shown in FIG. 103 g clearly show the pH effect ofa conditioning sodium spectral pattern upon distilled water, which islater used to make a sodium chloride/water solution 105, as measured byan AR20 meter from Accumet Research used in combination with a pHelectrode 109 (as shown in more detail in FIG. 102).

FIG. 103 h shows the experimental data from each of the three (3)experiments from Example 7f3, 7f4, and 7f5. The data (7f5) show that the120 minute interval between conditioning of the distilled water anddissolution of the NaCl salt had the smallest overall measured rise inpH after a period of time of approximately 40 minutes. The datagenerated from Example 7f4, after about a 60 minute interval betweenconditioning of the distilled water and dissolution of the NaCl salt,showed an intermediate rise in measured pH with time after about 40minutes. In Example 7f3, the water was conditioned by the sodiumspectral pattern, and the interval between conditioning and dissolutionof the NaCl salt was only about 40 minutes. This curve was essentiallyidentical to the curve for 20 minutes and the normalized curve for zerominutes. Example 7f3 showed the greatest rise in pH.

Accordingly, the data shown in FIG. 103 h clearly show a time-relateddecay effect of a conditioning sodium spectral pattern upon distilledwater, which is later used to make a sodium chloride/water solution 105,as measured by an AR20 meter from Accumet Research used in combinationwith a pH electrode 109 (as shown in more detail in FIG. 102). Theconditioning effects of a sodium spectral pattern upon distilled waterremained in the water for a period of time approximately equal to theconditioning time. After an interval of 1.5 times the conditioning time,the conditioning effects of a sodium spectral pattern upon distilledwater were beginning to decline. Finally, after an interval of 3.0 timesthe conditioning time, the conditioning effects of a sodium spectralpattern upon distilled water declined still further.

Example 7g Changes in pH Due to Effects of Na Lamp Conditioned NaCl onpH

Sodium chloride (about 50 grams) was spread into a thin layer under asodium lamp in an otherwise dark room overnight. The next day the saltwas used in a pH experiment.

Overhead fluorescent lighting was present continuously throughout bothexperiments. Water (about 800 ml) was placed in a 1000 ml beaker and thepH was measured. The water was next heated to about 55° C. and pH wasmeasured again. The water temperature was maintained at about 55° C. forthe remainder of the experiment. NaCl (about 50 grams) was added andstirred with a glass stir rod. Ten additional pH measurements were takenabout every two (2) minutes after the addition of the NaCl, for a totalof about 20 minutes. Final pH was measured about 40 minutes afteraddition of the NaCl. FIG. 103 i shows pH as a function of time for twoexperiments where sodium chloride solute was dissolved in water.

One series of pH tests was performed on a solution made with the regularsalt (which had not been conditioned), and one series of tests wasperformed on the solution made with the conditioned salt.

Results: The pH increased more when the salt had been conditioned withits own Na spectral energy pattern. This same effect was seen in othersimilar experiments. When significantly larger amounts of salt in a muchthicker layer were irradiated with the same intensity, this effect wasnot nearly so pronounced, or was not seen at all.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to change thematerial properties of a solid upon subsequent phase change into aliquid solution.

Example 8 Studies of Solubility Rates in Conditioned Water

For the following Examples 8a-8d, the below-listed Equipment, materialsand experimental procedures were utilized (unless stated differently ineach Example).

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Pyrex 1000 ml beakers, Corning.    -   Pyrex 600 ml beakers, Corning.    -   Pyrex Petri dishes; model 3160-102, 100×20 mm.    -   Ohaus portable standard scale LS200, 0.1 to 100.0 grams.    -   Toastmaster cool touch griddle (TG15W).    -   Distilled Water—American Fare, contained in one (1) gallon        translucent, colorless, plastic jugs, processed by distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. Source, Greeneville Municipal        Water supply, Greeneville, Tenn. Stored in cardboard boxes in a        dark, shielded room prior to use in the experiments described in        Examples 8a, 8b and 8c.    -   Forma Scientific Incubator; Model 3157, Water-jacketed; 28° C.        internal temperature, opaque door and walls, nearly completely        light blocking with internal light average 0.82 mW/cm². Chamber        capacity about 5.6 cubic feet.    -   Fisher brand Salimeters; Models 11-605 (1.0% divisions), 11-606        (0.5% divisions); specialized salinity and sodium chloride        hydrometers; length 12″. Calibrated for 60° F.    -   Fisher brand Specific Gravity Hydrometer; Model 11-520E. Length        12″. Calibrated for 60° F., with 0.01 s.g. divisions.    -   Fisher brand Sugar Hydrometer, Model 11-6080; length 12″.        Calibrated for 60° F., in 0.1% divisions.    -   Ambient Lighting—All experimental conditions described in these        Examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent        lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe        Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were each about eight (8) feet        long (about 2.4 meters long). The lamps were suspended in pairs        approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on which        the experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of        lamps present in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by        40 feet (7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce        a widely broadened and noisy mercury spectrum.    -   Fisher 50 ml pipettes TD 20° C. serological/Drummond pipet-aid.    -   Kymex immersion tube (2.3 cm×30 cm) tapered bottom with rubber        stopper.    -   E-Z high purity solvent acetone; contains acetone CAS        #67-64-1, E. E. Zimmeman Co.    -   Glass stir rod.

Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kgbottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is characterized asfollows:

-   -   Sodium Chloride: Certified A.C.S.        -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.        -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%        -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%        -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%        -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm        -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%        -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%        -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm        -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%        -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%        -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0        -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm        -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%        -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Sucrose, Table sugar 4 g/1 tsp, Kroger Brand.    -   Sodium lamp, Stonco, 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall        light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light down and away from the housing, oriented vertically above        a flat, horizontal testing surface, with the bulb about 9 inches        (about 23 cm) from the horizontal test surface.

Example 8a Sodium Chloride Solubility in Water at Room Temperature (22°C.)

Distilled water (about 500 ml, at about 20° C.) was placed into each ofsix beakers (each about 1000 ml in size). One Beaker “EE” was placedunder a sodium lamp 112, as configured in FIG. 97 f, while the otherBeaker “FF” functioning as the control was placed in an incubator atabout 28° C. Approximately, one hour later, about 500 ml of water wasagain placed into two separate beakers. Beaker “CC” was placed underanother sodium lamp as Beaker “EE”; and Beaker “DD” was placed into thesame incubator as Beaker “FF”. The process was repeated a third time,about one hour later. Specifically, Beaker “AA” was placed under anothersodium lamp as Beakers “EE” and “CC”; and Becker “BB” was placed intothe same incubator as Beaker “FF” and “DD”. Thus, the result was threesets of beakers exposed to the sodium lamp and three sets of beakers inthe incubator, one set each for one, two, or three hours. Watertemperatures were as follows:

-   -   1) Beaker AA sodium lamp about 1 hour, at about 21° C.;    -   2) Beaker CC sodium lamp about 2 hours, at about 22° C.;    -   3) Beaker EE sodium lamp about 3 hours, at about 23° C.;    -   4) Beaker BB, a control beaker, about 1 hour, at about 21° C.;    -   5) Beaker DD, a control beaker, about 2 hours, at about 22° C.;        and    -   6) Beaker FF, a control beaker, about 3 hours, at about 23° C.

Sodium chloride (about 250 grams) was then added to each beaker andstirred. The beakers were covered with wax paper, placed in a darkenedcabinet, and covered with a thick, black, opaque, light-blocking drape.

Twenty hours later the solutions in the beakers were filtered over theirsalt into 1000 ml beakers. Two hours later each of the solutions (about85 ml) was pipetted into the Kimex hydrometer testing tube, andtemperature and hydrometer measurements were determined. The solutionswere finally pipetted (about 50 ml) into each of five petri dishes,dried, and the dry sodium chloride weight per 100 ml solutiondetermined.

Results: The rate of NaCl dissolution increased with exposure of thesolvent water to the conditioning sodium lamp, as compared tounconditioned control water. After two hours exposure to the sodiumlamp, the conditioned water dissolved approximately 7% more NaCl thanthe unconditioned control water. After three hours exposure to thesodium lamp, the conditioned water dissolved approximately 9% more NaClthan the unconditioned control water.

The rate of NaCl dissolution also increased with increasing time ofexposure to the sodium lamp from one hour to two hours. After about twohours conditioned water dissolved about 3.5% more NaCl than the one hourconditioned water. Beaker AA Beaker BB Sodium Lamp 1 Hour Control 1 HourTemperature 22° C. Temperature 22° C. Salinity 82 Salinity   80%Specific gravity 1.163 Specific gravity 1.155 NaCl Percent 21.5% NaClPercent 20.75%  Weight 27.0 g/100 ml Weight 26.2 g/100 ml Beaker CCBeaker DD Na Lamp Two Hours Control 2 Hours Temperature 22° C.Temperature 22 ° C. Salinity  83+%  Salinity   77% Specific gravity1.160 Specific gravity 1.145 NaCl Percent 21.5% NaCl Percent 20.0%Weight 27.8 g/100 ml Weight 25.2 g/100 ml Beaker EE Beaker FF Na LampThree Hours Control 3 Hours Temperature 22° C. Temperature 22° C.Salinity 80.5% Salinity   74% Specific gravity 1.155 Specific gravity1.135 NaCl Percent 21.0% NaCl Percent 19.0% Weight 26.0 g/100 ml Weight23.8 g/100 ml

Example 8b Sodium Chloride Solubility in Water at Elevated Temperature(55° C.)

Distilled water (about 500 ml, at about 20° C.) was placed in each oftwo beakers 104 as shown in FIG. 92 (about 1000 ml) and heated to about55° C. on an iron ringplate 103, over a Bunsen burner 101. One beaker105 was then irradiated with a sodium lamp 112 from the side (as shownin FIG. 97 h), while the other control water beaker 105 was exposedsimply to the ambient laboratory lighting. One hour later, water wasplaced into a second set of beakers 105, which were treated exactly thesame as the first set of beakers. The process was repeated a third timewith a third set of beakers 105, one hour later, producing three sets ofbeakers, each set having been exposed to the sodium lamp or just ambientlighting for about one hour, two hours or three hours. Temperatures weremaintained at about 55° C. for all three sets of beakers for the entiretime prior to sodium chloride being added thereto.

Specifically, sodium chloride (about 250 grams) was added to each beakerand stirred after the treatments discussed above occurred. Each of thesix the beakers were covered with wax paper, placed in a darkenedcabinet, and covered with a thick, black, opaque, light-blocking, clothdrape.

Twenty hours later the solutions in the beakers were filtered over theirsalt into 1000 ml beakers. Each of the solutions (about 85 ml) waspipetted into the Kimex hydrometer testing tube, and temperature andhydrometer measurements were determined.

Results: Results were virtually identical for all six solutions, whichwere all fully saturated. Temperature was about 23.5° C., salinity wasabout 99.5-100%, specific gravity was about 1.195 and NaCl percent wasabout 25.5-26%.

Example 8c Sugar Solubility in Water at Room Temperature (22° C.)

Distilled water (about 500 ml, at about 20° C.) was placed in each oftwo beakers (each about 1000 ml). One beaker “KK” was placed under asodium lamp 112 for about three hours, as configured in FIG. 97 f, whilethe other Beaker “IL” functioning as the control was placed in anincubator for about three hours at an internal temperature of about 28°C.

Sugar (about 300 grams) was then added to each beaker and stirred. Thebeakers were covered with wax paper, placed in a darkened cabinet, andcovered with a thick, black, opaque, light-blocking, cloth drape.

Twenty hours later the solutions in the beakers were filtered over theircrystals into 2000 ml beakers. Each of the solutions (about 85 ml) waspipetted into a hydrometer testing tube, and temperature and hydrometermeasurements were determined.

Results: The rate of sucrose dissolution increased with exposure of thesolvent water to the sodium lamp, as compared to unconditioned controlwater. After three hours exposure to the sodium lamp, the conditionedwater dissolved about 2.4% more sucrose by weight than the unconditionedcontrol water. KK LL Na Lamp Three Hours Control 3 Hours Temperature23.5° C. Temperature 23.5° C. Specific Gravity 1.170 Specific Gravity1.150 Percent sugar 39.1% Percent sugar 36.7% by weight by weight

Example 8d Phenyl Salicylate Solubility in Acetone at Room Temperature(22° C.)

Acetone (about 1 ml) was pipetted into small glass test tubes andstoppers placed in the tube. The neon electronic spectrum was resonantwith the vibrational overtones of acetone. Tubes were conditioned undera neon lamp; (about 8 mW/cm²) in an otherwise dark room for about 1.5hours at about 28° C. ambient temperature. Tubes were also placedsimultaneously in an incubator at about 28° C. for about 1.5 hours.

Phenyl salicylate (about 3.50 grams) was added to each tube leaving alayer undissolved on the bottom of each tube. The solutions were allowedto equilibrate overnight (about 20 hours). Solution was filtered overthe crystals and 0.500 ml pipetted into fresh tubes.

After the acetone evaporated, dry weights of phenyl salicylate per mldissolved in conditioned and unconditioned acetone were determined.

Results: Average amounts of phenyl salicylate dissolved in conditionedacetone was 0.78 g/ml. Average amount dissolved in unconditioned acetonewas 0.68 g/ml.

Example 9

For the following Examples 9a and 9b, the below-listed Equipment,materials and experimental procedures were utilized (unless stateddifferently in each Example).

Mercury-Silver Metal Alloy Crystallization

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Distilled water—American Fare, contained in one (1) gallon        translucent, colorless, plastic jugs, processed by distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. Source, Greenville Municipal        Water supply, Greenville, Tenn.    -   Forma Scientific incubator; Model 3157; Water-jacketed; 28° C.        internal temperature, opaque door and walls, nearly completely        light blocking with internal light, average 0.82 mW/cm².    -   Silver nitrate (AgNO₃) crystals: Fisher chemicals, certified        A.C.S, in brown glass bottle, 100 gm, product #S181-1001; Lot        #017010.    -   Mercury reagent; Fisher M141, Lot # 014856; ACS mercury metal.    -   Test tubes; Fisherbrand, disposable culture tubes; 12×75 mm;        Borosilicate glass; Cat. #14-961-26.    -   Mercury Vapor Lamp; GE; 175 watts; HR 175D×39; oriented        vertically above a flat testing surface, with spectral emissions        traveling down along the vertical axis of the test tubes from        top to bottom.    -   Ambient lighting—All experimental conditions described in the        Examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent        lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe        Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts, and were each about eight (8) feet        long (about 2.4 meters long). The lamps were suspended in pairs        approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on which        the experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of        lamps present in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by        40 feet (7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce        a widely broadened and noisy mercury spectrum.    -   Radiant Power Energy Meter; ThermoOriel; Model 70260, 190 nm to        10 μm.    -   Sodium lamp, Stonco, 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall        light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light down and away from the housing, oriented vertically above        a flat, horizontal testing surface, with the bulb about 8.75        inches (intensity about 14.0 mW/cm²) from the horizontal test        surface.

Example 9a Spectral Enhancement of Mercury-Silver Metal AlloyCrystallization

Silver nitrate (about 2.0 grams) was added to about 80 ml distilledwater (stored in white, semi-opaque plastic one-gallon jugs in cardboardboxes with thick black opaque drapes, in a darkened, shielded room). Thesolution was allowed to equilibrate for about 1.5 hours in ambientlaboratory lighting before pipetting about two (2) ml into each of 36small test tubes. Mercury (about 2 drops) was added to each tube.Eighteen of the test tubes were placed into the incubator as controls atabout 28° C. Eighteen test tubes were placed on a black non-reflectivesurface about 14 inches (about 35 cm) from the mercury lamp (47 mW/cm²).Ambient room temperature was about 28° C., in an otherwise dark room.

About four hours later the ambient temperature under the mercury lampwas noted to be about 30° C. and the test tubes on the blacknon-reflective surface were moved to a distance of about 29.5 inches(about 75 cm) from the mercury lamp at a light intensity of about 4.5mW/cm², where ambient temperature remained at about 28° C. Crystals intest tubes under the mercury lamp measured up to about 10 mm long atthis time, while crystals in the incubator measured up to about 3 mmlong.

Results: The crystals were evaluated after about 20 hours after theaddition of the mercury. Photomicrographs were taken at about 10×magnification (not shown herein). Heights of the crystals formed weredetermined from measurements taken from the photomicrographs and plottedin graphs shown in FIGS. 104 a and 104 b. The average height of theincubator control metal alloy crystals was about 7 mm, with brancheddendrites in one tube. The average height of the mercury spectrallyirradiated metal alloy crystals was about 12 mm, with branched dendritesin 7 tubes, six of which contained excessively branched dendrites. Threeof the spectrally grown crystals were about 22-25 mm high (an exemplaryphotograph of the dendritic formation is shown in FIG. 105 c). Themercury spectral pattern catalyzed enhanced growth of the mercury-silveralloy and morphology was significantly different.

In this Example, targeted spectral energy was used to affect phasechange and structure.

Example 9b Mercury-Silver Metal Alloy Crystallization Using WaterConditioned for One Hour

Distilled water (about 40 ml) at about 18° C. (stored in a white,semi-opaque plastic one-gallon jug in a dark, shielded cabinet) waspipetted into a 125 ml Pyrex beaker and was conditioned by irradiationunder a sodium lamp for about one hour. Another 125 ml Pyrex beaker withdistilled water (about 40 ml) at about 18° C. was placed into theincubator at 28° C. at the same time. At the end of about one hour,water temperatures in both beakers were 21° C. and the volume unchanged.Silver nitrate (about 1.00 gram) was added to each beaker. The solutions(about 2 ml) were each pipetted into 16 small test tubes and mercury(about 100 μl) was added to each tube. All of the test tubes were placedin the incubator at about 28° C.

Results: The crystals were evaluated after about 17 hours after additionof the mercury. Photomicrographs were taken at about 10× magnification(not shown herein). The heights of the formed crystals were determinedfrom measurements taken from the photomicrographs and plotted in graphsshown in FIGS. 105 a and 105 b. The average height of the control metalalloy crystals was about 8 mm, the tallest being about 13 mm, and onetube contained a simple branched dendritic crystal. The average heightof the mercury-silver metal alloy crystals grown from conditioned waterwas about 9 mm, the tallest about 25 mm. Three tubes containedexcessively branched dendritic crystals.

Growth of the mercury-silver alloy was slightly greater in the solutionmade with sodium lamp conditioned water, and morphology was differentcompared to the control solution.

Example 10 Protein Crystals and Phase Changes

For the following Examples 10a-10b the below listed Equipment, materialsand experimental procedures were utilized (unless stated otherwise inthe Example).

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Distilled Water—the water is distilled water from American Fare,        contained in one (1) gallon translucent, colorless, plastic jugs        and was processed by a combination of distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. The original source for the water        was the Greeneville Municipal water supply in Greeneville, Tenn.        The plastic jugs were stored in a darkened and electromagnetic        shielded room prior to use in the experiments described in        Examples 10a, 10b and 10c.

Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall lightfitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the light away fromthe housing. Ring stand and beaker suspension chain (i.e., similar tothe apparatus shown in FIG. 94). Sodium lamps placed on table in anirradiation room (room measuring about 11 feet×14 feet), no electronicsproducts and no other lights sources in the room, temperature 28°±2 C.

Forma Scientific incubator; Model 3157, water jacketed, 28° C., withsolid opaque sides and door which was nearly completely light blocking;with the internal light having an average intensity of about 0.82mW/cm².

-   -   Protein; Sigma Lysozyme Grade I from chicken egg white; EC        3.2.1.17: Material # L6876, Lot 051K7028, 1 Gram: 58,100        units/mg protein.    -   Emerald Biostructures Inc., combinatorial clover crystallization        plates, First Generation Combi Plates, 24 reservoirs with 4        wells per reservoir for sitting drop crystallization, Crystal        Clear sealing tape (EBS-CBT).    -   Reservoir: Hampton Research Grid Screen Sodium Chloride; #        HR2-219.    -   Reservoir: Hampton Research Crystal Screen 2, Macromolecular        Crystallization Kit; #HR2-112.    -   Hampton Research, Sodium acetate, 3.0 M, solution made from        sodium acetate trihydrate, HR2-543.    -   Binocular microscope.    -   Intel computerized microscope.    -   Ambient Lighting—All experimental conditions described in these        Examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent        lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe        Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were each about eight (8) feet        long (about 2.4 meters long). The lamps were suspended in pairs        approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on which        the experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of        lamps present in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by        40 feet (7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce        a widely broadened and noisy mercury spectrum.

Example 10a Altered Protein Crystallization and Phase Changes

Lysozyme (about 1 gram) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to asample concentration of about 50 mg/ml. Grid screen sodium chloride(about 1.3 ml) was pipetted into the reservoirs of two combi plates.Protein sample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the four wellsand reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted over the proteinsample for a total of about 60 μl per drop. Drop mixing was accomplishedwith one micropipette aspiration per well. Plates were sealed withsealing tape. One plate was placed in the incubator, and one plate wasplaced under a sodium lamp.

Results:

Two Days

-   -   A4—(0.1 M HEPES pH 7.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator        plate showed single crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in 2 wells        and clear drop in 2 wells. The sodium lamp plate showed all        clear drops.    -   B1—(0.1 M citric acid pH 4.0, 2.0 M sodium chloride). The        incubator plate showed precipitate in 2 wells and single        crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in 2 wells. The sodium lamp        wells contained clear drops.

6 Days

-   -   A1—(0.1 M Citric acid pH 4.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The        incubator plate showed clear drops. Two of four wells in the        sodium lamp plate precipitated.    -   A3—(0.1 M MES pH 6.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator        plate contained clear drops, while one of four sodium lamp wells        contained needles.    -   A4—The incubator plate contained small crystals (less than about        0.2 mm) in all four wells, while the sodium lamp plate still        contained clear drops.    -   B1—The incubator plate contained precipitate in three wells and        single crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in only one well. The        sodium lamp plate also contained precipitate in three wells and        new single crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in one well.    -   B2—(0.1 M/citric acid pH 5.0, 2.0 M sodium chloride). The        incubator plate contained clear drops, while all four wells in        the sodium lamp plate contained precipitate.

9 Days

-   -   A1—The incubator plate contained clear drops in all four wells.        The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in all four wells.    -   A2—(0.1 M citric acid pH 5.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The        incubator plate contained clear drops in all 4 wells. The sodium        lamp plate contained precipitate in three of four wells.    -   A3—The incubator plate still contained clear drops in all four        wells. The sodium lamp plate contained needles again in one        well, precipitate in two wells, and clear drop in the fourth.    -   A4—The incubator plate contained single crystals (less than        about 0.2 mm and a few up to about 0.5 mm largest dimension) in        all four wells again. The sodium lamp plate contained new        needles in two wells, and new single crystals (greater then        about 0.2 mm, up to about 1×2 mm) in two wells.    -   B1—The incubator plate contained precipitate in 3 wells and        single crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in only one well again.        The sodium lamp plate also contained precipitate in only two        wells, new needles in one well, and single crystals (greater        than about 0.2 mm) in one well.    -   B2—Both plates contained precipitate in all four wells.

Crystals from A4 were dried and stored in containers in a desiccationchamber.

Example 10b Altered Protein Crystal Growth and Phase

Lysozyme (about 1 gram) was dissolved in 0.1 M sodium acetate to asample concentration of 50 about mg/ml. Crystal Screen 2 (#'s 1-18)(about 1.3 ml) was pipetted into the first 18 reservoirs of two combiplates. Protein sample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the fourwells and reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted over the proteinsample for a total of about 60 μl drop. Drop mixing was accomplishedwith one micropipette aspiration per well. Plates were sealed withsealing tape. One plate was placed in the incubator, and one plate wasplaced under a sodium lamp.

Results:

Two Days

-   -   —Tube #14—(about 0.2 M potassium sodium tartrate tetrahydrate,        0.1 M tri-sodium citrate dihydrate pH 5.6, and 2.0 M ammonium        sulfate). The incubator contained clear drops in all 4 wells.        The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in two out of four        wells.

Six Days

-   -   Tube #1—(about 2.0 M sodium chloride, 10% w/v PEG 6000). The        incubator plate contained clear drops in all four wells. The        sodium lamp plate contained clear drop in three wells, and        single crystals (greater than about 0.2 mm) in one well.    -   Tube #2—(about 0.01 M Hexadecyltrimethylammonium bromide, 0.5 M        sodium chloride, 0.01 magnesium chloride hexahydrate). The        incubator plate contained precipitate in two wells and needles        in two wells. The sodium lamp plate contained clear drops in two        wells and rods in two wells.    -   Tube #9—(buffer about 0.1 M Sodium Acetate trihydrate pH 4.6,        precipitant 2.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate        contained single crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in all four        wells. The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in all four        wells.    -   Tube #14—Both plates contained precipitate in all four wells.

Nine Days

-   -   Tube #1—The incubator plate contained clear drops in two wells,        and precipitate in two wells. The sodium lamp plate contained        clear drops in two wells, needles in one well, and needles and        single crystals (greater than about 0.2 mm) in one well.    -   Tube #2—The incubator plate contained precipitate in two wells        and needles in two wells. The sodium lamp plate contained clear        drop in only one well, needles in one well, and rods (greater        than about 0.2 mm) in two wells.    -   Tube #9—The incubator plate contained single crystals (greater        than about 0.2 mm) in all 4 wells. The sodium lamp plate again        contained precipitate in all 4 wells.

Example 10c Altered Protein Crystal Growth and Phase

Lysozyme (about 1 gram) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to asample concentration of about 50 mg/ml. Crystal Screen 2 (#9) (1.2 ml)was pipetted into two reservoirs on each of two combi plates. Proteinsample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the four wells andreservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted over the protein samplefor a total of about 60 μl per drop. Drop mixing was accomplished withone micropipette aspiration per well. Plates were sealed with sealingtape. One plate was placed in the incubator, and one plate was placedunder a sodium lamp 112, similar to the lamp shown in FIG. 94.

Results:

Two Days

-   -   Tube #9 (buffer about 0.1 M sodium acetate trihydrate, pH 4.6,        preciptant 2.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate contained        single crystals (less than 0.2 mm) in all four wells of both        reservoirs (i.e., eight total wells). The sodium lamp plate        contained precipitate in all four wells of both reservoirs        (i.e., eight total wells).

Example 10d Enhanced Protein Crystallization

Lysozyme (about 1 gram) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to asample concentration of about 50 mg/ml. Grid screen A4 (0.1 M HEPES, pH7.0, 1.0M sodium chloride) about 1.3 ml was pipetted into two reservoirseach of two combi plates. Protein sample (30 μl) was pipetted into eachof the four wells and reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted overthe protein sample for a total of about 60 μl per drop. Drop mixing wasaccomplished with one micropipette aspiration per well. Plates weresealed with sealing tape. One plate was placed in the incubator at about28° C., and one plate was placed under a sodium lamp at about 28° C.

Results:

Two Days:

-   -   Clear drops in all wells on both plates.

Six Days:

-   -   Three of the eight sodium lamp wells grew large (greater than        about 1.0 mm) single protein crystals (FIG. 105 d). On the        control plate, two of the eight wells grew several small (less        than about 0.1 mm) crystals (FIG. 105 e).

Conclusion: The sodium lamp irradiation produced varying effects onlysozyme protein crystal growth depending on the reagents used,including:

-   -   1. Increased precipitation.    -   2. Decreased precipitation.    -   3. Increased rate of precipitation.    -   4. Delayed single crystal growth followed by growth of larger        single crystals.    -   5. Increased growth rate of large, single crystals.    -   6. Altered morphology of crystals.

Differences were noted between the incubator and sodium lamp primarilyfor reservoir solutions containing sodium or potassium. Differences wereminimal when the reservoir solution did not contain sodium or potassium.

Example 11

For the following Examples 11a-e the below listed Equipment, materialsand experimental procedures were utilized (unless stated otherwise inthe Example).

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kg        bottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Sodium Chloride: Certified A.C.S.            -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.            -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%            -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%            -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%            -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0            -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm            -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%            -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Potassium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3        Kg bottles. The potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Potassium Chloride, Certified A.C.S.        -   Certificate of Lot Analysis            -   Bromide—0.01%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.001%            -   Phosphate—less than 5 ppm            -   Sulfate—less than 0.001%            -   Barium 0.001%            -   Calcium and R₂O₃ Precipitate—less than 0.002%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 5 ppm            -   Iron—less than 2 ppm            -   Sodium—less than 0.005%            -   Magnesium—less than 0.001%            -   Iodide—less than 0.002%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.4 to 8.6            -   Insoluable Matter—less than 0.005%    -   Sterile water by Bio Whittaker (prepared by ultrafiltration,        reverse osmosis, deionization, and distillation) in one liter        plastic bottles.    -   Sodium lamp, Stonco, 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall        light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light down and away from the housing, oriented vertically above        a flat, horizontal testing surface, with the bulb about 8.75        inches (intensity about 14.0 mW/cm) the from horizontal test        surface.    -   Humboldt Bunsen burner.    -   Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate.    -   Crystallization dishes, Pyrex 270 ml capacity, Corning 3140, Ace        Glass 8465-12.    -   Shielded room in a darkened room, Ace Shielded Room Ace,        Philadelphia, Pa., U.S. Model A6H3-16, copper mesh, with a width        of about eight feet, a length of about 17 feet and a height of        about eight feet (about 2.4 meters×5.2 meters×2.4 meters).    -   Ambient Lighting—All experimental conditions described in the        Examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent        lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe        Fluorescent Lamps, 75 watts and were each about eight (8) feet        long (about 2.4 meters long). The lamps were suspended in pairs        approximately 3.5 meters above the laboratory counter on which        the experimental set-up was located. There were six (6) pairs of        lamps present in a room which measured approximately 25 feet by        40 feet (7.6 meters×12.1 meters). The fluorescent lamps produce        a widely broadened and noisy mercury spectrum.    -   Aluminum foil, plastic containers.    -   Black plastic, plastic container.    -   Potassium lamp, Thermo Oriel 10 watt spectral line potassium        lamp #65070 with Thermo Oriel lamp mount #65160 and Thermo Oriel        spectral lamp power supply #65150. The potassium lamp was        mounted overhead with the rectangular bulb oriented horizontally        at about 9 inches (about 23 cm) from the crystallization dishes        (as shown in FIG. 97 h).    -   American Fare distilled water, in one gallon semi-opaque        colorless plastic jugs, processed by distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. Source: Greenville Municipal        water supply, Greenville, Tenn. Stored in shielded, darkened        room, in cardboard boxes.    -   Pyrex 1000 ml beakers.    -   Pyrex 400 ml beakers.    -   Pyrex 2000 ml bealers.    -   Grounded, dark enclosure, about 6 feet by about 3 feet by about        1½ feet metal cabinet (24 gauge metal), flat, black paint        inside.    -   Microwave horn, Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN# s959,        12.4-18.0 GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725 A, 3.5 mm.    -   Microwave spectroscopy system, Hewlett Packard; HP 8350B Sweep        Oscillator, HP8510B Network analyzer, and HP 8513A Reflection        Transmission Test set.    -   Forma Scientific incubator; model 3157, water jacketed, 28° C.,        with solid opaque sides and door, average internal light        intensity about 0.82 mW/cm²).    -   Computer microscope manufactured by Intel, Model Qx3.

Example 11a Sodium Chloride/Potassium Chloride 1:1 Molar SaturatedSolution

Saturated sodium chloride (NaCl)/potassium chloride (KCl) 1:1 molarsolution was prepared by heating distilled/deionized water (about 1600ml) in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C. NaCl (about 29 grams) andKCl (about 37 grams) were mixed dry and added in about 66 gram amountsfor a total mixture weight of about 726 grams, until no more woulddissolve, under ambient laboratory lighting. The beaker was wrapped inblack plastic, stored in a cabinet, and allowed to equilibrate overnight(about 18 hours).

The saturated solution was filtered at room temperature at about 100 mland was placed into each of 13 crystallization dishes. The dishes weretreated as follows:

-   -   three under the potassium lamp in the shielded room surrounded        by 1 meter tall light blocking barriers (the potassium lamp was        suspended on a ring stand such that the lamp portion in the        rectangular-shaped housing was about 9 inches above the sample        beakers);    -   three under the sodium lamp (apparatus similar to that shown in        FIG. 94) in the shielded room surrounded by about 1 meter tall        light blocking barriers;    -   two in an opaque plastic container with light blocked by an        entire covering of aluminum foil, in the shielded room;    -   two in an opaque plastic container with light blocked by an        entire covering of black plastic in the shielded room;    -   three under fluorescent lights (the fluorescent lamps produce a        widely broadened and noisy mercury spectrum).

The solutions were allowed to crystallize overnight.

Results: All dishes had crystalline masses covering the bottom. Weightswere about as follows: Average Weight (g) per Dish Potassium Lamp 14.94Sodium Lamp 15.03 Al Foil Covered Container 5.75 Black Plastic CoveredContainer 5.50 Fluorescent Lights 13.87

Elemental analysis for sodium and potassium was performed on the mixedNaCl/KCl crystals. Results were: Percent Percent K by Weight Na byWeight Potassium Lamp 52.1 1.15 Sodium Lamp 50.8 1.61 Al Foil CoveredContainer 51.9 1.10 Black Plastic Covered Container 51.9 1.63Fluorescent Lights 51.7 1.55

The presence of spectral light frequencies (potassium lamp, sodium lamp,and fluorescent lights) enhanced the rate of crystallization for bothsodium and potassium, compared to conditions in which light was blocked(aluminum foil and black plastic covered containers).

The potassium lamp inhibited NaCl crystallization preferentially infavor of KCl. Similarly, the sodium lamp enhanced crystallization ofNaCl relative to KCl.

The aluminum-foil covered container inhibited crystallization of NaCl,without affecting KCl crystallization.

Example 11b Sodium Chloride/Potassium Chloride 1:1 Molar UnsaturatedSolution

Saturated sodium chloride (NaCl)/potassium chloride (KCl) 1:1 molarsolution was prepared by heating distilled/deionized water (about 1600ml) in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C. NaCl (about 29 grams) andKCl (about 37 grams) were mixed dry and added in about 66 gram amountsfor a total mixture weight of about 660 grams under ambient laboratorylighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic, stored in a cabinet,and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).

The unsaturated solution was filtered at room temperature and 100 ml wasplaced in each of 13 crystallization dishes. Dishes were treated asfollows:

-   -   three under the potassium lamp in the shielded room surrounded        by about 1 meter tall light blocking barriers (the potassium        lamp was suspended on a ring stand such that the lamp portion in        the rectangular-shaped housing was about 9 inches above the        sample beakers);    -   three under the sodium lamp (apparatus similar to that shown in        FIG. 94) in the shielded room surrounded by 1 meter tall light        blocking barriers;    -   two in an opaque plastic container with light blocked by an        entire covering of aluminum foil, in the shielded room;    -   two in an opaque plastic container with light blocked by an        entire covering of black plastic in the shielded room;    -   three under fluorescent lights (the fluorescent lamps produce a        widely broadened and noisy mercury spectrum).

The solutions were allowed to crystallize overnight and were evaluatedafter about 20 hours.

Results: Weights and morphologies of crystals grown from unsaturatedsolution were as follows: Average Weight (g) per Dish MorphologyPotassium Lamp 3.4 more than 50 cubic crystals, 3-4 mm cubic Sodium Lamp3.9 more than 50 cubic crystals, up to 5 mm cubic Al Foil CoveredContainer 1.2 about 15 crystals, 3-10 mm in size Black Plastic CoveredContainer 1.1 8 crystals, 6-15 mm Fluorescent Lights 2.8 more than 50crystals, 1-2 mm in one dish, 5-10 mm in two dishes

Elemental analysis for sodium and potassium was performed via ICP(Baird) on the mixed NaCl/KCl crystals. Results were: Percent Na PercentK by Weight by Weight Potassium Lamp 51.4 1.45 Sodium Lamp 51.1 1.36Aluminum-Foil Covered Container 51.6 1.17 Black Plastic CoveredContainer 50.1 1.88 Fluorescent Lights 50.5 1.83

The presence of spectral light frequencies (potassium lamp, sodium lamp,and fluorescent lights) in a less saturated solution again enhanced theoverall rates of crystallization and nucleation, compared to conditionsin which light was blocked (aluminum foil and black plastic coveredcontainers). Individual crystals were larger in those same light-blockedconditions, with significantly less nucleation.

The potassium and sodium lamps did not exhibit preferentialcrystallization in this unsaturated solution.

The aluminum foil-covered container again exhibited inhibition of NaClcrystallization, relative to KCl crystallization.

Conversely, crystallization of Na was enhanced in the unsaturatedsolution under fluorescent lights and in the plastic container withlight blocking black plastic. (It was noted after the fact that theplastic container with light blocking black plastic had been placeddirectly adjacent to a bundle of electrical cords.)

Example 11c Sodium Chloride/Potassium Chloride 1:1 Molar UnsaturatedSolution

Saturated sodium chloride (NaCl)/potassium chloride (KCl) 1:1 molarsolution was prepared as above in Example 11a dissolving a total ofabout 528 grams mixed salts in about 1600 ml distilled/deionized water.Dishes were prepared and treated as above and allowed to crystallizeovernight, however there was no crystal growth in any of the dishes.

Example 11d Sodium Chloride/Potassium Chloride 1:1 Molar UnsaturatedSolution

Saturated sodium chloride (NaCl)/potassium chloride (KCl) 1:1 molarsolution was prepared by heating distilled/deionized water (about 1600ml) in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C. NaCl (about 29 grams) andKCl (about 37 grams) were mixed dry and added in about 66 gram amountsfor a total mixture weight of about 594 grams under ambient laboratorylighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic, stored in a cabinet,and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).

The unsaturated solution was filtered at room temperature and 100 ml wasplaced in each of 14 crystallization dishes. Dishes were treated asfollows:

-   -   three under the potassium lamp in the shielded room surrounded        by 1 meter tall light blocking barriers (the potassium lamp was        suspended on a ring stand such that the lamp portion in the        rectangular-shaped housing was about 9 inches above the sample        beakers);    -   three under the sodium lamp (apparatus similar to that shown in        FIG. 94) in the shielded room surrounded by 1 meter tall light        blocking barriers;    -   two in an opaque plastic container with light blocked by an        entire covering of aluminum foil, in the shielded room;    -   two in an opaque plastic container with light blocked by an        entire covering of loose black plastic; and    -   two under fluorescent lights.

The solutions were allowed to crystallize overnight and were evaluatedafter about 20 hours.

Results: Weights and morphologies of crystals grown from unsaturatedsolution were as follows: Average Weight (g) per Dish MorphologyPotassium Lamp 0.15 3 cubes 4-7 mm, one flat sheet 1 × 2 cm Sodium Lamp0.9 more than 5 cubic crystals, about 5-10 mm in size Aluminum-FoilCovered Container No growth Loose Black Plastic Covered No growthContainer Fluorescent Lights 0.1 about 4 cubic crystals, about 3-5 mm insize

Elemental analysis for sodium and potassium was performed via ICP(Baird) on the mixed NaCl/KCl crystals. Results were: Percent K byWeight Percent Na by Weight Potassium Lamp 51.8 0.71 Sodium Lamp 52.10.99 Fluorescent Lights 51.1 0.79

The presence of spectral light frequencies (potassium lamp, sodium lamp,and fluorescent lights) in this much less saturated solution againenhanced the overall rates of crystallization and nucleation, comparedto conditions in which light was blocked (aluminum foil and blackplastic-covered containers). Crystallization growth rate was greatestwith the sodium lamp. Nucleation was approximately equal with all lightirradiation.

The potassium and sodium lamps exhibited slight preferentialcrystallization in this very unsaturated solution.

Example 12 Mixed Microwave Crystals

For the following Examples 12a and 12b the below-listed Equipment,materials and experimental procedures were utilized (unless statedotherwise in the Example).

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   American Fare distilled water, in one gallon semi-opaque        colorless plastic jugs, processed by distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. Source: Greenville Municipal        water supply, Greenville, Tenn. Stored in shielded, darkened        room, in cardboard boxes.    -   Pyrex 1000 ml beakers.    -   Pyrex 400 ml beakers.    -   Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kg        bottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Sodium Chloride: Certified A.C.S.            -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.            -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%            -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%            -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%            -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0            -   Phosphate PO₃)—less than 5 ppm            -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%            -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Potassium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3        Kg bottles. The potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Potassium Chloride, Certified A.C.S.        -   Certificate of Lot Analysis            -   Bromide—0.01%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.001%            -   Phosphate—less than 5 ppm            -   Sulfate—less than 0.001%            -   Barium 0.001%            -   Calcium and R₂O₃ Precipitate—less than 0.002%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 5 ppm            -   Iron—less than 2 ppm            -   Sodium—less than 0.005%            -   Magnesium—less than 0.001%            -   Iodide—less than 0.002%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.4 to 8.6            -   Insoluable Matter—less than 0.005%    -   Grounded, dark enclosures (2) about 6 feet by 3 feet×1½ feet        metal cabinets (24 gauge metal); flat, black paint inside.    -   Microwave horn, Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN# s959,        12.4-18.0 GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725 A, 3.5 mm.    -   Microwave spectroscopy system, Hewlett Packard; HP 8350B Sweep        Oscillator, HP 8510B Network analyzer, and HP 8513A Reflection        Transmission Test set.    -   Sodium lamp, Stonco, 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall        light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light down and away from the housing, oriented vertically above        a flat, horizontal testing surface, with the bulb about 9 inches        (23 cm) from the horizontal test surface.    -   Humboldt Bunsen burner with Bernzomatic propane fuel.    -   Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate.    -   Crystallization dishes, Pyrex, 90×50 mm, part no. 3140.    -   Forma Scientific Incubator; Model # 3157; Single        chamber/water-jacketed incubator with CHIP CO2 control; chamber        capacity-5.6 cubic feet, opaque walls and door with an average        internal light intensity of about 0.82 mW/cm².    -   Computer microscope; manufactured by Intel, model Qx3.

Example 12a Sodium Chloride/Potassium Chloride 1:1 Molar SaturatedSolution and Sodium Chloride Microwave Rotational Frequency

A saturated sodium chloride (NaCl)/potassium chloride (KCl) 1:1 molarsolution was prepared by heating distilled water (about 800 ml) in a1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C. NaCl (about 29 grams) and KCl(about 37 grams) were mixed dry and added in about 66 gram amounts,until no more would dissolve, under ambient laboratory lighting. Thebeaker was wrapped in black plastic, stored in a cabinet, and allowed toequilibrate overnight about 18 hours.

The saturated solution was filtered at room temperature and about 100 mlwas placed into each of 4 crystallization dishes. Two of the dishes wereplaced in the shielded, dark control enclosure and two were placed inthe second shielded, dark enclosure for microwave irradiation, parameterS₁₁, sweeping from 13.073719 GHz to 13.073721 in a very narrow resonancepeak. Microwave Dish “A” was immediately adjacent to the microwave horn,and microwave Dish “B” was adjacent to dish A, and in line with themicrowave horn.

After about 17 hours, the microwave irradiation was terminated and thecrystals were evaluated. Temperatures in both cabinets were about 21° C.

Results: Crystals were similar in size and morphology. Weights for totalcrystals differed however, with the control crystals weighing more.Microwave crystals exhibited reduced crystallization rates relative tocontrols. Weight of Crystals (g) Microwave Dish A 3.2 Microwave Dish B3.1 Control Dish A 3.4 Control Dish B 3.5

Example 12b Sodium Chloride/Potassium Chloride 1:3 Molar SaturatedSolution and Sodium Chloride Microwave Rotational Frequency

Saturated sodium chloride (NaCl)/potassium chloride (KCl) solution, 1:4by weight (approximately 1:3 molar) was prepared by heating distilledwater (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55° C. NaCl(about 75 grams) and KCl (about 300 grams) were mixed dry and then addedto the water with undissolved salt remaining in the water under ambientlaboratory lighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic, stored ina cabinet, and allowed to equilibrate overnight about 18 hours.

The saturated solution was filtered at room temperature and about 100 mlwas placed into each of 8 crystallization dishes. Dishes were treated asfollows:

-   -   Two dishes in the shielded, dark control enclosure (about 22°        C.)    -   Two dishes in the second shielded, dark enclosure (about 22° C.)        for microwave irradiation, parameter S₁₁, sweeping more broadly        from 13.0736 GHz to 13.0738. Microwave Dish “A” was immediately        adjacent to the microwave horn, and microwave Dish “B” was        adjacent to dish A, and in line with the microwave horn.    -   Two dishes in the incubator (about 28° C.)    -   Two dishes under a sodium lamp (about 28° C.) as shown in FIG.        94.

Microwave irradiation was terminated after about 12 hours and theshielded controls were placed in the same enclosure with the microwavedishes. After about 5 more hours all the crystallization dishes wereassessed. Photomicrographs corresponding to the grown crystals are shownin FIGS. 105 f-105 i. Dry crystal weights were also obtained.

Results: Weights and morphologies were: Weight of Crystals (g)Morphology Microwave A (FIG. 105f) 2.2 Many cubic crystals Microwave B2.0 with some flat sheets Shielded Control A (FIG. 105g) 2.5 Many flatsheets Shielded Control B 2.6 with some cubic crystals Na Lamp A (FIG.105h) 6.2 Mostly cubic crystals Na Lamp B 5.9 Incubator Control A (FIG.105i) 1.2 Mostly flat sheets Incubator Control B 0.9

A broader microwave resonance curve was used in the experiment.Differences between the microwave crystal weights and the shieldedcontrol weights were more pronounced, with crystallization duringmicrowave irradiation being 18% less.

Morphology differences between the crystals were more pronounced, asshown in FIGS. 105 f-105 i, as well and revealed a continuum fromspectrally irradiated crystals to controls.

Example 13 Conductivity

For the following Example 13, the below-listed Equipment, materials andexperimental procedures were utilized.

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Accumet Research AR20 ph/Conductivity Meter, calibrated with        reference solutions prior to all experiments.    -   Traceable Conductivity Calibration Standard—Catalog # 09-328-3    -   MicroMHOS/cm—1,004.    -   Microseimens/cm—1,004.    -   OmhS/cm—99.    -   PPM D. S.—669.    -   Accuracy @ 25° C. (+/−0.25%).    -   Size—16 oz (473 ml).    -   Analysis #—2713.    -   Conductivity probe # 13-620-155 with thermocouple.    -   Humboldt Bunsen burner with Bernozomatic propane fuel.    -   Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate.    -   sodium lamp, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall        light, fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing the        light away from the housing. The sodium bulb was a Type S62        lamp, 120V, 60 Hz, 1.5 A made in Hungary by Jemanamjjasond. The        lamp was located about 12 cm from the beaker side.    -   Sterile water—Bio Whittaker, contained in one liter clear,        plastic bottles, processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis,        deionization, and distillation.

Example 13a Conductivity of Sodium Chloride Aqueous Solution

Procedures similar to those discussed in detail in Example 7 werefollowed with the following specific differences.

Water (about 800 ml) was placed in a 1000 ml beaker and room temperaturemeasurements were obtained for conductivity (S/cm), dissolved solids(ppm), and resistance (kOhms), after allowing about 10 minutes for theprobe to equilibrate to the water. The water was then heated to about56.1° C., and measurements were repeated. Sodium chloride (about 0.01gram) was added and stirred with a glass stir rod for about 30 seconds.Measurements of conductivity were obtained about every 2 minutes forabout 20 minutes, and a final measurement was taken at about 40 minutes.Dissolved solids and resistance measurements were also obtained at about4 minutes, at about 14 minutes, and at about 20 minutes after adding thesalt.

The experimental apparatuses used to obtain data are shown in FIGS. 99and 100. A conditioning probe was substituted for the pH probe ofExample 7.

Four sets of parameters were evaluated, with three tests within eachset:

-   -   1. Bunsen burner heating only (apparatus corresponding to FIG.        99);    -   2. Sodium lamp irradiation of water about 40 minutes before        adding the salt (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 100);    -   3. Sodium lamp irradiation of water about 40 minutes after        adding the salt (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 100);    -   4. Sodium lamp irradiation of water about 40 minutes before and        after adding the salt (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 100).

Results: Conductivity appears to be increased with sodium lampirradiation after addition of the sodium chloride.

FIG. 106 a is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of Bunsen burner-onlydata.

FIG. 106 b is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only) for Bunsenburner-only data.

FIG. 106 c is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of Bunsen burner-onlydata, the plot beginning with the data point generated two minutes aftersodium chloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 d is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp for about 40 minutesbefore the sodium chloride was dissolved therein.

FIG. 106 e is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only),corresponding to the water being conditioned by the sodium lamp forabout 40 minutes before the sodium chloride was dissolved therein.

FIG. 106 f is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp for about 40 minutesbefore the sodium chloride was dissolved therein, the plot beginningwith the data point generated two minutes after sodium chloride wasadded to the water.

FIG. 106 g is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe solution of sodium chloride and water being irradiated with aspectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp beginning when the sodiumchloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 h is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only)corresponding to the solution of sodium chloride and water beingirradiated with a spectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp beginningwhen the sodium chloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 i is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe solution of sodium chloride and water being irradiated with aspectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp beginning when the sodiumchloride was added to the water, the plot beginning with the data pointgenerated two minutes after sodium chloride was added to the water.

FIG. 106 j is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioningpattern for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride was added to thewater; and continually irradiating the water with the sodium lightspectral pattern while sodium chloride is added thereto and remaining onwhile all conductivity measurements were taken.

FIG. 106 k is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of temperature (two separate data points only) for threesets of data, corresponding to the water being conditioned by the sodiumlamp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before thesodium chloride was dissolved; and continually irradiating the waterwith the sodium light spectral pattern while sodium chloride is addedthereto and remaining on while all conductivity measurements were taken.

FIG. 106 l is a graph of the experimental data which shows conductivityas a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding tothe water being conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioningpattern for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride was dissolved;and continually irradiating the water with the sodium light spectralpattern while sodium chloride is added thereto and remaining on whileall conductivity measurements were taken, the plot beginning with thedata point generated two minutes after sodium chloride was added to thewater.

FIG. 106 m is a graph of the experimental data which superimposesaverages from the data in FIGS. 106 a, 106 d, 106 g and 106 j.

FIG. 106 n is a graph of the experimental data which superimposesaverages from the data in FIGS. 106 b, 106 e, 106 h and 106 k.

FIG. 106 o is a graph of the experimental data which superimposesaverages from the data in FIGS. 106 c, 106 f, 106 i and 106 j.

In this Example, targeted spectral patterns and/or targeted spectralconditioning patterns were used to change the material properties of asolvent and/or solvent/solute system.

Example 14 Batteries

For the following Examples 14a and 14b the following Equipment,materials and experimental procedures were utilized.

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   One or more sodium lamps, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium        security wall light, fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector        directing the light away from the housing. The sodium bulb was a        Type S62 lamp, 120V, 60 Hz, 1.5 A made in Hungary by        Jemanamjjasond. One or more sodium lamps was/were mounted at        various angles, and location(s) as specified in each experiment.        Unless stated differently in the Example, the lamp was located        at about 15 inches (about 38 cm) from the beakers or dishes to        maintain substantially consistent intensities.    -   Sterile water—Bio Whittaker, contained in one liter clear,        plastic bottles, processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis,        deionization, and distillation.    -   Sodium Chloride, Fisher Chemicals, packaged in gray plastic 3 Kg        bottles. The sodium chloride, in crystalline form, is        characterized as follows:        -   Sodium Chloride: Certified A.C.S.            -   Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)—P.T.            -   Bromide (Br)—less than 0.01%            -   Calcium (Ca)—less than 0.0002%-0.0007%            -   Chlorate and Nitrate (as NO₃)—less than 0.0006%-0.0009%            -   Heavy Metals (as Pb)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Insoluble Matter—less than 0.001%-0.006%            -   Iodide (I)—less than 0.0002%-0.0004%            -   Iron (Fe)—less than 0.2 ppm-0.4 ppm            -   Magnesium (Mg)—less than 0.001%-0.0003%            -   Nitrogen Compounds (as N)—less than 0.0001%-0.0003%            -   pH of 5% solution at 25° C.—5.0-9.0            -   Phosphate (PO₃)—less than 5 ppm            -   Potassium (K)—0.001%-0.005%            -   Sulfate (SO₄)—0.003%-0.004%    -   Battery anodes by Sovietski; #150400; primarily magnesium and        aluminum.    -   Battery/flashlight assembly: Aqueous sodium chloride (NaCl)        electrolyte powered flashlight by Sovietski; #150400; double        cathode/anode configuration.    -   Sodium (Na) Lamp, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium security        wall light fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing        the light away from the housing, oriented horizontally with a        cylindrical aluminum foil light guide about 9 cm in diameter.    -   Receptacle, clear plastic box about 7.5×5.75×3.75 inches.    -   American Fare distilled water, in one gallon semi-opaque        colorless plastic jugs, processed by distillation,        microfiltration and ozonation. Source: Greenville Municipal        water supply, Greenville, Tenn. Stored in shielded, darkened        room, in cardboard boxes.    -   Grounded, dark enclosure about 6 feet×3 feet×1½ feet metal        cabinet (24 gauge metal), flat, black paint inside.    -   Load box Ammeter/Voltmeter (Fuel Cell Store) Heliocentris        #DBGMNR29126811 with 10 ohm load.    -   FisherBrand Dual Channel Thermometer with Offset.    -   2000 ml Pyrex beaker.

Example 14a Enhanced Sodium Chloride Battery Current with SodiumSpectral Irradiation

FIG. 107 shows an aqueous NaCl battery/flashlight assembly 308. Twoassemblies 308 were placed side-by-side in a grounded, dark enclosure.Electrolyte 310 was distilled water (about 1700 ml) and NaCl (about 97g) mixed at the same time at room temperature in 2000 ml Pyrex beakers.Thermometer wires 309 were placed on the bottom center of theelectrolyte receptacles 307. FIG. 108 shows Sodium lamp 112 in a housing111 with an aluminum foil cylinder 110, with the sodium lamp 112positioned about 18 cm to the outside side of each electrolytereceptacle 307 allowing delivery of sodium spectral irradiation throughthe outside of the receptacle 307, into the electrolyte solution 310,and onto the outside of the anode plate 306.

The electrolyte receptacles 307 were filled with electrolyte 310, theanode/cathode assembly 301 was lowered into the electrolyte 310, and theflashlights 303 of each assembly 308 were turned on throughout theexperiment. Initial measurements of current (mAmps) and temperature wereperformed and then measured again every 40 minutes.

The sodium lamp was cycled as follows:

-   -   1. Off first 40 minutes;    -   2. On second 40 minutes;    -   3. Off third 40 minutes;    -   4. On fourth 40 minutes.

Results: As shown in FIG. 109, the standard initial current increaseoccurred with the sodium lamp turned off. The current increase continuedwith the sodium lamp turned on during the second 40 minutes. When thesodium lamp was turned off at 80 minutes however, the current stoppedincreasing and stayed essentially the same to 120 minutes. When thesodium lamp was turned on again at 120 minutes, the current againincreased. Finally, when the sodium lamp was turned off again thecurrent remained the same.

These current characteristics were not related to temperature. Althoughthe temperature increased between 80 and 120 minutes and between 160 and200 minutes, when the sodium lamp was off, the current did not increase,suggesting that current increase was not due to an increase intemperature.

Example 14b Enhanced Sodium Chloride Battery Current with SodiumSpectral Irradiation

FIG. 107 shows an aqueous NaCl battery/flashlight assembly 308. Twoassemblies 308 were placed side-by-side in a grounded, dark enclosure.Electrolyte 310 was distilled water (about 1700 ml) and NaCl (about 97g) mixed at the same time at room temperature in 2000 ml Pyrex beakers.FIG. 108 shows Sodium lamp 112 in a housing 111 with an aluminum foilcylinder 110 with the sodium lamp 112 that was positioned about 18 cm tothe outside side of each electrolyte receptacle 307 allowing delivery ofsodium spectral irradiation through the outside of the receptacle 307,into the electrolyte solution 310, and onto the outside of the anodeplate 306.

The electrolyte receptacles 307 were filled with electrolyte 310, theanode/cathode assembly 301 was lowered into the electrolyte 310, and theflashlights 303 of each assembly 308 were turned on throughout theexperiment. Initial measurements of current (mAmps) and temperature wereperformed and then measured again every 10 minutes. Movement of chargedspecies in this battery is accomplished by phase changes entailingdissolution of metal atoms on the anode, followed by migration acrossthe electrolyte, and ending with bonding crystallization onto thecathode. The spectral energy pattern used in this Example enhanced thesephase changes.

The sodium lamp was cycled as follows:

-   -   1. Off 040 minutes;    -   2. Off 40-70 minutes;    -   2. On 70-110 minutes;    -   3. Off 110-150 minutes;    -   4. On 150-190 minutes.

Results: As shown in FIG. 110, the standard initial current increaseoccurred with the sodium lamp turned off. Rate of rise of current hadslowed by about 70 minutes. The current increased faster with the sodiumlamp turned on between 70 and 110 minutes. When the sodium lamp wasturned off at from 110-150 minutes, the rate of current increase wentdown. When the sodium lamp was turned on again at 150 minutes, the rateof current increase went up again.

In these examples, the spectral energy pattern of sodium was used toincrease current in an electrolyte.

Example 15 Corrosion

Corrosion of Steel Razor Blades in Aqueous Solutions

For the following Examples 15a and 15b, the following Equipment,materials and experimental procedures were utilized.

a) Equipment and Materials

-   -   Sterile water, BioWhittaker, contained in one liter clear,        plastic bottles, processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis,        deionization, and distillation.    -   Stanley Utility blades 11-921, 1095 Carbon steel.    -   Sodium Lamp, Stonco 70 watt high-pressure sodium security wall        light, fitted with a parabolic aluminum reflector directing        light away from the housing. The sodium bulb Type S62 lamp, 120        V, 60 Hz, 1.5 Å made in Hungary by Jemanamjjasond.

Example 15 a

Ten steel razor blades 311 were placed in a beaker 104 in distilleddeionized water 105 for about 48 hours. Five razor blades 311 b werekept in the dark, and five razor blades 311 a were exposed only to thesodium electronic spectrum, which is resonant with water vibrationalovertones. FIG. 94 shows the experimental apparatus used in thisexperiment. FIG. 111 shows the differences in amounts of corrosionbetween blades 311 a and 311 b.

Results: Razor blades kept in the dark had virtually no corrosion. Razorblades exposed to sodium electronic/water vibrational overtonesdisplayed corrosion on more than 90% of the surface.

Example 15b

Twelve razor blades 311 were placed in beakers 104, in sodium chloridesolution 105 (25 g/100 ml). Six razor blades (311 b) were kept in totaldarkness and six razor blades (311 a) were exposed only to the sodiumelectronic/water vibrational overtones from a sodium lamp. FIG. 94 showsthe experimental apparatus used in this experiment.

Results: Razor blades kept in the dark (not shown) had mild corrosionover 20-25% of their surfaces. Razor blades exposed to sodiumelectronic/water vibrational overtones exhibited moderate corrosion (notshown) over 70-75% of their surfaces.

Example 16 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Spectral Catalyst in aGas Phase Reaction

2H₂+O₂>>>>platinum catalyst>>>>2H₂O

Water can be produced by the method of exposing H₂ and O₂ to a physicalplatinum (Pt) catalyst but there is always the possibility of producinga potentially dangerous explosive risk, This experiment replaced thephysical platinum catalyst with a spectral catalyst comprising thespectral pattern of the physical platinum catalyst, which resonates withand transfers energy to the hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates.

To demonstrate that oxygen and hydrogen can combine to form waterutilizing a spectral catalyst, electrolysis of water was performed toprovide stoichiometric amounts of oxygen and hydrogen starting gases. Atriple neck flask was fitted with two (2) rubber stoppers on the outsidenecks, each fitted with platinum electrodes encased in glass for a four(4) inch length. The flask was filled with distilled water and a pinchof salt so that only the glass-encased portion of the electrode wasexposed to air, and the unencased portion of the electrode wascompletely under water. The central neck was connected via a rubberstopper to vacuum tubing, which led to a Drierite column to remove anywater from the produced gases.

After vacuum removal of all gases in the system (to about 700 mm Hg),electrolysis was conducted using a 12 V power source attached to the twoelectrodes. Electrolysis was commenced with the subsequent production ofhydrogen and oxygen gases in stoichiometric amounts. The gases passedthrough the Drierite column, through vacuum tubing connected to positiveand negative pressure gauges and into a sealed 1,000 ml, round quartzflask. A strip of filter paper, which contained dried cobalt, had beenplaced in the bottom of the sealed flask. Initially the cobalt paper wasblue, indicating the absence of water in the flask. A similar cobalttest strip exposed to the ambient air was also blue.

The traditional physical platinum catalyst was replaced by spectralcatalyst platinum electronic frequencies (with their attendant fine andhyperfine frequencies) from a Fisher Scientific Hollow Cathode PlatinumLamp which was positioned approximately one inch (about 2 cm) from theflask. This allowed the oxygen and hydrogen gases in the round quartzflask to be irradiated with emissions from the spectral catalyst. ACathodeon Hollow Cathode Lamp Supply C610 was used to power the Pt lampat 80% maximum current (12 mAmps). The reaction flask was cooled usingdry ice in a Styrofoam container positioned directly beneath the roundquartz flask, offsetting any effects of heat from the Pt lamp. The Ptlamp was turned on and within two days of irradiation, a noticeable pinkcolor was evident on the cobalt paper strip indicating the presence ofwater in the round quartz flask. The cobalt test strip exposed toambient air in the lab remained blue. Over the next four to five days,the pink colored area on the cobalt strip became brighter and larger.Upon discontinuation of the Pt emission, H₂O diffused out of the cobaltstrip and was taken up by the Drierite column. Over the next four tofive days, the pink coloration of the cobalt strip in the quartz flaskfaded. The cobalt strip exposed to the ambient air remained blue.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to affect chemicalreactions in a gas phase.

Example 17 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Spectrl Catalyst in aLiquid Phase Reaction

H₂O₂>>>>platinum catalyst>>>>H₂O+O₂

The decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is an extremely slow reaction inthe absence of catalysts. Accordingly, an experiment was performed whichshowed that the physical catalyst, finely divided platinum, could bereplaced with the spectral catalyst having the spectral pattern ofplatinum. Hydrogen peroxide, 3%, filled two (2) nippled quartz tubes.(the nippled quartz tubes consisted of a lower portion about 17 mminternal diameter and about 150 mm in length, narrowing over about a 10mm length to an upper capillary portion being about 2.0 mm internaldiameter and about 140 mm in length and were made from PhotoVac Laserquartz tubing). Both quartz tubes were inverted in 50 ml beakerreservoirs filled with (3%) hydrogen peroxide to about 40 ml and wereshielded from incident light (cardboard cylinders covered with aluminumfoil). One of the light shielded tubes was used as a control. The othershielded tube was exposed to a Fisher Scientific Hollow Cathode Lamp forplatinum (Pt) using a Cathodeon Hollow Cathode Lamp Supply C610, at 80%maximum current (12 mA). The experiment was performed several times withan exposure time ranging from about 24 to about 96 hours. The shieldedtubes were monitored for increases in temperature (there was none) toassure that any reaction was not due to thermal effects. In a typicalexperiment the nippled tubes were prepared with hydrogen peroxide (3%)as described above herein. Both tubes were shielded from light, and thePt tube was exposed to platinum spectral emissions, as described above,for about 24 hours. Gas production in the control tube A measured aboutfour (4) mm in length in the capillary (i.e., about 12.5 mm³), while gasin the Pt (tube B) measured about 50 mm (i.e., about 157 mm³) Theplatinum spectral catalyst thus increased the reaction rate about 12.5times.

The tubes were then switched and tube A was exposed to the platinumspectral catalyst, for about 24 hours, while tube B served as thecontrol. Gas production in the control (tube B) measured about 2 mm inlength in the capillary (i.e., about 6 mm³) while gas in the Pt tube(tube A) measured about 36 mm (i.e., about 113 mm³), yielding about a 19fold difference in reaction rate.

As a negative control, to confirm that any lamp would not cause the sameresult, the experiment was repeated with a sodium lamp at 6 mA (80% ofthe maximum current). Na in a traditional reaction would be a reactantwith water releasing hydrogen gas, not a catalyst of hydrogen peroxidebreakdown. The control tube measured gas to be about 4 mm in length(i.e., about 12 mm³) in the capillary portion, while the Na tube gasmeasured to be about 1 mm in length (i.e., about 3 mm³). This indicatedthat while spectral emissions can substitute for catalysts, they cannotyet substitute for reactants. Also, it indicated that the simple effectof using a hollow cathode tube emitting heat and energy into thehydrogen peroxide was not the cause of the gas bubble formation, butinstead, the spectral pattern of Pt replacing the physical catalystcaused the reaction.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to affect achemical reaction in a liquid phase and subsequent transformation to agas phase.

Example 18 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Spectral Catalyst in aSolid Phase Reaction

It is well known that certain microorganisms have a toxic reaction tosilver (Ag). The silver electronic spectrum consists of essentially twoultraviolet frequencies that fall between UV-A and UV-B. It is nowunderstood through this invention, that the high intensity spectralfrequencies produced in the silver electronic spectrum are ultravioletfrequencies that inhibit bacterial growth (by creation of free radicalsand by causing bacterial DNA damage). These UV frequencies areessentially harmless to mammalian cells. Thus, it was theorized that theknown medicinal and anti-microbial uses of silver are due to a spectralcatalyst effect. In this regard, an experiment was conducted whichshowed that the spectral catalyst emitting the spectrum of silverdemonstrated a toxic or inhibitory effect on microorganisms.

Bacterial cultures were placed onto standard growth medium in two petridishes (one control and one Ag) using standard plating techniquescovering the entire dish. Each dish was placed at the bottom of a lightshielding cylindrical chamber. A light shielding foil-covered, cardboarddisc with a patterned slit was placed over each culture plate. A FisherScientific Hollow Cathode Lamp for Silver (Ag) was inserted through thetop of the Ag exposure chamber so that only the spectral emissionpattern from the silver lamp was irradiating the bacteria on the Agculture plate (i.e., through the patterned slit). A Cathodeon HollowCathode Lamp Supply C610 was used to power the Ag lamp at about 80%maximum current (3.6 mA). The control plate was not exposed to emissionsof an Ag lamp, and ambient light was blocked. Both control and Ag plateswere maintained at room temperature (e.g., about 70-74° F.) during thesilver spectral emission exposure time, which ranged from about 12-24hours in the various experiments. Afterwards, both plates were incubatedusing standard techniques (37° C., aerobic Forma Scientific Model 3157,Water-Jacketed Incubator) for about 24 hours.

The following bacteria (obtained from the Microbiology Laboratory atPeople's Hospital in Mansfield, Ohio, US), were studied for effects ofthe Ag lamp spectral emissions:

-   -   1. E. coli;    -   2. Strep. pneumoniae;    -   3. Staph. aureus; and    -   4. Salmonella typhi.

This group included both Gram⁺ and Gram⁻ species, as well as cocci androds.

Results were as follows:

-   -   1. Controls—all controls showed full growth covering the culture        plates;    -   2. The Ag plates        -   areas unexposed to the Ag spectral emission pattern showed            full growth.        -   areas exposed to the Ag spectral emission pattern showed:            -   a. E. coli—no growth;            -   b. Strep. pneumoniae—no growth;            -   c. Staph. aureus—no growth; and            -   d. Salmonella tyhli—inhibited growth.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to catalyzechemical reactions in biological organisms. These reactions inhibitedgrowth of the biological organisms.

Example 19 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Spectral Catalyst, andComparing Results to Physical Catalyst Results in a Biologic Preparation

To further demonstrate that certain susceptible organisms which have atoxic reaction to silver would have a similar reaction to the spectralcatalyst emitting the spectrum of silver, cultures were obtained fromthe American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) which included Escherichiacoli #25922, and Klebsiella pneumonia, subsp Pneumoniae, # 13883.Control and Ag plate cultures were performed as described above. Afterincubation, plates were examined using a binocular microscope. The E.coli exhibited moderate resistance to the bactericidal effects of thespectral silver emission, while the Klebsiella exhibited moderatesensitivity. All controls exhibited full growth.

Accordingly, an experiment was performed which demonstrated a similarresult using the physical silver catalyst as was obtained with the Agspectral catalyst. Sterile test discs were soaked in an 80 ppm,colloidal silver solution. The same two (2) organisms were again plated,as described above. Colloidal silver test discs were placed on each Agplate, while the control plates had none. The plates were incubated asdescribed above and examined under the binocular microscope. Thecolloidal silver E. coli exhibited moderate resistance to thebactericidal effects of the physical colloidal silver, while theKlebsiella again exhibited moderate sensitivity. All controls exhibitedfull growth.

Example 20 Augmenting a Physical Catalyst with a Spectral Catalyst

To demonstrate that oxygen and hydrogen can combine to form waterutilizing a spectral catalyst to augment a physical catalyst,electrolysis of water was performed to provide the necessary oxygen andhydrogen starting gases, as in Example 1.

Two quartz flasks (A and B) were connected separately after the Drieritecolumn, each with its own set of vacuum and pressure gauges. Platinumpowder (about 31 mg) was placed in each flask. The flasks were filledwith electrolytically produced stoichiometric amounts of H₂ and O₂ to120 mm Hg. The flasks were separated by a stopcock from the electrolysissystem and from each other. The pressure in each flask was recorded overtime as the reaction proceeded over the physical platinum catalyst. Thereaction combines three (3) moles of gases, (i.e., two (2) moles H₂ andone (1) mole O₂), to produce two (2) moles H₂O. This decrease inmolarity, and hence progress of the reaction, can be monitored by adecrease in pressure “P” which is proportional, via the ideal gas law,(PV=nRT), to molarity “n”. A baseline rate of reaction was thusobtained. Additionally, the test was repeated filling each flask with H₂and O₂ to 220 mm Hg. Catalysis of the reaction by only the physicalcatalyst yielded two baseline reaction curves which were in goodagreement between flasks A and B, and for both the 110 mm and 220 mm Hgtests.

Next, the traditional physical platinum catalyst in flask A wasaugmented with spectral catalyst platinum emissions from two (2)parallel Fisher Scientific Hollow Cathode Platinum Lamps, as in Example1, which were positioned approximately two (2) cm from flask A. The testwas repeated as described above, separating the two (2) flasks from eachother and monitoring the rate of the reaction via the pressure decreasein each. Flask B served as a control flask. In flask A, the oxygen andhydrogen gases, as well as the physical platinum catalyst, were directlyirradiated with emissions from the Pt lamp spectral catalyst.

Rate of reaction in the control flask B, was in good agreement withprevious baseline rates. Rate of reaction in flask “A”, wherein physicalplatinum catalyst was augmented with the platinum spectral pattern,exhibited an overall mean increase of 60%, with a maximal increase of70% over the baseline and flask B.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to change thechemical reaction properties of a solid catalyst in a gas phase(heterogeneous) reaction system.

Example 21 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Fine StructureHeterodyned Frequency and Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a FineStructure Frequency the Alpha Rotation-Vibration Constant

Water was electrolyzed to produce stoichiometric amounts of hydrogen andoxygen gases as described above herein. Additionally, a dry ice cooledstainless steel coil was placed immediately after the Drierite column.After vacuum removal of all gases in the system, electrolysis wasaccomplished using a 12 V power source attached to the two electrodes,resulting in a production of hydrogen and oxygen gases. After passingthrough the Drierite column, the hydrogen and oxygen gases passedthrough vacuum tubing connected to positive and negative pressuregauges, through the dry ice cooled stainless steel coil and then to a1,000 ml round, quartz flask. A strip of filter paper impregnated withdry (blue) cobalt was in the bottom of the quartz flask, as an indicatorof the presence or absence of water.

The entire system was vacuum evacuated to a pressure of about 700 mm Hgbelow atmospheric pressure. Electrolysis was performed, producinghydrogen and oxygen gases in stoichiometric amounts, to result in apressure of about 220 mm Hg above atmospheric pressure. The center ofthe quartz flask, now containing hydrogen and oxygen gases, wasirradiated for approximately 12 hours with continuous microwaveelectromagnetic radiation emitted from a Hewlett Packard microwavespectroscopy system which included an HP 83350B Sweep Oscillator, an HP8510B Network Analyzer and an HP 8513A Reflection Transmission Test Set.The frequency used was 21.4 GHz, which corresponds to a fine splittingconstant, the alpha rotation-vibration constant, of the hydroxyintermediate, and is thus a harmonic resonant heterodyne for the hydroxyradical. The cobalt strip changed strongly in color to pink whichindicated the presence of water in the quartz flask, whose creation wascatalyzed by a harmonic resonant heterodyne frequency for the hydroxyradical.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to control a gasphase chemical reaction.

Example 22 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Hyperfine SplittingFrequency

An experimental dark room was prepared, in which there is no ambientlight, and which can be totally darkened. A shielded, ground room (AceShielded Room, Ace, Philadelphia, Pa., US, Model A6H3-16; 8 feet wide,17 feet long, and 8 feet high (about 2. meters×5.2 meters×2.4 meters)copper mesh) was installed inside the dark room.

Hydrogen peroxide (3%) was placed in nippled quartz tubes, which werethen inverted in beakers filled with (3%) hydrogen peroxide, asdescribed in greater detail herein. The tubes were allowed to rest forabout 18 hours in the dark room, covered with non-metallic lightblocking hoods (so that the room could be entered without exposing thetubes to light). Baseline measurements of gases in the nippled tubeswere then performed.

Three nippled RF tubes were placed on a wooden grid table in theshielded room, in the center of grids 4, 54, and 127; corresponding todistances of about 107 cm, 187 cm, and 312 cm respectively, from afrequency-emitting antenna (copper tubing 15 mm diameter, 4.7 moctagonal circumference, with the center frequency at approximately 6.5MHz. A 25 watt, 17 MHz signal was sent to the antenna. This frequencycorresponds to a hyperfine splitting frequency of the hydrogen atom,which is a transient in the dissociation of hydrogen peroxide. Theantenna was pulsed continuously by a BK Precision RF Signal GeneratorModel 2005A, and amplified by an Amplifier Research amplifier, Model25A-100. A control tube was placed on a wooden cart immediately adjacentto the shielded room, in the dark room. All tubes were covered withnon-metallic light blocking hoods.

After about 18 hours, gas production from dissociation of hydrogenperoxide and resultant oxygen formation in the nippled tubes wasmeasured. The RF tube closest to the antenna produced 11 mm length gasin the capillary (34 mm³), the tube intermediate to the antenna produceda 5 mm length (10 mm³) gas, and the RF tube farthest from the antennaproduced no gas. The control tube produced 1 mm gas. Thus, it can beconcluded that the RF hyperfine splitting frequency for hydrogenincreased the reaction rate approximately five (5) to ten (10) times.

In this Example, targeted spectral energy was used to control a chemicalreaction in a liquid phase, resulting in a transformation to a gasphase.

Example 23 Replacing a Physical Catalyst with a Magnetic Field

Hydrogen peroxide (15%) was placed in nippled quartz tubes, which werethen inverted in beakers filled with (15%) hydrogen peroxide, asdescribed above. The tubes were allowed to rest for about four (4) hourson a wooden table in a shielded cage, in a dark room. Baselinemeasurements of gases in the nippled tubes were then performed.

Remaining in the shielded cage, in the dark room, two (2) control tubeswere left on a wooden table as controls. Two (2) magnetic field tubeswere placed on the center platform of an ETS Helmholtz single axis coil,Model 6402, 1.06 gauss/Ampere, pulsed at about 83 Hz by a BK Precision20 MHz Sweep/Function Generator, Model 4040. The voltage output of thefunction generator was adjusted to produce an alternating magnetic fieldof about 19.5 milliGauss on the center platform of the Helmholtz Coil,as measured by a Holaday Model HI-3627, three (3) axis ELF magneticfield meter and probe. Hydrogen atoms, which are a transient in thedissociation of hydrogen peroxide, exhibit nuclear magnetic resonancevia Zeeman splitting at this applied frequency and applied magneticfield strength. Thus, frequency of the alternating magnetic field wasresonant with the hydrogen transients.

After about 18 hours, gas production from dissociation of hydrogenperoxide and resultant oxygen formation in the nippled tubes wasmeasured. The control tubes averaged about 180 mm gas formation (540mm³) while the tubes exposed to the alternating magnetic field producedabout 810 mm gas (2,430 mm³), resulting in an increase in the reactionrate of approximately four (4) times.

Example 24 Negatively Catalyzing a Reaction with an Electric Field

Hydrogen peroxide (15%) was placed in four (4) nippled quartz tubeswhich were inverted in hydrogen peroxide (15%) filled beakers, asdescribed in greater detail above herein. The tubes were placed on awooden table, in a shielded room, in a dark room. After four (4) hours,baseline measurements were taken of the gas in the capillary portion ofthe tubes.

An Amplifier Research self-contained electromagnetic mode cell (“TEM”)Model TC1510A had been placed in the dark, shielded room. A sine wavesignal of about 133 MHz was provided to the TEM cell by a BK PrecisionRF Signal Generator, Model 2005A, and an Amplifier Research amplifier,Model 25A100. Output levels on the signal generator and amplifier waveadjusted to produce an electric field (E-field) of about five (5) V/m inthe center of the TEM cell, as measured with a Holaday Industrieselectric field probe, Model HI-4433GRE, placed in the center of thelower chamber.

Two of the hydrogen peroxide filled tubes were placed in the center ofthe upper chamber of the TEM cell, about 35 cm from the wall of theshielded room. The other two (2) tubes served as controls and wereplaced on a wooden table, also about 35 cm from the same wall of theshielded, dark room, and removed from the immediate vicinity of the TEMcell, so that there was no ambient electric field, as confirmed byE-field probe measurements.

The 133 MHz alternating sine wave signal delivered to the TEM cell waswell above the typical line width frequency at room temperature (e.g.,about 100 KHz) and was theorized to be resonant with an n=20 Rydbergstate of the hydrogen atom as derived fromΔE=c E ^(3/4)

-   -   where E is the change in energy in cm⁻¹, c is 7.51+/−0.02 for        the hydrogen state n=20 and E is the electric field intensity in        (Kv/cm)².

After about five (5) hours of exposure to the electric field, the meangas production in the tubes subjected to the E-field was about 17.5 mm,while mean gas production in the control tubes was about 58 mm.

While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory or explanation,it is believed that the alternating electric field resonated with anupper energy level in the hydrogen atoms, producing a negative Starkeffect, and thereby negatively catalyzing the reaction.

Example 25 Augmentation of a Physical Catalyst by IrradiatingReactants/Transients with a Spectral Catalyst

Hydrogen and oxygen gases were produced in stoichiometric amounts byelectrolysis, as previously described in greater detail above herein. Astainless steel coil cooled in dry ice was placed immediately after theDrierite column. Positive and negative pressure gauges were connectedafter the coil, and then a 1,000 ml round quartz flask was sequentiallyconnected with a second set of pressure gauges.

At the beginning of each experimental run, the entire system was vacuumevacuated to a pressure of about minus 650 mm Hg. The system was sealedfor about 15 minutes to confirm the maintenance of the generated vacuumand integrity of the connections. Electrolysis of water to producehydrogen and oxygen gases was performed, as described previously.

Initially, about 10 mg of finely divided platinum was placed into theround quartz flask. Reactant gases were allowed to react over theplatinum and the reaction rate was monitored by increasing the rate ofpressure drop over time, as previously described. The starting pressurewas approximately in the mid-90's mm Hg positive pressure, and theending pressure was approximately in the low 30's over the amount oftime that measurements were taken. Two (2) control runs were performed,with reaction rates of about 0.47 mm Hg/minute and about 0.48 mmHg/minute.

For the third run, a single platinum lamp was applied, as previouslydescribed, except that the operating current was reduced to about eight(8) mA and the lamp was positioned through the center of the flask toirradiate only the reactant/transient gases, and not the physicalplatinum catalyst. The reaction rate was determined, as described above,and was found to be about 0.63 mm Hg/minute, an increase of 34%.

Example 26 Apparent Poisoning of a Reaction by the Spectral Pattern of aphysical poison

The conversion of hydrogen and oxygen gases to water, over a steppedplatinum physical catalyst, is known to be poisoned by gold. Addition ofgold to this platinum catalyzed reaction reduces reaction rates by about95%. The gold blocks only about one sixth of the platinum binding sites,which according to prior art, would need to be blocked to poison thephysical catalyst to this degree. Thus, it was theorized that a spectralinteraction of the physical gold with the physical platinum and/orreaction system could also be responsible for the poisoning effects ofgold on the reaction. It was further theorized that addition of the goldspectral pattern to the reaction catalyzed by physical platinum couldalso poison the reaction.

Hydrogen and oxygen gases were produced by electrolysis, as describedabove in greater detail. Finely directed platinum, about 15 mg, wasadded to the round quartz flask.

Starting pressures were about in the 90's mm Hg positive pressure, andending pressures were about in the 20's mm Hg over the amount of timethat measurements were taken. Reaction rates were determined aspreviously described. The first control run revealed a reaction rate ofabout 0.81 mm Hg/minute.

In the second run, a Fisher Hollow Cathode Gold lamp was applied, aspreviously described, at an operating frequency of about eight (8) mA,(80% maximum current), through about the center of the round flask. Thereaction rate increased to about 0.87 mm Hg/minute.

A third run was then performed on the same reaction flask and physicalplatinum that had been in the flask exposed to the gold spectralpattern. The reaction rate decreased to about 0.75 mm Hg/minute.

In this Example, targeted spectral energies were used to control anenvironmental reaction condition (poison) and change the chemicalreaction properties of a physical catalyst in a heterogeneous catalystreaction system.

In these experiments, targeted spectral energies were used to change thechemical and material properties of solutions, resulting in alteredelectrochemical reaction rates and corrosion of solids.

1. A method for growing a crystal in a crystallization reaction systemcomprising the steps of: targeting at least one participant in saidcrystallization reaction system with at least one spectral energypattern to cause at least one of the formation, stimulation andstabilization of at least one component in said crystallization reactionsystem.
 2. A method for conditioning at least one conditionableparticipant in a crystallization reaction system comprising: applying atleast one conditioning frequency to at least one conditionableparticipant to cause at least one of the formation, stimulation andstabilization of at least one conditioned participant, whereby said atleast one conditioning frequency comprises at least one frequencyselected from the group consisting of direct resonance conditioningfrequencies, harmonic resonance conditioning frequencies andnon-harmonic heterodyne conditioning resonance frequencies; and usingsaid conditioned participant in said crystallization reaction system toenhance the rate of at least one reaction in said crystallizationreaction system.
 3. The method of claim 2, wherein said conditionedparticipant resonantly transfers energy with at least one participant insaid crystallization reaction system to affect at least one reactionpathway in said crystallization reaction system.
 4. The method of claim3, further comprising applying at least one spectral energy pattern tosaid crystallization reaction system.
 5. The method of claim 4, whereina rate of at least one reaction in said crystallization reaction systemis accelerated.
 6. A method to affect a particular reaction pathway in acrystallization reaction with a spectral catalyst by augmenting aphysical catalyst comprising the steps of: duplicating at least aportion of a spectral pattern of a physical catalyst with at least oneenergy emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern; and applyingto the crystallization reaction system at least a portion of thecatalytic spectral pattern at a sufficient intensity and for asufficient duration to catalyze at least one reaction in thecrystallization reaction system.